Wisdot c3d Train Manual

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual Page 1 of 398
Module 010 Civil 3D interface

The segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do the
exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
Download the zip file to your computer.
Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-trianing is a suggested loctation.
After extraction, there should be a folder called "010-exercise-files". The exercise files are located here.
The file used in a section will be in italics at the beginning of the section (e.g. Intro.dwg )
Open the file prior to the exercise to follow along with the instructor.
010.010 Introduction Section updated: 9/1/2012
Example files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/010/010-exercise-files.zip
21:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-010-001.mp4
010.010.001 Workspaces = tool arrangement and configuration
Workspace named Civil 3D
Can configure workspace for task-related needs
Workspace components:
Welcome Screen
Application Menu Browser
Quick Access Toolbar
Ribbon
Toolbars
Welcome Screen
Short tutorial videos
Step-by-Step Tutorials (like exercises)
Whats New Listing

General File Functions
New, Open, Save, Save As, Export, Publish, Print, Drawing Utilities, and Close
Command Search
Recently Opened Files or Currently Open Files List

Typical program commands
New, Open, Save, Plot, Undo/redo
Can add your own commands.
Add More Commands
Right-click icon Add to Quick Access Toolbar
Show Menu Bar
Ribbon
Tabs
Panels
Panel Pull-Downs
Thumb-tack will hold open the pull-down
Panel Options
Some icons have pull-down menus
Viewing Levels: Open, Minimized, and Tabs Only
Toolbars
Held icons prior to ribbon
Transparent Commands only one open by default
Can open any old toolbar
Command Line
For typed versions of commands
Palette can be docked at the top or the bottom of screen
Palette can be moved to another screen
Status Bar
Icons..
Manual last updated: 4/8/2016

Function Key Alternatives
Drawing Scale
Always draw at 1 = 1
Drawing Scale controls size of text
And space between section views in array
010.020 Toolspace Section updated: 9/1/2012

34:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-020-001.mp4
010.020.001 123456789_2.dwg
Toolspace tabs
Prospector
Settings
Survey
Toolbox
Preview Window
Active Drawing View/MasterView
Drawing Objects Access

Points, Point Groups, Point Clouds, Surfaces, Alignments (Profiles and Sections), Sites (Grading and
Parcels), Catchments, Pipe Networks (including Interference objects), Corridors, Assemblies, Intersections,
and View Frame Groups
Data Shortcuts
Surfaces, Alignments (and Profiles), Pipe Networks, View Frame Groups
Managing Objects
Right-click on object names for Properties or Edit Current Style
Styles for each object

Object styles, label styles, table styles, commands
Other settings, criteria or rules
Setting default styles

Right-click on object collection name (header)
Edit Feature Settings
Drawing Settings and Object Defaults
Commands
Macros for creation settings
Overall Drawing Settings

Right-click on drawing name
Units and Zone (coordinates)
Transformation (coordinates)
Object Layer defaults
Abbreviations (for labels)
Ambient Settings (drawing settings)
Survey Database Access

External to any drawing
Survey Databases (per project)
Equipment Database
Survey equipment data to aid analysis
Figure Prefix Database
Point codes that have linework
Manages the linework style, layer
Linework Code Sets
Field codes that start linework
Toolbox - Extra Functionality

Report Manager
Subscription Advantage Packs and Extensions
Autodesk Labs tools
To access tools
Right-click and choose Execute
010.030 Ribbon overview Section updated: 9/1/2012

20:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-030-001.mp4
010.030.001 AliProf4thAve.dwg
Tabs for grouping of command panels
Panels for grouping of similar command icons
Icons for starting commands
Panel Pull-downs for less frequently used commands
Minimize Arrow icon

Minimize to Panel Buttons
Minimize to Panel Tiles
Minimize to Tabs
Show Full Ribbon
Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, Vault
Help Express Tools Online Add-Ins
Context Ribbons
Specific to selected object
010.040 Layer Control Section updated: 9/1/2012

19:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-040-001.mp4
010.040.001 AliProf4thAve.dwg
Layers manage entities
Unlimited layers and names
Control color, linetype, lineweight, line thickness, plot/no plot, on/off

On/off versus freeze/thaw-both make layers invisible
Off still computes the graphics
Freeze does not compute the graphics
Civil 3D styles use of layers

Object has a layer
Objects components can have individual layers
Different styles could have different component layers
Object layer assignment

Settings tab, right-click on drawing name, Object Layer tab
WisDOT templates have layer standards set
Anything assigned 0 layer is new since 2010
These are default layers, could be changed at object creation
Modifiers for creating unique layers for new objects
None, the object does not create a unique layer
Prefix, a unique layer with name and Value field at beginning
Suffix, a unique layer with name and Value field at end
Asterisk holds place of objects name
Object Styles in the Display tab
List of objects components

Each component has a layer option
Component layers set to 0 allow objects layer to control
Layers for Labels

In Label Style General tab
Drawing Settings set default
Could be set differently than its object
010.050 Inquiry Tools Section updated: 9/1/2012

1:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-050-001.mp4
010.050.001 For reporting data from Civil 3D objects
Analyze tab, Inquiry panel
Fill in a field or two to report data
Types of Inquiries:
Point
Surface
Alignment
Profile and Profile View
Section and Section View
Corridor Sections
010.060 Layout Tabs Section updated: 9/1/2012

19:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-060-001.mp4
010.060.001 123456789_2.dwg
For plotting to scale

Layout tabs include:
The printable area of the paper
Titleblock information
Viewport(s) to display portions of modelspace
Turning on layout tabs

Right-click on model button
Choose Display
Viewports
When viewport is selected, viewport scale pop-up menu is available
Regen after changing the scale
As many viewports as you need
Can be any shape that you need
Paperspace
Titleblock
Dimensions and labels (ACAD labels)
010.070 Rotate View Section updated: 9/1/2012

7:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-070-001.mp4
010.070.001 123456789_3.dwg
Leaves paper, rotates model
More efficient use of paper
Free Orbit in layout viewport, outside orbit ring (maintains XY plane)
DVIEW/Twist to rotate view
Plan Production tools do this automatically

010.080 Common and useful command lines Section updated: 9/1/2012

29:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-080-001.mp4
010.080.001 123456789_2.dwg
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones

<ESC>
<SPACEBAR> = Enter
<F1> = Opens Help to topic you are working with
<F2> = Expands command line to a window
<F3> = OSNAPS toggle

<SHIFT> + Right-Click Temporary OSNAP Overrides
<SHIFT> + <spacebar> = selection cycling

<CTRL> + Left-click select for some labels
<CTRL> + 9 = toggles Command Line palette
<CTRL> + 3 = toggles tool palettes
Z <ENTER> E <ENTER> = Zoom Extent (Fit View)

Z <ENTER> <ENTER> = real-time zooming
P <ENTER> = Pan
<DELETE> = Erase
PL for polyline
PE for polyline edit
DI for Distance command (slightly different than ribbon version)
FILEDIA, setting should = 1

CMDDIA, setting, should =1
GEOMARKERVISIBLITY = 0
OSNAPZ = if 1 then snaps to 3D objects (x/y/z)

if 0 then snaps to X/Y but ignores elevation z
OPTIONS = opens OPTIONS dialog box
010.090 Basic mouse operations Section updated: 9/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/125/125-030-proj-dataset1.zip
12:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-090-001.mp4
010.090.001 123456789_2.dwg
Three-button wheel mouse
Left-click = select
Right-click = context menus
Wheel operation
Roll forward/backward = zoom in/out
Click wheel = pan
Double-click wheel = zoom extents

Keyboard + Mouse clicks

<SHIFT> Right-click = Temporary OSNAPS menu
Hold <SHIFT> wheel-button = Orbit
<CTRL> + Left-click for some objects allows individual label editing
<SHIFT> + left-click = remove from selection set
MBUTTONPAN
= 1, pan
= 0, Temporary OSNAP menu
Right-click customization
In OPTIONS, User Preference tab, Right-click Customization button
Context sensitive
Repeat Last command
010.100 Steering wheel control Section updated: 9/1/2012

5:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-100-001.mp4
010.100.001 123456789_2.dwg
Navigation controls that follow your cursor
Sections of the wheel do different tasks

Zoom, pan, orbit, center
Open through the Navigation Bar
Different sized steering wheels depending on your preference
Set pivot point for orbits
010.110 Viewports Section updated: 9/1/2012

10:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-110-001.mp4
010.110.001 123456789_3.dwg
Divide screen into real-time windows
Individual zoom and pan control
Objects in different areas can be seen together (in context)
Configuring the screen

Corridor Section Editor is automated configuration
Manual configuration, View tab, Viewport panel, Set Viewports
In-canvas controls, minus sign
010.120 View styles Section updated: 9/1/2012

7:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-120-001.mp4
010.120.001 View Styles.dwg
Controls how objects are viewed in viewports
Can help provide visual perspective of objects

Can make visual analysis easier
Object Styles can affect how visual styles represent them
2D Wireframe
Realistic
Conceptual
2D and 3D Hidden
3D Wireframe
Sketchy, Shades of Gray, Shaded, et al

010.130 Select similar Section updated: 9/1/2012

4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-130-001.mp4
010.130.001 123456789_4.dwg
Selection set across entire drawing
Speeds up selection so there is less panning
You can remove from selection by <shift> left-click
Left-click select an object

Right-click, Select Similar
<SHIFT> + left click to remove anything from set
010.140 Managing saved views Section updated: 9/1/2012

8:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-140-001.mp4
010.140.001 123456789_2.dwg
Name and save predetermined views
Preset Views, Top, Left, Right, Isometric views
Users can create their own views in Model and Layouts
Some view settings can be recalled
Create and recall views:

View Tab, Views panel, list of views
in canvas controls, Manage Views
010.150 Xreference Section updated: 9/1/2012

21:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-150-001.mp4
010.150.001 123456789_2.dwg will be used in this segment but do not open it.
For bringing drawings behind design drawings
Reduces design drawing size
Overlays DWG files

Underlays DGN files
Attaches Images
Can be Unloaded or Detached

Binding brings the XREF into the current file
Reference fading control in Insert tab, Reference Panel pull-down

You can
label Civil 3D objects
sample data for sections
draft in relation to those referenced files
snap to Xrefd drawing entities
add data from references into design drawing if needed
Bind, for the entire file
NCOPY, for individual entities (not Civil 3D objects)
Insert tab, References panel, Attach

(or type XREF)
Identify file type to attach

DWG, DGN, PDF, Image
Attachment dialog
Location, Rotation, Scale (similar to a block)
Path Type: Relative path
Attachment versus Overlay
010.160 Data shortcuts Section updated: 9/1/2012

15:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-160-001.mp4
010.160.001 Existing Surface.dwg
Overview
Provides selective object data for use in other files
Surfaces, alignments/profiles/pipe networks
Files must be attached to a project
Object geometry is in one file, can be referenced into many other files. Allows for different styles to be applied
to the same object in different references.
References can be used simultaneously
Control/distribution of geometry held in XML file
Data Shortcut Folder Relationship

Working Folder = Path where projects are stored (level above project folders)
Project Folder = in working folder path where project files are stored
_shortcut folder = inside Project folder, where actual data shortcuts reside
The data is in XML format
DO NOT go in here this is for Civil 3D to access/manage
If a project is moved, these locations are relative.
Data Shortcut Process

Right-click on Data Shortcuts
Set Working Folder

New (or Set) Project Folder

Create Data Shortcuts
Now that project path and folder are established, this step is repeated throughout project.
010.170 Xreference vs Data Shortcut concepts Section updated: 9/1/2012

10:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-170-001.mp4
010.170.001 Both tools for referencing data in different ways. Data Shortcuts are more Civil 3D specific. XREFs are generally more
AutoCAD entities.
Civil 3D Objects will Xref and are usable
Data shortcuts
When you need data from surface, alignment, profile or pipes
View Frames for plan and profile sheets
When object interaction is needed
XREFS
Background information
Just for labeling, but not for interaction with other objects
Data shortcuts
Alignment (for sample line creation)
XREFS
Everything else, especially the corridor
010.180 Starting a new file Section updated: 9/1/2012

11:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-180-001.mp4
010.180.001 All new files start with a template (.DWT) file
DWT brings settings into new drawings
Similar to seed files
AutoCAD settings like text styles, linestyles, etc.
Civil 3D specific object and label styles
WisDOT provides two templates for new drawings

Wisdot12.dwt
Wisdot12-etopog.dwt
Use the New command

Browser starts at DWT location
Browse and choose the appropriate template
Save the new DWG in location and with name
QNEW command
In Quick Access Toolbar
Begins file with default template
Default Template is set at Options Files Template Settings Default Template File Name for QNEW
010.190 Status Bar Section updated: 9/1/2012

17:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-190-001.mp4
010.190.001 Status Bar
Icons..
Function Key Alternatives
Right-Click Settings
Status Bar Keys:

Constraints (CTRL-Shift-I)
Snap/Grid (<F9>)
Ortho Snap (<F8>)
Polar Track (<F10>)
OSNAP (<F3>)
3D OSNAP (<F4>)
Object Snap Tracking (<F11>)
Status Bar Keys:

Dynamic UCS (<F6>)
Dynamic Input (<F12>)
Lineweight
Transparency
Quick Properties (Ctrl+Shift+P)
Selection Cycling (Ctrl+W)
010.200 Basic tips Section updated: 7/1/2010

5:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-200-001.mp4
010.200.001 Borrowing a Civil 3D license
7:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-200-002.mp4
010.200.002 Adding a folder link to civil 3d folder locations

Module 020 Setting up a WisDOT project

020.010 WisDOT standards - Civil 3D project Section updated: 7/1/2010
WisDOT Project Folder Structure
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct.pdf
WisDOT Multi PS&E Project Folder
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct-multi-pse.pdf
WisDOT Civil 3D Naming Conventions
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/c3d-naming-conv.pdf
5:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-010-001.mp4
020.010.001 WisDOT has established standards for workflows to maximize the ability to share data across many people
involved with a project
WisDOT Civil 3D projects will consist of MANY Civil 3D Drawing files. Managing them is imperative! Sharing data
seamlessly across the Project as well as with multiple Designers is a must.
To do this, WisDOT standards outline use of :

Standard Project Folder structure and locations
Standard Drawing File names
Standard Civil 3D Object names
Civil 3D objects are shared across the multiple Drawing files using:
Data Shortcuts
XReferences
Civil 3D projects are a collection of the input files, working drawing files, and data shortcuts used to manage all the
Civil 3D data associated with a project.
WisDOT standard Civil 3D Project Template that contains the standard folder structure. This Project Template is
placed in a unique Project ID folder on your Local Area Network. The unique eight character project ID is
numerical.
Project Template - Folder Structure contains the following folders

\_shortcuts DO NOT edit files in this folder. Data Shortcuts are automatically created when you create Data
Shortcuts in Civil 3D
\BaseData this folder is home to input files as well as your topographic mapping, existing surfaces, and ortho
photos. Subfolders include
Imagery; Mapping; Other; Survey
\Design this folder is home to your Design Data. Subfolders include
AliProf; Corridors; Edgelines; Quantities; Surfaces;ViewFrameGroups
\RW this folder is home to Right of Way type files and data
\SheetsOther this folder is home to Sheets other than Plan, Plan Profile, Right of Way or Cross Section
\SheetsPlan this folder is home to Plan, Plan/Profile and Cross Section type Sheets
Drawing (DWG) File names and locations are discussed as we step through the WisDOT vBook Modules
DWG file names are suggested and are somewhat flexible. The intent is so another person can look at your Civil
3D project and tell what a DWG file contains by looking at its name. Project Folder structure is not flexible. Any
suggested changes should be given to Methods Development to include in future project template updates (with
Standard Files)
All of the topics discussed in this Module are elaborated on in great detail as you go on in the vBook content. It is
very important that you follow the suggested workflow to accomplish tasks. Things like how you store a curve for
an Alignment can be done several ways with little or no effect on the overall product. How you setup and manage
your Projects data is something all together different. Consciously not using suggested file, and object/data
management can be a cause for a headache when it comes to putting everything together in the end. Remember,
our workflows are not always the most efficient ways to accomplish a task, but a great amount of thought went into
developing workflows so everything fits together. Please talk with Methods Development staff before you modify
workflows
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
WisDOT Methods Development [email protected]
020.020 Exercise DS0100 - Create Civil 3D project Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-001.mp4

020.020.001 Introduction
Exercise DS100 Create Project
Sample Project: N:\pds\c3d\12345678 (Training data at C:\WisDOT\Design\c3d\12345678)
Note: Project data is on the N drive at the above location, training data is kept on the C drive as shown in training
documentation. The remainder of this document will be using WisDOT training data and the
associated training project folder locations. Both project data and training data have identical folder structure inside
the ProjectID folder.
1:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-002.mp4
020.020.002 Set the Project Working Folder
ToolspaceProspectorRight-click Data Shortcuts

Click Set Working Folder
Select C:\WisDOT\Design\c3d folder (actual projects would use N:\pds\c3d for WisDOT staff)
Press OK button
1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-003.mp4
020.020.003 Create a New Shortcuts Folder
Manage Ribbon...New Shortcuts Folder
Key in Project ID Name 12345678
Check Use Project Template
Select C:\Civil 3D Project Templates\WisDOTProjectTemplate folder
Press OK
The New Shortcuts folder creates the project ID folder and populates its standard subfolders. It also
prepares Civil 3D to store our project data shortcuts later.
Module 030 AutoCAD Fundamentals

Extract the zip file to a local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training is a suggested loctation.
030.010 AutoCAD Basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
AutoCAD Fundamentals exercise files
15:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-001.mp4
030.010.001 Intro1.dwg
This fast-paced class is intended for existing CAD users who wish to get more out of their current AutoCAD or are
migrating to AutoCAD 2012 from Microstation. All of the topics have been chosen to ease the transition to Civil 3D
2012 from Microstation, BricsCAD or a version of AutoCAD prior to 2009.
You should be working in the Civil 3D workspace.

Before You Begin:
Make sure you have any mouse with a scroll wheel.
You have a working knowledge of Windows.

You know how to browse for files.
You know what a save icon looks like.
You know what an undo icon looks like.
You have used Microsoft Word or a similar word processing program.

You are working with AutoCAD from within the Civil 3D interface.
Workspaces
A workspace controls how and what you see on your screen. It tracks the contents of your Quick Access
Toolbar and if you have rearranged the tabs on your ribbon.
To work with ONLY base-AutoCAD tools, you can change your active Workspace to 2D Drafting and
Annotation. To work with a mix of Civil 3D and AutoCAD tools, use the Civil 3D Workspace.
Base AutoCAD Tools on the Civil 3D Home tab
Base AutoCAD Tools on the AutoCAD Home tab
MicroStation terminology vs AutoCAD terminology

Things that exist in AutoCAD, but not Microstation

A Save button. AutoCAD behaves more like other Windows programs with its save functionality.
Paperspace and modelspace. Microstation uses the concept of sheet models to do what
AutoCAD does in layout mode.
Polar tracking at specific angles.
Undo for multiple actions.
Things that exist in Microstation, but not AutoCAD

Stream line string.
View attributes from Microstation would be equivalent to a mix of options from the Options dialog
box and settings found on the status bar of AutoCAD.
Monitor awareness for multiple views.
How Does AutoCAD relate to Civil 3D?
General Interface Intro
When you open up Civil 3D 2012, you will see many buttons, tools and icons.
The tools that you will use in the course of reading this document are:
The drawing area
Command line

Ribbon tabs
Ribbon panels
Toolpalettes
Model and Layout Tabs
Application Menu
Application Menu
The application menu replaces what many people remember as the File menu from pre-ribbon days.
When you first open the Application Menu you will see a list of the most recently used drawings.
At the Top of the Application menu is a command search to help you locate tools.
This handy toolbar is available regardless of what tab is active. Later in this class you will be
customizing it to make it even more useful.
Ribbons
The ribbon interface may be new to you. Ribbons consist of tabs and panels. The ribbon allows for
more tools to be on the screen at once than the outdated toolbars and menu-type interface. The ribbon
uses tabs and panels to group together tools you will need for certain tasks.
Tabs
The tabs across the top, (Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, and
Express Tools) represent different categories of tools. Each tab gives you a logical grouping of tools.
The main tab you will be working with is the Home tab.
When a tab is active, you will see the tools split into more specific categories in panels.
Panels
Panels bring specific types of commands together.
For example, lets look at the Draw Panel.
At the top of the panel are the more common tools. This panel can be expanded, as indicated by the
black dropdown arrow.

Click the black arrow to expand the panel. We see quite a few more tools.
Click the thumbtack icon in the lower left of the panel to keep the expanded view.
You may notice that some of the buttons are split into a command and a dropdown.
The dropdown button gives you multiple ways to execute a command. In the example shown here,
there are multiple ways to determine the size and location of a circle.
Command Line
The command line is how you and AutoCAD communicate to each other. When the command line
reads Command it is waiting for your next instruction or selection.
Get in the habit of looking at your command line frequently! Many AutoCAD and Civil 3D commands
heavily rely on this input.
As you start typing, AutoCAD will assist you in locating the command you are after. This is referred to as
AutoComplete.

Status Bar
Just below your command line is the Status Bar. When a status bar icon is shaded blue, it means that
the feature is turned on.
From Left to Right here is a listing of what each icon represents.
InfoCenter
InfoCenter is an AutoCAD-specific web browser built into your screen. To search the online help,
Autodesk discussion groups or any of your favorite blogs, type the search item into InfoCenter and click
the binoculars icon.
The Communication center icon will check online to verify that you are using the most up-to-date version
of your software and inform you of any service packs.
This is also the toolbar where you can go directly to Help.
Viewport Controls
You will see the viewport contols in your model tab as well as when you are working in modelspace
using the viewports. This gives you a shortcut to display options, view directions, and visual styles.
For AutoCAD beginners, it is reccomended that you hide this tool. You will see where to change the
display of this element later in this chapter.
View Cube

The View Cube allows you to quickly change your view direction while keeping your eyes oriented with a
box.
By clicking on any part of the box you are taken to the correspnding view dierection in CAD.
While this is a very handy tool in 3D drafting, it has limited applications in 2D.
Navigation Bar
You will do the vast majority of panning and zooming with your mouse, however in the cases where you
need one of the navigation tools not provided by the mouse, the Navigation bar is available.
The most important command you will get to from the Navigation bar is the Zoom Window command.
To access the zoom extents tool, click the flyout in the zoom areas.
User Coordinate System (UCS) Icon

When you are working in coordinates near 0,0 the UCS icon will appear on the screen at 0,0. When you
are working far away from 0,0, the UCS icon will appear in the lower-left corner of the screen.
For the duration of this class, be sure that your UCS icon appears with Y straight up and X pointing East.
Relocating or rotating the UCS is for advanced CAD users only.
Model and Layout tabs

The model tab is where you will do the vast majority of your drafting. The layout tabs are where you will
prepare your project for printing.
You will dive deeper into wotking with the layout tabs when you get into printing.
Dynamic Input
Dynamic input is on by default and is a very helpful tool. Information seen near your cursor is identical
to what you will see on the command line.
As you type, you will get the AutoComplete just as you do in the command line.
Whenever a command has multiple options, you will see the key-in version on the command line or you
can use your mouse to select from the dynamic input menu.
6:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-002.mp4
030.010.002 Intro1.dwg
Getting to Drawings
The first thing you will need to understand is how to open drawings. The best way to open an existing project is to
use the open icon from the Quick Access toolbar.
When you click Open, AutoCAD will take you to the most recently used directory. If this is your first time opening
up a drawing in AutoCAD it will take you to the Documents folder.
Be sure that the Files of type is set to DWG when opening a drawing. If this is showing another file type, you may
have clicked the wrong icon.
To access a recently used drawing, use the application menu. A shortcut listing of your 9 most recent files will be
listed immediately upon clicking the application menu icon. Depending on your version of AutioCAD, this may be a
big red A or a C for Civil..
As you open files, the oldest ones will drop off as new ones are added. You can force these items to stay on the

list by using the pushpin icon.
Starting New Drawings

What is a template?
A template is the starting point for new drawings. A template is a file that ends with a DWT extension. These
templates contain pre-defined standards for your drawings.
There are two ways to create new drawings. The new icon in the Quick Access toolbar is slightly different than the
New you will find under the application menu.
The New icon from the Quick access toolbar is Quick New or QNEW. If you are internal to WisDOT this should be
set up as WisDOT12.dwt.
The Application menu > New will always ask for a template.
General Navigation
Panning and Zooming

Most of your panning and zooming will be done with your mouses wheel.
Roll the wheel forward to zoom in to an object.
Roll the wheel towards you to zoom out.
For zooming with the wheel, the location of your cursor is where AutoCAD centers the screen.
Press and hold the middle mouse wheel to pan the screen.
Double-click the middle mouse wheel to zoom extents.
Undo
The Undo command can now process multiple Undos at once. Click on the black drop-down arrow to the right of
the undo icon for a list of the actions that can be undone. Simply drag the cursor to pick the batch you wish to
undo.
View Cube
Located in the upper-right corner of the screen, the Viewcube allows for easy navigation in 3D environments. It is a
great way to keep an eye on the orientation of the drawing. You will see the Viewcube in Object Viewer and
modelspace viewports by default. It is common to turn off the Viewcube in 2D views.
By clicking on a portion of the box, you can quickly jump to isometric views. The home icon will take you back to
the Home view, which is SW isometric by default. Right-click on the Viewcube to reset the home view to the view
of your choice. Most people use the plan view, with north as up as their home view.
Viewport Controls
Viewport controls are another shortcut that can be used to control the display of your screen. Microstation has
similar tools in the View Control toolbar. In AutoCAD, these are a series of menus that allow fast changes to what
you are seeing on screen.
The [-] menu is where you can change how many model viewports are showing at once. This is also where you can
choose to turn the Viewcube off.
The [Top] menu will change to display the view you are in. This is an additional option for controlling the direction
you are viewing your drawing.
The [2D Wireframe] menu also changes depending on what Visual Style you are in. Visual Styles control how 3D
objects re displayed. In most cases while you are designing in Civil 3D, you will be working in the 2D Wireframe
visual style.

Exercise: Overview of AutoCAD 2012

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by locating key elements of the AutoCAD drawing
screen.
Be sure you are able to identify the screen components in AutoCAD before moving on to the next exercises.
1. Open the drawing called Intro1.dwg Drawing contains a surface, a pipe and structures, an alignment, a
profile view and a 3D car (can you find it?).
2. Locate the Application Menu.
3. Locate the Quick Access toolbar.
4. Locate and Switch to the Annotate tab.
5. Locate the Block Panel

The Block panel is located on the Insert tab.
6. Click the lower left corner of the view cube.

You are taken to a SW Isometric view of the drawing.
7. Use the Viewport control to change the visual style to Conceptual.

The CAD objects should appear filled in.
8. Experiment with viewing the drawing from different aspects using the view cube.
9. Try some of the other visual styles to get a feel for what each one does.
10. When you are done, click Top. The viewcube may reveal that the image is upside down.
11. Use the arrows to spin the drawing so that N is pointed upward.
Change the visual style back to 2D wireframe. When you have completed this step, the drawing should appear as
it did when you first entered it.
10:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-003.mp4
030.010.003 Intro2.dwg
Selecting Things
It may sound simple, but knowing how to select objects efficiently in AutoCAD will make using Civil 3D much
easier.
The first thing you need to know is that if you are not actively in a command, AutoCAD is in a selection
mode.
After you are done with a command, the tool you are using is no longer active and you are back at a Command:
prompt in the AutoCAD command line.
This is very different for users who may be used to software that keeps you in a command until you switch tools
(such as Microstation).
All of the techniques discussed in this section will work outside of a command or at the Select Objects: prompt
when you start working with commands.
When you are not in a command, and you click on an object, you will see blue squares at key points. These blue
squares are called grips. If you click a grip, you can move or adjust the object.
If you are in a command, such as move, you will not see grips but you will see objects become dashed.
Window Selection
To select multiple items at once, use a selection window. Click on the screen where you have no CAD
objects and a selection window is started. Drag across your screen and you will see a temporary
rectangle forming.
The direction that you drag your selection window makes a difference. Dragging left to right across your
screen will give you a blue field with a solid line around it.

Only objects that are completely inside the blue area will become selected. Items that are partially in,
but cross the solid line are not selected.
Dragging right to left across your screen will give you a green field with a dashed line around it. Objects
inside the green area and anything touching the dashed line will become selected. Items that are
partially inside will also become selected.
Selection Cycling
Items that are drawn first tend to get covered up by items that are drawn after them. In AutoCAD this is
called Display Order. We will discuss display order later in this section.
A new addition to CAD is the selection cycling status bar icon. With this option turned on, you will be
prompted to pick an item from a list of choices.
Selecting, and then Right-clicking

It is important to get comfortable with using the right-click button on your mouse; in Civil 3D, right-
clicking is very important.
Outside of a command, if you have an item or group of items selected, right-clicking will give you a list
of options that are specific to the item(s).
A very handy tool to know is the Select Similar command.

Select similar will look for objects of the same type on the same layer, and select them all in one shot.
Deleting Things
There are two main ways to erase objects in AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the
modify toolbar.
Display Order
If you draw something in AutoCAD, and then draw another thing on top of the first thing, the second
thing will obscure the first thing where they overlap.
This becomes especially important when working with Civil 3D objects because you will frequently have
two objects in the same location of the XY plane.
Regardless of actual elevation, objects drawn on top of each other (i.e. they share the same XY space)
will take precedence over the items drawn before them. For instance, if cycle for selection isnt working,
use the Display order commands to get to the objects you want.
Select the object you wish to work with. Right-click and select display order.
Bring to Front takes the selected object and puts it in front of other objects that intersect it.
Send to Back pushes the selected object behind all the others that it intersects.
Bring Above Object moves the selected entity on top an object you select.
Send under Object moves the selected entity behind the object you select.
Display order has no effect on actual elevation. It just impacts graphic display.
Exercise: Selection Practice

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by selecting objects.
1. Open the drawing called Intro2.dwg

This drawing contains a number of elements that you will use to practice selecting objects.
There is purposely some junk items for practice deleting things.
2. Use a left- to right crossing window to select the three green polylines closest to station 0+00 in
the drawing.
Note that this type of selection window only captures objects that are completely inside of the
box.
3. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
4. In the same location, use a Right-to-left crossing window to select objects.

This time, many more objects become selected.
6. Click on any one of the blocks representing a tree.
7. Right-click and pick Select Similar.

All of the trees become selected, as long as they are:
On the same layer
Have the same block name.

You should not have any items selected.
9. In the same area of interest, select one of the white/black lines.
10. Right-click and pick select similar.
11. Press DELETE on your keyboard.

Depending on which line you originally selected, your result may vary. Some of the lines are
actually polylines and some are segments of large radius arcs.
Pressing the delete key on your keyboard will remove the items you had selected.
12. Select one of the small circles in the area of interest and one of the remaining lines.
Both objects are selected.
13. Right-click and pick select Similar.

All the circles and like lines will become selected.
14. From the Home tab, Modify panel, click the Erase icon.
The selected objects are deleted.
15. Repeat the previous steps to delete the remaining extraneous objects.
The drawing should appear cleaner.
16. Turn on the Cycle for Selection status bar icon.

Cycle for Selection is now on.
17. Click one of the ROW lines.

Cycle for selection window reveals that there are multiple objects hiding under the ROW lines.
18. Highlight the arc from the selection dialog.
19. Press DELETE on your keyboard.
20. Turn off Cycle for Selection.

The Selection dialog will not automatically appear.
21. Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
030.020 Starting to Draw Section updated: 10/1/2012

13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-020-001.mp4
030.020.001 Dynamic Input.dwg
Introduction
Before you can truly understand the AutoCAD coordinate system and units, it will help to know several drawing
tools.
You will be working with the Line tool and Rectangle tool, both of which are located on the Home tab > Draw panel.
You will need to click the line tool fly-out and select Create Line. Notice there are many surveyor and civil-friendly
ways to define your lines.
As you move your cursor around, you will see the dynamic input display your current coordinate. When you first
start the line command, the first click establishes the start point of the line.
After you commit the first endpoint to the drawing, the dynamic input cursor changes slightly. The tool now shows
your distance and angle away from the previous click location.
The second click establishes the second point on the line and so on.
When you want to exit the Line tool, press enter on your keyboard.
Dynamic Input and Coordinates

AutoCAD operates in a traditional XY coordinate system with the origin at 0,0.
With dynamic input turned on it is easy to draw lines at specific locations with desired length.
Using Dynamic input, you can type in desired coordinates for the start of a line. Typing 4,5 will indicate to CAD that
you wish to start the line 4 units from 0 in the X direction and 5 units from 0 in the Y direction. We call this type of
measurement from 0 an absolute coordinate.
The start of any geometry (i.e circles, rectangles, lines, etc.) is always absolute.
For the second click, you can specify a relative coordinate. Because dynamic input is turned on, you would type in
3,4 for the example above (not 7,9). The comma tells CAD that the information you are giving it is a change in the
X and Y coordinate. Dynamic input ensures that the input is relative to the last location we clicked.
With dynamic input ON in the status bar, only the first click in drawing is absolute. All other input is relative. With
dynamic input OFF in the status bar all input is absolute.

Dynamic Input and Angles

Dynamic input also affects how angles are interpreted by AutoCAD.
With dynamic input ON, the direction an angle goes (clockwise vs counter-clockwise) depends on where your
cursor is relative to 0 degrees.
With dynamic input OFF, all positive angles are measured counter-clockwise from 0 degrees.
You can press F12 on your keyboard to toggle Dynamic Input on/off.
In most cases, you want dynamic input turned on. That way you can specify lengths and angles using the tab key
on your keyboard.

Exercise: Dynamic Input

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing objects with dynamic input on and
with dynamic input off.
If you make any mistakes, use Undo in the command line to go back a step.
Be sure you understand the difference between coordinate entry with and without this status bar tool.
1. Open the drawing called Dynamic Input.dwg

This drawing contains some labels to help you understand where you are in space.
2. Verify that dynamic input is ON.
3. Start the rectangle tool.

The tool tip and the command line will prompt you Specify First Point
4. Type in 5,5 then press ENTER.

You have set down the first corner of the rectangle and you are prompted to specify the other corner.

A 3x2 rectangle has been created in your drawing.
6. Turn dynamic input off.
7. Start the rectangle tool.

As before, you are prompted for the first point.

You have set down the first corner of the rectangle in the same location as the first rectangle.

This time, instead of creating a rectangle of the same size as the previous steps, it has created a
rectangle where the second corner went to the overall location 3,2.
With dynamic input on, you created a rectangle with dimensions 3,2.
With dynamic input off the second rectangle went to the coordinate 3,2.
10. Turn dynamic input back on. (You can press F12 on your keyboard to toggle Dynamic Input on/off)
11. Start the line tool.

You are prompted to specify the first point.
12. Type in 10,8 then press ENTER on the keyboard.

The endpoint of the line is placed at 10, 8 and you are prompted to specify the next point.
13. With your mouse slightly below the horizontal guideline, type 5 TAB 65 and press ENTER.
You now have a line that is 5 units long 65 degrees down from due East.
14. You are still in the line tool and prompted to select the next point.
15. With your mouse slightly above the horizontal guideline, type 5 TAB 65 and press ENTER.
The result should be a line 5 units long 65 degrees counter-clockwise from due East.
16. Press ESC. The command is complete.
17. Double-click your middle mouse wheel.

This will Zoom to the extents of the drawing.
Save and close the drawing. End of Exercise.
18:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-020-002.mp4
030.020.002 DrawTools1.dwg
Drawing Lines, Polylines and 3D polylines

The differences between lines, polylines and 3D polylines are significant to the Civil 3D world. All of these
commands are located on the Home tab...Draw panel
Lines
An AutoCAD line is any two points in space.
A line can have differing elevations at each end.
The differing elevations may be a result of snapping to nodes of different elevation.
Be aware that a chain of single lines will not join if they have a Delta Z value other than 0.
Also, if you convert a line to a polyline, check the resulting polyline elevation. The result may be unexpected,
as polylines can only be at one elevation.
Polylines
You may not realize it, but you have already been working with polylines. The rectangles you used in the previous
section are just a special case of a polyline. The term Polyline refers to a 2D polyline. A 2d polyline is a chain of
line segments and/or arcs at the same elevation.
A polyline can be at an elevation, but every vertex is at the same elevation.
When you start the polyline command, if you happen to snap to something at an elevation, the rest of your line will
all be at the same elevation.
3D Polylines
A 3D polyline is also a chain of line segments, but it cannot contain arcs. Each vertex of a 3D polyline can be at
different elevations.
You can edit each vertex independently through the properties.

When you get into Feature Lines in Civil 3D, there are much slicker ways to set elevations.
Other general tidbits about lines:

Avoid Splines. Do not use these! You may receive a drawing from someone who thought splines
looked pretty when they drew contours in base AutoCAD.
In this situation use SPLINEDIT command to convert splines to polylines.
If you want to join individual segments together and they are at the same elevation and do not
have gaps at the endpoint, use the Join command from the Modify panel.
If you have individual line segments that do not touch perfectly and wish to convert them to a
polyline use the PEDIT command.
1. Start the PEDIT command.
2. Type M for Multiple.
3. When you are prompted to convert objects to polylines, hit enter for yes.
4. Type J for join. (Then enter)
5. If there are gaps between the lines, type a fuzz distance that will force the lines to close.
6. The command line will report how many segments were joined. If fewer segments were
joined than you expected there are two possible causes:
The lines are at differing elevations. (Use the FLATTEN command to fix)
The fuzz distance is not large enough to close the gaps.
If you have objects that you wish to smoosh down to zero elevation, use the FLATTEN command.
FLATTEN pushes 3D polylines, polylines and lines down to elevation 0. When asked if youd like to

remove hidden lines, Yes will convert the object to a 2D polyline, and will remove any vertices that are
not visible in plan view. If you dont wish to change the object type, use NO when asked to remove
hidden lines.
Circles
Drawing Circles is one of the most fundamental aspects of working in AutoCAD.
If you go directly for the main circle icon, you will get the most simple version of the tool.
Simply click or type in the coordinates of the radius point, then Key-in or click to set the radius distance.
Many variations of the circle command exist, depending on how you wish to fit the circle into your
project.
Arcs
Like circles, the arc tool has many variations, depending on what info you are given ahead of time.
AutoCAD creates arcs in a counterclockwise fashion - keep this in mind as you draw.
Working with arcs is one of the few places where it can be advantageous to turn off dynamic input. F12
key on your keyboard will toggle on or off dynamic input on the fly.
Civil 3D users have additional arc tools that do not exist in base-AutoCAD.
The end result of these tools is still an AutoCAD arc, but users often find that these fit a civil drafting
scenario more than the traditional AutoCAD arc tools.
Exercise: Starting to Draw

As you draw, you will be given coordinates, lengths and angles with which to draw your objects. All the
keying-in may seem cumbersome - but it is good practice. In the next segment, you will learn some
tools that will eliminate the need for so much typing.
1. Open the drawing called DrawTools1.dwg

In case you are wondering: Yes - theres a much easier way to accomplish the following drawing task.
However, I want you to get the feel for the Dynamic input and getting used to looking at either the
command line or the tooltips for feedback.
2. Turn your Dynamic Input on in the status bar.
3. Start the polyline command.
4. When prompted for the start point, Key-in 500,500 ENTER.
5. When prompted for the next point on the line, Key-in 100 TAB 0 ENTER.
6. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Arc. (Alternately, you can type in A and press
ENTER)
7. Key-in 40 TAB 45. Because you have dynamic input on, pay attention to the location of your
cursor when you Key-in the 45 angle.
Hint: If you goof, you can always type U for UNDO at the command line. Using Undo from within
a command will only undo one step. If you press escape and press the main undo, you will
remove the entire polyline and will need to start over.
8. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Line. (Alternately, you can type in L and press
ENTER)
9. Make sure your cursor is below the last point you drew dynamic input is on. Key-in 100 TAB 90
ENTER.
10. Press ESC when done. Your drawing will resemble the following image
11. Start the default circle command again.
12. Key-in: 750,600 ENTER as the center point of the circle.
13. Key-in a radius of 15 and press ENTER.

The house in the drawing now has a swimming pool.
Your next task will be to add curves within the intersection by experimenting with various arc
creation tools.
14. Start the Start-Center-End arc command.
15. Zoom into the NW quadrant of the intersection. Because base-AutoCAD arcs always want to go
counter clockwise use the endpoint object snap (the green square thing) to select the first point as
shown below.
16. You are now prompted for the center of the arc. Use the endpoint snap again to select where
the two grey construction lines come together at a 90 degree angle
17. You are now prompted for the endpoint of the arc, click where the curve should end, at the
endpoint of the vertical line. The first arc is now complete.
18. Click the arc tool again, but this time, choose Start, Center Angle.
19. Click the vertical line in the SE quadrant to start the arc.
20. Click the center as the intersection of the construction lines.
21. Type in 90 ENTER as the included angle.

The completed arc will look like the following image.
22. Use the arc tool of your choosing to complete the SE quadrant.
End of Exercise.
030.030 Object Snaps Section updated: 10/1/2012

11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-001.mp4
030.030.001 oSnaps.dwg
Object Snaps enable you to quickly select exact geometric points on existing entities without having to know the
exact coordinates of those points.
Use object snaps to draw more precisely. You can make sure that object truly touch or are drawn the way you
intended.
The most common object snaps youll use are endpoint, midpoint, center, node and intersection.
If you right-click on the OSNAP icon at the bottom of your screen youll see a list of the available snaps.
The object snaps highlighted in blue are referred to as Running snaps. All running snaps are active when the
object snap icon is turned on in the command line.
Most Common Running Object Snaps
Endpoint - Endpoint grabs the ends or vertices of any type of line or arc.
Midpoint - Midpoint grabs the halfway point between two vertices of any line or arc.
Center - Center grabs the radius point of any circle, ellipse or arc. To use this, you hover your cursor over the
object.
Insert - Insert snaps to the insertion point of blocks or text.
Intersection - For two objects at the same elevation, intersection picks the point where they cross. (If the objects
are at different elevations, use Apparent Intersection)
Node - Snaps to the insertion point of an AutoCAD point or Civil 3D survey point.
When using right-click to access the running snaps, you can only make one change at a time. After one click, the
menu disappears back into the status bar.
To make several changes at once you can right-click on the object snaps icon and go to Settings.
Object Snap Settings

In the settings box you can check the snaps you want as your active running snaps.
A cleared checkbox means that the object snap will not be on during drawing commands if your object snap button
is on.
Later in this chapter you will examine working with object snaps that we are leaving unchecked here.
Object Snap Tips

If you want your object snaps to ignore the elevation of the object you are picking, type OSNAPZ
at the command line. Set this variable to 1.
Be patient when using object snaps on complex objects. Sometimes it takes a moment for the
object snaps to sort out all the data you have on your screen. Pause your cursor where you expect
the object snap to appear and it will pop up.
Be aware of your zoom level when running object snaps. OSNAPS work even when the object you
are snapping to is off-screen. For example, the closest endpoint of a line may be outside of your
screens view. When you click, the line you are drawing will jump to that off-screen spot.
You can turn object snaps on/off on the fly by using the F3 key.
If AutoCAD doesnt seem to be grabbing the correct objects, use the TAB key to force the object
snap to jump to the next nearest location.
Exercise: Basic Object Snaps
1. Open the drawing oSnaps.dwg

In the SE portion of the drawing there is a grid and some lines that you will use to experiment
with the object snaps that you learned in this section.

2. Set your running object snaps to:

1. Endpoint
2. Midpoint
3. Center
4. Node
5. Intersection
3. Start the line command and snap to the end point of the long parcel as shown.
4. Next, use the intersection object snap to snap to the grid lines as shown.
5. Use the Node osnap to locate the Autocad point representing the property corner.
6. Use the midpoint of the right-most vertical grid line to place the next point.
7. Lastly, use object snaps to connect back to the nearest parcel, as shown.
8. Use the center object snap to create a line through the centers of all three circles.
End of exercise. Save the drawing.
23:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-002.mp4
030.030.002 oSnaps.dwg
Some of the most useful object snaps are ones that are generally not used as running object snaps. The snaps you
will use in this section are usually accessed through object snap overrides.
Object snap overrides are object snaps that are only active for one click. AutoCAD filters out all other object snaps
until you complete the action.
Object snaps commonly used with Osnap Overrides
Mid Between Two Points

This is more of a snap tool than a true object snap. Mid Between Two points leverages your running snaps to find
a midpoint where there is no object. For example, in the image to the left, a circle was drawn exactly halfway
between the end points of the lines. Using the Mid Between Two points option eliminates the need to draw a
temporary construction line for this purpose.
Quadrant
Quadrant object snap will help you find the 3 oclock, 6oclock, 9 oclock and 12 oclock positions on any circle or
arc.
Tangent
The tangent snap helps you find the point where a line touches, but does not pass through, a circle or an arc. If
you are drawing the line from an arc to another point, you will initially see the deferred tangent symbol. Deferred
tangent means that AutoCAD needs more information from you to find the final location of the line.
Perpendicular
If you need to draw perpendicular to a non-standard angle, the perpendicular object snap will come in handy.
Note: There is a parallel object snap but it tends to be cumbersome to use. Later in this class, we will use the

offset command, which does a better job creating parallel lines.
Node
Some users find the node Snap helpful if working with AutoCAD points. Many blocks contain AutoCAD points so
the node snap may be useful when snapping to a point of interest that is not handled by other snaps.
Nearest
Nearest is a catch-all object snap that selects any point on an object. Be careful, as the nearest snap has no
regard for maintaining regular angles.
How to Access Object Snap Overrides

To access these snaps you must be in the middle of a drawing command. Press the SHIFT key on your keyboard.
If you hold the shift key for a moment you will notice a symbol pop up indicating it is ok to continue.
At that point right-click your mouse to show the object snap override menu.
Select the object snap that you want active for the proceeding click. The object snap you choose will only be
active, and all other object snaps will be temporarily disabled for one click.
Why Use Object Snap Overrides

Many people ask, Why not just turn on all the object snaps as running snaps? Some object snaps interfere with
other snaps. For example, a quadrant snap may be very close to a tangent location on a circle. By accessing
these as overrides, it is easier to pinpoint the location you are after.
Additionally, by only keeping your most frequently used object snaps as running snaps and using the object snap
overrides for more exotic snaps, you will decrease the amount of clutter on your screen.
There is a lot to pay attention to while you are drafting and more information on screen isnt always better.

Exercise: Using Object Snap Overrides

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by completing the drawing.
You will use object snap overrides to access the following:
Mid Between Two points
Node
Tangent
Perpendicular
1. Keep working in (or open) oSnaps.dwg (You do not need to have completed the previous exercise before
continuing.
This drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of. You will work the tangents first
ang go back to complete the arcs afterward. Verify that your object snaps are turned on. The object
snaps are on and should be set as they were before from the previous exercise. In particular, make sure
midpoint running snap is turned on. While doing this lesson, you may wish to turn off polar tracking.
Once you get more comfortable with object snap overrides you can keep this on. The extra information on
your screen resulting from polar tracking may be distracting to new users.
2. Start the line command.
3. Hold down Shift and right click your mouse.
4. Select Mid Between 2 Points.
5. Use the endpoints of the west-most property lines to find the mid-point between these locations.
The first line of the exercise is started halfway between the two lots.
6. Start the line command again; use the Node snap to select the node representing the first point of the road.
7. Repeat step 6 to connect to the second point on the alignment.
8. Next, use Shift + right click to turn on the tangent snap.
9. Snap to the tangent of the first circle, as shown.
10. Press Escape when complete.

11. Start the line command again.
12. Use the tangent snap to create a line tangent to the west circle and tangent to the east circle. Click when
you see the deferred tangent glyph appear.
13. Press escape when complete.
14. Start the line command one last time and use the tangent snap from the east circle, and the Perpendicular
snap to the vertical line as shown.
You will see these as deferred until the step is complete. This indicates that CAD is still looking for more
information before it can compute the final location.
Once the tangents are complete, the next step will have you create curves using the arc command that is
specific to Civil 3D. You will work west to east along the tangents you just created.
15. From the draw panel, select the curves tool.
16. Select Create Curves between two lines. Working west to east, select the first line as prompted, then the
second line.
17. Press enter to confirm that you will enter a radius as the next entry.
18. When prompted for a radius, key-in 850 and press enter.
19. Repeat the previous steps for the second missing arc.
20. The radius for that arc is 1000.
Save the drawing.

030.040 Polar Tracking & Object Snap Tracking Section updated: 10/1/2012
8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-001.mp4
030.040.001 Polar Tracking.dwg
Polar tracking allows you to draw or move an object in a specific direction without using ortho mode or angular
key-ins at the command line. When the option is highlighted on the status bar, you will automatically get polar
tracking lines at 90 intervals.
If you see the tracking line with your cursor, you can simply type the distance at the command line, then enter.
Without polar tracking turned on, you would need to use the tedious notation of @20<90 to denote a distance of
20 at 90.
How to Use Polar Tracking

Whenever you see the polar tracking line on the screen, you can simply enter a numeric distance, then enter (or
spacebar) on your keyboard to enter a distance.
In other words, you do not need to enter 10 TAB 90 to make a 10 unit line going due north. With polar tracking on
you can just key-in 10 ENTER.
If your mouse is too far away from the polar tracking position, the dashed line will disappear. Typing in an angle,
as you did previously will always override polar tracking.
Never rely on the display angle to set your angles. The number displayed on the tool tip round to the nearest whole
angle. The 75 you see here could be anything from 74.5 to 75.4.
To set the polar tracking angle to a value other than 90 degrees, right click the polar tracking icon and select from
the frequently used angles.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at 90 degrees
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing using the polar tracking feature.
Use 0,0 as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create
dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the step-
by-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
1. Open the drawing called Polar Tracking.dwg

This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool.
The only thing in this drawing is the start here leader.
2. Verify that your Polar tracking tool is turned on in the status bar.
3. Start the Line command.
4. For the start point, key in 0,0.

The line should start exactly at the arrowhead of the Start here arrow.
5. Drag your mouse straight up.
6. With the polar tracking line displayed, key in 6 ENTER

The first vertical line is formed.
7. Push your mouse left to get a polar tracking line at 180.
8. Key in 1.5 ENTER

The horizontal line forming the top of the beam guard is formed.
9. Slide your mouse to the down so that the polar tracking line forms at 90 south
10. Key in 1.5 ENTER

The third line is formed.
11. Slide your mouse right.
12. Key in 1 ENTER
13. Slide your mouse down.

14. Key in 4.5 ENTER
15. Type C with your keyboard to close the line.
16. If you were able to draw the shape without stopping the line command, the C will close the shape where
you started. If you needed to press escape and re-start the line tool, the close will take you back to the
location where you started back up.
If this is the case, try the exercise again.
17. Save and close the drawing.
End of Exercise.
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-002.mp4
030.040.002 PolarTracking2.dwg
Polar tracking is extremely useful even if it were always left at 90 angles. However, polar tracking can be used at
any angle you need.
To change the active polar tracking angle, right-click on the polar tracking icon. The angles seen in the immediate
listing are all multiples of 360 and are referred to as increment angles. Increment angles will show up everywhere
the multiple occurs. For instance, if we set the increment angle to 22.5, you will see a polar tracking angle at 0,
22.5, 45, 67.5, 90, 112.5, 135, and so on.
If you need an angle that is not listed in the increment angle list, you will need to go to the polar tracking settings.
Additional Angles
To add an additional angle, place a checkmark next to the Additional Angles box in the Polar Tracking Settings.
Click New to add the angle of your choice.
Additional angles only once around the clock unlike increment angles. For example, if you set your additional
angle to 35 you will only see angle 35. If you wish to see 35, 70, 105 and so on, you would need to add them as
well.
Additional Settings
The Object Snap Tracking Settings and Polar Angle Measurement are usually left as default.
Object Snap Tracking is a tool we will discuss in the next chapter. The control here determines how polar tracking
related to Object snap tracking.
Polar Angle Measurement determines how polar tracking relates to the last object you drew while a command is
active.
Consider the following example where a line is drawn at 10 from due East (0).
With the setting changed to Relative to last segment, the increment angle kicks in 45 from the original 10,
resulting in an overall angle of 55. The need for this option depends on your situation, but is not needed in most
day-to-day drafting.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at Additional Angles

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing by changing the increment angle as
part of the polar tracking feature.
You will draw the arrow, using the Start here arrowhead as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for
guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the step-
by-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
Hint: You will need to set your increment angle to 30

1. Open the drawing called PolarTracking2.dwg
This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool. The only thing in this
drawing is the start here leader.
2. Set the Increment angle to 30.
3. Start the polyline command. Key in 10,0 for the start point.
The line is started at the same spot as the start here label.
4. Pull your mouse to the left of where it currently sits.

You will see a polar tracking line automatically appear at 0.
5. Key in 2 ENTER.
The first line of the arrow is created.
6. Push your mouse up to get a tracking line at 90.
7. Type in 10 ENTER
8. To draw the point of the arrowhead, position the polar tracking so that the angle you see is 120.
9. Save the Drawing. End of exercise.
9:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-003.mp4
030.040.003 oSnap-Track.dwg
Object snap tracking
Many functions in AutoCAD 2012 exist to eliminate the need for unnecessary construction lines. In most cases, if
you dont need to plot it, you dont need to draw it.
The Object Snap tracking tool is a perfect example of a tool that will help you draft more efficiently and accurately
without the need for construction lines.
To work with object snap tracking, both object snaps and the object snap tracking status bar icons must be active.
Polar tracking is also helpful when using object snap tracking - as the two can work together.
Say you are working with these perpendicular lines and would like to complete the formation of a rectangle using
the line command.
You start the line command and use the traditional endpoint snap to start the line. To place the other endpoint of
the line (without knowing the measurement ahead of time) object snap tracking is a huge help.
As shown in the image to the left, to activate object snap tracking, you will sweep your cursor (without clicking)
until the location you want to line up with is picked up by your object snaps.
As you move your cursor away, a tracking line will form.
If you move your cursor too far away, the tracking line will hide, but you will see a tiny plus (+) sign left behind.
If you do not see the plus sign, try again. If you accidentally sweep over the same point twice, it will clear the
tracking point.
As you move your cursor down, eventually AutoCAD will show you where the polar tracking line and object tracking
line intersect. As long as you see the tracking lines, a click will place the endpoint exactly where these two
temporary tracking lines intersect.
It takes a little bit of practice to get the hang of object snap tracking, but I guarantee this is a tool that you will use
over and over throughout your drafting day.
Lets take a look at another example.

Working with a rectangle, say you wish to draw a circle exactly in the center.
Start the circle command, but do not click. Sweep your cursor against the first midpoint to activate the tracking
point.
Sweep your cursor up to the second tracking point - still no clicking yet.
Notice the blip left behind by the first sweep to the midpoint - that means AutoCAD is still tracking that location for
us.
As you pull your cursor toward where the approximate location should be for the center of the rectangle, the
tracking lines will appear and help you locate your position.
Notice how the snap tracking lights up the midpoints of both the lines you are working off of.

NOW you can click and place the circle at the location you were aiming for. You can turn off object snap tracking
by pressing the F11 key.
Exercise: Object Snap Tracking
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by completing the drawing as shown.
Remember orthographic projections from manual drafting? This example forces you to use object snap tracking by
leveraging the projection lines as a guide to locating the missing geometry.
You will need polar tracking on and set to 90 degrees.

You will need object snaps on
Intersection
Endpoint
midpoint
You will need object snap tracking on.
1. Open the drawing called oSnap-Track.dwg

Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of. The geometry in green represents a
manhole. The grey lines are construction lines that will help you draw. You will need to produce the side
view of the manhole using object snap tracking.
2. Start the rectangle command.

To find the first point of the rectangle, use the endpoint of the existing lines and the endpoint of the
projection lines.
3. To find the second corner of the rectangle, use the projection lines.
4. Do not click until you see the crossing guidelines on the screen.
The result should be a single rectangle that lines up perfectly with the side below it and the projection
lines.
5. Start the circle command.
6. Use polar tracking from the middle of the new reactangle and the middle of the small rectangle on the right
to find the center of the circle. Click to start the circle.
7. To find the diameter of the circle, use object snap tracking from the top of the small rectangle.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
030.050 Working with Grips Section updated: 10/1/2012

15:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-050-001.mp4
030.050.001 Grips.dwg
Using Grips to Modify Objects

Selecting an object without a command active will result in CAD displaying grips on the object.
Grips are a quick and easy way to modify any AutoCAD object.
When a grip is clicked, it turns red to indicate it is active, or hot.
A hot grip can be used to relocate an endpoint, as shown in the illustration.
Grips and Lines

On a regular line (as opposed to a polyline) the center square grip will relocate the line without changing its
geometry.
Notice that the dynamic input is chowing the change in length resulting from the stretching of the line.
You can use the tab key to change to the overall length field if you wish to key-in the final value of the line.
Grips and Circles

On a circle, the center grip will relocate the object without changing the radius value.
Clicking on one of the grips along the edge will result in stretching the radius.
In this case, the dynamic input shows the overall radius of the circle. Use tab to change to the radius change field.
Grips and Polylines

On a polyline, the midpoint of each segment has a rectangular grip. The rectangular grip will move the entire
segment of the polyline
Polylines also have a new feature called dynamic grip menus. As you pause your cursor over a grip, you will see
several functional options. Clicking on one of the verticies will give you options to: Stretch vertex, Add vertex or
remove vertex. This is by far the easiest way to add or remove a vertex from a polyline!
Clicking on one of the center grips will give you slightly different options. You can stretch the entire side, ad a
vertex or convert the line to an arc.
Grips and Blocks

Clicking the grip on a block will allow you to move the block without needing any additional commands. Simply
click the grip to pick it up and click a second location to put it down.
To make copies of a block, hold down control as you click the grip. Keep the control key held until you click a
second time. If you continue to hold down the control key, you can make copies in a grid formation. If you let go of
control, you will be in a free-form copy mode until you press ESC.
Exercise: Working with Grips

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by modifying shapes and drawing lines using
grips. There are several groupings of objects you will work with.
You will need the following object snaps:

Endpoint
Center
node
1. Open the drawing called Grips.dwg

2.
3. Verify that your object snaps and polar tracking are both turned on.
Both of these icons will appear highlighted in blue at in the status bar.
Right-click on the polar tracking icon in the status bar.
In polar tracking settings, change the increment angle to 90.
Turn off the additional angles by clearing the checkbox.
3. Zoom to the part of the drawing near the intersection of STH 16 and Dickason Blvd.
Here there are some construction lines to help you place objects using grips.
4. Select the planter block to the south of the intersection. Move it into place using the center of one of the
construction circles as a guide.
5. Once the first planter is in place, hold down Control on your keyboard and click the grip from the first
planter.
6. Use the control-click to make copies of the planter at each corner of the intersection.
8. Click the grip in the NW corner of the median at the south of the intersection.
9. Use polar tracking and object snap tracking to relocate the grip point so that the resulting median is squared
off.
10. Use the rectangular grips dynamic menu to convert the top of the median to an arc.
11. Use the node object snap to place the arc in the correct position. In the SW part of the intersection is a
line.
12. Change its overall length to 150 by:

Clicking the grip on the left end of the object.
Press TAB on your keyboard.
Key-in a length of 150.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
030.060 Modify Commands Section updated: 10/1/2012

11:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-001.mp4
030.060.001 MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.dwg
Introduction to Modify Commands

In this chapter you will learn about Move, Copy and Rotate, the three most common Modify tools you will
encounter. As you work through the example, ask yourself the following questions as you work:
What items are selected when I start the command? How does this affect the behavior of the tool?
Move
Example Workflow: Move
1. Hit ESC several times to ensure you are out of any other commands. This will also ensure that you do not
have any objects selected.
2. Click the Move command.
3.
4. You are prompted to Select Objects:
5.
6. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
7.
8. Right-click to move on to the next step.
9.
10. The command line now reads:
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where you are moving the objects to.
When the second click is complete, the command is finished.
When you finish working with an AutoCAD command, you are taken back to a command line prompt. When you
see the word Command: at the prompt you know you are in a selection mode.
If you want to restart a command again right away, right-click and select Repeat
If an object (or several objects) are already selected at the time you start the command, it will skip past the option
to Select Objects. For example, if I had the suitcase objects selected at the time I clicked Move, it would jump me
to step 6.
Copy
Example Workflow: Copy
1. Click the Copy command.
2. You are prompted to Select Objects:
3. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
4. Right-click to move on to the next step.
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where the duplicate object will appear.
1. Your command line now says:
Specify second point or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>:
You can keep making copies of your objects.
7. Hit enter when you are done making copies.
Rotate
Example Workflow: Rotate
1. With no objects selected, click the Rotate tool.
2. The command line now asks: Select Objects:

3. Select the object or objects you wish to rotate.

4. Right-click when you are done selecting entities to rotate.
5. You are now asked: Specify base point: Use object snaps to select the base point.
6. You are now asked to Specify a rotation angle. The default options allow you to type in a rotation angle or
graphically select the rotation angle. If you type in a rotation angle, hit enter to finish the command.
By default, AutoCAD considers due East = 0.
When we get into AutoCAD there are more options for specifying angles (such as bearing), so if the angle defaults
in AutoCAD bug you, dont worry!
Exercise: Move/Copy/Rotate
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing.
You will use Move, Copy and Rotate to place pavement markings in the configuration shown here.
Use the cyan points as your placement guide.
If you feel confident enough to try the exercise without step-by-step instructions, Go for it!
It will be helpful to have your Node object snap on.

1. Open the Drawing MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.DWG .
2. Remember that you can turn on/off polar tracking with F10. You can turn on/off object snap tracking using
F11. You can turn on/off object snaps using F3. You will leverage all three of these tools as you move, copy
and rotate.
3. Start the move command. Select the pavement marking arrows using the midpoint of the bottom of the
arrow as the Base Point.
4. Snap to the south most Node in the S approach to the intersection.
5. Start the copy command. Copy the pavement marking arrows by clicking at the midpoint of the bottom (as
you did before).
6. Place a copy of the arrows at each node as shown here:
7. Note each quadrant of the intersection has a point representing the location of the pavement marking
arrows.
8. Start the rotate command. Start with the arrows at the east approach. Use the node (or the midpoint of the
bottom of the arrows - as these two points should coincide) as the basepoint.
9. Specify a rotation of 90. The arrows will then be pointed the same direction.
10. Continue moving, copying and rotating until the pavement marking placement on the intersection is
completed.
11. When moving the Crosswalk and stop bar, line up the bottom corner of the stopbar with the node closer to
the intersection.
19:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-002.mp4
030.060.002 Polyline edits.dwg
More Modify Commands
In this chapter:
Join
Polyline Edit
Explode
Once you locate these commands on the Modify Panel, the only learning curve working with the tools is getting
used to the order in which you do your clicking and picking.
Keep an eye on the command line to help steer you in the right direction.
As you will see in the first example, you can pick objects before initiating the command or wait until AutoCAD asks
you to Select Objects.

Turning Lines into Polylines (and Vice Versa)
If you have drawn many line segments that touch perfectly, you can use the Join command directly from the Modify
pull-down.
To use Join:
1. Select the lines and arcs you want to combine into a polyline.
2. Click the Join command.
OR
1. Click the Join command.
2. Select the objects you wish to join.
3. Press enter to complete the command.
If the lines were not drawn using object snaps, there may be very tiny gaps between the segments. If this is the
case, you will need to use the Polyline edit command to join your line.
Using Polyline Edit to Join:
1. Click the polyline edit command.

2. At the command line, type M for multiple. Press enter.
3. Select the objects you wish to join. Hit enter.
4. If prompted to convert Lines arc and splines to polylines, press Enter to accept the default of Yes.
5. Type J for Join and press enter (OR select Join from the dynamic input menu.
6. You are then prompted for a Fuzz Distance.
7. Enter a distance that you know will be larger than any gaps between entities you want to join.
8. Press enter.
The command line will report to you how many segments were added to the polyline. If fewer segments were
added than you expected, try the process again with a larger fuzz distance.
Explode
There are some situations where you want to break apart an AutoCAD object into components that make it up. For
example, you may wish to turn a polyline into several line segments. You may wish to turn a block into regular
lines. To break down an object into smaller parts explode can be used.
Use Explode with caution. Using explode on a objects in Civil 3D will remove the intelligent information behind it,
leaving you with just the graphical representation.
Erase
We briefly discussed the Erase command earlier in this course. There are two main ways to erase objects in
AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the modify toolbar.
Distance Inquiry
Distance Inquiry is not a modify command but it will be used in the upcoming example to check your work.
It is handy to know the distance between two spots. I like the DI command to get a quick measure of the line or
space Im interested.
Type DI at the command line for a quick one-off measurement.

As you see here, you will get the overall angular distance as well as the X, Y and Z distances.
You will use distance inquiry in the exercise to ensure that the fuzz distance you specify in the PEDT-Join
command is large enough to plug the gaps in the polylines.
Exercise: PEDIT/Join/Explode/Erase
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing. You will use explode, Join and Polyline edit to
make the modifications. If you successfully complete this exercise you can use it in the next one.
1. Open the drawing Polyline edits.dwg .

This drawing contains several shapes that appear to be closed. Upon closer inspection you will see that
the elements are not joined.
Without being in a command, move your cursor over the drawing. You will notice that more elements
light up than you might expect. This is because the entire drawing is a block.
2. With the block selected, click Explode

Now as you mouse over the items, they behave as separate line segments.
3. Select all the line segments that make up Building1. Click Join. The command line will report that 19
lines have now been converted to 2 polylines.
4. Use join again to join the remaining segments.

On selecting, all of building 1 will be a single polyline, open on one segment.
5. Double click the polyline. Select close from the polyline edit options.
6. Press escape.
The building polyline is now closed.
7. Zoom into building2. Select all the objects (including the protrusion on the right side).
8. Try the Join command on this line.
9. It will report that 1 line was discarded from the selection set.
10. With NO object selected, start the PEDIT command from the Modify panel.
11. Use M to start the Multiple option.
12. Select the polyline and the discarded line from the previous steps.
13. Select the JOIN option.
14. For Fuzz Distance, enter 1 foot.
15. The last line is now part of the polyline. You are still in the polyline edit command. Select close.
16. Building2 footprint is now complete.
17. Repeat these techniques to join the polylines for Building3. At the end of the process, Building 3 will be a
closed, continuous polyline as shown.
Save the drawing.
16:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-003.mp4
030.060.003 Offset-Array.dwg, Scale-Stretch.dwg
Even More Modify Commands

In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
In this chapter:
Offset
Mirror
Scale
Stretch
Trim/Extend
Break
Fillet
Chamfer
Offset
Example Workflow: Offset
1. With no objects selected, click the Offset tool.

2.
Specify offset distance or [Through/Erase/Layer] <3.0000>:
Type in the distance you wish to offset the line or polyline.

Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>:
Click on the object you wish to offset.
4. Now your command line says:

Specify point on side to offset or [Exit/Multiple/Undo] <Exit>:
5. Click on the side you wish to offset.

At this point you should see the new object you created.
6. The command remains active until you hit enter.
The offset command adjusts the geometry of the line to get a consistent distance between the original and offset
line. This means that arcs will have different radii in the offset object.
Mirror
The mirror command is a special version of the copy command that flips objects over an imaginary mirror line.
Select Objects first or after the Mirror command is started.
You will be prompted to select two points that form an imaginary mirror line. This mirror line determines the angle
and distance away from the original the flipped copy is made.
Polar tracking and the mirror command are frequently used together.
One of the options in the mirror command is to Erase Source objects. The default is N for No. If you choose to key
in Y for yes, the original will be deleted. This option is a convenient way to flip objects without duplicating them.
Exercise: Offset and Array

1. Open the Drawing Offset-Array.dwg.
2.
3. Zoom into the intersection of STH 16 and STH 73. The back of curb is already drawn in the NE quadrant.
You will use the offset command to create flowline and flange lines.
4.
5. Start the offset command. Set the offset distance to 0.5. (Note the foot symbol is not needed.)
6.
7. Select the back of curb line and press enter.
8.
9. Click in CAD anywhere to the left or below the line. The first offset is created.
10.
11. Press escape.
12.
13. Start the offset command again and specify an offset distance of 2.
8. Select the flowline, and then click in cad anywhere to the south or west of it.
9. To the west of the site, locate the square that represents the gridline. This is a 100 x 100 square.
10. Select the square, then click Array.
11. Press enter to indicate rectangular.
12. Press enter to indicate Count.

For the number of rows, type in 6 then press enter.
For the number of columns, type in 14 then press enter.
13. Press enter again to indicate spacing.

For the distance between rows, type in 100, then press enter.
For the distance between columns, type in 100 and press enter.
14. Press enter one last time to complete the array.

15. Select the array and experiment with the different grips.
16. Save the drawing. End of exercise.
Stretch
The Stretch command and polar tracking are frequently used together.
Start the Stretch command by clicking the Stretch icon from the Home tab > Modify panel
When you are prompted to select objects, it is important to pay attention to the window you create.
You must use a right-to-left crossing window when working with Stretch.
Items that are completely inside the crossing window will move. Items that cross the dashed selection boundary
will act like rubber-bands. These are the objects that stretch when you proceed with the command.
Do not use a right-to-left crossing window.
Like all of the modify commands, after selecting objects you are prompted for a base point.
The base point on the stretch command can be anywhere on the object. The location of the base point will not
affect the outcome of the command. Rather, the base point is used as a start point when specifying a stretch
distance.
Using polar tracking, you can manually stretch the item and click to complete the command.
You can also key-in a stretch distance. If you do not use polar tracking the result is a skewed geometry.
Scale
The scale command is used to resize items uniformly. You will find the scale command with the rest of the modify
commands on the home tab.
Start the scale command and select objects or have objects selected ahead of time and click the scale icon. (Like
all the modify commands, if you have an item selected to begin with, the command will skip the step to Select
objects.)
You are prompted to specify a base point. In the case of scale, the base point acts as an anchor. This base point
will stay put, while the rest of the object grows or shrinks around it. After the base point is set, you will want to
key-in your scale value.
Moving your cursor will increase or decrease the size, however, the distance away from your base point is taken as
a scale factor, which can be confusing.
You should always key-in your scale factor. A scale factor greater than 1 will increase the size of the item. A
scale factor less than 1 will result in a smaller item.
Scale factors in use with the Scale command are always positive numbers.
Exercise: Scale/Stretch
You will use the scale and stretch commands to fix the drawing that follows.
1. Open the drawing Scale-stretch.dwg Zoom into the area in the NW of the site shown here.
2.
3. Start the stretch command.
4.
5. Start a R to L crossing window to select objects.
6.
7. Press enter when complete.
8.
9. Select a base point and stretch the building 8 to the east. Use polar tracking to keep the building
straight.
10.
11. Select the center tree.
12.
13. Start the scale command.
14.
15. Click the center of the tree for the base point. Specify a scale of 0.5. Press enter.
16.
17. Click the right tree. Scale it up using a scale factor of 1.3.
18.
19. Select the flared end section. Rotate it 90 counter -clockwise.
20.
21. Move the block so that the right edge lines up with the right edge of the pipe as shown here.
12. Start the scale command.
13. For the base point, click the right corner of the FES.
14. When prompted for a scale factor, type in R for reference. Press enter.
15. When prompted for a reference length, click the two points representing the current width of the block.
16. For the new length, click the opposite side of the pipe.
The result should be that the block fits perfectly at the end of the pipe.
12:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-004.mp4
030.060.004 Trim.dwg
Trim and Extend

Trim and Extend are frequently discussed together because they are two sides of the same proverbial coin. The
two commands behave in a very similar manner.
When working with the trim command, you can switch to extend mode by pressing the shift key on your keyboard.
These commands are both found on the Modify panel of the home tab. When you first start the command you are
asked to select objects for a cutting edge (boundary edge for extend). However, I recommend pressing enter on
your keyboard to take the option to Select All.
By using the <Select All> option you simplify the trim/extend process.
Break
Break and Break at Point are the same command. In the case of Break at Point, the icon chooses the command
line options for you.
You will probably find that the break at point version of the command is more useful and easier to control.
When working with the Break version of the command (the default version) the first click specifies the object and
the location of the gap that will be formed in the object.
The problem with this, however, is that object snaps do not engage and therefore, the exact location of the gap is
difficult to control.
To overcome this, you could use the First Point option.
The break at point version of the command automatically picks the first point for you and forces the first point to
be the same as the second point. The result is a single break in the line. No gap is formed.
Exercise: Trim/Extend/Break
First you will experiment with some junk lines to get the feel for the options in the Trim/Extend and Break
commands.
When you feel confident with the new tools, use them to Trim both intersections in the drawing.
1. Open the drawing Trim.dwg

To get a feel for the Trim command (and to review the offset command) zoom to the two lines in the SE
corner of the drawing. These dont represent any physical objects, they are just here for practice.
2. Start the Offset command. Specify an offset distance of 40 feet. Press Enter.
3. Select the line that is more horizontal.
4. Type in M for multiple.
5. Start clicking south of the line until you have a good number of lines to play with, as shown.
6. Repeat the offset process with the mostly vertical line. Use an offset distance of 40 feet and use the
Multiple option to save time.
7. Start the Trim command.
8. When prompted to select objects as a cutting edge, press ENTER to select all.
9. Start clicking around to get the feel for the trim command.
10. Try the F for Fence option to get a feel for that as well.
11. Hold down SHIFT on your keyboard and start clicking. This will convert Trim to EXTEND mode.
12. Press Escape and try the same techniques with the Extend command.
Once you feel you are confident with the trim and extend commands, erase the mess you made in the
right side of the drawing. Its time to focus on the real project.
13. Use the Trim command to clean up the lines in the intersections.
Do not modify the (yellow) centerlines.
14. When youve completed the exercise, the intersection will look like the image here.
15. Save the drawing. This will come in handy for the fillet and chamfer commands.

Fillet/Chamfer
Fillet and chamfer have many similarities. In both commands, if you start with a polyline, the result will remain a
polyline. If you start with line segments, the result will be separate segments. Both need information before they
will appear to work.
Fillet
Pronounced fill it not fill eh, the fillet command is the most common method for creating arcs between lines.
The first thing you do is set the radius value. If you forget this step, the default radius is 0 and nothing will happen.
The command line will tell you what the current fillet radius value is. AutoCAD will remember the last used value.
Key-in R and Enter OR pick radius from the dynamic input menu.
Chamfer
Like fillet, chamfer needs information given to it before it will proceed as expected. You need to specify two
distances or a distance and an angle to complete the command.
Exercise: Fillet/ Chamfer
1. Keep working in the drawing form the previous exercise or open up Fillet-chamfer.dwg
2. Start the Fillet command. Type in R for Radius. Press enter.
3. Specify a radius of 30 feet. Press enter.
4. Fillet all the orange curb lines to 30 feet at the Dickason intersection.
5. Use a fillet radius of 35 at the STH 73 intersection.
6. Use the Chamfer command to create sight lines.
7. For the intersection with Dickason, use a chamfer distance of 15 feet . (Note: the foot symbol is not
needed. )
8. For the Intersection with STH 73, use a chamfer distance of 20 feet.
9. At the end of the process ,both intersections will be filleted and chamfered with the radii and distances
specified.
10. Save the drawing. End of Exercise.
030.070 Layers Section updated: 10/1/2012

18:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-001.mp4
030.070.001 Layers.dwg
Introduction
Creating different types of objects on their own layer is the best way to keep your drawings organized and
manageable. In the exercises you have worked with up to this point, the layers have been created for you. In this
chapter you will start to work with layers.
In this chapter:
Current layer vs Object Layer
Creating New Layers
Working with Layer States (Freeze/Thaw, On/Off, Lock/Unlock)
Working With Layers

Everything you draw should go on a layer. No exceptions! The good news is that once you get Civil 3D involved, it
will push things to the correct layer.
Layers are key to AutoCAD in keeping your drawing well organized.
They are especially valuable when it comes to printing because you can freeze items you dont wish to display on a
plot.

When you start a drawing tool and start drawing, that line is being created on the current layer. You can tell what
layer is current by looking at the layer dropdown on the Home tab...Layers panel.
To switch which layer is current, make sure nothing is selected in the drawing and click on the dropdown arrow and
select the layer you want.
Important Layer Notes
When an object is selected, its layer is displayed in the layer dropdown.

To change and objects layer:
Select the object whose layer you wish to change
Go to the layer dropdown on the Home tab > layers panel
Pick the new layer.
A great command to know is the Layer Previous command. If you want to get back to the layer state you were in
last, hit this and it will take you back. For example, say you accidentally hit thaw all layers in a viewport. Layer
previous will restore the layers.
Finished projects should have nothing on layer zero.
Do not use the Defpoints layer. It doesnt plot, and is used by AutoCAD as a placeholder for dimensions.
Creating a New Layer
To create a new layer:

1. Click the Layer Properties Manager Button.
2.
3. Inside layer properties manager, click the new layer button .
4.
5. Type in the layers name and hit enter to continue.
6.
7. You may wish to make the new layer current by double clicking on it in the layer manager.
Layer Properties manager can be closed or kept open like any other Tool Palette. (See Working with Tool Palettes
for more information)
Layer Properties
Note: Modelspace and viewport concepts are discussed in depth in a later section.
Layer Tools
There are quite a few tools in the layer panel. The following list is a rundown of the most frequently used tools on
this panel.
Exercise: Layer Basics

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by working with frequently used layer tools.
You will only be doing a little drawing. Most of this is practice using the layer tools. Many of the results are
observational. That is, I want you to do them and think about the result you obtained. Make sure you understand
why certain things are happening.
In steps 14-20 you will use differing tools to understand the difference between Frozen and Off.
1. Open the drawing called Layers.dwg.

Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of.
2. On the Home tab > Layers panel, click the icon to launch the layer properties manager.
3. Notice that the layer P_PATH_SYDEWUK is intentionally spelled incorrectly.
4. Use a slow double-click to edit the text of the layer name.
5. Rename the layer to P_PATH_SIDEWALK
6. From the layer properties manager, click the new layer icon.
A new layer is created. If you had P_PATH_SIDEWALK highlighted at the time you clicked the New icon,
the layers properties will be identical.
7. Name the new layer P_NOTES.
8. Press enter to complete the naming process before proceeding.
9. Click the square in the Color Column.

You are prompted to select color using the Select color dialog.
10. Click the RED square, then click OK.
11. Repeat steps 5-7 to create a second new layer called P_CRDR.
12. Press enter and set the color of the new layer to Green.
13. Close the layer property manager by clicking the X in top of the dialog.
The side of the layer manager that has the X may vary depending on where the dialog box is sitting on
your screen.
14. From the layers panel fly-out, click Thaw All layers.
All of the Frozen layers are now visible.
15. Press Escape to ensure no objects are selected.
16. Click the Make Object Layer current button.
17. Click the red loop at the pedestrian bridge in the SE portion of the site.
18. P_STRUCT is now the current layer.
19. In the layers flyout, turn OFF the option for Locked and Faded layers When you have successfully turned
this off the slider bar will not be selectable and the icon is no longer blue.
20. Click Layer isolate

You are prompted to select objects.
21. Click on one of the pavement marking lines at the park & ride in the NE portion of the site. Then press
enter.
Only the pavement markings are visible in the drawing. Also note that the layer 0 is current. This is telling
us that the pavement markings are actually on layer 0. We will fix this in a later step!
22. Open the layer properties manager and make note of what is going on with the layers.
23. Close the layer properties manager when complete.

What you should observe is that the layer isolate command utilizes the Off command rather than the
freeze option for hiding layers.
24. Double-click your middle mouse wheel to Zoom extents.

Notice that even though layers are off (such as RAB_SB_TURN_Left, and P_WAL) zoom is treating them
like they are still there.
25. Click Layer unisolate.

The drawing goes back to how it was prior to using the layer isolate command.
26. Turn on the layer RAB_SB_TURN_Left
27. Use the layer pull-down to make the current layer 0.
28. Click on the Layer Freeze command from the Layer Panel.
You are prompted to select objects on layers to be frozen.
Click several objects to freeze as many layers as you can.
Make sure to select the green circle in the far right side of the drawing.
29. Just for fun click on the one of the pavement marking lines.
What happens? The only items visible should be the pavement markings
You will not be able to freeze this layer because you should have made it current in a previous step.

30. Again, double-click your middle mouse wheel to zoom extents. This time the interchange fills the drawing
area with little room to spare.
31. Click Layer Previous until all of the layers are visible again.
32. What happens if you click Layer previous twice?

The first click should take you the layer state before you used the freeze command. Clicking it twice will
take you back to the isolated layer state.
33. Again, use Layer Isolate to isolate the pavement markings layer, as you did preiously.
34. Use a large selection window to select all of the visible objects. All of the pavement markings should be
selected.
35. Use the layer pulldown to change the layer of the spokes to P_PM
36. Press Escape when complete. Because the layer you are moving the items to is off, you will receive a
message that the items are on a layer that is off.
37. Click Close.
38. Click Layer Un-isolate again.
39. Verify that all the layers are on and thawed.
8:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-002.mp4
030.070.002 Layers2.dwg
Layer Walk
Several commands that will help you manage the often numerous layers I the layer walk command and creating
layer states. These commands go hand-in-hand because layer states can be made from the Layer Walk
command.
The layer walk command is located in the Layers panel flyout.
When you first enter the layer walk command, the layers that are visible in the drawing will be highlighted in blue. If
the layer is Off or Frozen it will not be highlighted.
Use the Control + click and Shift click commands to select various combinations of visible layers. The graphic will
update instantly to reveal what is on the layers you have chosen.
Keep Restore on exit checked. Instead of changing the layers directly from this dialog box, we will save a layer
state.
When a combination of layers is active that might be useful to you repeatedly in the process of design, you can
save the layer combination as a Layer State.
Layer States
When you get into Civil 3D, youll see that every element goes to its own layer. This means that a Civil 3D project
can easily have several hundred layers. For example, the WisDOT base template contains over 700 layers - thats
before you draw your first line!
To help manage the layers (and your sanity) use Layer States. Lets say youve been working in modelspace
freezing things, thawing things, maybe locking things and you think to yourself, Gee this is a good point I might
want to get back to quickly. Create a new layer state!
Give the new state a name and click OK.
Now you can easily get back to that layer situation by hitting the dropdown again and setting your desired state
current.
This also works inside viewports. So if youve got a pretty state youd like to plot, double click inside the viewport
and set the layer state you want current.

A Layer State is a snapshot in time of your layer situation that you can easily retrieve as you are drafting.
Layer states track on/off, freeze/thaw and locked/unlock status of the layers.
Right-click anywhere in the Layer Walk dialog to access this tool.
Give the layer state a name that best describes the layers you have selected.
Back in the Layer panel, you will see the layer states listed in the pull-down. To restore a layer state, simply select
the saved state and the drawing will switch.
At any time you can create a layer state using the New Layer State button found in this pull down.
Exercise: Layer Walk & Layer States

In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by working with the Layer Walk Command and
Layer States. This is practice using the layer tools, and does not require drawing. Many of the results are
observational. That is, I want you to do them and think about the result you obtained. Make sure you understand
why certain things are happening.
1. Open Layers2.dwg Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working with.
2. Open the layer manager to observe the layer names. This drawing is an excellent example of WisDOT
layer naming.
3. Close the layer manager.
4. Use your middle mouse wheel to Zoom Extents.

Make sure you can see the entire interchange on your screen.
5. Start the Layer Walk command.

The layer walk dialog opens with all the layers highlighted. This indicates that all the layers are on and
thawed.
6. Right-click anywhere in the Layer Walk dialog and select Save Layer State
7. Save the layer state as All On and Thawed.
8. Click OK.
9. Remain in the Layer Walk command.
10. Select the layer E-ALI. There are no visible objects on this layer.
11. Use the Arrow Keys on your keyboard to move down the listing.
As you work through the listing you will see the objects on the layers.
12. Hold down your control key and select the layers:
E_RDWY
E_RDWY_Gravel
E_WTR
Multiple layers will become selected as long as you keep the control key pressed.
13. Right-click in the Layer walk dialog and select Save Layer State
14. Save the New Layer State as Edgelines.
15. Click OK. Note that you are not allowed to use commas or slashes in the name of the layer state but
ampersands are ok.
16. Close the layer walk dialog. The drawing should be the same as when you first opened the drawing.
17. From the layer panel, try out your new layer state by picking it from the pull-down
18. From the layer panel, switch to the All on and Thawed Layer state. The drawing should reflect the layers in
this state.

Save the drawing End of Exercise.
11:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-003.mp4
030.070.003 Layers3.dwg
Layer Filters
Layer filters help you narrow down what layers are shown in the layer properties listing.
The layer filters do not actually change what layers are visible. However, you can use Shfit + click, Ctrl + click or
Ctrl+A to select layers from the listing and perform action on them.
Find a Layer
To quickly locate a layer without using a layer filter, use the search field in the upper right corner of the layer
properties manager.
The asterisk acts as a wildcard to make your search more general. For example, here you see the search for all
layers containing the word text in the name.
This search is not case-sensitive.

Layer Settings
The wrench icon in the layer properties manager will take you to layer settings.
In the exercise for this section, you will examine the results of changing the Layer Isolate settings.
You will also see the pros and cons of having the Dialog Settings Apply layer filter to toolbar selected.
Exercise: Even More Layer Tools

1. Open the File Layers 3.dwg.
2.
3. Go the Home tab > Layers panel, and select the main layer properties manger button.
4.
5. Along the left hand side of the layer properties manager, highlight Alignment.
Notice that now you only see layers in the listing that pertain to proposed alignments.
4. Along the left hand side of the layer properties manager, highlight Corridor.
Notice that now you only see layers in the listing that pertain to proposed corridor design.
5. Hold your shift key and select the first layer in the listing [which should be P_CRDR]
6. Continue holding down shift and select the last layer in the lisintg [which should be P_RDWY_Subg_ShldPt]
All of the layers should now be selected.
7. Click the lock icon. All of the layers will lock together.
8. Click the lock icon again to unlock all of the corridor layers.
9. Now place a checkbox next to Invert Filter.

1. You now see all layers, except the Corridor layers.
2. Clear the checkbox.
10. In the upper right corner of the layers property dialog box, key-in *TEXT*.
1. There should be 5 layers that contain the letters TEXT.
2. Clear the search by clicking the X that is in the same field as the search.
11. Click the wrench icon on the right side of the layer properties manger.
1. Set the radio button to Lock and Fade option for Isolate Layer settings.
2. Click OK.
3. Move your layer properties manager aside or close it temporarily.
10. Click the Layer Isolate command from the Home tab > Layers panel. Click one of the blue grid lines in the
drawing.
11. In the layers panel flyout, turn on the option for Locked layer fading. Set the slider bar to approximately
50%.
1. Locked layers should appear to dim
2. Layers are visible, but not able to be modified.
3. Mouse around and observe the lock icon that floats near your cursor as you mouse around.
12. Click the Layer Unisolate button. All layers will go back to their previous state.
13. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon again.
14. In the Isolate Layer settings, set the radio button to Off.
1. Set the radio button for VP freeze.
2. Click OK.
15. Move or close the layer properties manager again.
16. Click the layer isolate command.
17. Click one of the blue grid lines again.

1. Now, all you see are the grid lines.
2. Click Layer Unisolate.
18. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon yet again. Make sure that Apply Layer
Filter to Layer Toolbar is checked ON.
19. Set the current layer filter to Erosion control.

1. In the main CAD window, click the pulldown for the layers.
2. You should only see the current layer plus the layers from the filter.
20. Return to the layer properties manager and click the wrench icon yet again.
21. Clear the checkbox for the Apply Layer Filter to Layer Toolbar option.
1. Click OK
2. Observe that you can now see all lyers regardless of the current layer filter.
22. Right-click on the layer pulldown from the Layers panel.

1. Select Add to Quick access toolbar.
23. End of exercise.
030.080 Properties Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-001.mp4
030.080.001 Properties2.dwg
Properties
The properties tool palette is a great tool to know. The properties palette allows you to see information about a
selected object and make modifications.
From the previous section, you know that selecting an object, and then right-clicking it is a way to view commands
associated with an object. Properties is one of the items you can access this way.
You can also access the properties palette by clicking the Properties icon from the Home tab > Palettes panel from
the ribbon.
At the top of the properties palette, you will see the type of object you have selected. You can change many things
about an object right from here, such as the layer and elevation.
If you have multiple objects selected, you will see the number of items in parenthesis at the top of the properties
panel. Click on the dropdown to see the breakdown of the types of objects.
If you wish to make changes using the properties palette-, you will need to click into the area you want to change to
wake up the cell. Any properties that cannot be changed here will appear slightly grayed out.
Exercise: Working with the Properties Palette

This drawing has several things wrong with it which you will correct using Properties.
1. Open the file Properties2.dwg
2. Open the Properties Pallet by Going to the Home tab > Properties.
An empty properties pallet shows with No Selection at the top.
3. Select one of the grid lines ,right-click and pick Select Similar.
All grid lines become selected. In the Properties dialog, notice that the color of the lines is not ByLayer as
it should be. Also, the Layer is 0.
4. Set the Color to ByLayer.
5. Change the Layer to E_MAP_Gridlines
6. Select one of the Tree blocks, then right-click and pick Select Similar.
7. Use the Properties to change

Color to ByLayer.
Layer to E_LAND_Vegetation
X and Y Scales to 1

6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-002.mp4
030.080.002 Properties2.dwg
Quick Select
Quick select is a selection tool that goes above and beyond the capabilities of the Select Similar command.
You can access the Quick Select tool at any time by right-clicking. It does not matter if you have items selected
ahead of time.
Select similar looks at object type and layer only. In the case of blocks, select similar uses the block name and
layer to locate similar items. Using Quick select can filter your drawing for specific information, based on any
property of the object.
Using quick select requires you to specify where you are searching, what you are searching for, what properties to
look at and how to identify the items you want.
It helps to say the search out loud to check if you have the correct criteria set.
You can also look for all items of a particular type. In the Operator field, you will always have the option to Select
All. This will pick all items of the object type you choose, regardless of layer or any other parameters.
If you have items selected ahead of time, the Apply to: option will read Current Selection. You can use the drop-
down to switch to entire drawing or remain on Current selection to narrow down your previous search results.
Exercise: Quick Select

In this exercise, you will use the Quick Select dialog to search for items. Then you will use the properties dialog
that you learned in the previous section to edit the properties of the items.
1. Open the file Properties3.dwg This drawing contains numerous layers, objects and text items.
2. Be sure your properties palette is visible.
3. From the upper-right corner of the properties palette, click Quick Select
4. Use the Quick select dialog to search the entire drawing for any objects on the Level 18 layer.
5. Set the options as shown.
6. Click OK You will have 20 items selected.
7. Change the color from *VARIES* to ByLayer.
8. Press escape when complete. Escape will clear the selection.
9. Start Quick Select again.
10. This time, create a search for all blocks named A-SPRINKLER.
11. Click OK. There are 7 instances of A-SPRINKLER in this drawing.
12. DO NOT press escape.
13. Launch the Quick select command again and search the entire drawing for blocks named A-STONE.
14. Put a checkmark next to Append to current selection set.
15. Click OK.
16. There should be 10 blocks total selected as a result of the quick selections.
Save and Close the Drawing. End of exercise.
030.090 Text & Annotation Section updated: 10/1/2012

20:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-001.mp4
030.090.001 Working with Text
The best method for creating text in AutoCAD is to use the MTEXT command. This is found under
Annotate...Text...Multiline Text
Starting Text
Click an imaginary rectangle object to approximate the location of the text box. Once the text is placed you will see
the CAD interface change.
The Text Editor is a contextual tab that you will only see when creating or editing MTEXT. It behaves much like
Microsoft word in terms of formatting and typing in text. Any font and font size can be used in this editor.
The text in the graphic also has similarities to word processing. You can change the width of the page by using
the diamond shape on the right end of the toolbar.
Additionally, misspelled words will appear with a red underline - but only while the text is actively being edited.
Once the text editor is closed, this line will not appear.
Once you have completed working with text, click the Close Text editor button.
Editing & Formatting Text

If you wish to add to text, fix a spelling error or wish to re-enter the text editor for any reason, simply double-click
the piece of text to edit it.
MTEXTs insertion point is controlled by the justification. By default this is set to Top Left, but it is common to need
to change this in order to make text align the way you wish.
It is possible to highlight individual words and change the formatting as needed. This works very similar to a word
processor.
Importing Text
You can import two main types of files directly into AutoCAD:
RTF (rich text format)
TXT (plain text)
When it comes to working with existing Microsoft word documents, the easiest thing to do is use Copy and Paste.
Most formatting from Word, such s bold, underline and italic, will translate to AutoCAD. The only formatting that
will not translate to AutoCAD is strikethrough text.
Converting TEXT to MTEXT

When a CAD file is translated from Microstation to AutoCAD, the text does not translate as multiline text. The text
comes over as single-line text (or what some older AutoCAD people might call DTEXT). This type of text is more
difficult to format, as it does not use the contextual tab to control it.
You will want to convert plain text to mtext, using a tool found on the express tools tab.
Exercise: Working with Text
1. Open the file Text1.dwg.

This file should open in paperspace on a layout called 11x17. Verify that the
current layer is P_RW_TEXT.
2. From the Annotate tab, Text panel, set the current text style to 100.
3. Click Multiline Text button.
4. Use the rectangle on the left side of the drawing to guide you as you create the two corners of the text box.
5. Type in the text, NOTES: and press enter. Notice that enter in this case does not exit the text editor.
6 From the Text Editor contextual tab, click the Tools flyout and click Import Text.
7. Browse to the location of your training files and locate EASEMENT TEXT.TXT. Double click this file to
import it into AutoCAD.
8. Still in the text editor, highlight the text TEMPORARY LIMITED EASEMENT (TLE) and click the B for bold in
the Text Editor.
9. Repeat this step to make the text PERMANENT LIMITED EASEMENT (PLE) bold.
10. Close the text editor.
11. Switch to the Express Tools tab.
12. From the Text panel, click Convert to MTEXT.
13. Select all the lines of text under (Airport Road to Southwest Road) near the top of the sheet, starting with
the line that says, To properly establish, lay out
14. The text should now be converted to MTEXT and can be formatted as you see fit.
Save the drawing. End of Exercise.
20:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-002.mp4
030.090.002 Annotation Scale
An annotative object automatically resizes based on the intended plot scale. The annotation scale only affects
objects that have the annotative attribute turned on.
The following base AutoCAD object types can be annotative:
Text
Dimensions
Multileaders
Hatch patterns
Blocks
Linetypes
In the case of text, dimensions and multileaders, the annotative behavior is determined as part of the objects style.
In the case of a hatch pattern, the annotative behavior can be turned on as you place the hatch. For blocks
annotative behavior is turned on in the block definition. For all of the above object types, you can also set the
behavior after the fact in the Properties palette.
Linetypes are a little different. Whether or not a line changes with annotation scale depends on an overall drawing
setting called MSLTSCALE. This drawing variable will affect all lines/polylines/circles etc. in the drawing. Key-in
MSLTSCALE at the command line. The default of 0 means that lines will not change per annotation scale. Setting
this to 1 will force lines to update with annotation scale.
You can tell an object has annotative behavior tied to it if you move your cursor over it and see the annotative
object symbol pop up next to your cursor.
Annotative Text
In this module, we will focus on annotative text. Whenever annotative text displays a height, you will see two
values. The Paper text height is the plotted size. The Model text height is the paper text height multiplied by the
annotative scale.
Each object will have a list of scales associated with it. For instance, select a piece of annotative text and right-
click. You will see Annotative Object Scale...Add Delete Scales.
You will then see a listing of the scales at which the object is intended to plot. For scales in the list, the text will
resize accordingly. For all other scales, the text can be hidden.
Why Learn About Annotative Objects?

For base AutoCAD objects such as blocks and text, you have a choice as to whether or not that object will change
with the annotation scale.
When you get into Civil 3D, text placed automatically, such as station labels or spot elevations, are always
annotative. (You do not have choice.)
The annotative scale does not affect the size that you draft design objects. For instance, a 10 fence is still a 10
fence.
This automatic resizing serves several purposes:
You never have to type in the same bit of text more than once.
You do not need to separate text of different heights by layer
You dont need to specify a text height in your text style thus eliminating the need for styles that use the
same font but have different text heights.
Modelspace: Annotation Scale
You will see the current annotation scale and some related options in the lower right corner of your screen. To
change annotation scale, click the black arrow next to the current scale and pick from the list.
The buttons to the right of the current scale are very helpful. For new users, you will want to have these both
turned on. You can tell they are on when the symbols next to each icon is yellow rather than blue.
Annotation Visibility: Show annotative objects for all scales. This tells AutoCAD, Show me annotative stuff
regardless of annotation scale."
Automatically add scales to annotative objects when annotation scale changes.

We can also relocate text for a current scale by simply clicking on the grip and dragging the text to a new location.
This will prevent our text from overlapping objects when it changes size.
Paperspace: Viewport Scale

When we get to paperspace and set specific scales for viewports, the whole thing starts to come together. For
instance, if I am plotting a subdivision plan at 1=50 I would want to see street names and lot numbers. However,
if I am plotting a project overview at 1=200 all that detailed text would just get messy. I could use annotation
scales to tell CAD to hide the owner addresses at 1=200 by removing the scale from the list. Omitting the detail
text for this scale makes for a much neater drawing.
Exercise: Introduction to Annotation Scaling

1. Open the file Anno-Text.dwg.
When you open this drawing you will be on a layout tab called Viewport Examples 34x22.
2. Verify that your annotation settings match the following image when you are on the layout tab:
Annotation Visibility should be Off.
Automatically Add scales should be off
Each rectangle represents a Viewport. Viewports are a window into the model and are used to show
design objects on your paper. Viewports are critical in setting the scale for your project.
You may notice that the road names appear in the 1IN=50FT viewport but not in the other viewports. The
layer state is the same in all viewports. It is the annotative text behavior which is causing the difference in
the display. Synchronize
If the text appeared in the 1IN=400FT viewport, it would be too tiny to read.
3. Double-click inside the viewport labeled 1IN=50FT.
4. Click the text U.S.H. 14. Right-click and click Select Similar.
5. With the road names selected, right-click again and select Annotative Object Scale > Add/Delete Scales.
6. Set the radio button at the bottom to List Scales common to all selected objects only.
7. Click Add
8. Add 1IN=200FT and 1=10 to the list and click OK.

You should now see the text in multiple viewports.
9. Switch to the model tab.

The annotation scale in the model tab is 1IN=50FT.
10. Make sure the Annotation settings are set as shown here.
Annotation Visibility should be On.
Automatically Add scales should be On
11. Click the annotation scale in the lower-right of the screen. Change the annotation scale to 1=400.
12. The street names appear MUCH larger relative to the rest of the objects.
13. Experiment with the text by setting the annotation scale to various settings.
14. Check back on the layout tab.

Because the Automatically Add scales setting was turned on, 1=400 was automatically added to the
scale list.
Note that the text in each viewport is the same height. Whenever you see text height for an annotative
object, it is always referring to the height plotted.
Save and close the drawing. End of Exercise.
16:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-003.mp4
030.090.003 Text3.dwg
Text Styles
You have already been using text styles in this class, but you will go more in depth.
When making a new text style, making it annotative is very easy.

Just turn on the Annotative check box under size.
Leave the paper text height zero if you wish to use this style in a dimension. By default, the text height is
0.2 plotted.
You can change this default using the TEXTSIZE system variable.
If you do set a height in the style, the TEXTSIZE variable is ignored.
Exercise: Create Text Styles

You will create several text styles and review placing text in the drawing
.
1. Open the drawing Text3.dwg On the annotate tab, text panel, select the small arrow to open the text style
dialog.
Click New.
Name the new style ROAD NAMES
Click OK.
2. Change the font to Times New Roman

Place a checkmark next to Annotative
Set the width factor to 1.2
Click Apply
3. Close the Text Style dialog.
4. Verify that ROAD NAMES is the current text style.
5. Double-click the viewport to activate modelspace.

Type in TEXTSIZE at the command line.
Change the active text height to 0.25.
Press enter when complete.
6. Start the Multiline Text command and place the textbox anywhere in the modelspace of the viewport.
7. Key-in TEST ROAD NAME TEXT
8. Click outside the text box to complete.
9. Open the text style dialog again.
10. Click New.

Name the new style GENERAL NOTES
Click OK.
The new text style appears with the same attributes as the ROAD NAMES style. That is because
AutoCAD uses the active style as a starting point.
11. Change the font to Arial.

Uncheck the annotative option.
Change the Width factor to 0.9.
Click Apply.

12. Click close when complete.

Double-click outside the viewport to get back into paperspace mode.
13. Start the multiline text tool and draw your text box near the other bit of text.
14. Key-in GENERAL NOTES EXAMPLE TEXT

Double-click inside the viewport to activate modelspace.
Unlock the viewport.
Change the viewport scale to 1=100
15. Use the techniques you learned in previously to reposition the text on the screen.
16. Re-lock the viewport.
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-004.mp4
030.090.004 Multileaders1.dwg
Multileaders
Multileaders are a leader with either text or a block as its end. You can choose any type of arrowhead for a leader.
You will find this command on the annotate tab.
Here you see multiple types of leaders including ones with multiple leader lines.
Multileaders can be comprised of straight lines or splines.
The text component can be text on its own or a block.
Leaders are intelligent and will prevent the leaders from crossing attached text.
Exercise: Placing Multileaders

1. In this exercise you will work in modelspace from the layout tab to place multileaders.
2.
3. Open the drawing MULTILEADERS1.dwg
4.
5. On the Annotate tab > Leaders Panel, set the current style to HEX.
4. Change the current layer to P_MISC_TXT.
5. Start the leader tool by clicking Multileader.
6. Use the node object snap to place the arrowhead on the sign to the right of the Dickason intersection. The
blue marker is there as a guide. The first click sets the arrowhead location.
7. Click a second time to place the landing location.
8. You are prompted to Enter a Tag Number.
9. Type in 1 and press enter. The multi leader will now be complete.
10. Repeat the previous steps to add a multileader at the sign just north of the intersection.
Use the HEX multileader style
Number the sign 2.
11. Change the active multileader style to TEXT ONLY.
12. Click to place the arrowhead at one of the nodes on the end of the magenta line as shown below.
13. Click to place the landing to the upper right.
14. Type in SAWCUT in the text box.
15. Click Close Text Editor to complete the leader.
16. Click the Add Leader button from the Leaders Panel.

17. Click the newly created SAWCUT multileader to indicate which multileader you are adding on to.
18. Click the opposite side of the street to place the arrowhead of the second leader.
20. Click the small arrow icon on the Leaders panel to enter the Multileader Style Manager.
21. Click New
22. Name the new style Circle and click Continue

On the Leader format tab, set the arrowhead symbol to Integral.
On the Content tab, change the Multileader type to Block.
Change the source block to Circle.
Click OK.
23. Click close to close the multileader style manger.
24. Set the current multileader style to Circle if it is not already.
25. Click Multileader.
26. Click to place the end of the leader at the node near the inlet.
Click a second time to set the landing location.
Type in 55 when prompted for the TAGNUMBER.
27. Add a second circle multileader to the symbol in the middle of the road, south of the intersection. Number
this one 56.
14:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-005.mp4
030.090.005 Dimension1.dwg, Dimension2.dwg
Dimensions
In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.

You can create dimensions for a variety of object types in many orientations. The basic types of dimensioning are
Linear
Radial (radius, diameter and jogged)
Angular
Ordinate
Arc Length
Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline, or continued (chained). Dimensions have
several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines.
Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include
prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension
line is an arc.
Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of the dimension line. You can
specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks.
Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the feature to the dimension line.
A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc.
Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc.
Exercise: Placing Dimensions
1. Open DIMENSIONS1.dwg
2.
3. Set the current layer to P_DRN_TEXT
4.
5. Set the current dimension style to Plan_Bearing
6.
7. Set the annotation scale to 1IN:10FT
5. On the Annotate tab, click the linear Dimension tool.
6. Create a dimension along the top of the manhole.

The first two clicks establish the distance, the third click will place the text and complete the dimension. It
does not matter which end of the line you click first. If your screen looks different from the image below,
check your settings for layer, dimension style and annotation scale.
7. Add another linear dimension along the left side of the manhole. Be sure to place the dimension line far
enough away so that it does not overlap the protrusion.
8. Start the Aligned dimension tool. Add a dimension along the angled edge of the manhole.
9. Start the radius dimension tool.
10. Click the large circle near the middle of the manhole. At the end of these steps, your drawing should look
like the following image.
Dimension Styles
A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as
arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances.
You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to
industry or project standards.
When you create a dimension, it uses the settings of the current dimension style
If you change a setting in a dimension style, all dimensions in a drawing that use the style update
automatically
You can create dimension substyles that, for specified types of dimensions, deviate from the current
dimension style
If necessary, you can override a dimension style temporarily
Exercise: Dimension Style Basics
You will create and modify a dimension style.

1. Open the file DIMENSIONS2.dwg. This drawing contains an example do-dad whose sole purpose is to give
you a feel for adding and modifying dimensions. You will create a dimension style and use it to dimension this
object.
2. Open the dimension styles dialog by clicking the arrow icon at the bottom of the dimensions panel.
3. Click New.
4. Name the new style EXAMPLE DIMS
5. Place a checkmark next to Annotative
6. Click Continue
7. Switch to the Symbols and Arrows tab.
8. Change the arrowhead type to Closed Blank.
9. Change the Arrowhead size to 0.2.
10. Switch to the Text tab.
11. Change the text style to 200.
12. Switch to the Primary units tab.

13. Change the display precision to 0.0
14. Click OK.
15. If you receive a message indicating that setting a new style current will discard overrides, click OK.
16. Close the dimension style manager.
17. Verify that the current style has changed to EXAMPLE DIMS.
18. Set the current layer to P_MISC_TXT
19. Add a linear dimension to the top step of the do-dad.
20. Change the annotation scale to 1IN:20FT
21. Click the Continue command from the Dimensions panel.
22. When prompted to select the continued dimension, click the linear dimension you created previously.
23. Click the second step, then the third step to add new dimensions.
25. Add an angular dimension along the bottom of the part.
26. Add an arc length dimension along the curved piece.
27. Enter the dimension style manager by clicking the small arrow.
28. With EXAMPLE DIMS selected, click Modify.
29. On the symbols and arrows tab, change all of the arrowhead types to Right angle.
30. Click OK to exit the style.
31. Click close to exit the dimension style manager.
32. All of the dimensions in the project will have updated to reflect the style change.
030.100 Blocks Section updated: 10/1/2012

15:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-100-001.mp4
030.100.001 Block Basics
A block is a group of AutoCAD objects that have been tied together. A block can be used like a rubber stamp
you can have the same items over and over in the same drawing without having to recreate them.
Every block has a main base point. The base point appears as a grip when you select the block.
First you will learn to utilize existing blocks.
Methods for Inserting blocks

Here are the most common ways to work with existing blocks:
Insert a block from a tool palette
Insert a block that already exists in the drawing
Insert a block that comes from an external DWG.
Inserting from a Toolpalette
To open up the toolpalette, click the icon

When you are using civil 3D, the first set of tools you will see on the tool palette are special roadway creation tools.
The tool palette initially will not display blocks. To access some of the blocks available to you, right-click on the
edge of the tool palette.
Select Civil Multiview Blocks.
Once you have switched palette groups, the set of tabs along the side of the palette will change.
The tabs represent different groupings of tools. This tool palette contains blocks that are useful to Civil 3D users.
Click on the Landscape tab.
Click the Detail tree 01.
To place a block in the drawing, click it from the palette and then place it in the drawing. The base point of the
block will automatically attach to your cursor. The first click places the base point of the block wherever you click
in the graphic. The second click establishes the rotation of the block. After you are done setting the rotation, you
are back at a Command prompt.
You may encounter blocks with the lightning bolt symbol shown in the tool palette. These are a special type of
block called dynamic blocks.
Insert Command
Inserting a Block Using the Insert Command
If you dont have blocks set up on a tool palette, you can use the more traditional Insert Block command.
Existing Block
If a block has already been inserted into the drawing or is defined in the template, you can easily insert it using the
insert block command.
From the Insert tab, go to the block panel and select Insert.
Click the dropdown to see the blocks available to you.
Select the block you wish to work with.
Set your Insertion point, scale and rotation options.
Click OK.
Browsing for Blocks
A block is just a special case of a DWG file. In fact, any DWG file can be used as a block.
When you get to the insert dialog box, click the Browse button and navigate to the folder where the DWG is saved.
Set the insertion, scale and rotation options.

Click OK.
Once the block has been pulled in from an outside file, it is no longer necessary to browse out for it again. It will
now show up in the list of blocks available in the drawing.
Block Insertion Settings

So, you noticed those checkboxes on the insert block settings. The insertion point refers to where the block base
point is going to end up when you place it in your drawing. The scale refers to how large the block will come in; as
compared to the size the block was defined. You always want Uniform Scale checked on. Rotation specifies the
angle at which the block will come in. This rotation angle is similar to the rotation angle used in the Rotate
command.
The block unit is AutoCAD reporting to you if it is doing any unit conversion. For instance, if the block you have
browsed for has been created in inches, AutoCAD will show the conversion that is automatically happening.
Explode should remain unchecked. You can always explode the block after it has already been inserted.
Exercise: Inserting Blocks

1. Open the file Blocks1.dwg
2. Set your current layer is E_LAND_VEGETATION
3. If it is not already open, open the tool palette from the Home tab > Palettes panel (or press CTRL+3).

4. Right-click on the edge of the toolpalette and select Civil Multiview blocks.
5. Switch to the landscape tab.
6. Locate Detail Tree 01 from the palette. Click the detail tree and then click again to place it in the drawing
near the driveway entrance (do not drag and drop).
7. Click to confirm any rotation angle of your choosing.

In this case, the block does not take on the layer color because of the way it was created. We will go into
detail about the correct procedure for creating blocks in the next exercise.
8. Switch to the insert tab of the ribbon.
9. From the Block panel, click Insert.
10. From the Block Name pull-down, select DTRE. This block is already part of the drawing.
For Insertion point, place a checkmark next to Specify on screen.
Clear the check marks for both scale and rotation.
11. Click OK and place the block near the driveway entrance. In this case the tree appears green because it
was defined correctly when it was created.
12. Change the current layer to E_LTG. This is the layer for existing lighting.
13. Start the insert command again and set the block name to LPOL. This block should already be part of the
block listing.
14. Place the block near the trees you placed earlier. Use the same settings for Insertion point, scale and
rotation as you did for the tree.
15. Set the current layer to 0.
16. Start the insert command again. This time click Browse. Select the block called Mystery Structure.dwg.
17. Clear the checkbox for Insertion point. We want the building to come in at its original coordinates.
18. Click OK.
17:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-100-002.mp4
030.100.002 Blocks2.dwg
Creating Blocks
You learned in the chapter on layers, that 0 is not used for general drafting. The 0 layer acts as a placeholder for
the inner geometry of blocks. In other words, blocks should be created on layer 0.
When the completed blocks are ready to use, they will be inserted with the correct layer current.
When you draw objects you wish to convert to a block, you will find the Create block icon on the Insert tab of the
ribbon, on the Block panel. When you create a block in this manner you are creating a local block.
Give your block a name and select the base point using the pick point icon.
Use Select objects to make sure you have the correct items selected. Generally people want to use the
Convert to Block option.
Verify the units, whether or not the item is to be annotative and click OK.
If you wish to export your block to an external drawing (i.e. turn it into a global block) you can do so by typing W at
the command line. The write block command will allow you to pick an existing block from the drawing (as shown
here) or you can export items from your drawing as a block while maintaining them as non-blocks locally. In many
cases, you will be using this command to push an existing block to its own DWG file as shown here.
The most common mistake when writing blocks is forgetting to set the destination path. The default path is the
My Documents folder. Dont lose your blocks!
Editing Blocks

For many blocks, simply double-clicking on the block you wish to edit is the most efficient way to get into the Block
Editor. After you double-click on a block, the Edit Block Definition appears and you can verify which block you want
to edit.
However, in some cases you will encounter blocks that contain attributes, such as the WisDOT titleblocks. When
you double click a block that contains attributes, the block editor does not appear. Instead you are taken to a spot
where you can edit attributes. In cases where double-clicking does not take you to the block editor, you can use
the block editor button from the ribbon.
Once inside the block editor, you will notice that your workspace has automatically changed. The background will
be a gray color, helping you to visually identify that you are no longer in a regular drawing area. You will also see
a green context tab with block-specific tools in it. Dont worry, you can still change tabs and use more familiar
draw and modify commands from the home tab.
When you are done working in the block editor, you will want to save the block.
Notice that you can also save the block with a different name if you wish. Using save as will not change the original
block, but it will create an additional block that contains the changes you made.
Exercise: Create a Block

In this exercise you will create a block from scratch using the tools you have learned. You will also modify an
existing block.
You may want to review the following topics, as they will be used in this exercise:
Drawing Circles & lines
Offset
Object snaps
1. Open the file Blocks2.dwg or continue working in the drawing from the previous exercise. This is the same
drawing you left off with from the previous exercise.
2. Set the current layer to 0.
3. Using skills you used in the previous chapters, draw the following object (shown here with dimensions for
illustration sake). You may draw this item anywhere in the drawing area.
4. Click Create Block
5. The Block Definition dialog appears.
6. For the name, type in SECTION CORNER
7. For the base point, click Pick Point.
8. Use object snaps and tracking to locate and click the center of the symbol. As soon as you click, you are
instantly taken back to the block definition dialog.
9. Click Select Objects
10. Select all the lines that comprise the section corner symbol.
11. Set the Radio button to Delete.
12. Set all other options as shown here and click OK.
The block is created, but the original objects have been deleted from the drawing.
13. Set the current layer to P_RW_SectionCorner

Click insert
Set the name of the block to be placed as SECTION CORNER
Verify that Specify on-screen option is checked and click ok.
14. Place the section corner in the western corner of the parking lot.
15. Click Insert.

Browse for the block named CAUTION

Verify that Specify on-screen is checked for the insertion point.

Click OK
16. Place the block anywhere in the drawing and select it. Notice that the insertion point is not in a logical
position. This is one of the items we will correct in the next steps.
17. Click Block Editor
18. Click OK to verify that you wish to edit the CAUTION block. You are taken to the block editor.
19. On the status bar, turn off Dynamic input.

Switch to the Home tab and select move.
When prompted to select objects, select all the objects that form the caution symbol.
Press enter to continue.
When prompted for the base-point, select the center of the circle inside the word caution.
20. When prompted for the second point, key-in 0,0.
21. Press enter.

Because we had dynamic input off for that maneuver, the move command should have relocated the
symbol to 0,0 in the block editor. 0,0 in the block editor is where the insertion point resides.
22. You can tell if you were successful if the UCS icon is in the center of the symbol.
23. Delete the circle on the T of the word Caution.

Switch back to the green block editor tab.
Click Save Block.
24. Click Close Block editor.
25. Select the block. Back in the main drawing area, you will see that the grip aligns with the base point in a
logical location.
030.110 Plotting Basics Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-001.mp4
030.110.001 Plotting1.dwg
Printing Basics
At the bottom-left of your screen you should see several tabs. The Model tab is where all of your drafting and the
majority of your labeling should go. The layout tabs represent pieces of paper and act as a dynamic print preview.
If you do not see your layout tabs:

It is recommended that you have your layout and model tabs displayed. If you dont see them, do the following:
Right-click the Model button and select Display Layout and Model Tabs
All formal printing will happen from the layout tabs. The only time you would print from the Model tab is if you are
just creating a check and are not concerned about scale or a titleblock.

Printing Terminology
Annotation scale - the scale that drives the size of annotative text/blocks/etc on the model tab. This does not
affect the size of the final plot, nor does it carry over to the viewports.
Layout - acts as a working print preview-like view. This shows how your design, title block and the paper relate
to each other. In some cases you will see this referred to as a sheet.
Modelspace - the location where your main design is drafted. When you are on the main model tab, you are
always in modelspace. You can be in modelspace from a layout tab if you have a viewport active. Modelspace
measurements will always be in feet.
Paperspace - the drafting mode when you are directly working on the paper. You can tell you are in
paperspace when you see triangular USC icon. Paperspace always shows units in inches (not feet).
Printing - sending a single layout to a printer or to a file such as PDF.
Plotting - same as printing. These terms are used interchangeably throughout the software and this document.
Publishing - sending multiple layouts to a printer (or PDF file) at once. Publishing can be done through the
Sheetset Manager or through the publish command.
Sheetset manager - a saved list of layouts that go together. Primarily this is for printing purposes, but it is also
used to fill out pre-defined fields in the titleblock.
Viewport - a window into your design as seen from one of the layout tabs. Viewports are used to set the
desired plot scale of the project.
Viewport scale - the plotted scale assigned to the viewport.

Paperspace and Modelspace

Working with Paperspace and Modelspace can be a funky concept for people who have never used AutoCAD
before. The tabs on the bottom of the drawing area will switch you between main Modelspace and the layout tabs.
The Model Tab (the Real Modelspace)

The model tab is where you will do the vast majority of drafting, design and annotation. You may not delete,
rename or move the layout tab from its position. You will work in real-life scale; a 24 wide road will be 24 wide.
The annotation scale you see while you are working in Modelspace affects the size of text placed by AutoCAD or
annotative text placed by AutoCAD. While you are in the model tab, this scale is determined by drafters
preference. Because you will do all your plotting out of paperspace, the scale doesnt affect anything at all other
than your ability to see it!
Layout Paperspace
The layout tabs are there for you as you get ready to print your project. Switch to the layout tab you wish to work
with by clicking on the name of the tab at the bottom of your drawing screen. Once you have switched to the
layout, you will see the following: The big white square represents the size and orientation of the piece of paper
you would like to print. We will discuss setting the paper size in the next unit.
The dashed line represents the printable bounds, or the limit as far as how close to the edge of the paper you
printer can print. The distance between this dashed line and the edge of paper is usually determined by the printer
you are sending your design to. The viewport is a window into your design.
The triangular Paperspace UCS icon is a sign to us that we are in paperspace. Any drawing we do when the
triangular icon is showing will only be on our current layout. We are not affecting Modelspace as long as you see
this symbol or the MODEL button at the bottom on the screen. Any zooming in and out just zooms the paper itself,
and does not affect the final print of the drawing. Paperspace is where you will draw your title block, add north
arrows and add text related to the date, project location etc.
Layout- Modelspace
If you double-click inside the viewport you are activating a viewport.
Youll notice that the UCS icon changes and the viewport outline gets heavier. You are now in Modelspace. We
can now work inside the viewport. Any drawing we do at this point affects the main model. If we zoom and pan in
this state, you are changing the scale and location of the Modelspace view. It is a GREAT idea to lock the viewport
once you have gotten your view in the right place and at the desired scale. With the viewport active, set the scale
by using the scale list in the status bar.
When the viewport is locked, you can still draw in Modelspace and manipulate layers, you just cant pan or
zoom.To get back to paperspace, double-click outside the viewport or click the button in your status bar.
11:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-002.mp4
Exercise: Getting the Feel for Paperspace & Modelspace

In this exercise, you will get comfortable working with layout tabs, paperspace and modelspace.
1. Open the drawing Plotting1.dwg.

2.
3. Switch to layout view Layout 1 34x22.
4.
5. Right-click on Layout 1 Layout 1 34x22 and select New Layout.
4. Switch to the new layout.

Double click the tab for the layout and rename it to My New Layout. The text will not be bold when you
have completed the rename.
Select the edge of the viewport in the center of the page and Delete it. (You will learn about setting the
Paper size in an upcoming exercise.)
5. Switch back to Layout 1 34x22.

Click the gray rectangle on its edge. This is the viewport
Click the lock icon in the lower right corner of the screen so that it turns yellow. The viewport is now
unlocked.
Change the viewport scale to 1IN:100FT.
Click the lock icon again. You have just changed the viewport scale.
At the command line, type in REA to regenerate the view and update the special text that labels the
viewport scale.
6. Hold down the control key on your keyboard and drag the Layout 1 34x22 tab to the right. You will see a
layout symbol with a plus sign appear.
7. Release the cursor and the control key to form the copy.
8. Make the new layout current by clicking the tab.

Double click it to edit the name.
Rename the tab to Broadhead Intersection.
9. Drag the tab so that it is to the right of My New Layout.

Keep an eye on the black arrow to help you find the location of the tab.
10. Right-click and Delete the Layout2 34x22 tab. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
11. Switch to the Example tab.
12. Verify that the current layer is PLT_Sheet_Border
13. On the Insert tab...Block panel of the ribbon, click Insert. The block SHT42-C3D12 is already defined in the
listing of available blocks.
Hint: Start typing the name of the block to jump in the listing.
Uncheck all options for Specify on screen
Click OK.
The block should drop in but is too small.
14. Start the Scale command that you used in the Modify chapter.
Use the lower-left most corner of the titleblock as the basepoint.
Use a scale factor of 2.
The block should now line up perfectly with the sheet.
15. Click Insert again. This time select the Graphic Scale that is in the listing.
Place a checkmark next to Specify on screen for the insertion point.
Set all other options as shown below.
16. Repeat the block insertion one last time and insert the block called North3.
Save the Drawing, End of exercise.
13:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-003.mp4
Exercise: Creating and Scaling Viewports

In this exercise, you will create viewports and set them to the desired plot scale.
You will use the dynamic block that was placed in the previous exercise to show the correct scale on the bar scale.
1. Open the drawing Plotting2.dwg or continue working in the previous drawing.

2.
3. Set the current layer to PLT_Viewport
4.
5. Verify that you are on the Example layout tab.
6.
7. On the Layout Tools Contextual Tab, Viewports panel, click Rectangular.
5. Use the title block with object snaps to set the first corner of the title block. Click this first corner.
6. Click the second corner using object snaps.
7. The modelspace image will appear in the viewport.
8. Double click your cursor inside the viewport.

You have switched to modelspace through the viewport.

9. Set the viewport scale to 1IN=200FT
10. Use the pan command to center the view.

If you accidentally roll your mouse wheel, it will cause the viewport scale to slip. If this happens, simply re-
select 1IN=200FT from the annotation scale list.
11. Next to the viewport scale listing, verify that the scale is still 1IN=200FT and click the lock icon.
The lock icon turns blue and you are no longer able to pan or zoom the viewport.
12. Switch back to paperspace by double-clicking outside of the thick viewport border or by clicking the Model
button at the bottom right of the screen.
13. Select the bar scale at the bottom of the screen.
14. Click the visibility grip and pick 1=200 from the listing.
15. Right-click on the Example Tab and select Move or Copy.
16. In the Move or Copy dialog box, highlight (move to end)
17. Place a checkmark next to Create a Copy and click OK.
18. Switch to the Example (2) tab and unlock the viewport.
19. Set the Viewport a scale to 1IN:50FT. Lock the viewport again.
20. Use the Layer Freeze command to freeze the layers that contain the vegetation.
These objects are only frozen in this viewport.
End of exercise. Save and close the drawing.
13:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-004.mp4
Page Setup
You will frequently use the same size piece of paper - usually 11x17. You will also frequently need the same
settings for multiple layouts. In the next few steps, you will create a Named Page Setup and apply it to multiple
layouts.
Page Setup Manager

Right-click on the tab you are working with.
Create New Page Setup

Select Page Setup Manager
In the Page Setup Manager, click NEW
In the New Page Setup dialog box you are creating the name for your printing settings.
I recommend having the name reflect:

The name of the printer
The paper size
What type of color the print out will be
Click OK.
Setting the Printer

First, set your printer to the correct device. All printers that you are attached to will show up in this list, as well
as some options for printing to a file (such as PDF).
In most cases, you should print to PDF first. This eliminates any problems sending the output directly to the
printer.
Paper Size
Next, set your paper size. The list of sizes comes from the printer. In the case of a PDF, there is no physical
limit of roll width. Any size can be used from PDF. Whenever possible, use the WisDOT specific paper sizes.
These are set up to have the correct margin location and sizes to fit the WisDOT title blocks correctly.
Plot Area, Scale & Offset

The what to plot option should always read Layout.
Leave the plot offset at X: 0.000 inch, Y: 0.000 inch.
Plot scale should be 1=1. Remember we set the viewport to an appropriate scale, so the scaling is taken
care of already.
The only time this should be 1 inch = 2 units is when you are forcing a D-size sheet (34x22) to plot as a B-size
sheet (17x11).
Plot Style Table

The Plot Style table needs to be set to reflect how you want to handle colors from the drawing.
Want full-color, what-you-see-is-what-you-get in your print? Use wisdot-color.stb
Want some colors to be dark gray, some black, some lighter gray? Use wisdot-gshade.stb
Objects on layers starting with E for existing will plot gray.
Objects on all other layers, such as P for proposed or PLT for plot will plot black.
Want all black lines? Use wisdot-black.stb
Leave the rest of the settings as-is and click OK.
Apply Page Setup to a Layout

Now click Set Current.
In the background you will see the paper size change to the size you set in the last step.
You will also see that the name of your page setup appears in parenthesis next to the name of your active
Layout.
Close the Page Setup Manager.
Re-using the Page Setup

The beautiful thing about this is that we can recycle the Page Setup you created. Odds are good that another
layout will go to the same plotter, have the page size and same color settings.
Switch to the layout you wish to change.

Right-click on the layout tab and pick Page Setup Manager.
Highlight the page setup.
Click Set Current.
You just saved yourself the trouble of redoing those settings for each layout.

Exercise: Page Setup

In this first activity you will create several page setups and apply them to a layout tab. Named page setups help
organize drawings and can be placed in a template file so they dont have to be created over and over.
1. Open the file Plotting3.dwg.
You must switch to this file as several new layouts have been created for you..
2. Right-click on any of the layout tabs and select New Layout.
3. Switch to the new layout tab.

The layout tab is completely empty, except for the viewport.
You should be able to identify the paper and the dashed line that represents the outer plotting extents.
4. Right-click on the layout tab and select Page Setup manager.
5. Inside the Page Setup manager, click New.
6. You are prompted to name your new page setup.
7. Name the page setup 11x17 PDF WisDOT Color.

This page setup name reflects the key components of the named page setup you are about to create.
8. Inside the main page setup area, set the printer to WisDOT PDF.pc3.
9. Set the paper size to WisDOT (17x11 Inches) L (this will be at the top of the paper size listing.)
10. Set the plot style table to wisdot-color.stb

This plot style table is going to generate a color PDF. If we were plotting to a color printer, you would see
the colors that you have specified on screen as the colors that will be printed on the finished paper.
11. Your Page Setup should resemble the image shown here.
Place a checkmark next to Display Plot Styles
What to plot should be set to Layout
Plot offsets for both X and Y should be 0.
The scale will be 1:1
Leave all other settings as default.
Click OK when complete.
12. Back in the Page Setup manager, click set current.
13. Remain in the Page Setup manager.

Notice that the new page setup is listed next to the layout name.
14. You should notice that the paper size has changed and that the plot extents are slightly different.
15. Click New again and make a new page setup named : 22x34 PDF WisDOT Gray with the following
settings:
Plotter WisDOT PDF.pc3
Paper size WisDOT (34x22 Inches) L
Plot style table WisDOT-gshade.stb
Place a checkmark next to Display Plot Styles
Leave all other settings as default
16. Click OK when complete.
17. Click set current. You should notice more changes in the background
18. Highlight 11x17 PDF WisDOT Color (the page setup you created previously).
19. Click Set Current.

You should notice a difference in the size of the paper.
Experiment by exiting the page setup manager, changing tabs and setting a different plot style current.

11:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-005.mp4
Printing and Publishing
We are going to keep this printing thing as simple as possible. In the future, you may want to get acquainted with
the Publish option, which allows you to print multiple pages in one shot. In this document, Im going easy on you.
It is near to the end of the document and you are probably tired of reading all this stuff anyway.
Click the Application Menu and click Print.

(No need to dive into the other options on the right.)
You will see the print settings you created previously. Always use the Preview button before you print.
When you click Preview, you will see EXACTLY what will come out of the printer. If there is a problem here, you
can correct it before you commit it to paper. If you like what you see, click print. If you need to go back and adjust
something, click close print preview.
Exercise:Printing & Publishing

In this exercise you will use print preview to view the design before you print. You will use the Plot to PDF option.
1. Open the drawing Plotting4.dwg. Even if you completed the previous exercises, there are a few things added
to this drawing.
2.
3. Switch to the Scott Street tab.
4.
5. Right-click and select plot.
6.
7. Notice that all the plot settings are completed ahead of time because of the named plot setup we created in
the previous exercise.
8.
9. Click Preview.
10.
11. Click close on the preview using the circle - X icon.
You are back at the plot dialog box.
7. Click OK inside the plot dialog.
8. Save the output file to the class file folder.
9. When plot and publish job complete bubble appears, browse to the PDF file and double click it to open.
(Depending on the version of your Adobe reader, it may pop up automatically)
10. Examine the file and experiment with turning layers on and off.
11. Close Adobe reader when complete.
12. Switch to the Site overview tab.
13. Use your shift key to select all the layouts from Site Overview to HWY KP.
14. Right-click and select Publish Selected Layouts.
15. In the Publish dialog box click Publish Options.
16. Verify that the default location where the PDF will be stored is your Documents folder. (You may change
this path to be whatever you wish by clicking the ellipsis icon.)
17. Verify that the Type is Multi-sheet file and Layer information is included.
18. Click OK.
19. Click OK in the publish dialog.
20. Click close when AutoCAD reminds you that your publish job is processing in the background.
21. Watch the animated plot icon to verify that the job is processing.

22. When the plot and publish job is complete, dismiss the bubble by clicking the X.
23. Browse to location of the PDF to examine the result.
24. Switch through the multiple pages to examine each page.
25. Close the PDF when youve had enough.
030.120 XREFS Section updated: 10/1/2012

16:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-120-001.mp4
030.120.001 XREF.dwg
Intro to External References

External references are a way of viewing another drawing as a backdrop for your current drawing. You
can measure, snap to and work with layers of the items in the referenced drawing.
External Reference (XREF) Terminology
Attachment The building (file) is part of the file. It will follow the drawing where ever it goes.
Attach links referenced drawing to the current drawing; any changes to the referenced drawing are
displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
Overlay The building (file) is only for show. It will not follow the drawing. By overlaying an xref,
you can see how your drawing relates to the drawings of other groups without changing your drawing
by attaching an xref.
Full Path Committed relationship between drawing file and xreference. Its a long path and must
be maintained. The drawing file looks first at the network server for the xref.
Relative Path Casual relationship between drawing file and xreference. Its a short path and
easier to maintain. The drawing file looks first in the same folder for the xref.
Unload Makes xref invisible but holds its place.

Reload Makes xref visible or is used to update the xreference.
Detach Completely removes link between the drawing file and xref.
Why Use XREFs

There are several reasons why you would want to use XREFs:
Prevents your current drawing from getting too big.
Allows other people to work in the XREFd drawing while you are working in the current drawing.
Gives you access to some Civil 3D data in the XREFd drawing.
Working with XREFs

Before you attach a drawing as an XREF, save your current drawing.
To attach another drawing, go to the Insert tab > Reference panel and click Attach.
Make sure your Files of Type is set to DWG. It is possible to attach other types of files, but were
sticking to the basics in this document.
Overlay vs Attachment
Use Overlay for General Drafting
In most cases, you should try to use the Overlay option.
Funny though it seems at first, this setting doesnt actually effect the drawing you are currently
working in. It does affect any downstream drawings that might have your current drawing XREFd
in.
In the case of an overlay, you only get one level of references. (Microstation users will know this as
a nest depth set to zero).
In other words, if X is referenced into Y as an overlay, and then Y is later referenced into Z, X does
not come along for the ride. When Im working in Z, Ill just see Y attached. Overlay is preferable
because it is less confusing and avoids the dreaded circular reference.
Use Attach When Preparing to Create P&P Sheets
If you are preparing a drawing as your base for pan and profile sheets, you will want to use the Attach
option. When you XREF drawings that contain attachments, those attachments come along for the ride.
The reason this is advantageous for P&P sheeets is that the automated Civil 3D tool to create P&P
sheets will automatically create new drawings and XREF in the design elements that you want. If you
used overlay in this situation, your plan objects would not carry over.
Set the Path type to Relative path.
Click OK.
If your current drawing and the XREF drawing are in the same coordinate system, keep the scale,
insertion point and rotation at the default values.
The XREF layers now appear in the Layer Properties manager and can be frozen & thawed individually
just like any other layer.
Exercise: XREFs
1. Open the drawing XREF.dwg

2. Go to the Insert tab > Reference Panel and click Attach.
3. At the bottom of the Select Reference File dialog, change the Files of Type to DWG.
4. Browse to the file CONTOURS.dwg and click Open.
5. In the Attach External Reference file dialog box, clear all checkmarks for Scale, Insertion Point
and Rotation.
6. Set the path type to Relative path.
7. Set the reference type to Overlay.
8. Click OK.
9. Save the drawing, but keep it open for some experimenting.
10. Start a new drawing based on the WisDOT12.dwt template.
11. Save the drawing as Test.dwg in the same folder as the rest of the files for this exercise.
12. Go to Insert > Reference > Attach again.
13. Attach XREF.dwg to the current drawing.
14. Use the same settings for Relative path and overlay.
15. Click OK.
16. Open the External Reference Manager by clicking the small arrow on the Reference panel (or by
entering XREF on the command line).
17. Click the button to switch to Tree View.
Notice that Contours did not show up in the graphic or the XREF manager. That is because it
was referenced to XREF as an overlay.
18. Switch back to XREF.dwg by using Quick View drawings.
1. Click the Quick View Drawings icon at the bottom of the screen.
2. Click the thumbnail for XREF that appears.
3. Click the X in the small toolbar if the thumbnails do not disappear automatically.
19. If you closed the XREF manager, open it again.
20. Highlight the Contours drawing.
21. At the bottom of the XREF manager, change the Type to Attach.
22. Save the drawing.
23. Use Quick View Drawings to switch back to TEST.dwg.
24. After a moment you should be prompted to reload the xref. (If you do not get this prompt, be
sure you saved the other drawing.
25. Click the link to Reload XREF.
26. In the XREF manager, you will now see Contours appear under XREF.
27. Hide the Contours drawing by right-clicking on it in the External reference manager and select
Unload.
28. Save the drawings and close. End of Exercise.
030.130 Basic interface modifications Section updated: 10/1/2012

16:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-130-001.mp4
030.130.001 Workspaces
When you are working in AutoCAD the display of your tabs, ribbons and Quick access toolbar are controlled by a
named Workspace. The workspace that you are working in currently is most likely the Civil 3D default.
If you have modified the position of your tabs and/or panels you can save your workspace changes to your own
named workspace.
After changes are made, you can click Save Current As.. to create a custom named workspace.
Give your Workspace a name and click Save
The quick Access Toolbar is a component of the Workspace that is very east to modify.
Any icon can be added or removed from the Quick access toolbar by right-clicking and selecting Add to Quick
Access Toolbar.
Frequently Added Items to the QAT Include:

Layer Pull-down
Properties
Create Viewport
Layer Manager
Tool palette
Tile Vertically
Layer Freeze
Exercise: Quick Access Toolbar
In this exercise, you will add useful tools to the quick access toolbar. It is highly recommended that you go through
this and add the recommended tools to the QAT.
1. Open any drawing (or click QNEW). No drawing will take place in this file. It doesnt matter what drawing
you have open for this example, as long as you have a drawing active, you will have access to the dialog
boxes needed to make the changes.
2.
3. Right-click on the Workspaces pull-down in the Quick Access Toolbar and select Remove From Quick
Acces toolbar.
4.
5. On the home tab...Layers panel right-click on the layers pulldown.
4. Select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
5. At the command line, key-in CUI
6. After a moment the CUI editor will appear.
7. In the upper-left side, locate Quick Access Toolbars > Quickaccess toolbar 1 and layer combo control.
8. Highlight Layer combo control.
9. In the right hand side, change the Maximum width to 300.
10. Change the Minumum width to 250.
11. Click OK to finish the task and close the CUI editor. After a moment the Layer pull-down in the Quick
access toolbar will become longer.
12. On the Home tab, right click on Properties and select Add to Quick Access toolbar.
13. Right-click on Toolpalettes and select Add to Quick Acces toolbar. You can add as little or as much to the
Quick Access toolbar as you wish.
14. Click on the workspace icon at the far bottom of the AutoCAD window.
15. Select Save Current As
16. You are prompted to name the workspace.
17. Name the workspace My Workspace and click Save.
18. Close AutoCAD Civil 3D. This ensures that the changes you made to the interface are truly saved.
19. Open AutoCAD Civil 3D again (it does not matter what drawing you have up). The changes you made to
the quick access toolbar will still be available.
20. End of Exercise.
Options
When you first open AutoCAD, the background is not a true black, but more of a dark chalkboard color. If you are
familiar with older versions of AutoCAD, you may also notice that object snap symbols are now green rather than
yellow. These colors are simply a matter of personal preference and can be easily modified in the Options Dialog.
You can access AutoCAD Options from many places. From the Application menu, go to Options.
Also, if you are not in an active command, right-click anywhere to access the options dialog.
On the Display tab you will see many options that are available to change. The most common option to change
from here is the color display.

Once inside the Drawing Window Colors area, you can change many things. However the default is the color of
the main background.
The Display tab is also where you can change the Cross hair size as a percentage of the screen. The default is
5%, but many people choose to increase this for better visibility.
The Open and Save tab is another frequently modified tab.
Many users prefer to place a checkmark next to Display Full path in title.
Do not turn off your automatic save.
The settings shown here are recommended.
The 3D Modeling tab is another location where users like to make changes.
If you are primarily working in 2D, you may not need the viewcube and can remove it by unchecking it as shown.
If you would like to remove the viewport controls from your views, you can uncheck the Display the Viewport
Control checkbox.
AutoCAD saves these settings to the local users machine registry. That is, if another user logs into a computer
that has custom settings in the Options, the second user will not see the changes.
These options can be exported out to a Profile file if needed.
Exercise: AutoCAD Options

You can change your background color to whatever you want. Black, white or even magenta (although this is just
shown here as a joke).
1. It does not matter what drawing you are in, as these settings are saved to the registry of the computer.
2. From the Application menu, choose Options The Options Dialog opens.
3. Go to the Display tab
4. Click the Colors button
5. Set your background color to whatever color you wish. Most people choose black.
6. Click Apply & close when complete.
7. On the Display tab, set the cross hair size to 20
8. Switch to the Open and Save Tab

9. Place a checkmark next to Display full path in title
10. Switch to the 3D Modeling tab
11. Clear the checkmark next to 2D Wireframe visual style.
12. Click OK
13. Exit AutoCAD and restart it. It is on exit that the Options gets saved to the AutoCAD portion of the
Windows registry.
End of exercise.
Module 040 Points

040.010 Civil 3D point basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
Point exercise files
11:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-010-001.mp4
040.010.001 Bridge Survey.dwg
Point basics
What is a point?
Civil 3D object that represents a location
Frequently collected from a field survey / GPS
or imported from CAiCE
or generated by hand
Has X,Y and (usually) Z coordinates

Civil 3D Points vs AutoCAD Points

Civil 3D Points
Are used frequently in Civil 3D
Are intelligent objects
Have description and number
Can be organized by point group
Can have differing symbols depending on description
Work with Description Keys
Can have styles applied
AutoCAD Points
Used infrequently
Are base AutoCAD objects
Have no distinctive characteristics
Can be organized by layer
All AutoCAD points will have the same symbol
Definitions
Description Key Set: A listing of field codes, styles and layers. When a point is imported/created Civil 3D
checks to see if there is a code matching the point description. If so, the point will take on the properties from
the Description Key Set
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all
shots brought in from the same point file. Point groups are used to organize points and control display
Anatomy of a Point
Marker- Blocks/Symbols representing location of said shot
Text-Point number, Elevation, Description
Editing Points
Editing Markers with grips
Multifunctional grip menu
Editing Labels with grips
Multifunctional grip menu
040.020 Points in Prospector Section updated: 10/1/2012

11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-020-001.mp4
040.020.001 Bridge Survey.dwg
Accessing all the Points in a file

Toolspace...Prospector tab...Points...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Edit Points Table in Panorama
Accessing specific points

Toolspace...Prospector tab...Point Groups...Specific Point Group Name...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Group Locking vs Point Locking

Lock Points will prevent you from moving or editing points graphically or through the Panorama
Lock refers to the group. If a group is locked, additional points cannot be added to the group. It also prevents
the group from being deleted
Zoom to Points
Pan to Points
040.030 Point groups Section updated: 10/1/2012

11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-030-001.mp4
040.030.001 Point_Groups.dwg
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all shots
brought in from the same point file
Another way to think of it: Point Groups act as a Filter. Filter points in and/or out to specify which points will be
part of the group.

Point groups are helpful when

Building a surface, but want to EXCLUDE certain shots
(inverts, top of hydrant, tree stumps)
Changing the elevation of a specific range of points.
(raise all shots by 0.25 for example)
Changing how certain points appear in the drawing.
Isolating all the roadway CL shots
Finding out how many trees are in the R/W
Working with soil boring data
Create Point Groups

ToolspaceProspector...Point Groups...Rt. Click Select New
Point Groups Properties

Tabs
Information
Include Exclude
Overrides
Point List
040.040 Point groups & styles Section updated: 10/1/2012

12:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-040-001.mp4
040.040.001 Point_Groups2.dwg
Point Group Listing

Toolspace...Point Groups...Rt. Click Properties
Point Styles
Marker Styles
Label Styles
Description Keys
040.050 Point creation tools Section updated: 10/1/2012

23:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-050-001.mp4
040.050.001 Point Placement Practice.dwg
Creating Manual Points

Home Tab...Create Ground Data...Points pull down...Point Creation Tools...Create Points Toolbar opens
Point Creation Settings

Chevron Icon to open Point Parameters
Default Layer- Used if Description key is not found
Points Creation- Setting Prompt for Descriptions to Automatic will force Civil 3D to use the default
Description from these settings
Command Icons and Pulldowns

Miscellaneous
Intersection
Alignment
Surface
Interpolation
Slope
Note: Not all Point Commands Pick up Elevation
040.060 Converting points from AutoCAD points Section updated: 10/1/2012

6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-060-001.mp4
040.060.001 Existing_TOPO.dwg
Creating Points

Home Tab...Create Ground Data panel...Points pull down...Point Creation Tools...Create Points Toolbar opens
Expand Points Creation
Prompt For Descriptions = None
Prompt For Elevations = Automatic
Manual Points Pulldown

Convert AutoCAD Points
Select By Crossing window
Export Points to File

Prospector>Points Groups>All Points>Rt Click Export Points
Select Format (PNEZD)
Select Destination file
Uncheck all boxes
Click OK
040.080 Importing points from a file Section updated: 10/1/2012

14:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-080-001.mp4
040.080.001 The most common formats for text files:
PNEZD (Comma Delimited)
PNEZD (Space Delimited)
Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation Z, Description. These may end with TXT, PNT, CSV, ASC,
NEZ, PRN
Start with new template

Open...Browse to Templates- USWI File folder...wisdot12-etopog.dwt...open...Save as (new project
name)
Consultants can download the WisDOT templates and other content from:
ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/civil3d-2012-win7-64/
Import Points
Insert Tab...Points from File icon ...Import Points Dialog Box
Add file by browsing to folder
Select format (PNEZD)
Place Checkmark in Add Points to Point Group (create point group on the fly)
Click ok (zoom extents if points are not shown)
Prospector...Point Groups...Update
Point Group...Rt. Click...Apply Description Keys
Important notes:
If you are working with a PNT file that has already been converted from an SRV the format is:
PENZ (Comma Delimited)
Point Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation Z
Start with new template

Open...Browse to Templates- USWI File folder...wisdot12-etopog.dwt...open...Save as (new project
name)
040.090 Editing points Section updated: 10/1/2012

6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-090-001.mp4
040.090.001 Bridge Survey2.dwg
Locked Points will not allow editing
Grip Editing
Hot Grips
Grip Menu
Edit Elevations
Prospector...Point Group...Rt. Click Edit Points
Select All...Rt click Datum
Raise or lower all points

Renumber points
040.100 Transparent commands for points Section updated: 10/1/2012

7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-100-001.mp4
040.100.001 Transparent Commands can only be used when a command is active.
Point Number Transparent Command (TC)
Activate Polyline commandClick by Point Number TC...Enter point numbers
Point Object TC
Activate Polyline commandSelect by Point Object TC...click on point objects
040.110 Points from alignments Section updated: 10/1/2012

12:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-110-001.mp4
040.110.001 Points from Alignment.dwg
Point Creation Tools

First open te point creation tools.
1. Go to Home > Crete Design panel > Points Menu > Point Creation tools.
2. Expand the toolbar by clicking the chevron on the far right.

3. Expand the Points creation category.
4. Set Prompt for point names to None.
5. Change Prompt for point descriptions to Automatic - Object.
6. From the Alignment menu on the points toolbar, choose At Geometry Points.
7. Select the alignment.
8. When prompted to pick a profile, keep te default of None and click OK. (Choosing a profile would add
elevation to the points).
9. Click enter to confirm the start station of 0+00.

10. Click enter again to confirm the end station of 9+73.95.
11. Press ESC to complete the command,

You now have points, but they are not displayed with descriptions.
12. In Prospector, right-click point groups and select New.
13. On the information tab, name the new point group Alignment Points.
1. Set the Point Style to P Ali Proposed Reference Line
2. Set the Label style to Point Name Full Desc 45
14. On the Include Tab, place a checkmark next to With raw descriptions matching.
15. Type EXAMPLE* in the field as shown.
16. On the Overrides tab, place a checkmark next to Style and Point Label Style.
17. Click OK.
18. Right-click the new point group and select Edit points. Verify that all of the intended points re part of the
group.
19. Save the drawing
20. Right-click the point group and select Export points.

1. Use the format PNEZD (Comma Delimited).
2. Browse to a location on your computer (such as the project folder) to save the resulting file.
3. Click OK.
End of Exercise.
040.120 WisDOT standards points Section updated: 7/1/2010

6:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-001.mp4
040.120.001 Civil 3D Points
The points created by AutoCAD Civil 3D are called Coordinate Geometry (COGO) points, which are very different
from AutoCAD point nodes. AutoCAD point nodes have only coordinate data (XYZ values) associated with them.
However, COGO points, in addition to coordinate data, have a variety of properties associated with them, including
point number, point name, raw (field) description, and full (expanded) description. Unlike AutoCAD point nodes,
which exist in a single drawing, COGO points can be stored in a project outside a drawing and referenced by
multiple users. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, the term point refers to a COGO point, not to an AutoCAD point node (from
Civil 3D 2010 Help)
Civil 3D Point properties

Number integer, required, unique
Name anything, not required, unique
Northing, Easting, Elevation
Raw Description
Full Description
Civil 3D Points are displayed in the Points Collection from the Prospector Tab of the Toolspace
Point Groups provide a method of working with subsets of Points
Point Groups
Assign Style and Label Style
Turn on or Turn off display with _noDisplay style
Add Point Groups to a Surface
Export to File(s)
Point Group properties

Name
Style
Label Style
Description Key
Query to include or exclude Points in a Point Group by Number, Elevations, Name, Descriptions (widlcards
allowed)
Description Key Sets can be used to control the Style, Label Style, Layer, etc of points that you create or import.
We are not using Description Key Sets at this time.
Where are Civil 3D Points used?

Defining surfaces
Control points
RW points
Locations of Topographic Features
Assist in Locating Alignment Geometry (Civil 3D points are not a part of the Alignment)
Labels for things such as Pavement Grades
Other types of points in Civil 3D

AutoCAD points not intelligent, but have attribution and coordinates.
Corridor Points
Basic building blocks of Corridor and Corridor Surface, but are not Civil 3D points
Can be stored as Civil 3D points
Survey Points - points in the Survey Database that can be loaded to DWG file at any time. WisDOT does not
use at this time.
Points as they relate to CAiCE

CAiCE Points = Civil 3D Points
CAiCE Point Feature Code = Civil 3D Point Group Style
CAiCE Point Labels = Civil 3D Point Group Label Style
Things that are different than CAiCE

Alignments, Feature Lines do not use Civil 3D points and are not dynamically linked to points
Wisconsin DOT Drawing File Names and File Management

Points are most commonly created or read into the DWG files they are used in. There are no specific Points
Drawing Files at this time

Topographics DWG files will be Xreferenced into working DWG files. Points will display as needed, but they are
not Civil 3D points in the source DWG file. They can be read into the Source DWG file using Xreference and
Promote.
Points Files can be shared multiple ways. One method is LandXML. Civil 3D supports read and write of several
different ASCII Point formats
Wisconsin DOT Standards

WisDOT12 drawing template (WisDOT12.DWT) contains:
Point styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Point creation
Layers and symbology for Points
Point Object naming
Name s are not necessary. Civil 3D assigns unique Number to points
Point Group naming
WisDOT standard DWT template only has AllPoints Point Group
Name them what they if you create them
Wisconsin DOT Sharing the Points

For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Alignments will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Alignments can be saved to LandXML files
and shared
2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-002.mp4
040.120.002 Points Need to Know!!!
Different types of Points

Importing Points from Files
Creating Points from Create Point Toolbar
Transparent Commands
Point Groups
Standard DWT has limited Point Groups
Contact Methods Development when additional standard Point Groups should be added to Drawing
Template
Points Projected to Profile View

6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-003.mp4
040.120.003 Discussion and examples on points and point groups
9:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-004.mp4
040.120.004 Points Custom content
Importing Points from a File
LandXML
PENZD
Saving Points to a File

LandXML
PENZD
Storing Points
Create a Pavement Grades Drawing
Data Reference Alignments and Surfaces
Create Points Along Alignments assign a known description and show how Description key sets are used
to assign Style, Label Style and Layer
Create a couple of Points using Transparent Commands

Create a Pavement Grades Point Group
Show Display
Module 045 Survey

A visual layout of the data workflow for survey and mapping files going into Civil 3D can be found here:
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d14-survey-data-flow.pdf
045.005 Create topo file from mapping Section updated: 4/13/2015
2:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-001.mp4
045.005.001 ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-005-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the topo file from mapping data
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and name the file Topo-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar click the Save button.
0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-002.mp4
Insert the mapping data into the topo file
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Block panel, select the Insert command icon.
In the Insert dialog click the Browse button.

Browse to the 12345678/BaseData/Mapping folder and choose M12345678.dwg.
Click Open.
Make sure the Insert Point is set to 0,0,0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Rotation is set to Angle 0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Select/checkmark the Explode option.
Click OK.
045.010 Survey database fundamentals Section updated: 3/1/2013

Survey exercise files
2:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-001.mp4

045.010.001 Survey database fundamentals

Series of files external to any drawing
Multiple survey jobs can be stored in a single survey database.
A survey database can only have one projection assignment.
There should be one survey database per project with the exception of multiple projections.
Survey data must be inserted into a DWG to see it in Civil 3D.
By default data inserted into a DWG is locked and can only be edited if the source survey database is
open for editing.
Survey databases must be created in Civil 3D, but can only be deleted in Windows.
3:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-002.mp4
045.010.002 Survey object data types
Survey point: Virtually identical to Civil 3D point. In the survey database, points have a Description (feature
code) that is translated to layer and style information in the DWG.
Survey figure: Very similar to Civil 3D feature line. It is a 3D linear object but it does support curve
definitions. Survey figures do not have Description (feature code). Layer and style information can be set
from the figure prefix. Survey figures have their own definition in the DWG.
Network: A traverse. It contains all associated known control points, known directions, setups, and
observations. Networks have their own definition in the DWG.
Additional survey database objects: Groups can be built for all of the above objects. Survey databases also
have Import Events that track how data came into the survey database.
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-003.mp4
045.010.003 Survey user settings
These settings are accessible from the top left button on the Toolbox tab.
WisDOT custom files must be installed prior to changing these settings. If WisDOT settings are not seen in
Survey User Settings dialog box, import WisDOT user settings.
Important Survey user settings

Survey Database Defaults
Survey Database Settings WisDOT_Survey Database Settings
Extended properties definition - WisDOT_Survey Extended Properties
Linework Processing Defaults
Current linework code set - WisDOT
Import Defaults
Default figure site - Field Survey
Survey interface in Civil 3D

Toolspace Survey tab
Survey databases have a working folder. This can be changed, but only the survey databases in the active
working folder can be seen.
Equipment databases: Only needed for working with networks.
Figure prefix database: Use database starting with WisDOT.
Linework code set: Use code set starting with WisDOT.
045.015 Create survey databases and queries Section updated: 4/13/2015

3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-001.mp4
Copy the master survey database and rename it
Using Windows Explore, browse to C:\wisdot\stnd folder and find the SD-WisDOT-Template folder (master
database).
In the left side of that Windows Explore window, browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Right-click on the SD-WisDOT-Template folder from the right side and choose Copy.
In the left side of the window right-click on the 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and choose Paste.
On the left side left click on the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder which now holds the SD-WisDOT-Template
database folder.

Left click on the name on the folder (currently SD-WisDOT-Template) and rename it to be SD-12345678.
Assign settings to the survey database

In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Choose Open for Edit.
Choose Edit Survey Database Settings.
In the Coordinate Zone field click the ellipsis button.

Click OK twice.
2:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-002.mp4
Create the survey database directly in Civil 3D
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose Set Working Folder.

Browse to the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder. Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose New Local Survey Database.
In the New Local Survey Database dialog type the name SD-12345678 and click OK.
Assign settings to the survey database

Choose Edit Survey Database Settings.
In the Coordinate Zone field click the ellipsis button.

Click OK.
2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-003.mp4
Import the survey query QML files

This process is for if you built the survey database from scratch, or if you discover that one or more of the standard
survey queries are not in your survey database.
Import the survey queries
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the survey database name SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand the SD-12345678 database.
Right-click on the Survey Queries area.
Choose Import
Browse to C:\wisdot\stnd\SD-WisDOT-Templatecool.
Select the first query you need, then, <CTRL> select the survey queries that you need to add.

045.020 Import PAC/LandXML into survey database Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-001.mp4
Translate a PAC file to a LandXML file
Translating the PAC file is only necessary if you have not received the LandXML file. If you have received the
LandXML file proceed to the next section Import the LandXML File Into the Survey Database.
In the Toolspace select the Toolbox tab.
Expand the WisDOT Toolbox.
Expand the Survey File Conversion.
Right-click on SDMS PAC, CTL Translator and choose Execute.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.

Select the 12345678-wo1.pac file.
Click Open.
In the Convert File dialog browse to12345678/BaseData/Survey to place the LandXML file, and click OK.
In the Convert SDMS Point Files to LandXML Files dialog, confirm the file selection by clicking OK.
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-002.mp4
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
Choose Open for Edit. In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo01.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.
Set the import settings

In the Import Settings page:
Set the Current Figure Prefix Database to WisDOT14-Etopog
Set Process Linework During Import to YES.
Current Linework Code Set to WisDOT-14.
Set Insert Network Object to NO.
Set Insert Figure Objects to NO.
Set Insert Survey Points to NO.
Set Display Tolerance Errors to NO.

Under LandXML Data:
Make sure all of the items are check marked.
For the Coordinate Zone field, click the ellipsis button (three dot button).
Set the Coordinate Zone Category to USA, Wisconsin
Set the Coordinate Zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Click the Finish button.
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-003.mp4
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo02.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.
Set the import settings
In the Import Settings page:
Set the Current Figure Prefix Database to WisDOT14-Etopog
Set Process Linework During Import to YES.
Current Linework Code Set to WisDOT-14.
Set Insert Network Object to NO.
Set Insert Figure Objects to NO.
Set Insert Survey Points to NO.
Set Display Tolerance Errors to NO.
Under LandXML Data:
Make sure all of the items are check marked.
For the Coordinate Zone field, click the ellipsis button (three dot button).
Set the Coordinate Zone Category to USA, Wisconsin
Set the Coordinate Zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Click the Finish button.
045.030 Set up to edit/add survey figures Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-030-001.mp4
Create a survey editing DWG
Browse to the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and name the file SurveyEdits.dwg.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar click the Save button.
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-030-002.mp4
Import a survey query to edit survey data
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand Survey Databases.
Right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand Survey Queries
Drag and drop the following queries into the Survey Edits.dwg:
UtilityFigures1
UtilityFigures2
UtilityPoints1
In the Survey Queries area right-click on UtilityPoints2 and choose Insert into File.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on Point Groups and choose Update.
In the lower right of the status bar change the drawing scale to 1 IN:40 FT.
Remove a survey query from a file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, and expand the Survey Queries area.
Drag the Centerlines query into the Survey Edits.dwg.
In the SD-12345678 database, Survey Queries, right-click on the Centerlines query and choose Remove from
Drawing.
Zoom Extents and save the drawing.
045.040 Editing survey figures Section updated: 4/13/2015

5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-001.mp4
Editing survey figures by adding and deleting points

Delete points from the figure
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4240,4252 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between those two points.
In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4252.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the red X icon to delete this point from the figure.
Click OK.
Adding points to the figure
Type 4240,4251,4234 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between points 4240 and 4234.
At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select the point number 4240.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the Insert Vertex Before icon.
In the new point entry type 4251.
Click OK.
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-002.mp4
Editing survey figures by changing the relation to points
Changing the order of points
Left-click on the figure between points 4240, 4251 and 4234.
Near the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4251.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the Move the Selected Item Down icon.
Click OK.
Changing the points that define a figure
Left-click on the figure between points 4240 and 4251.

At the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4251.
Type in 4252.
Click OK.
045.050 Creating survey figures Section updated: 4/13/2015

3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-001.mp4
Create a survey figure point-to-point
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678, right-click on Figures.
Choose Modify Figure Begin New Figure.
Enter the figure name of OH and click <ENTER>.
Use the Snap to Point osnap option from the osnap toolbar.
Snap to the point marker for point number 4219.
Select P for Point.
For the next point in the figure line:
Type P for the Point option.
Type the point number 4254.

Click <ENTER>.
End the figure creation method by typing DO for done.
Insert the new figure(s) to the drawing file
Creating figures in the database add them only to the database, not the drawing file. If you need the
figure in the drawing file you need to insert them. Adding all of the figures will only insert the new or edited
figures.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678 database.
Drag the Figures area into the drawing file.
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-002.mp4
Create a survey figure interactively
Type 4311,4312,4294 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures. Choose Create Figure Interactively.
Name the Figure OH. Click OK.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4311 to 4312 to 4294 (near the south of the project).

In the Figure Properties dialog click OK.
Insert the new figure(s) to the drawing file
Creating figures in the database add them only to the database, not the drawing file. If you need the
figure in the drawing file you need to insert them. Adding all of the figures will only insert the new or edited
figures.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Insert into Drawing.
5:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-003.mp4
Create survey figure from object
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point
icon.
In the Home ribbon, Draw panel choose the Polyline tool.
In the Transparent Command toolbar on the right of the screen, choose the Point Object tool.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4295 to 4296 (near the south of the project).
Click <ESC> twice to end the transparent command and the PLINE tool.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Create Figure from Object.
Select the polyline that you just created.
Change the name to OH.
Make sure the Current Figure Prefix Database is set to WisDOT14-Etopog.
Make sure the Associate Survey Points to Vertices option is set to YES.
Click OK.
Click the <ENTER> button on the keyboard to end the command.
Select the polyline and delete it.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Insert into Drawing.
Zoom to the figure you just created and left click on it to select it.
From the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
In the Figure Properties click the Convert Figure to Chain and Edit Vertices.
Click Convert the Survey Figure.
Check the elevations of the two points.
Click OK.
045.060 Verfiy DWG and SDB match Section updated: 4/13/2015

4:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-060-001.mp4

Verify the DWG and SDB match
To verify survey database and drawing file match reinsert SDB into file
Open the SurveyEdits.dwg file
Click Save to save your drawing file.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database.
Select on Figures and drag that area into the file.
Select on Points and drag that area into the file.
(This does not duplicate points or lines, but replaces them with the most up-to-date objects.)
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Point Group area header.
Choose Update.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, scroll down to the Survey and expand it, and expand Figures.
Scroll through the list of figures to make sure no error flags have appeared.
If there are error flags right-click on the Figures area header and choose Update from Survey Data.
Save the file.
045.070 Replicate/copy SDB to PDS C3D project Section updated: 4/13/2015

3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-001.mp4
Replicate the SDB to the PDS C3D project
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.
For the Source Survey Project Path, click the ellipsis button to the right.
Browse to the N:\tss\survey\c3d\SD-12345678 OR C:\wisdot\survey\c3d\SD-12345678. Click OK.
For the Destination Design Project Folder click the ellipsis button on the right.
Browse to the N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Click the Replicate Database button.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases.
Browse to N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder
In the Replicate Survey Database dialog click Exit.
3:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-002.mp4

Replicate the SDB to the users local drive
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.
For the Source Survey Project Path, click the ellipsis button to the right.
Browse to the N:\ \PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Click OK.
For the Destination Design Project Folder click the ellipsis button on the right.
Browse to C:\wisdot\survey\c3d. Click OK.
Click the Replicate Database button.
Click Exit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases.
Browse to C:\wisdot\survey\c3d folder where you will find the replicated SD-12345678.
045.080 Create/update topo file from field survey Section updated: 4/13/2015
2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-001.mp4
Insert the Topo queries into the topo file
In the Quick Access toolbar choose Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg file.
In the Survey tab, right-click the SD-12345678 database and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, expand Survey Queries.
Drag the following queries into the topo file:

TopoFigures1, TopoFigures2, TopoPoints1, TopoPoints2, and TopoPoints3.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save icon.
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-002.mp4
Delete mapping data if needed
In the Quick Access toolbar select Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg
file.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678, and expand the Survey Queries.
Right-click on Topo Figure 1 survey query and choose Zoom to.
Under the SD-12345678 select on the Figures area.
In the preview window of the Toolspace scroll down to the HEDG24 figure.

Click on the HEDG24 figure name to highlight the figure in the file.
Select the duplicate line in the file, make sure you have the mapping data block selected.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel select on the Explode icon.
Select the duplicated line and notice that the green context ribbon does not indicate a survey figure and the layer
manager changes to the layer that the line to be deleted is on.
Delete this duplicated item.
045.090 Create utility file from field survey Section updated: 4/13/2015
2:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-090-001.mp4
Create the utility file
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and save this new file as Uti-Ex.dwg.
In the Units and Zone tab:.
Click OK.
Insert utility queries
Add the utility point and linework queries to the file
In the Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, expand Survey Queries.
Drag the following queries into the utility file:

UtilityFigures1, UtilityFigures2, UtilityPoints1, and UtilityPoints2.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save icon.
3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-090-002.mp4
Clean up the utility linework
In the lower right of the drawing area, select the drawing scale menu and chose 1 IN:40 FT
For the utility feature lines that have special linetypes (those represented with letters) check to make sure the letter
in the linetype is not upside down.
When you find a linetype that is upside down, select on that feature line.
In the green context ribbon toggle open the Edit Geometry panel.
In the Edit Geometry Panel select the upper right icon, Reverse. This will reverse the direction of the
feature line so the letters appear correctly.

Continue selecting feature lines and reversing them as needed. This works on one feature line at a time.
Set the utility point labels
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click the Point Group header and choose Updates.
In the toolspace, Prospector, Expand the Point Groups.
Right-click the Survey User Defined point group. Choose Properties.
In the Survey User-Defined properties dialog, Information tab, change the Point Label Style to _No
Display.
Click OK.
045.100 Updating/merging SDB from other SDBs Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-001.mp4
Export the SDB to a LandXML file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Export Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and click Save.
Confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
** NOTE ** This process can also be performed with an import event. When this is done, the edits done in the
survey database are exported. The import event is just used as the selection set.
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-002.mp4
Import the LandXML file into the stored SDB
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose the Import flyout. From the flyout choose
Import Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select SD-12345678.xml.
Scroll down to the LandXML Data area and confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems:
Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
045.110 Create ad-hoc survey queries Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-001.mp4
Clear out file of previous survey edit work
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Open command.
In the Open dialog browse to 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and open SurveyEdits.dwg.

Right-click on Figures and choose Remove from Drawing.
Right-click on Survey Points and choose Points then choose Remove from Drawing.
3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-002.mp4
Create a survey query
Right-click on Survey Queries and choose New.
Change the name of the query to Ditch.
Under the Points, Select a Property drop down choose Description.
Make sure the Operator says Contains.
In the Value field type DTCH.
Under the Figures, Select a Property drop down choose Name.
Make sure the Operator field says Contains.
In the Value field type DTCH.
Click Preview in Drawing.
Click the Dismiss Preview button in the upper left of the drafting area.
Click Save Query. Close the Query Builder.
In the Survey Query ribbon tab click the Close X on the left panel.
Module 050 Surfaces

The first segments in this module use files found within the zip file linked to in the first section. If you want to do
the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
050.010 Surface basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-010-001.mp4
050.010.001 What is a Surface?
Civil 3D object that represents elevation information
Frequently created from points (Existing Surfaces)

or imported from LandXML
or created from a corridor design (Proposed surfaces)
or created with grading tools (Proposed surfaces)
or from other surfaces (Volume Surfaces, Composite surfaces)
Vocabulary:
TIN : triangulated irregular network; the guts of virtually all surface models.
(Each triangle forms a 3D plane. Together, all these planes form a surface.)
Boundary: A boundary is added by you, the user, to restrict triangle formation.

(i.e. outer project limits or obscure area)
Border: The line formed automatically by the outermost triangle legs.

Breakline: a line, polyline, 3D polyline, feature line or figure used to represent where triangles should line up.
Examples of breakline locations:
Bottom of a ditch
Crown of a road
Top or bottom of a retaining wall
Curb flowline
Types of Surfaces
Tin Surface
Most Common
Grid Surface
Only used when bringing in Data Elevation Model (DEM) files
Grid Volume Surface
Rarely used, compares two surfaces to calculate the cut/fill.
TIN Volume Surface
Commonly used to find depth of cut/fill as well as surface-to-surface volume.
Notes about surfaces

Surfaces cannot contain caves or overhangs
Watch out for vertical walls
050.020 Surface creation Section updated: 10/1/2012

Surface creation exercise files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-020-exercise-files.zip
13:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-020-001.mp4
050.020.001 Surface Creation Basics
Add Items with Elevation to the Definition

Points
Breaklines
From file
Boundaries
050.030 Surface styles Section updated: 10/1/2012

10:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-030-001.mp4
050.030.001 Surface Display
Three Ways to Change a Surfaces Style:

1. Click the Surface in the graphic. Click Surface Properties from the Context Tab.
2. Right-click the surfaces name in prospector. Click Surface Properties.
3. Click the main Surfaces listing in Prospector. Click the Style field for the surface.
050.040 Surface creation additional Section updated: 10/1/2012

6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-040-001.mp4
050.040.001 More Surface Creation
Add Items with Elevation to the Definition
Points
Breaklines
From file
050.050 Surface boundaries Section updated: 10/1/2012

12:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-050-001.mp4
050.050.001 Boundaries
Surface models with bogus triangles before breaklines and boundaries are added
Boundaries
Reign-in surface models

Help control where triangles are created
Destructive vs. Non-Destructive

A destructive boundary removes any triangles it touches. Outer boundaries are frequently destructive.
A non-destructive boundary removes portions of triangles, but creates new triangles. Hide boundaries should
be non-destructive.
Boundary Types
Outer (most Common)
Represents extents of surface model
Prevents bogus triangles from forming
Usually destructive
There can only be one outer boundary per surface
Show (most Common)

Adds and island of surface model data inside of a hide boundary. Fairly uncommon
Hide (most Common)

Represents obscure areas, ponds, buildings
Creates a hole in the surface model
Usually non-destructive
You can have many Hide boundaries in a surface
Data Clip (very helpful)

Allows you to narrow-down the focus area of your surface
Works great when working with large surfaces to make them more manageable
Add Data-clip boundaries before adding other data
050.060 Boundary exercise Section updated: 10/1/2012

12:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-060-001.mp4
050.060.001 Exercise
050.070 Breaklines Section updated: 10/1/2012

27:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-070-001.mp4
050.070.001 Breaklines
A line added to a surface that represents a distinct change in slope.
Enforce triangle edges (in other words, triangle sides will never cross a breakline)
Examples: curb features, crown of road, ditch, edge of pavement, etc
Types of Breaklines
Standard
Lines, 3D polylines, feature lines or figures with elevation
Contribute vertex and endpoint elevations as surface points
Can significantly change elevations
Proximity
Any line elevations are not used
Inherit vertex and endpoint elevations from nearest surface points
Use when you have linework, but no known elevation
Wall
Start with a line with elevation
Represent cliffs, retaining walls or other abrupt elevation changes
From file (FLT)
FLT file
Frequently converted from CAiCE
Once the file is imported, it acts like a standard breakline
It does not actually draw the line
Non-destructive
Not frequently used
Does not change elevation or slope
Just changes triangles
Can be used to show saw cut lines, pavement islands without grade change
Avoiding Crossing Breaklines

Crossing Breaklines Cleanup

Before Breaklines are added to definition

OVERKILL command
TRIM command
After breaklines are already added
Crossing Breakline cleanup tool
050.080 Surface edits Section updated: 10/1/2012

24:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-080-001.mp4
050.080.001 Editing Tools
Adding / Deleting TIN lines
Modifying triangle vertices
Swap edges
Raise/Lower
Changing the order of edits
Mid-Ordinate Distance (MOD)
050.090 Masks and data clip boundaries Section updated: 10/1/2012

10:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-090-001.mp4
050.090.001 Surface Masks & Clip Boundaries
Mask
Used to hide a portion of surface for rendering purposes
Not frequently used
Data Clip
Used to omit extraneous surface data
EXCELLENT for working with large surfaces
050.100 Surface paste Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-100-001.mp4
050.110 WisDOT standards surfaces Section updated: 7/1/2010

13:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-001.mp4
050.110.001 Surface creation and manipulation
Surfaces are 3D representations of the existing, proposed ground or some subsurface.
Surfaces as they relate to CAiCE DTMs:

CAiCE DTM = Civil 3D surface
Civil 3D surface contains all of the contours, triangles, grid model, etc. and can be viewed using different
styles.
Surface types:
TIN triangulated irregular network
Grid
Grid Volume
Tin Volume
Surfaces are shared through data shortcuts.
Build order is critical particularly with boundaries.
Working with surfaces can crash Civil 3D

Too much data
Too much graphics
WisDOT will use points, breaklines, corridors, and grading as inputs to surfaces.
Points will primarily come from:

Import PNT files created from SRV macro

Civil 3D Points
Can use AutoCad Points, but make sure they are 3D points.
Breaklines will primarily come from:

Import FLT files created from SRV macro
Civil 3D Feature Lines
AutoCad 3D Polylines
Corridors and Grading groups are results of design effort.

WisDOT Drawing File Names and File Management
Base Surfaces are created in DWG files under the project template:
N:\pds\c3d\ProjectID\BaseData\
Standard Name of files:
<Object Type>-<SomeDescriptiveName>-<comment>.DWG
For example, for the existing surface
Surface-Exist.DWG
Surface-Rock-4thStInt.DWG
Corridor surfaces will be contained in the ProjectID\Design\Surfaces folder.
WisDOT Standards
There will typically only be one surface per DWG file.
WisDOT10.dwt Drawing template contains:
Surface styles
Label styles
Command settings for surface creation
TIN type default
Maximum triangle length used
Allowing crossing breaklines and how to address
Layers and symbology for surfaces
Naming Surface objects:
Exist
Exist CTH B US 12
Surface creation and manipulation Need to Know!!!
Do NOT export DTM from CAiCE using LandXML. Use SRV file format and import macro.
Creating a quality surface
Adding/deleting TIN lines
Adding/deleting/modifying points
Swapping triangle edges
Modifying surface build parameters
Pasting surfaces
Order, order! All Definition objects have a build order
Surface creation and manipulation Need to Know!!!
11:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-002.mp4
050.110.002 Masks (hide graphics, leave data, active for calculation)
Inside and Outside
Do not have a build order
Boundaries
Outer (hide graphics outside boundary, leave data, inactive for calculation)
Hide (hide graphics inside boundary, leave data, inactive for calculation)
Show (creates an island inside a Hide)
Data clip (delete data and graphics outside boundary)
All affected by build order
Type of breaklines
Destructive vs. non-destructive
13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-003.mp4

050.110.003 Dealing with large surfaces (display/performance issues)

Save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save, save,
Styles
Masks
Outer boundary
Data Clip boundary
Dividing surfaces
Simplifying surfaces
Surface Errors and Issues

Definition errors
Disconnection errors
Build errors
Duplicate points (same horizontal, different Z)
Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator
Surface data from Mapping (SRV file)

Create Exist Surface DWG in proper folder
Create Exist surface object
Read SRV data from CAiCE to C3D translator
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut
Topography data from Mapping (DGN file)

Convert Mapping DGNs to DWGs
XREF them into Exist-Topo-Map.DWG
Save file
Surface data from CAiCE (existing or proposed surface)

Open/create Surface DWG
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut (if needed)
Point and chain data from CAiCE

Export survey points from CAiCE using LandXML.
View survey chains to export in CAiCE.
Export chains as 2D DWG.
Create Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG using template file
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-004.mp4
050.110.004 Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator
Surface data from Mapping (SRV file)
Create Exist Surface DWG in proper folder
Create Exist surface object
Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut
Topography data from Mapping (DGN file)
Convert Mapping DGNs to DWGs
XREF them into Exist-Topo-Map.DWG
Save file
Surface creation and manipulation Custom content
Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator or Designer
Surface data from CAiCE (existing or proposed surface)

Open/create Surface DWG

Evaluate surface
Save DWG file
Save Data Shortcut (if needed)
Surface creation and manipulation Custom content
Module 4 Workflow for Survey Data Coordinator or Designer (contd)
Point and chain data from CAiCE
Export survey points from CAiCE using LandXML.
View survey chains to export in CAiCE.
Export chains as 2D DWG. Create Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG using seed file WISDOT10-
ETOPOG-2004.DWG.
Open Exist-Topo-Survey.DWG in Civil 3D.
Import LandXML point file.
Save file.
050.130 Create exist surface DWG from mapping data Section updated: 6/17/2015
2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-001.mp4
Create the existing surface file
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and name the file Surf-Ex.dwg.
Click OK.
Create the Exist surface
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel select the Surfaces drop-down and chose Create
Surface.
Name the surface Exist.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar select Save.
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-002.mp4
Add the Topo-Ex file XREF to place an appropriate boundary
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, select the Attach icon.
In the Select Reference File dialog, browse to the project 12345678/BaseData folder and select the Topo-Ex.dwg.

In the Attach External Reference dialog:
Select the Path type of Relative
Select the Reference type of Overlay
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Insertion Point is X,Y,Z of 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Rotation is Angle 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Click OK.
Create the polyline for the data clip boundary
Zoom to the location of where the Exist surface will be needed for the project.
Start the polyline command from the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel (or type PL at the command line).
Select the first point near the surface. Continue adding polyline vertices around the surface.
When this is nearly complete, type C to close the polyline shape.
Add the data clip boundary to the Exist surface definition
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces area, and expand the Exist surface.
Under the Exist surface expand the Definition area.
Right-click on Boundaries and choose Add.
In the boundaries dialog add the name Field Survey.
From the Type drop-down choose Data Clip.
Click OK.
Select the closed polyline of the boundary.
5:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-003.mp4
Define the Exist surface from the mapping survey data
Translate SRV to PNT/FLT

In the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros.
Right-click on SRV to PNT/FLT and choose Execute.
Browse to the project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and select Exist.SRV. Click Open.
Click OK to confirm file location.
[This step is not necessary, but is to confirm the files created from the SRV] In Windows Explorer, browse to the
project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and confirm The Exist.PNT, Exist.FLT, Exist-bldg.FLT and Exist-
obsc.FLT were created. There may also be Exist-weak.FLT and Exist-ewbdy.FLT files created here, depending on
your project.
Add the survey points to the Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Exist, expand Definition, right-click on Point Files and
choose Add.
In the Add Point File dialog:
Select the plus sign icon in the upper right.

Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Mapping and select the Exist.SRV.pnt file. Click OK.
In the Specify Point File Format select the PENZD (space delimited) format. Click OK.
Add the figures to the Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Exist, expand Definition, right-click on Breaklines and
choose Add.
In the Add Breaklines dialog change the Type to From File.
Click OK.
In the Import Breakline File dialog browse to 12345678/BaseData/Mapping and choose the Exist.SRV.flt file.
Click Open.
Create the data shortcut for the Exist surface.
In the Quick Access toolbar choose Save.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Data Shortcut area and choose Create Data
Shortcuts.
In the data shortcuts dialog check mark the Exist surface. Click OK.
050.135 Create obscured areas in Exist surface Section updated: 6/17/2015

Exercise project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-135-proj-dataset.zip
2:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-001.mp4
050.135.001 Create the Boundary surface
Open the Surf-Ex file

In the Quick Access toolbar select the Open icon.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData folder and open Surf-Ex.dwg.
Create the Boundaries surface

In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, select Surfaces Create Surface.
Select in the name field and name the surface Boundaries.
Select the Style value field, click on the ellipsis button.
From the Select Surface Style dialog click the drop-down menu and choose _No Display. Click OK.
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Save icon.
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-002.mp4
050.135.002 Add obscured area breaklines to the Boundaries surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Boundaries, expand Definition, and right-click on
Breaklines and choose Add.
Change the breakline Type to From File. Click OK.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Mapping folder and select EXIST-bldg.flt. Click Open.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Mapping folder and select EXIST-obsc.flt. Click Open.
Note: Repeat these steps for EXIST-weak.flt and EXIST-ewbdy.flt if they are present.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Boundaries, expand Definition, and expand Breaklines.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, select the Layers Property icon.
In the Search bar in the upper right type E_DTM_ObscureArea.

If the layer already exists double-click it to make it the current active layer.
If that layer does not exist do the following steps:
Clear the search bar from any text so you can see all of the layer names.
In the Layers Properties Manager select the New Layer icon.

For the new Layer1, enter the name E_DTM_ObscureArea.
Close the Layer Properties Manager.
Right-click on the first breakline entry and choose Insert into Drawing.
Right-click on the second breakline entry and choose Insert into Drawing.
2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-003.mp4
050.135.003 Add obscured area hide boundaries to Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surface, expand Exist, expand Definition, and right-click on the
Boundaries area and choose Add.
In the Add Boundaries dialog name the boundaries Obscured.

Change the Type to Hide.
Make sure the Non-Destructive option is turned ON. Click OK.
Select the obscured area boundaries in the project area.
Click <ENTER> to end the command.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surface, right-click on Exist surface and choose Rebuild.
Save and close the file.
050.140 Create field survey exist surface DWG Section updated: 4/13/2015
3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-001.mp4
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, select the Create Surface command.
Name the surface Exist-Survey
Click OK.
Add the surface query points and figures to the survey surface file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.

Expand the survey queries area.
Drag and drop the following survey queries into the file:
Surface Figres1, Surface Figures2, Surface Points1, Surface Points2, Surface Points 3, and Centerline.
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-002.mp4
Create the polyline for the data clip boundary
Zoom to the location of where the Exist-Survey surface will be needed for the project.
Start the polyline command from the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel (or type PL at the command line).
Select the first point near the surface. Continue adding polyline vertices around the surface.
When this is nearly complete, type C to close the polyline shape.
Add the data clip boundary to the Exist-Survey surface definition
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the Surfaces area, and expand the Exist surface.
Under the Exist surface expand the Definition area.
Right-click on Boundaries and choose Add.
In the boundaries dialog add the name Field Survey.
From the Type drop-down choose Data Clip. Click OK.
Select the closed polyline of the boundary.
Remove the Survey points and figures from the drawing
In the Toolspace, survey tab, expand the SD-12345678, right-click on Survey Points and click Points Remove
from Drawing.
Confirm by clicking Yes.
Right-click on the Figures and choose Remove from Drawing.
Confirm by clicking Yes.
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-003.mp4
Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.

Click OK.
Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command. In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the
SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey ribbon tab, Modify panel, select the Survey Queries icon.
In the Survey Queries blue context ribbon, Manage panel, click the query name drop-down and choose
SurfacePoints1.
In the Survey Query ribbon tab, Query Results panel, select the Add to Surface icon.
In the Add to Surface dialog select the Add Query Results to this Surface drop-down and choose Exist-Survey.
Under Query Results choose Reference the Survey Database for Dynamic Query Results.
In the Use These Survey Queries select/check mark the following:

SurfacePoints1, SurfacePoints2, SurfacePoints3, SurfaceFigures1, SurfaceFigures2, and Centerlines.
Click OK.
Save the file.
Create a data shortcut for the field survey surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Data Shortcuts area, right-click on the data shortcuts header and choose Create
Data Shortcuts.
Select the Exist-Survey surface. Click OK.
Close the Surf-Ex-Survey surface file.
050.150 Paste field survey surface into master existing surface Section updated: 4/13/2015
2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-150-001.mp4
Create the data reference of the field survey surface
Open 12345678/BaseData/Surf-Ex.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Data Shortcut area, expand the Surfaces area.
Right-click on the Exist-Survey surface and choose Create Reference.
Set the style to Ex Border. Click OK.
Paste the field survey surface into the Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, surfaces area, expand the Exist surface, and expand the definition area.
Right-click on the Edits area and choose Paste.
Choose the Exist-Survey surface. Click OK.

050.190 Create a drainage analysis surface from USGS data Section updated: 3/10/2014
6:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-190-001.mp4
050.190.001 Download USGS DEM Data
This segment will demonstrate how to download USGS DEM data.
Download USGS DEM data

From the USGS National Map Viewer http://viewer.nationalmap.gov, navigate to the desired location.
Click the Download Data button at the top of the screen.
Use the "Click here" link to create a bounding box of the area you need. Make the box only as large as you
need.
Check the Elevation toggle box and click Next.
*Multiple options will likely be available to you. The smaller the arc second value, the higher the point grid
density will be. Point elevation accuracy is the same. Check the desired data set. Be sure to choose the
ArcGrid format. Click Next.
The data will be added to your cart. Click Checkout. Enter your e-mail and click Place Order
You will receive and e-mail with a link to download the data.
Unzip the data to your project folder \BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\
*Note: 1/3 arc second is typically adequate, but download the best available. Later, if you are unable to load a
denser point density, try a larger (less dense point spacing) or break the DEM into smaller pieces. This may occur
on larger areas.
18:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-190-002.mp4
050.190.002 Create Surface from USGS DEM
***CAUTION*** This segment includes a large dataset and may take a long time to download.
Create USGS DEM Surface file

Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_meters.dwg.
In the drawing settings set the Drawing Units to Meters. Set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin and Wisconsin
County Systems: {Your project County}, Meter. Click OK.
Import the project mapping into the drawing to provide spatial reference. Refer to 160.030 for this procedure.
Draw a closed polyline around the area where the DEM Surface is needed. Make this area as small as
possible to improve system performance.
Create a new surface called USGS-DEM
Expand the surface definition in the Toolspace-Prospector.
Right click on Boundaries and select Add....
Set the Type to Data Clip. Click OK and select the closed polyline from the screen.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on DEM Files under the surface definition. Select Add...
At the top of the dialogue box, select the DEM file. The file extension is ESRI Binary Grid (*.adf). You will
see multiple .adf files in the data set downloaded. Choose the one with the largest file size.
Set the CS Code to Lat Longs, NAD83 datum, Latitude-Longitude; Degrees. (Coordinate System Code is
LL83) Click OK. Civil 3D will transform the DEM surface from Lat/Long to the coordinate system assigned to
the drawing. However, it will not transform the elevations. This is why we first bring the DEM into a metric
drawing.
Click OK to finish loading the DEM file. The surface is now viewable according to the assigned style. This
may take some time depending on the point density and area.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on the surface and select Export LandXML... Make sure the surface
(only the surface) is selected in the Export to LandXML dialogue box. Click OK. Save the xml file to the
BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\ directory. Name the file USGS-DEM_meters.
Save and Close the drawing.
Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_USFoot.dwg.
In the Drawing Settings, set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin, Wisconsin County Systems: {Your Project County},
US Foot. Click OK.
Data shortcut reference your roadway alignment or xreference your mapping to provide spatial reference.
From the Insert Tab - Import Panel, click LandXML. Select the USGS-DEM_meters.xml file and click Open.
Click OK at the Import LandXML dialogue box. The DEM surface will now appear in your drawing according to its

assigned style. Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the surface. The DEM surface now has elevations
in feet.
050.191 Create DEM surface using Infraworks Section updated: 6/17/2015

5:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-001.mp4
Infraworks is capable of processing larger data sets. Therefore it is sometimes easier to consume DEM files,
LiDAR files, or other large sets of data in Infraworks instead of working directly in Civil 3D. Once the data is
inside Infraworks, smaller sample surfaces can be exported to Civil 3D.
Another advantage to consuming data in Infraworks is coordinate transformations. Infraworks will
automatically transform data to project specific coordinate systems. Then, when that data is exported to Civil
3D, it will appear in the correct location.
WisDOT employees can have Infraworks installed on their workstation by contacting the IT service desk.
http://dotnet/servicecatalog/procurement/pro-it-proc/index-get.htm
In this exercise, we will be using the same USGS data obtained in Module 050.190. Download the
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-190-proj-dataset.zip to follow along. Alternatively, the dem data
can be obtained from the national map viewer. http://viewer.nationalmap.gov/viewer/
In this example, we are going to download a topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images
can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-002.mp4
050.191.002 Start an Infraworks Project
Start Infraworks
Under Model, select New.
Since the Infraworks model will only be used for consuming data, we recommend that the
Infraworks project be kept on the users C-drive. Infraworks projects can grow quickly in size and
take up unnecessary server space.
Name the project the project ID and provide a descriptions such as the highway name and project
title.
It is important to define the model extents when practical. The model extents limit the Infraworks
model to the area of interest. Without model extents, the Infraworks model will include the entire
planet and performance would suffer. However, since the Infraworks engine can process large data,
the model extents can be set significantly larger than the project. There are several options for
setting the model extents:
Option 1: One way to obtain coordinate values for the model extents, is to open the
project mapping file in Civil 3D. Choose minimum coordinates representing a point
southwest of the expected area of interest. Choose maximum coordinates representing
a point northeast of the expected area of interest.
Option 2: The simplest way to set the model extents is with the data that will be
consumed. By clicking on the Load Extents From File button, you can select the data

that will be brought into Infraworks. The extents will be set automatically based on the
spatial limits of the data.
In this example, well select the .adf file from our USGS DEM download. These extents will be
much larger than what we will need. However, we can reduce the model extents later.
Under Advanced Setting, there are some options regarding coordinate systems. These can be left
as the default even if they do not match your project coordinate system. The UCS coordinate
system can be changed to the project coordinate system if you wish. This will display the project
coordinate system in the model. For our application, there is no need to change the database
coordinate system.
Click Ok to create the model.
1:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-003.mp4
050.191.003 Model Navigation
To navigate the model, the hold the left mouse button down to orbit. Hold the right mouse button down to
pan. Use the wheel to zoom in and out. To return to a top view with north up, hover the cursor over the view
cube and click on the home symbol. This is the default view for the home view. The home view can be
changed if desired by click in the down arrow next to the view cube.
4:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-004.mp4
050.191.004 Load Image Data into Model and Refine Model Extents

We can now begin to load data into the model. We recommend that you load an image file (or
files) that encompasses the area of interest first. In this example, we are going to download a
topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps
To load the images into the model, just drag and drop the image files (one at a time) into
Infraworks.
1. Under the geolocation tab, there should not be any edits that are needed. The coordinate
system of the image should automatically load.
2. Under the Raster tab, there are no required edits. However, since in this example we are
loading a topographic quad map, we can change the classification to Topographic Map.
3. We recommend that you check the Clip to Model Extent box for all data loaded into
Infraworks.
1. Click the Close & Refresh button

In this example, the area of interest spans 2 topographic quad maps. Repeat the previous step to
load the second map.
Now we can refine our model extents before loading our terrain data. From the Infraworks menu,
select Model Settings. Under Extent, we can interactively define the model extents with a bounding
box or polygon. Select the one that you prefer. For bounding box, first left click on one extent
corner in the model. Next, double left click on the other extent corner in the model.
Click Save and then Click Close. The model extents are now refined.
1:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-005.mp4
050.191.005 Loading Terrain Data into Model
The process for loading terrain data is the same. Drag and drop the USGS .adf file into the model.
Under the Raster Tab, it is important to check the Clip to Model Extent box for terrain data.
Click Close & Refresh
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-006.mp4
050.191.006 Infraworks Tools and Tips
Terrain Themes
Terrain Themes can be a very useful tool for analysis. Under the Analyze Tab, select Terrain
Themes. Click the green plus button to add a theme. You can make your own theme, or choose one
of the preset themes. To access a preset them, click the palette type drop down menu. For USGS
DEM files, the USGS National Map palette can be very useful. More than one theme can be loaded if
desired.
Once a theme is added, it can be toggle on and off or edited. A common useful edit is
transparency. This allow you to view the images loaded into the model at the same time as the
terrain theme.
Surface Layers
If more than one image is loaded and they overlap, the order can be adjusted to view one or the
other in the overlap area. In the example, the 2 topographic quads overlap. To switch which image is
on top, click the Manage Surface Layers button from the home tab. In the dialogue, the images can
be turned on and off and reordered.
Visual Effects
To adjust the visual effects, such as lighting, go to the Visual Effect tab. One common effect
modification is the Light intensity. Often, the light intensity is set too high for optimal viewing of the
topographic quad maps. Gradually slide the light intensity down until desired effect is achieved.
Terrain Exaggeration
For flatter terrain, it can be difficult to distinguish watershed boundaries. Exaggerating the terrain in
Infraworks can quickly reveal these boundaries. To exaggerate the terrain, right click on the .adf file
under the data sources. Choose configure. In the geolocation tab, set the exaggeration under the z
scale. In the example, we exaggerate by 5. Click Close & Refresh. Since the terrain has been
exaggerated in the z direction, you may need to zoom out to bring it back into view. Also note, that
new terrain themes will need to be added for the exaggerated data.
6:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-007.mp4
050.191.007 Export Infraworks Terrain to Civil 3D
IMPORTANT: You must remove any terrain exaggeration before exporting to Civil 3D.
To export the terrain to Civil 3D, go to the Infraworks menu. Select Export Export IMX
Define the area of the model that you want to export using either a bounding box or polygon. If the model
size is not large, the entire model can be exported. We recommend exporting only the area that is required.
The exported area remains dynamic with the Civil 3D surface that is create. The Civil 3D surface reads
the .imx file in its definition. Therefore, if the .imx file is updated the Civil 3D surface will update.
Set the target file/location to the Civil 3D project directory. N:\PDS\C3D\ProjectID\BaseData\Other\USGS-
DEM\USGS-DEM-ProjectID.imx
Click Export
Open Civil 3D. Save a new drawing called N:\PDS\C3D\ProjectID\BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\USGS-DEM-
ProjectID.dwg
IMPORTANT: Set the project coordinate system for the drawing in the drawing settings. This is how the
terrain will get transformed to the project coordinate system.
Insert Tab - Import Panel Import IMX. Select the IMX file.
The surface will automatically be created and named AIM_Existing_Ground. Give the surface a logical name
such as Exist-USGS-DEM
If the surface extents need to be updated, just re-export the IMX file from Infraworks with the new extents.
Overwrite the previous IMX file. The Civil 3D surface will update.
2:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-008.mp4
050.191.008 Update Surface Limits
The exported area remains dynamic with the Civil 3D surface that is creates. The Civil 3D surface reads
the .imx file in its definition. Therefore, if the .imx file is updated the Civil 3D surface will update. If it is
discovered that a larger (or smaller) area is needed for the Civil 3D surface, redefine the export extents in
Infraworks.
If the surface extents need to be updated, just re-export the IMX file from Infraworks with the new extents.
Overwrite the previous IMX file. The Civil 3D surface will update.
Module 060 Alignments


060.010 Alignment basics Section updated: 10/1/2012

7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-010-001.mp4
060.010.001 Introduction to Alignments
Many Ways to Develop an alignment:
From lines, arcs and/or polylines
From scratch
From points as best fit*
From existing edge lines as best fit*
*good as a starting point
Workflow:
All project alignments can go in one drawing
Use WisDOT naming convention
DWG File type: Alignments and Profiles
Description: Contains alignments and profiles
Name: AliProfs-<Dominant Roadway Name>-<Comment>
Example: AliProfs-STH25BestFit.dwg
Comment: Belongs in (Proj ID)(Design)(AliProfs)
Sites
It is recommended that you do not put alignments on a Site.
Some objects need to be on a Site, but for alignments this is optional.
When alignments are together on a site, they will react to each other by forming parcels within closed areas. This
is not desirable in most cases. When alignments on separate sites form closed areas, no parcel is created.
Store in Design > AliProfs folder
All Alignments & Profile can go in the same file.

To Summarize:
Alignments are your horizontal geometry components
Represents centerline of the road in many cases
Organize your projects alignments in one or two drawings
Use <none> as your site
060.020 Alignments from objects Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-020-001.mp4
060.020.001 Alignments From Lines Arcs & Polylines
alignment from lines etc.dwg
Exercise:
1. Open the file alignment from lines etc.dwg.

1. This contains a polyline to form USH 51
2. The separate segment will be Lake Kegonsa road.
2. On the home tab of the ribbon go to Create design panel > Alignment Create Alignment from objects.
3. Pick the polyline near the southeast part of the site.
1. This will force the lower station value to be in the south-east.
2. Press enter to finish.
3. Press enter if the alignment direction is correct.
4. Name the alignment USH 51 from Polyline
1. Verify the site is NONE.
2. Set the style to ALI Proposed
3. The alignment label set will be ticks 100 50 minor [desc]
4. Type-in USH51 in the description field.
5. Set the starting station to 196+08.64
6. Click OK.
5. Create design panel > Alignment Create Alignment from objects
1. Pick all the lines nd arcs that comprise Lake Kegonsa Road.
2. Press enter to confirm the direction.
3. Press enter to give the alignment a name.

4. Lake Kegonsa
5. Set the Alignment Label Set to ticks 500 major 100 minor.
6. Click OK.
6. Select the Lake Kegonsa alignment
1. In the alignment context tab, click Alignment Properties
2. Go to the Station Control tab
3. Change the station to 10+00.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Ok to the alignment warning message.
End of exercise.
060.030 Alignment creation tools Section updated: 10/1/2012

20:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-030-001.mp4
060.030.001 Alignment Layout Toolbar
alignment1.dwg
Exercise:
1. Open the file alignment1.dwg.

2. Select the alignment. Be sure that you see the alignment-specific grips.
3. Click Geometry editor.
4. In the Alignment Layout toolbar.
1. Verify that the name of the alignment appears at the top of the toolbar.
5. Explore the alignment layout toolbar.
1. The first icon is Draw.
Use the pulldown to find Tangent-Tangent (No curves)
1. Snap to the last endpoint in the north of the site.
2. Press enter to complete adding segments to the end the alignment.
3. Remember that missing labels indicate a gap in the alignment.
1. Use Tangent-Tangent (with curves)
1. Snap to the end of the previous line.
2. Draw a few arbitrary lines with curves for practice.
2. Go to Curve and Spiral Settings.
1. Clothoid refers to the spiral option.
2. The default circular curve type is 200. This is NOT used if the design speed is set.
3. Click OK.
3. Click Insert PI.
1. Click anywhere to add a new horizontal point of intersection.
2. Practice adding several PIs anywhere you lie.
3. Click Escape to complete the action.
4. Click Delete PI.
1. Click near one of the PIs you created in the previous steps.
2. The PI closest to your cursor will be removed.
3. Click Escape to complete the command.
5. Click Break-apart PI.
1. Click near the PI where you would like to form a gap.
2. Type in a gap distance of 50.
3. Notice that the labels have changed. The EOP label is at the end of the first segment. No
labels are at the second portion of the alignment.
6. Click Fixed Line Two-points.
1. U
2. Use object snaps to snap 2 points connecting the alignment back together.
3. This will close the gap and cause your labels to return to the northern part of the
alignment.
7. Click the curves menu
1. Free Curve Fillet (Between Two Entities, radius)
2. Zoom into an area with 2 tangent segments.
3. Click the tangent in, then click the tangent going out. Be sure to work low station to high
station.
4. Verify that the curve angle is Lessthan180.
5. Hit enter to accept the default 200 radius. If the radius you choose does not fit, you will
receive a message that says, No Solution Available at the command line.
6. Hit enter to complete the command and update the annotation.
8. Click Delete sub-entity.
1. Zoom close one of the arcs.
2. Click the arc. The arc will be removed and the geometry will revert to tangents.
3. Click a tangent segment. A gap will form where the tangent segment was removed.
9. Click the Alignment Grid View button
1. This will open a spreadsheet-like view of the alignment. Change the radius value of the
first curve to 2292.00. Note that the red highlighting in the graphic tells you which line in the
table you are working on.
2. Right click on the second curve. Select Zoom-to from the right-click Menu.
3. Change the radius value to 1440.
4. Change the radius value of the third curve to 1500.
10. Practice using the Undo/Redo commands from the alignment layout toolbar.
1. Using undo from the alignment layout toolbar will undo one step at a time from the time
you open up the toolbar.
2. Using the main undo from the Quick access toolbar will undo all actions you took while
the alignment layout toolbar was visible.
End of exercise.
8:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-030-002.mp4
060.030.002 Best Fit from Edgelines
Best Fit edgelines.dwg
Create Best Fit Alignment from Existing Lines
Pros:
Can work from As-builts (Do not need specific CL shots.)
Cons:
Cleanup needed
Difficult to modify geometry afterwards
Exercise: Working with Edgelines

1. Start with the file Best Fit edgelines.dwg
2. Key-in NCOPY at the command line. This will allow you to copy geometry from an XREF into the
current drawing.
1. Select the edgelines that you need to create the CL.
2. Once all of the edgelines re selected from the XREF, press enter.
3. Press enter too keep the same coordinates.
5. You will now have lines from the XREF in the current drawing.
3. Select all of the newly copied line.
4. Click the Join command from Home > Modify panel.
5. On the home tab > Create Design panel, click Alignment > Create Best fit alignment.
1. Set the input type to AutoCAD Entities
2. Click the pick in cad icon for the path1 entities.
1. Select all the lines from one edge of the road.
3. Click the pick in cad for the path 2 entities.
4. Clear the checkbox next to Create Spirals.
5. Name the alignment USH 51Best Fit Edgelines
6. Click OK
6. Examine the alignment and tke a look at any issues that may have arisin.
7. Select the alignment. From the contextual tab, click Geometry Editor.
8. Click the Alignment grid view to view the radii and other data.
9. You can also use grip-edits to modify the alignment.
1. The triangular grip that points up will allow you to relocate the PI, thereby changing the
tangents.
2. The circular grip will allow you to change a pass-through point.
3. The triangular grip that points away from the arc will change the radius of the curve at its
midpoint.
4. The circular grips at each end of an arc will allow you to change the length of curve.
10. When other alignment editing tools do not work, you may need to remove the sub-entities and
recreate them.
060.040 Fixed/Floating/Free Section updated: 10/1/2012

13:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-040-001.mp4

060.040.001 Fixed Floating free.dwg
Alignment Sub-entity Terminology
Fixed segment can be modified independently and tangency is not maintained

Examples: a three point arc, a two point line that is not constrained on either end.
Floating one end is attached and constrained by the previous element (tangency is maintained)
Free segment must be attached between two existing segments (tangency is maintained)
The ends of the object are both dependent on the objects before and after them. Example: a curve created with the
free curve filet command.
Example: Fixed Floating Free

1. Open the drawing Fixed floating free.dwg. You will use the points and notes to create example curves in the
file.
2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel >Alignment> Alignment Creation Tools
1. Name the alignment Lake Kegonsa road.
2. Leave styles as default.
3. Click OK.
3. Turn on your Node object snap by right-clicking the osnap icon from the status bar.
4. From the Alignment layout toolbar, go to the line menu, and click Fixed Line-Two points.
1. Snap to the south most point to the next point.
2. Press enter to complete the segment.
5. From the alignment layout toolbar, go to Cures > Floating curve (from entity radius through point)
1. Click the tangent segment you created in the previous steps.
2. Type in a radius of 575. Press enter.
3. Press enter to accept the default of Less Than180.
4. Use the point to set the next point. Be sure to use node snap.
6. To create the reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating Curves >
Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Select the curve.
2. Click the point that is in the intersection to complete the reverse curve.
7. To create the next reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating
Curves > Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Pick the curve you created in the previous steps.
2. Press enter to complete the alignment.
8. Go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > Fixed Curve 3-point.
1. Use the node object snap to click the three points to make a curve. The result should be a
disconnected curve which does not have labeling on it.
9. To close the gap, use the Line > Free line between two curves from the alignment layout toolbar.
1. Click the preceeding curve, then the curve that is not connected.
10. Click the alignment grid (panorama) view.
1. The Tangency constraints reflect the tools we used to create the segments. These can be
unlocked to force a change.
2. Unlock the fourth element ( the third curve) by clicking the lock icon.
3. Change the Tangency constraint to Constrained by Previous.
4. Change the radius to 300.
11. Unlock the third entity (the second curve).
1. Change the type to Constrained by previous (floating).
2. Change the radius to 400.
12. Close the alignment layout toolbar.
13. Select the alignment
1. Notice that you see different sets of grips depending on the way the curve was created.
2. Experiment by changing the grips. Dont worry - if you feel you have made a mistake you can
always use the undo command to go back a step.
14. Remember that the tools you use to create n alignment will change the tools you have to modify the
alignment after it is created.
End of exercise.
060.050 Reverse and compound curves Section updated: 10/1/2012

13:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-050-001.mp4
060.050.001 Additional Tools:
Free Curve Fillet.dwg
Station Equations,Masking, Implied Point of Intersection (PI), Constraint Editing, Free Curve Fillet
1. Open the file Free Curve Fillet.dwg

2. Select the main USH alignment.
3. From the alignment contextual tab, click Alignment Properties.
4. Go to the Station Control tab.
1. Chnge the start station to 192+00.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click Ok to the warning message that appears.
5. Click the green symbol to add a station equation.
1. Snap to the PT station near224+85.
2. Change the station head to 300+00.00.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
5. Notice the labeling now reflect the station equation values.
6. Switch to the Masking tab. Masking will allow you to hide a portion of the alignment. It is frequently used in
intersections.
1. Click Add Masking region.
2. Snap to the tick near 310+00 and click again at 312+00.
3. There now appears to be a gap in the alignment.
4. Click Add Masking region gain.
5. Snap to station 322+00. Use endpoint snaps to pick up the end of the alignment. The Lock to end
option is automatically set.
7. Switch to the Point of Intersection Tab
1. This comes into play when Civil 3D converts a line or polyline to an alignment.
2. By Change in alignment direction will calculate an overall PI for compund curves.
3. By Individual curves and curve group will create a separate PI for each curve (similar to how it
creates a PI as you draw tangents and PIs from scratch.
4. Do not display implied points of intersection will leave out PI locations. Use this option if you
want to prevent editing of the alignment using implied PI locations. You can change this option at any
time.
5. Blue PI grips are ones that are created when a curve is placed through a free curve fillet.
6. Grey PI grips are PIs that did not start out from tangents. Usually these are located where
tangency constraints have been modified or where polylines have been converted to alignments.
7. Click the grey PI and click Solve PI. This will turn the grip to a blue PI and allow you to move the
PI normally.
8. Switch to the Constraint editing tab.
1. Always perform implied tangency constraint swapping will automatically change the tangency
constraints on an alignment segment
2. Lock all parameter Constraints In the alignment grid view, you will see that this option
automatically adds a closed lock icon (meaning it is locked) to the tangency constraint.
3. These settings do affect all alignments, not just ones that are converted from
polylines/lines/arcs.
4. In all cases, tangency is maintained for all segments.
9. Close the Alignment properties.
10. Click the alignment.
11. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the tangent in (low station)
3. Click the tangent out (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Key-in 300
6. Press enter to complete the command & update any labeling.
12. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the curve (low station)
3. Click the tangent (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Type in R for reverse, then press enter.
6. Key-in 500 and press enter.

060.060 Editing alignments Section updated: 10/1/2012

7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-060-001.mp4
060.060.001 Reverse Alignment or Segment
alignment reverse.dwg
Use the following tools if the alignment was accidentally converted going the wrong direction through its entire
length or if a single segment is going in reverse. When the latter case happens, you will see the alignment behave
as if there is a gap in it.
Whenever possible, try to catch any direction errors as early as you can. The later in the design process you are
when you make these modifications, the more work you will have updating corridor stationing, station equations,
design speeds and any other design elements that are station dependent.
Exercise: Reverse Alignment and Subentity

1. Open the drawing alignment reverse.dwg This contains two alignments that were purposely created going
an undesirable direction.
2. Select the USH 51 alignment. This alignment is going the wrong direction in its entirety.
3. From the contextual tab > Click the down arrow on the modify panel.
1. Click reverse direction.
2. You receive a warning indicating that changing the alignment direction will affect ependant items
such as station equations and design speeds. Click OK.
4. Press escape to deselect the alignment.
5. Select Lake Kegonsa Road. Notice that the last segment of the alignment does not have labels on it.
Additionally, the EP label occurs just before the last segment. These are indicators that something is wrong
with the last segment. Zooming into the PI, you should observe that there is no gap, therefore the likely cause
of the problem is a reversed segment.
6. From the contextual tab > Click Geometry Editor.
1. From the Alignment layout tools, select Reverse Subentity Direction.
2. Click the last segment.
3. The sub entity is now reversed and the labels will continue to the end of the alignment.
8. End of exercise.
Adding on to an Alignment
The most common cause for the alignment or a single segment being reversed is incorrect conversion of lines
and arcs when adding on or converting to an alignment initially.
Always ad onto an alignment by going to the Alignment Geometry editor and select the Convert AutoCAD line
and arc. Be sure all lines and/or arcs are snapped together properly.
Convert the new lines in the direction of stationing. I.E. always work low station to high station. In some cases (like
in the video) you might get lucky and the software will fix the lines on conversion, but this is not always the case.
060.070 Alignment properties Section updated: 10/1/2012

10:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-001.mp4
060.070.001 Design Violation
Design criteria.dwg
The warning symbol will appear on an alignment if:

A line-curve connection is not tangent
A curves radius is too small for the design speed
Superelevation table is out of date
Any design check is violated
Adding Design Speed to an Existing Alignment

1. Open the file Design criteria.dwg
2. Select the Lake Kegonsa alignment (the shorter one)
3. From the alignment contextual tab click Alignment Properties.
1. Switch to the Design criteria tab.
2. Place a checkmark next to Use Criteria based design.
3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file. This file is part of the
WisDOT Civil 3D design files package that can be downloaded from the FTP site.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.

5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Verify that check for tangency between elements is checked ON.
7. Change the design speed to 30 mph.
8. Click add design speed (green plus sign.)
1. Set the start station of the new design speed to 25+00
2. Set the design speed to 45 mph.
9. Notice that you now have several radius warnings on the alignment.
10. To rectify the problem, you could change the design speed or increase the radius.
11. To ignore the problem and hide the warning symbol, click the LAYOFF button. And click one of
the symbols.
Adding a Design Speed as the Alignment is Created

1. Remain in the file Design criteria.dwg
2. From the Home tab of the ribbon > Create Design panel click alignment> Create Alignment from objects.
1. Select the polyline near the right end.
2. Press enter to accept the direction.
3. Name the alignment USH 51.
4. Leave all the rest of the options on the General tab as default.
5. Switch to the Design Criteria tab.
1. Type in 50 in the Starting design speed field.
2. Put a checkmark next to Use criteria based design.
3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.
5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Leave other options as default.
6. Click OK.
3. You can view any warnings graphically or by clicking the Alignment grid view from the alignment layout
toolbar.
4. Save the file. End of exercise.
14:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-002.mp4
060.070.002 Superelevation
Design Criteria.dwg
To add superelevation to a design you need:
1. An alignment with a design speed
2. Use Criteria-based design turned on
3. Superelevation calculated for the alignment
4. A typical cross-section (Assembly) that can superelevate
Superelevation Terminology

Exercise: Apply Superelevation to an Alignment

1. Remain in the file Design criteria.dwg
2. Select the alignment.
3. From the contextual tab, click Alignment Properties.
1. Verify that a design speed is active for the alignment by going to Alignment Properties >
Design criteri tab.
2. Click OK
4. Click the Superelevation > Calculate / Edit Superelevation button from the alignment contextual
tab (for USH 51).
1. Click Calculate Superelevation Now.
1. In the Calculate Superelevation wizard, be sure the roadway type is set to
undivided crowned road. This will match the assembly type and the option in the
design criteria.
2. Click Next.
3. Change the lane width to 14.
4. Click Next.
5. In the Shoulder control screen, set the normal shoulder width is 8 and the normal
shoulder slope is 4%.
6. Set the lowside option to Breakover removal.
7. Set the highside option to Default slopes.
8. Place a checkmark next to Maximum shoulder rollover and set the value to 8%.
9. Click next.
10. In the Attainment method area, verify that the same design criteria file is
selected by clicking the ellipsis.
11. Set the Superelevation rate table to WisDOT eMax 6%.
12. Set the transition length table to 1laneRamp, 2laneUndiv@CL
13. Set the attainment method to crowned roadway.
14. Leave all other values as default.
15. Click Finish.
5. You should now see the Superelevation table complete with stations and Superelevation stage
name.
6. This table can be used to override calculated values. You can change the length, station, and/or
lane & shoulder slopes depending on your needs.
7. Close the table by clicking the green checkmark.
8. The Superelevation table can be revisited by clicking Superelevation > View tabular editor from
the alignment contextual tab.
9. When changes to the geometry occur, you will see a warning symbol indicating that the
superelevtion needs to be recalculated.
10. From the alignment contextual tab, click superelevtion > Calculate/edit superelevation.
1. Advance through the curves by clicking Next at the top of the Superelevation curve
manager.
2. Observe the Superelevation status at the bottom of the Superelevation curve manager for
confirmation of the curve situation.
3. Click Recalculate for ny curves that report s Out of Date.
4. Click Continue to recalculate when warned that manual edits will be overwritten.
11. Save the file.
End of exercise.

060.080 Offsets and widenings Section updated: 10/1/2012

6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-001.mp4
060.080.001 Offset Alignment Use
offset alignments.dwg
Offset alignments are used to represent many different types of objects that run parallel (or mostly parallel) to your
main alignment. Their geometry depends on the main or parent alignment.
Frequent uses for offset alignments:
Edge of pavement
Sidewalk
Right of way
Grade break locations
Median locations
Create Offset Alignments

1. Use the file offset alignments.dwg.
2. Select the alignment you wish to offset. From the contextual tab launch pad panel > Create Offset
Alignment.
1. Name template
2. Station range for the offset
3. Number of offsets on each side (set this to zero if you wish to omit an alignment from one of the
sides.
4. Incremental offset distance on each side - this is the distance from the centerline.
3. Grip edit the centerline and observe that the offset alignments follow.
4. Changing the type of alignment (in the alignment properties > Information tab), will disconnect the offset
from the parent alignment.
5. To make an offset of the offset, select the offset alignment and pick offset alignment again.
1. Set the number of offsets to the left to 0.
2. Set the distance to 1.5. this new offset will represent the back of curb.
3. Click OK.
6. Repeat the process for the left (north) side of the alignment.
7. Save the file.
13:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-002.mp4
060.080.002 Offset Alignment Widening
Offset Alignment widening can be used for:

Lane widening
Turn lanes
Acceleration lanes
Passing lanes
Sidewalks that meander away from the centerline alignment.
On-street parking areas.
Exercise Add Widening:

1. Continue working in the file offset alignments.dwg.
1. All offsets and wideing options are based off the distance from the centerline of the road.
2. Click the alignment that will recieve the wideing information. In our case, you will use the edge of pavement
alignment (the one that is 14 offset).
3. From the contextual tab, click Add Widening.
1. Press enter to take he default of No to create the wideining as a separate alignment.
2. Type in 2600 for the start station. Press enter.
3. Type in 5800 for the end station. Press enter.
4. Type in 28 for the widening offset. Press enter.
4. If you dont see Offset Alignment Parameters, click Offset parameters from the contextual tab.
1. Change the transition in length to 200.
2. Experiment with the different taper and widening options.
3. Re-set any stations that were disrupted by changing the settings.
5. Right-click the transition out category from the Offset Alignment Widening palette.
1. Select Zoom to.
2. Change the transition length to 200.
6. To add curve widening: Select an offset alignment.
1. Click Add Automatic widening.
2. Use the manual option. There are no widening parameters in the design criteria file, so you can
use the manual option to add widening along curves if desired.
7. Graphic options for changing wideing:more grips for adding taper information.
1. Clicking the plus sign grip will add a widening but no taper.
2. Click the grey circle grip to show
3. Once a taper has been added graphically, you can edit them using the Offset Alignment
parameters.
8. Offset alignments can be masked using the alignment properties.
9. Also in the alignment properties, Offset alignments can be truncated by clearing the checkbox next to Start
or End stations.
1. Note that it will not allow you to stop an offset alignment usingthese parameters if the station falls
within a taper area.
End of exercise.
060.100 WisDOT standards alignments Section updated: 7/1/2010

30:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-001.mp4
060.100.001 Alignments are Two dimensional objects that get their third dimension when combined with a Vertical Profile (or
Veritcal Alignment)
Alignments are CRITICAL to the overall Civil 3D Object Model
Alignments do not have dependencies, but have several Objects that are depend upon them.
Child Objects directly dependent upon Alignments:

Profiles
Profile Views
Sample Line Groups
Sample Lines
Section Views
Materials quantities
Objects that use Alignments and have dynamic relationship with them:
Corridors
Intersections
Pipe Networks
Alignments as they relate to CAiCE

CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned off = Civil 3D Alignment without labels
CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned on = Civil 3D Alignment with labels
Things that are WAY different than CAiCE (or any other product for that matter)
Civil 3D has dynamic relationship between Alignments and other objects that use Alignments (Corridors,
Intersections). When the Alignment changes, objects that use that Alignment can change as well.
Civil 3D is a true Object model. Child objects such as Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Lines, etc. can change
when an Alignment changes. Note: for this reason it is very important to get your Alignments location,
stationing, and equations correct before creating the Child objects.
Civil 3D Alignment Types

Four types of Alignments
Centerline
Offset
Curb Return
Miscellaneous
Centerline Alignments
Most commonly used to create Profile views, Profiles, Sample Line Groups, Sections, Section Views and
Quantities.
Used as Baselines for the Corridor Object.
Used as Main or Secondary Roads for Intersection Object.
Possibly a Parent of an Offset Alignment
Centerline Alignment properties

Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Superelevation
Offset Alignments
Child of Centerline or possibly some other Offset Alignment
Represent Targets such as Pavement Edges, Shoulder Edges
Can have Widenings
Most do not have Station Labels
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Superelevation
Offset Parameters
Can set Update Mode to Dynamic or Static
Can lock to Geometry or stationing of Parent Alignment
Curb Return Alignments

Can have Intersection Wizard automatically create
Change Intersection layout parameters change Curb Return Alignments
Intersection parent Alignments are the Main and Secondary Roads
Curb Return Alignment shapes are generated by quadrant offsets, radii, transitions and widenings
Used as Baselines when Intersection Wizard stores Corridor
Most do not have Station Labels
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Superelevation
Curb Return Parameters
Can set Update Mode to Dynamic or Static
Miscellaneous Alignments
Possibly used as Matchlines for Quantities, Pipe Alignments, Special Ditching, other Roadway Features

Does not have Design Criteria or Superelevation

Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Civil 3D Alignments and Sites
Civil 3D uses Sites as a way of segregating data. A site is a collection of :

Alignments (all types)
Child objects from Alignments
Feature Lines (VERY similar to CAiCE Survey Chains)
Grading Groups (Site Design tool in CAiCE)
Parcels (New concept all together)
Feature Lines, Grading Groups and Parcels all interact within the same site (maintain Topology)
If an Alignment is put in a Site and that Alignment completely crosses a Parcel, the Parcel will automatically
be split into two Parcels.
In order to avoid potential conflicts with other Objects Wisconsin DOT will most often use Site-less Alignments.
Workflows will indicate when an Alignment is to be placed or moved to a Site and why
Alignments and Profiles will often be created within their own DWG file or files
One exception to this is the Intersecting (Secondary Roadways) Alignments used in a Intersection Object. To
have the Intersection Object maintain the Profile match with the Main Road these Alignments will be created in
their Corridor DWG files
Project folder - Alignments are found in

\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\AliProfs
File Naming
AliProf-<Descriptive Alignment Name>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
AliProf-STH25-BestFit.DWG
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!

Alignment styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Alignment creation
Layers and symbology for Alignments
Alignment Object naming

Centerline Alignments <Roadway Name> <Comment>
STH25 BestFit or 4th Ave
Offset Alignments <Parent Alignment Name>-<Side>-<Offset>
STH25 BestFit-Left-12.00
Curb Return Alignments <Intersection Name>-<Quadrant Name>-Quadrant
STH25and4thAve-NW-Quadrant

Miscellaneous Alignments <Name what it is>-<Side>-<Comment>

STH25-Right-Ditch or STH25and4thAve-Right-Matchline
Design criteria use the current WisDOT Design Criteria.XML file. This contains current standard WisDOT super
rates and transitions as well as Profile k Values.
Wisconsin DOT Sharing the Alignments

For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Alignments will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Alignments can be saved to LandXML files and
shared
Alignments Need to Know!!!

When creating an Alignment using Layout tools there are three words you will hear a LOT.
Fixed
Float
Free
It is very important to understand these concepts. The geometry you create (Lines and Curves) can be changed
based on how they were created.
Fixed line or curve has no point of tangency such as a curve through three points. These Lines or Curves maintain
their relationship to how they were originally stored regardless of how you edit them
Float(ing) line or curve has one point of tangency such as a curve at the end of a line. If the line changes the curve
is adjusted to maintain tangency
Free line or curve has two points of tangency such as a line between two curves. If one curve changes the free line
changes with it.
Be careful when creating Alignments from polylines or other CAD objects. Make sure curves fit the tangents.
Make sure Alignment stationing is correct before creating dependent objects. Changing stationing after such things
as profiles, section views, sample lines, etc are created can really mess up the model.
Do not get in the habit of exploding objects. Stock vBooks do this with an alignment to get a polyline, but it is not a
good practice and can corrupt your Drawing file.
[email protected]
14:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-002.mp4
060.100.002 Alignments Custom content
How to use Design Criteria for Alignment Super and Minimum Curve Radii
Best Fit Alignments by Layout
Bringing stuff through Xreferences

Polyline
Create Alignment from Polyline
Alignments by Layout
Precision input
Osnaps and Otrack
Best Fit
Quick Properties
Station Equations
Get to know Alignment Layout Tools
22:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-003.mp4
060.100.003 Alignment practice exercise

060.110 Exercise DS0200 - Create best alignment Section updated: 7/1/2010

Detailed exercise instructions
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-110-create-best-fit-alignment.pdf
4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-001.mp4
060.110.001 Introduction/unzip project dataset
2:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-002.mp4
060.110.002 Create DWG
5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-003.mp4
060.110.003 Import points
1:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-004.mp4
060.110.004 Create alignment
5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-005.mp4
060.110.005 Create best fit tangents
5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-006.mp4
060.110.006 Create best fit tangents continued
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-007.mp4
060.110.007 Create best fit tangents continued
6:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-008.mp4
060.110.008 Create Best Fit Curves
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-009.mp4
060.110.009 Edit all best fit entities
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-010.mp4
060.110.010 Set stationing
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-011.mp4
060.110.011 Adjust stationing
4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-012.mp4
060.110.012 Set design speed
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-013.mp4
060.110.013 Set superelevation
6:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-014.mp4
060.110.014 (48:52)
Apply superelevation macro

060.120 Exercise DS0400 - Create alignment by layout Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-120-create-alignment-by-layout.pdf
3:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-001.mp4
1:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-002.mp4
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-003.mp4
060.120.003 Import points
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-004.mp4
060.120.004 Data shortcut reference alignment
4:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-005.mp4
060.120.005 Create alignment geometry
1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-006.mp4
060.120.006 Flatten line objects to elevation = 0
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-007.mp4
060.120.007 Create alignment from objects
5:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-008.mp4
060.120.008 Extend alignment geometry
6:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-009.mp4
060.120.009 Finish alignment geometry
5:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-010.mp4
060.120.010 Set alignment stationing
060.130 Exercise DS0600 - Create offset geometry Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-130-create-offset-geometry.pdf
3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-001.mp4
1:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-002.mp4
060.130.002 Open AliProf4thAve.dwg
4:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-003.mp4
060.130.003 Create offset alignments
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-004.mp4
060.130.004 Mask offset alignments
4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-005.mp4
060.130.005 Create data shortcuts

Module 070 Vertical profiles

070.010 Surface profiles and profile views Section updated: 10/1/2012
Profile exercise files
22:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-010-001.mp4
070.010.001
15:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-010-002.mp4
070.010.002 AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-12.dwg
Exercise
070.020 Creating proposed profiles Section updated: 10/1/2012

26:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-020-001.mp4
Proposed (Layout) Profile Overview

Layout/Proposed profiles, not related to a surface
Generally for design purposes
Ties back to alignment
Layout profile toolbar

Home tab > Create Design > Profile > Profile Creation Tools
Layout Profile Creation dialog

Alignment name/Naming template
General tab
Profile Style
Profile Label Set
Design Criteria tab

Use Criteria-based toggle
Design criteria file
Design tables from that file
Design check set toggle and assignment
Layout Profile Toolbar

Vertical Curve Settings
Curve type and crest/sag settings
Draw Tangents or Draw Tangents with Curves
Create Line (Fixed Floating and Free)
Create Curves (Fixed Floating and Free)
Create curves between tangents (Free Curve Parabolic)
Insert PVIs Tabular

For profile creation without graphic interface
Enter Station and Elevation
If Curve Type is selected, Add Curve Length or Radius
Station and Elevation
Grade and Station

Grade and Length

Profile from Plan
Station and Elevation from Plan
070.030 Edit proposed profiles Section updated: 10/1/2012

14:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-030-001.mp4
Graphical Editing of Editing Layout Profiles

Grip Editing
Fixing Design Criteria Errors
Square grips for maintaining slopes
Circular grips for adjusting curve radius/length
Triangle grips for adjusting PVI point
Triangles at angles maintain incoming or outgoing slope
Upright triangle changes both slopes while adjusting PVI
Data Editing of Layout Profiles

Edit in Table (Panorama View)
Profile Layout Tools toolbar, right side
Data grid of entire profile, curves and slopes
Some fields are informational, most can be edited
Edit in Table per curve
Add/Remove PVI points
Copy Profile
Raise/Lower Profile
070.040 Profile view properties and styles Section updated: 10/1/2012

24:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-040-001.mp4
Profile View Properties

For looking at details of the view, and list of profiles that are available for display
Access to the grid parameters, stations and elevations

Band information and settings, elevation label assignments
Hatching associated in the selected view
Access to the current style
To access profile view properties

Select on the profile views grid
Context ribbon > Modify View > Profile View Properties
Profile View Styles

Controls the grid, major and minor station and elevation grid lines, linetypes, station and elevation labels, and
title labels
To access the Profile View Styles

The Information tab of the Profile View Properties
The Elevation tab of the profile View Properties if Split Profile is turned on
Select on the profile view, in the context ribbon choose Profile View Properties drop down > Profile View
Styles
Profile View Styles Tabs

Graph tab
Vertical scale/exaggeration set one, the others change to match
Left to Right or Right to Left grid
Grid tab
Clipping vertical or horizontal grids

Grid Padding to add extra grid lines around known data

Axis Offset, to add space between grid and the axis lines
Padding and Offset are both controlled for top, bottom, left and right separately
Title Annotation tab

Overall graph title
Text style/height
Title content template
Text location, macro and micro-location control
Titles for each axis top, bottom, left, right
Horizontal Axes
Controls top and bottom station grids and annotation
Major and Minor tick interval and related text
Horizontal geometry markers and text
Vertical Axes
Controls Left and Right elevation grids and annotation
Major and Minor tick interval and related text
Display tab controls whether the aspects of the grid are visible, no matter what previous tabs are set to
070.050 Profile view labels Section updated: 10/1/2012

8:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-050-001.mp4
Profile View Labels

Labels specific to the Profile View (grid)
Types of Labels
Station Elevation
Depth
Projection
Profile View Labels Placement

Placing labels
Select the profile view > green context ribbon > Labels panel > Add View Labels
Or Annotate tab > Add Labels > Profile View
Add Profile View Labels in fly out
Station Elevation, you will first identify the station, then the elevation
Depth, you will identify two points. The Depth will be the Y-axis measurement between the two
Adjusting labels after placement

Station Elevations have two grips
Square is for dragged state with leader
Diamond grip for moving label location
Depth label has three grips

Endpoints for adjusting depth measurements
Midpoint for moving while maintaining depth measurement
Projection Label
Top grip lengthens label leader
070.060 Profile view data bands Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-001.mp4
070.060.001 Profile View Bands
Provides extra data in relation to profile view
Profile Data band labels elevations for up to two surfaces at major and minor stations
Controls major and minor stationing labels separately
Elevation assignments can occur during profile view creation
Both fields could be set to the same profile
Can change surface assignments after placement

Horizontal Geometry provides alignment curve markers in relation to vertical geometry of profile
Profile View Properties Band Tab

Allows placement or removal of bands for grid
Choose the band type, the style specific to that type, then Add
Choose location, above or below grid
Assigned and type includes:

Option to change the style for the currently assigned type
Gap between profile view grid and the band
Geometry points that may receive special labels
Profile 1 & 2 columns for assigning left and right elevations
Weeding, to prevent labels from appearing to close together
Stagger, if labels are too close together they can shift
Save Band Set

Import Band Set
Arrows on right side to arrange the bands
Red X to delete band lines
Profile View Bands Styles

Band Details to set parameters for each type of label
Band Height for how much room band takes up
Text Box Width, for band title
If display is off, still affects width of overall profile view display
If display is on, displays text title of the type of band
Offset from Band, changes space between profile view grid and band display
Labels and Tick Settings
Whichever is highlighted the compose label will edit
Changes to several types requires each type to be selected and edited in turn
Full band ticks versus small ticks (at selected type of station)
Display tab to control whats turned on
11:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-002.mp4
Exercise
070.070 Profile view projections and superimposed profiles Section updated: 10/1/2012
11:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-070-001.mp4
Projecting Objects into Profile Views

Displays objects from plan view into the vertical geometry of profile view
Can project C3D Points, and Feature Lines
Can display at true elevations, or at an assigned elevation
Zoom to Source in profile view allows navigation to plan view object
Home tab > Profile & Section Views tab > Profile View pull-down > Project Objects to Profile View
Select the object(s), then select the profile view to display them
Identify the style, and the elevation options and label styles
Superimposed Profiles
Represents profile data from other profile views
Good for proportional data during design
Can be used for targeting and design
ALWAYS perpendicular from display profile views alignment!
Can appear skewed do to distance, angle, and perspective
Select the Profile in the profile view > context ribbon > Launch Pad > Superimpose Profile.
Then select the Profile View to display

Identify what station range
070.080 Quick profiles Section updated: 10/1/2012

8:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-080-001.mp4
Quick Profiles
A profile created from non-alignment lines or polylines
Temporary profile deletes itself when you close the file
View changes as you move the line/polyline
Great for troubleshooting design issues
Home > Create Design > Profile > Quick Profile
070.090 WisDOT standards - profiles Section updated: 7/1/2010

6:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-001.mp4
070.090.001 Civil 3D profile explained
Profiles, when combined with Alignments are Three dimensional objects

Profiles are also called Vertical Profiles or Vertical Alignments
An Alignment is a Parent Object to a Profile
Profiles can be displayed in Profile Views

Profiles can be displayed in another Alignment (not the Parent Alignment) profile view. These create new profiles
called Superimposed Profiles
Profiles can be used

To create Corridor Baselines when combined with iAlignment
To represent Targets in a Corridor
Objects that use Alignments/Profiles and have dynamic relationship with them:
Corridors
Intersections
Pipe Networks
Profiles as they relate to CAiCE

CAiCE Profile = Civil 3D Profile
CAiCE Terrain Profile = Civil 3D Surface Profile
CAiCE Active Alignment = Civil 3D Profile View
CAiCE profile viewed on wrong Active Alignment approximately = to Civil 3D Superimposed Profiles (except
Superimposed profiles are intentional, correct and will not cause the Galaxy to implode and create a new black
hole).
Civil 3D 2010 Profile Types
Profile types in Civil 3D

Layout
Surface
Superimposed
Corridor
Layout Profiles
Most commonly used as Corridor Baselines, Corridor Targets, Main or Secondary Road Profile in an
Intersection Object
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Static as it does not change VPIs when Parent Alignment changes
Created using Profile Layout Tools

Remember Fixed, Floating, Free!
Layout Profile properties

Name
Style, Labels
Design Criteria, Design check set
Surface Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created projecting Alignment onto Surface
Dynamic as it changes if Parent Alignment or Surface changes
Surface Profile properties

Name
Style, Labels
Superimposed Profiles
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Superimposed Profile
Dynamic as it changes when the Original Profile changes
Superimposed Profile properties

Name
Style, Labels
Corridor Profiles
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Profile from Corridor
Static as it does not change when the Corridor changes
Note: we do not have Corridor Profiles in WisDOT workflow
Corridor Profile properties

Name
Style, Labels
Profile Views
Profile Views are Dependent upon a Parent Alignment. They display

Profiles
Data bands
Grids
Pipe Networks
Points
Profile View properties

Name
Profile View Style
Station Range
Elevation Range
Split Profile View
Included Profiles
Profile View Bands
Hatching
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-002.mp4
070.090.002 WisDOT drawing file names and file management
Alignments and Profiles will often be created within their own DWG file or files
One exception to this is the Intersecting (Secondary Roadways) Alignments used in a Intersection Object. To
have the Intersection Object maintain the Profile match with the Main Road these Alignments will be created in
their Corridor DWG files
Project folder - Alignments are found in

\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\AliPRofs
File Naming
AliProf-<Descriptive Alignment Name>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
AliProf-STH25-BestFit.DWG
great start!

Profile styles
Label Styles
Command Settings for Profile creation
Layers and symbology for Profiles
Profile Object naming

Layout Profiles <Parent Alignment Name> <Comment>
STH25 BestFit
Surface Profile <Parent Alignment Name>-<Surface Name>-<Comment>
4th Ave-Exist
Superimposed Profile <Source Profile Name>-Superimposed
STH25and4thAve-Superimposed-PV 4thAve
Design criteria use the current WisDOT Design Criteria.XML file. This contains current standard WisDOT super
rates and transitions as well as Profile k Values.
WisDOT Sharing the profiles
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Profiles will be shared using References to Data
Shortcuts
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Profiles can be saved to LandXML files and
shared
Profiles Need to Know!!!

When creating an Profiles using Layout tools there are three words you will hear a LOT.
Fixed
Float
Free
It is very important to understand these concepts. The geometry you create (Lines and Curves) can be changed

based on how they were created.

Fixed line or curve has no point of tangency such as a curve through three points. These Lines or Curves maintain
their relationship to how they were originally stored regardless of how you edit them
Float(ing) line or curve has one point of tangency such as a curve at the end of a line. If the line changes the curve
is adjusted to maintain tangency
Free line or curve has two points of tangency such as a line between two curves. If one curve changes the free line
changes with it.
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-003.mp4
070.090.003 Profiles Custom Content
How to use Design Criteria to layout Profiles with minimum K-Values

Best Fit Profiles by Layout
Profiles by Layout
Precision input
Osnaps and Otrack
Quick Properties
Station Equations effect on Profile Layout tools
Get to know Profile Layout Tools
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-004.mp4
070.090.004 Profile example
7:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-005.mp4
070.090.005 Profile exercise
11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-006.mp4
070.090.006 Profile example
070.100 Exercise DS0300 - Create best fit profile Section updated: 7/1/2010
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-100-create-best-fit-profile.pdf
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-001.mp4
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-002.mp4
070.100.002 Create profile view
2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-003.mp4
070.100.003 Project points to profile view
1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-004.mp4
070.100.004 Create profile
5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-005.mp4
070.100.005 Create best fit tangents 1
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-006.mp4
2:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-007.mp4

6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-008.mp4
070.100.008 Create best fit vertical curves 1
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-009.mp4
070.100.009 Create best fit vertical curves 2
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-010.mp4
070.100.010 Edit best fit entities
4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-011.mp4
070.100.011 Create exist surface profile
2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-012.mp4
070.110 Exercise DS0500 - Create profile by layout Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/070/070-110-create-profile.pdf
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-001.mp4
3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-002.mp4
070.110.002 Create profile view
1:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-003.mp4
070.110.003 Project points to profile view
1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-004.mp4
070.110.004 Create profile
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-005.mp4
070.110.005 Profile layout tools 1
4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-006.mp4
4:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-007.mp4
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-008.mp4
070.110.008 Profile layout tools - add vertical curves
2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-009.mp4
070.110.009 Create exist surface profile
2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-010.mp4
070.120 Create Setup ETW surface Section updated: 4/13/2015

3:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-001.mp4

070.120.001 Creating the Lane Edge Setup Assembly
Open the AliProf-25.dwg.

Note: In your project this will be a drawing within the AliProf folder which has the baseline alignment(s) and
superelevation information for the alignment(s). The best practice is to create the setup surface in the drawing
that contains the design profile. For the primary road baseline alignment this would be in an AliProf drawing,
for the secondary roads this may be in a corridor drawing.
Verify that the primary roadway alignments and offset alignments are in this drawing.
Create an assembly that consists of two LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies on each side. (Generic palette)
The inside LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies will represent the lane top, and the outside subassembly will
represent the possible taper, turn lane or secondary road curb return areas. Name the assembly Setup-25-
ETW.
Set the right side links Use Superelevation Slope Input value to Right Outside Lane and the left side to Left
Outside Lane.
If superelevation is being used to control the turn lane and/or taper slope, set the Setup-Trans links to follow
that superelevation.
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-002.mp4
070.120.002 Creating the Lane Edge Setup Corridor
Create a new corridor called 25-Setup-ETW.

Alignment: 25
Profile: 25-PROP
Assembly: Setup-25-ETW
Surface: <none>
Set baseline and region parameters: checked
Set all Frequencies to 200. This may need to be changed after finishing the rest of this exercise.
Note: If the 200 feet frequency is the same length as the surface setting for maximum triangle length, then
these regions will not be included in the surface. This may not always be the preferred outcome if you
wish to use the surface to sample profile information outside the intersections.
Set all frequency points to yes

Target Mapping: Map the right and left ETW Offset Alignments
Setup-Lane-R to 25-R-ETW
Setup-Lane-L to 25-L-ETW
Set the Start Station and the End Station to match the project station start and end.
346+00 to 395+00.
Build corridor.
Break the corridor into regions for each intersection and the areas between the intersections. The intersection
regions should extend at least to the ends of the curb returns, turn or taper lanes, whichever is the furthest from the
intersection.
Select the corridor from the drawing. Use the Split Region tool and follow the tool directions. In this exercise
split the entire corridor into 3 regions by selecting 380+00 as the first split, and 389+00 as the second split.
Select the corridor from the drawing. Use the Edit Frequency tool to set the intersection region frequency to
2.5 feet. The regions outside the intersection areas can maintain their existing frequency of 200 feet.
Add additional frequencies at the locations where the mainline alignment and the side road alignment
intersect. If the intersection is at a skew, add frequencies where the mainline edge of travel way and the side
road alignment intersect.
1:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-003.mp4

070.120.003 Creating the Lane Edge Setup Surface
Create a new surface called Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top.

Surfaces tab: Add the P2 feature lines to its definition. Set the style to _No Display.
Boundaries tab: Add a boundary automatically using Corridor extents as outer boundary.
Set the corridor code set style, the corridor object style and the P2 feature line style to _No Display.

Click Ok to build the setup corridor and surface.

Save the drawing and create a data shortcut of the Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top surface. Note: In your surface build
options set your maximum triangle length to be shorter than your longest corridor frequency, but longer than your
shortest corridor frequency. In this case this length should be anywhere between 199 and 3. This way the triangles
would be excluded at a length of 200 and greater. This allows a surface which will only build in our particular area
of interest, the intersections, which have a frequency of 2.5.
This surface can now be used as a data reference into any drawing where you need to create an offset alignment
profile that represents the cross slope and superelevation design.
Module 080 Corridor modeling fundamentals

080.010 Subassemblies Section updated: 10/1/2012
9:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-001.mp4
080.010.001 Introduction to Corridors
What is a Corridor?
A corridor is a Civil 3D object that ties together your design data in an intelligent manner.
Corridors frequently represent roadways, railways, trails and even streams.
A corridor contains instructions on how your typical cross-section relates to existing surface and
where those instructions should be applied.
A 3D object that brings together:
Horizontal information: Alignment
Vertical information: Profile
Cross-section information: Assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Usually consist of multiple sub-assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Usually consist of multiple sub-assemblies
Targets
Target surfaces are used to find the slope intercept location.
Other targets allow you to change cross-section geometry without the need for an additional assembly.
General Workflow
Save the file in the Design > Corridors folder
Name the file per WisDOT naming standards
DWG File type: Corridors

Description: Contains corridors
Name: Corridor-<CorridorName>-<Comments>
Example: Corridor-STH25-4thAve-96to114.dwg
Comment: Belongs in (Proj ID)(Design)(Corridors)
Corridors & Data Shortcuts

To Create a Corridor, reference in:
Existing surface
All alignments needed for design
Be sure the design profiles come along!
You may want to XREF in:

Basemap (optional)
ROW lines (optional)
16:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-002.mp4
080.010.002 Assembly = cross-section geometry
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH51 BestFit[start].dwg

Sub-assembly anatomy
Marker points: Connect between frequency stations to form feature lines
Links: lines that will be used in design surfaces
Shapes: area inside a closed group of links (used for material computation)
Exercise: Your First Subassembly

1. Open up the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
2. Go to the Home tab > Create Design Panel > Assembly > Create Assembly
1. Name the assembly, Rural 14 foot lane w Shoulders
2. Set the Assembly type to Undivided crowned Road
3. Click OK.
3. Click in the graphic to place the assembly.
4. Set the annotation scale to 1in=20 ft (optional)
5. On the home tab > Palettes Panel, click the Tool palettes icon.
6. View the WisDOT subassemblies
1. Click the Wis-Lanes and Shoulders tab.
7. Click Lane Generic. You will now see the AutoCAD Properties pop up with the Parameters listed.
1. Set the side to left if it is not already.
2. Set the Width option to 14.
3. Click the main green assembly marker.
8. Click the SelSubShld subassembly
1. Verify the side is set to left.
2. Leave all other options as default.
3. Zoom in and click on the while marker point.
9. Switch to the Wis-Daylight and Slopes tab.
1. Click the GenCFFinalLink subassembly.
2. Verify the side is set to left.
3. Keep slope and height options as default.
4. Zoom in and click on the outermost marker point.
10. Press escape on your keyboard.
11. Select all three sub-assemblies.
1. From the contextual ribbon > Modify Subassembly palette > click Mirror Subassemblies.
2. Click the main green assembly marker again. The assembly is complete.
Save the drawing.

8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-003.mp4
080.010.003 Exercise: Troubleshooting Common Assembly Issues
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[Start].dwg
1. Name the assembly, C&G w Sidewalk
2. Set the Assembly type to Undivided crowned Road
3. Set the Code Set Style to XS Sheets
4. Click OK.
3. Click in the graphic to place the assembly.
1. Click the Wis-Lanes and Shoulders tab.
6. Click Lane Generic. You will now see the AutoCAD Properties pop up with the Parameters listed.
1. Set the side to left if it is not already.
2. Leave the default settings in the properties.
3. Click the main green assembly marker.
4. Press escape to complete the command.
The lane is placed, but because of the code set style you choose in the previous step, the links
are not visible. In the next steps, you will fix this.
7. Select the assembly marker.

1. From the contextual tb > Modify Assembly panel > click Assembly Properties.
2. Go to the Codes tab.
3. Change the active Code Set style to CRDR Proposed.
4. Click OK.
8. Keep the drawing open for the next portion of the exercise.
Code Set Styles

A Code set Style is a collection of styles which control the look of points, shapes and links. The code set
style is where labeling for lanes, daylight slope and offsets is set. Code Set styles are used in many
places. The assembly creation is the first place you encounter these. You will also see that code set
styles are used in the corridor cross section editor. Later on you will also see a code set style used in
cross section sheets. For all three instances the code set style is independent. In other words, you will
use a different code set style for assembly creation than you would for cross section sheets.
Adding Subbase to a Sidewalk Subassembly

In this example, a Generic pavement structure is used to create a subbase under a sidewalk subassembly. The
sidewalk subassembly that comes with Civil 3D does not have this material built in.

1. Click the Wis-Barriers and Curb tab.
2. Click CGGen
3. Verify that the side is set to left
4. Click the white marker at the edge of pavement to place the curb and gutter sub-assembly.
4. Right-click the edge of the toolpalette and open the Civil Imperial Subassemblies. These are the sub-
assemblies that come with Civil 3D out of the box
1. Switch to the Curbs tab.
2. Pick the UrbanSidewalk subassembly.
1. Change the Inside Boulevard Width (terrace) to 2
2. Set the Outside boulevard width to 4%
3. Verify that the side is set to left and click to place the subassembly to the left of the curb
and gutter subassembly. This will result in an overall terrace width of 7 because the curb
and gutter has a 5 terrace built into it.
3. Switch back to the WisDOT subassemblies and add the daylight subassembly called
GenCFFinalLink.
5. Switch to the Lanes tab.
1. Click the GenericPavementStructure subassembly.
2. Set the width to 5
3. Set the shift width to 0
4. Set the crossslope to 2%.
5. Verify that the side is left.
6. Set the depth to 0.67
7. Zoom in and click the bottom inside marker on the sidewalk. The sidewalk should now have
subbase.
6. Press Escape.
080.020 Subassembly catalog Section updated: 10/1/2012

8:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-020-001.mp4
080.020.001 Sub-Assembly Tool Palette
It is a good idea to create a custom tab in your tool palette for frequently used subassemblies or full assemblies.
Assemblies and subassemblies can be dragged onto the tool palette and easily transferred to other drawings or
other projects.
Many types of items can reside on a tool palette. Frequently used Assemblies, blocks and even commands can be
added to a tool palette.
Exercise: Adding Assemblies and Subassemblies to the Tool Palette

3. Right-click anywhere in the tool palette and select New Palette
1. Name the palette My Project Assemblies
4. Select one of the assemblies at the main assembly marker.
1. Click on the dashed portion (not at the grip location) and hold your mouse button down.
2. Drag the assembly into the tool palette until you see a plus sign appear next to the cursor.
3. Let go of your mouse button when the plus sign appears next to your cursor.
4. After a moment your assembly will appear in the tool palette. This assembly is now available to
any drawing, even after you close out of Civil 3D.
5. Repeat this process for the remaining subassemblies in the file.
6. Select the 5:1 daylight subassembly from any of the assemblies in the drawing.
1. Click on the dashed portion of the geometry (not at the grip location) and hold your mouse button
down.
2. Drag the assembly into the tool palette until you see a plus sign appear next to the cursor.
3. Let go of your mouse button when the plus sign appears next to your cursor.
4. You now see the subassembly appear in the tool palette. Any property/parameter changes you
made to the subassembly will also be stored with the subassembly.
7. Right-click anywhere in the toolpalette and select Add Separator. This will add a horizontal line to visually
separate items on the palette.
Exercise: Add Assemblies from Content Browser

1. From the Home tab > Palettes panel flyout, click the ContentBrowser icon.
2. Click the content browser catalog that is set up for WisDOT.
1. Open the WisDOT 2012 Assemblies Blocks and Lines catalog.
2. Open the Wis-Daylight catalog.
3. Click and hold the iDrop symbol next to GenCF.
4. When you see the dropper icon fill up drag it over to the tool palette.
5. Repeat the process for any block that you can find in the content browser.
3. Click the link to Catalog Top (at the top of the content browser)
4. Change to the Corridor Modeling Catalog (Imperial, .NET)
1. Click the Bridge and Rail Subassemblies category.
2. Click and hold the iDrop symbol next to BridgeBoxGirder2.
3. When you see the dropper icon fill up drag it over to the tool palette.
To save the catalog, exit Civil 3D and come back in. This will ensure that the settings in your tool palette are saved
to your hard drive. If Civil 3D exits unexpectedly (i.e. crashes) after making tool palette changes, the tool palette
will not be saved.
080.030 Create assembly Section updated: 10/1/2012

16:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-030-001.mp4
080.030.001 Special sub-assembly modify tools
Copy to Assembly
Move to Assembly
Mirror assembly
Do not use traditional move commands on subassemblies. Do not use grips to relocate subassemblies if you
accidentally place them on the wrong marker. Always use Move to Assembly to relocate subassemblies.
Exercise: Adding Assemblies and Subassemblies to the Tool Palette

2. On the Home tab > Modify panel > click Copy. This is the base-AutoCAD copy command.
1. Select the main assembly marker at the crown of the road.
2. Click the center again as the basepoint for the copy command.
3. Click just above the other assembly to complete the copy.
4. Press escape to exit the Copy command.
3. Click the main assembly marker.
1. From the Assembly Contextual tab, click Assembly Properties.
2. Switch to the Information tab to rename the Assembly.
3. Name the new assembly Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
4. Click OK.
4. Select the daylight subassemblies.
1. Be sure these are the only two items selected in the file.
2. Delete both the left and right subassemblies by pressing delete on the keyboard.
5. Open the subassembly tool palette if it is not already open.
6. Switch to the Wis-Daylight tab.
7. Right-click the icon for GenCF.
1. Click Help.
2. This will open a web browser displaying the Help file for the subassembly.
3. Examine the types of information available in the Help file. In particular, the diagram near the top of
the window will describe various behavior in cut and fill.
4. Close the Help file.
8. Click the GenCF subassembly
1. Verify that the side is set to Left
2. For all other parameters, keep the default values.
3. Press Escape.
9. Select the newly placed subassembly.
1. From the subassembly contextual tab, click Mirror Subassembly
2. Click the outermost marker point.
1. Name the assembly, Shoulder Right
2. Set the Assembly type to Other
3. Click OK.
4. Click to place the assembly in the graphic.
11. Select the daylight and shoulder subassemblies from the Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
assembly.
1. From the Subassemblies contextual tab, click Copy to Assembly.
2. Click the new, empty assembly.
Editing Subassembly Properties

If a subassembly needs to be renamed or switched sides, use the subassembly properties. If geometry changes
need to take place, you can use the AutoCAD Properties instead. Using AutoCAD properties, you can edit multiple
subassemblies at once.
12. Select the daylight subassemblies on the Shoulder right and Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders w ditch
assemblies.
1. From the contextual tab (or right-click menu), click Properties.
2. You should see the traditional AutoCAD properties.
1. In the Parameters section of Properties, change the Flat Rate of Cut Slope to 5:1.
2. Change the Flat Rate of Fill Slope to 5:1.
3. Press Escape.
4. Close the AutoCAD Properties palette.
Renaming Subassemblies
All subassemblies in a drawing need to have a unique name. It is a good idea to rename your subassemblies to to
have more user friendly, more identifiable names.
17. Select the main assembly marker.
1. From the contextual tab, click Assembly Properties.

2. Switch to the Construction tab.
3. Use the listing of subassemblies to rename. It is advisable to keep the names simple and to include
the side.
Save the drawing.
080.040 Create corridor Section updated: 10/1/2012

17:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-040-001.mp4
080.040.001 Creating Your First Corridor
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg

2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel > Corridor > Create Simple Corridor.
1. Keep all the defaults.
2. Click OK.
3. Press Enter (to pick alignment from list)
1. Select USH 51 Best fit from Exist.
2. Click OK.
4. Press Enter (to pick profile from list)
1. Verify that USH 51 Best Fit Profile Proposed is the design profile.
2. Click OK.
5. Press enter (to pick assembly from list)
1. Pick the Rural 14 foot lane w shoulders
2. Click OK.
6. In the Target Mapping dialog, click the <Click Here to set All> option at the top of the window. This
will set the daylight surface.
1. Select the Exist surface
2. Click OK.
7. Click OK to complete the target mapping and finish let the corridor build.
8. You should now see the corridor in the plan view.
Getting to Corridor Properties

If you use Civil 3D to design roads you will be constantly jumping in and out of the corridor properties. Get as
comfortable as possible locating corridor properties and getting to the Parameters tab. This is where the majority
of corridor editing and troubleshooting will take place.
1. Select the corridor.
2. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by right-
clicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
3. Click the Parameters tab.
1. Scroll over if necessary to locate the Frequency column.
2. Click the ellipsis in the Frequency column.
3. Set the Along Curves value to 10.
4. Click OK.
4. Click OK to allow the corridor to rebuild.
5. Observe the difference in frequencies by examining the drawing.
Adding Additional Regions
New assembly = new region

There is no such thing as more than one assembly per region.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties
by right-clicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
2. Click the Parameters tab if you are not already there.
2. Right-click the existing region from the parameters tab. You may wish to expand the name column to see
the names belter.
1. Click the region and select Split region.
2. Type in 22900 press enter
4. Press enter to return to the parameters tab.
5. Click OK to dismiss any warning messages.
6. You should now have three regions listed.
1. Click the Assembly column in the middle region you just created.
1. Change the assembly to C&G with sidewalk.

2. Click OK.
2. Click the Set All Targets button.
1. Verify that the Daylight surface for all regions is set to Exist.
2. Click OK.
3. Click OK to complete the edits and rebuild the corridor.
4. Observe the corridor.
Save the drawing End of exercise.
4:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-040-002.mp4
080.040.002 Using a Null Assembly
A null assembly is simply an empty placeholder that can be used to prevent feature lines from jumping across a
region. This is used in bridge locations or through intersections.
1. Continue working in the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [w Assem].dwg
2. From the Home tab > Create Design panel, click Assembly > Create Assembly.
1. Name the assembly Null.
2. Click OK.
3. Click to place the assembly in the graphic.
1. Highlight the first region. Right click the region and select split region.
4. Press enter
5. Click OK to the 0 Station message.
6. Select the new region you just created.
1. Change the assembly to Null.
2. Click OK.
080.050 Target mapping Section updated: 10/1/2012

11:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-050-001.mp4
080.050.001 Corridor Targets
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg
A null assembly is simply an empty placeholder that can be used to prevent feature lines from jumping across a
region. This is used in bridge locations or through intersections.
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has the subassemblies renamed on all assemblies to make
creating targets easier.
1. Select the first region.
2. Click the Elipsis in the target column.
3. Locate the Width target for the Lane - L (2) subassembly.
4. Click the field that currently says <None>
5. From the alignment listing, highlight the alignment called USH 51 Best Fit From Exist - Left
6. Click Add. Be sure the alignment appears in the listing below.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat the process for the right side of the assembly.
9. Click OK to complete the target mapping.
10. Repeat the process for the second and third regions.
Rebuild Your Corridor
7. Select one of the offset alignments.
1. Use the triangular grip to change the offset distance. Any arbitrary change will work for this
example.

2. Press escape to deselect the alignment.

8. Locate the Corridor in Prospector.
1. Notice that there is a yellow warning symbol next to the name of the corridor.
2. Right click the corridor name and select rebuild. (Do NOT use rebuild-automatic.)
080.060 Corridor surfaces Section updated: 6/17/2015

19:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-060-001.mp4
080.060.001 Corridor Surfaces
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg
** NOTE ** Since this recording, WisDOT no longer allows links in the definition of design surface models. See
http://roadwaystandards.dot.wi.gov/standards/fdm/15-05.pdf#fd15-5-7 for current design surface model
requirements and ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-
help.pdf#Roadway_Modeling_Workflow_Tips_ for reasons why this decision was made.
You will need to add boundaries for each corridor surface separately.
Corridor surface creation options vary depending on the complexity of the corridor.
Add Automatically
Corridor Extents as Outer Boundary
Add Interactively
Building a Top Surface

1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has a completed corridor that is ready to add surfaces to.
4. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
2. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Top-USH51.
3. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
4. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown.
5. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
6. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:
1. Daylight
2. EPS
3. ES_Unpaved
4. ETW
5. SGSP
6. SI
If you were to click OK at this point you would have a surface created but the surface would extend beyond the
corridor.
Adding a Boundary
5. Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
1. Click OK.
You should now have a corridor surface that does not extend beyond any of the frequency lines. By adding the
daylight feature line as a boundary, the surface is reigned in.
Datum Surfaces
7. Select the corridor that is associated with Lake Kegonsa Road.
8. From the corridor contextual tab, Click Corridor Properties.
9. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
1. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Datum-Kegonsa.
2. Set the surface style to CRDR Datum Border
2. Verify that the Data type says Links.
3. From the Specify Code menu, select Datum.
5. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
6. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown_Sub.
8. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:

1. Daylight
2. ETW_Sub
9. Click OK.
1. Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
2. Click OK.
3. Back in plan view, click the corridor.
4. From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
2. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
You should see that there is a problem with how Civil 3D is interpreting the surface at the curbs
subbase. This is a common problem caused by the subbase extension beyond the back of the
concrete part of the curb. Civil 3D surfaces cannot contain caves or vertical faces. The tolerance for
being vertical is 0.001. If the geometry of the subassembly would cause a vertical surface or a cave
as the subbase extension does, the surface gets confused trying to resolve it.
This is a very common situation and is easy to correct.
Overhang Correction
14. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.

15. Select the Lake Kegonsa corridor and return to corridor properties.
1. On the Surfaces tab, locate the Overhang correction column.
2. Change the overhang correction to Bottom Links.
3. Click OK and let the corridor rebuild.
2. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
Now the datum surface is in the correct location and no longer zig zags past the back of curb.
080.070 Corridor section editor Section updated: 10/1/2012

14:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-070-001.mp4
080.070.001 Section Editor
In the previous exercise section editor was used to examine the result of the corridor surface. Section editor is a
powerful tool that is capable of much more than just observation.
From section editor you can view every frequency station to view and edit the result of the corridor design.
Section editor shows the section but is NOT related to plotting cross section sheets.
Section editor is a data-driven view that is used to modify the design if necessary. From section editor you can
override subassembly geometry and force daylight slopes to tie into a specific location. Modifications can be made
both numerically (using the parameter editor) and/or graphically (grip edits).
Tips for Working in Section Editor
Be sure any surfaces you wish to view are not set to No Display styles.
Use the Station listing at in the Contextual tab to move between stations.
Perform numeric edits in the parameter editor before making graphic edits
Show both plan and section by using the viewport configuration.
Turn the UCSFOLLOW setting to 0. This will prevent the viewports from resetting every
time you switch views.
Always close the Section editor before closing the file or exiting Civil 3D.
If this cannot be avoided, reset plan view by going to the View tab and changing the view to
Top and changing the named UCS to World.
Working with Section Editor

1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [Section Editor].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed
previous exercises, switch to this file. The example file has a completed corridors and completed surfaces.
2. At the command line, type in UCSFOLLOW and press enter.
1. If the setting shows it is already at a value of 0, press escape.
2. If the setting shows that it is 1, type in 0 and press enter.
3. Select the corridor that is associated with USH 51.
2. From the section editor contextual tab, click Viewport Configuration

1. Set the Layout to Two: Horizontal.
2. Set the Horizontal split to 30%
3. Set Viewport 1 to Plan.
4. Set Viewport 2 to Section.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes to turn on the Section Editor option.
7. Wait a moment for your screen to reconfigure.
Station Selection
5. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Station Selection Panel click the station listing pull-down.
1. Pick station 200+50 from the list.
2. If necessary, click Zoom to Extents from the Section Editor contextual tab >View Tools panel.
Parameter Editor
6. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools , click Parameter Editor
1. Locate the parameter listing for Shoulder - R
2. Change the Paved shoulder width to 6
3. Press enter
4. Wait a moment while the graphic updates.
5. Repeat steps 6b-6d for Shoulder - L
7. Turn on your object snaps and make sure endpoint is one of the active snaps.
Graphic Edits
8. Hold down control key as you click the 4:1 daylight slope on the right side of the assembly.
1. Click the square grip on the rightmost end of the daylight link.
2. Drag the grip over so that the daylight slope is actually sloping down to the existing surface.
3. Use the endpoint snap to place the line.
9. Repeat steps 8a-8c for the left side of the subassembly.
10. Press escape to clear any remaining selections.
11. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools, click Apply to Station Range.
1. Apply the changes you have just made to the stations 200+50 to 202+00.
2. Click OK.
12. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.
Viewing/Deleting Station Overrides

13. Back in plan view, select the corridor.
14. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties.
1. On the parameters tab, locate the overrides column. (You may have to scroll over).
2. Click the ellipsis button in the Overrides column.
3. All stations from 200+50 to 202+00 are listed with checkmarks in both columns for the override
type.
4. If you wish to remove the overrides for any station, highlight the station and click the red X at the
bottom of the dialog box.
Click Ok.
080.080 Corridor command settings Section updated: 10/1/2012

19:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-080-001.mp4
080.080.001 Corridor Command Settings
Every time a corridor is rebuilt, you will see the Panorama screen pop up with any Warnings, Informational
messages or errors that occur. The goal of this lesson is to get you more familiar with the often-cryptic messages
that appear in this listing. You will start to get a feel for what messages you can ignore and which messages
warrant action.
Working with Panorama

1. Open the file crummy corridor.dwg. This corridor has many common errors. You will learn to troubleshoot
and understand many of the messages that pop up when a corridor is rebuilt.
2. From Prospector, locate the corridor named Crummy Corridor.
1. Notice there is a yellow shield icon next to the name of the corridor, indicating that it needs to be
rebuilt.
2. Right-click the name of the corridor and select Rebuild.
A Word on Rebuild and Rebuild-Automatic

Do NOT use Rebuild-automatic.
When the option for rebuild automatic is enabled, the corridor will rebuild itself after all changes to upstream
objects. Changes to Existing surfaces, alignments, profiles, assemblies, target alignments or other targets will
cause the Rebuild- Automatic option to kick in. This will result in frequent periods of waiting while the corridor
rebuilds. While the corridor is rebuilding you cannot do any other tasks. It is much better to leave the option off and
rebuild when you are ready.
3. After you use the rebuild command, you will see panorama pop up and list many warnings and errors.
Notice that you have a long listing of warnings and at each station where the error occurs. You will see the
message twice at each station because of the left and right sides of the assembly.
Corridor Messages and Fixes

This is not a comprehensive list of corridor warning messages, however the warning messages listed are very
common and are easy to address.
Message: Clear zone point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure Clear Zone From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal? No.
Meaning/Source: Your corridor will still be created, however you will not have a Clear Zone feature line
created for use in other places.
Fix: Go into the Assembly Properties and set the Offset to Measure Clear Zone to the ETW of your lanes on
both sides.
Message: Rotation point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure. Rotation Point From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: The rotation point is only used in fill situations to figure out if a single slope to the surface
is needed or two slopes. It is easier to think of it as a test point. If this test point is higher than the Max
Height (10 by default) a shallow AND a steep slope are created. The test is only used on the right side of the
baseline.
Fix: On the right side of the assembly, set the Offset to Measure Rotation Point from to the ETW of your
right lane. If you are only getting this on the left side of your assembly, you can completely ignore this.
Message:
Is it a big deal: The distance between surface and attachment point is too close, use cut situation instead of
fill situation.
Meaning/Source: No.
Fix: In places where your test point is very close to the existing surface the software automatically treats the
section as if it is in cut. Despite the wording, this has already been done and no action is needed by you.
Message: Failed. Point Outside Surface.

Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: Your daylight is not steep enough or you have run out of surface model.
Fix: Change the daylight slope or extend the surface model information.
Message: Intersection with target could not be computed. Cannot find intersection with surface using flat rate
slope when trying to construct final link!
Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor).
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
Message: Failed. Value does not fall within the expected range.
Is it a big deal:Yes
Meaning/Source: There are three main reasons for this error:
Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
One of the subassembly values is bad.
Fix:
3. See if there are zeroed out values that Civil 3D does not like.
Message: Macro file not found at original path specified in subassembly. Updated macro file location to path
defined by AECCCONTENT_DIR environment variable.

Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: This error can be outright ignored. It simply means that the assembly was originally created
on another computer whose paths are different from your computer. It could also mean or an older version of
Civil 3D and then updated.
Fix: There is no fix for this. Just ignore it.
Message: No sideslope intersect found.

Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
Fix:
Message: Target object not found TargetDTM.

Meaning/Source: You probably just forgot to set the Target Surface to your existing surface.
Fix: Go back into corridor properties and set the target surface.
4. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.

5. Click Clear All events.
Using Object Viewer as Diagnosis Tool

7. From the contextual tab, click Object viewer.
8. Use your left mouse button or the view cube to rotate the view into an isometric view. Observe the problems
and close the object viewer.
Reigning in the Corridor Station Range

If you look at the profile, you will see that the length of the existing ground is longer than the length of the design
profile. This is frequently the case. The fix is to change the processing range of the region where the error occurs.
9. Select the corridor and get into the corridor properties.
1. Click the Align
2. Set the start station of the region to 0+64.53.
3. Set the end station of the region to 8+50.
4. Click OK.
10. The corridor is now rebuilt. Return to the object viewer using the instructions from the previous step. You
should observe that the waterfalls are now gone.
Checking Targets & Using Section Editor
11. The cyan boundary is the surface model. There is a hide boundary interfering with the daylighting of the
surface from approximately 2+50 to 3+50.
12. Select the corridor. Go to Section editor.
1. Jump to station 2+75.
2. Open parameter editor.
3. Change the left side Daylight LEFT subassembly Flat Rate of Cut Slope to 6:1.
4. Click Apply to a station range.
1. The start station should already be 2+75
2. Set the End station to 3+00
3. Click OK.
5. Close section editor.
Checking the Assembly

13. Zoom into the assembly.
14. Select the main assembly.
15. Click Assembly Properties.
1. Go to the Construction tab
2. Highlight DAYLIGHT RIGHT. On the right side of the dialog box you will see a list of codes and input
values.
1. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Clear Zone From.
2. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub
3. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Rotation point from.
4. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub

3. Click OK.
16. Open panorama if it is not already open. (Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the panorama icon.)
17. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.
18. Click Clear All events.
19. Rebuild the corridor.
At this point you should have no errors when the corridor rebuilds.
Suppressing Panorama
Once you become VERY GOOD at creating and troubleshoot corridors, you can keep the panorama from popping
up. When you need to see panorama, at any time you can go to the Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the
panorama icon.
20. In the settings tab of the Toolspace locate the drawing name.
1. Right-click on the drawing name and select Edit Drawing Settings.
2. Switch to the Ambient Settings tab.
3. Expand the General category.
4. Set the Show Event Viewer option to No.
5. Click OK.
080.090 Extract corridor data Section updated: 10/1/2012

12:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-090-001.mp4
080.090.001 Extracting Corridor Data
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [EXTRACT DATA].dwg
Items that can Be Extracted:

Feature Lines
Alignments
Profiles
Points
3D Polylines
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 BestFit[EXTRACT DATA].dwg.

2. Highlight the corridor.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel, select Feature Lines from corridor.
1. Click in the graphic on the north edge of paved shoulder (EPS).
2. You will be prompted to clarify your selection. Highlight EPS and click OK.
2. In the Create Feature Line from corridor dialog box:
1. Place a checkmark in the Name Box
2. Name the feature line EPS - Right
3. Change the style to RDWY Shoulder Paved
4. Leave the layer and smoothing options as default.
5. Clear the checkbox next to Create Dynamic Link to corridor.
6. Click OK.
After you click OK you will still be in the command.

7. Repeat the process for the EPS - Left.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel, select Alignment from corridor.
1. Click the daylight feature line (you may want to turn on selection cycling if you are having difficulty
selecting the corridor.)
2. Highlight SI.
3. Click OK.
4. In the Create Alignment from Objects dialog box, rename the alignment to Slope Intercept.
5. Leave all other options as default and click OK.
6. You should now be prompted to create a profile.
7. Change the Profile Label set to No Labels and click OK.
4. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Profile from corridor.
1. Click on the SGSP (shoulder grade slope point) feature line.
2. Highlight SGSP and click OK.
3. Change the Profile Label set to No Labels.
4. Change the Profile Style to PROF Ditch Flowline and click OK.
5. Press escape.
1. From the home tab > Profile and Section views panel click Profile View Create the profile view in the
drawing using all of the default settings.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Points from corridor.
2. In the Create COGO points dialog box, name the new point group Corridor Stakeout.
3. Clear all the checkboxes except for Crown and Daylight.
4. Click OK.
5. Wait a moment while the points are generated.
1. From the Corridor contextual tab > Launch pad panel flyout, select Polyline from corridor.
2. Select any feature line.
3. Confirm the name of the feature line & click OK.
4. To force the 3D polyline to be a 2D polyline:
1. Go to the Modify tab > Design panel flyout
2. Click Convert 3D to 2D polyline. (Do not use the flatten command - use this instead)
080.100 WisDOT standards - corridors Section updated: 7/1/2010

6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-001.mp4
080.100.001 Corridors the application of assemblies along baselines at a given frequency
Corridors are CRITICAL to the overall Civil 3D Object Model They help bring it all together to create a corridor
model
Corridors are dependent on (Parent objects)

Alignments/Profiles
Superelevation
Assemblies
Assembly insertion Frequency
Target Surfaces
Horizontal Targets (Graphics included)
Vertical Targets (Graphics included)
Corridor dependencies (Child objects)

Corridor Point, Link and Shapes
Corridor Feature Lines
Corridor Surfaces
Corridor Surface Boundaries
Objects (Alignments, Profiles) created from Corridor
Grading Feature Lines

Can be created from Corridor Feature lines
Can maintain dynamic relationship to Corridor
Can be used to create specialized Gradings that maintains relationship to Corridor
Comparing to CAiCE
CAiCE Fragments are similar to Civil 3D Subassemblies
CAiCE Templates are similar to Civil 3D Assemblies
CAiCE Roadway Design is similar to Civil 3D Corridor Parameters for one Baseline
CAiCE Scan Line s relate to
Civil 3D Corridor Frequency for one Baseline
Alignment Sample Lines
CAiCE Fragment target alignments, profiles, surfaces is similar to Civil 3D Targets
Glaring Differences between CAiCE and Civil 3D

Civil 3D works directly on surfaces. Cross sections (Sample Line s, Section Views) created after the fact.
Civil 3D works on multiple Baselines in one Corridor
Civil 3D can model VERY complex Design situations such as Intersections, Roundabouts, Interchanges, etc
Civil 3D Targets are set when the Assembly is applied to a Baseline (Alignment) - Region (Sta Range)

combination making standardized Assemblies easier to create, maintain and distribute.

Normal Mass Ordinate Material quantities are computed between surfaces along Sample Lines.
Corridors will be created within their own DWG file or files

Project folder Corridors are found in
\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\Design\Corridor
File Naming
Corridor-<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>.DWG
Example
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-Approaches.DWG
great start!
12:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-002.mp4
080.100.002 WisDOT Standards

Corridor styles
Code sets
Command Settings for Corridor creation
Layers and symbology for Corridors, Assemblies, Corridor Surfaces, etc
Naming Corridor Object

<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>
STH25-4thAve-Approaches
Naming Assembly object

<Road Descr>-<Comment>-<Comment>
STH25-PartSection-DaylightLeft
2Lane-FullSection
Curb Return
Naming Subassemblies within an Assembly

<Comment>-<Subassembly Name>-<Comment>-<Side>
LaneInsideSuper-Inside-Right
2LaneFullSection-LaneInsideSuper-Left
Naming Corridor Surfaces

<Corridor Main Road Name>-Corridor-<Surface Name>
STH25-Corridor-Datum
Corridor Frequency this is the frequency (or spacing) in which an Assembly will be dropped along a Baseline in a
given Region. WisDOT drawing template is set up for frequencies in Design speeds of >= 55 MPH:
50 ft on Tangents, Horizontal Curves and Vertical Curves
5 ft within intersections
When roadway is in horizontal and vertical tangency, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 for all Design Speeds
When roadway is on a horizontal curve:
Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10 (2 ft within intersection)
35mph <= Design Speed <= 55mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25 (5 ft within intersection)
Design Speed >= 60 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 (5 ft within intersection)
When roadway is on a vertical curve:

Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10
35mph <= Design Speed <= 50mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25
Design Speed >= 55 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50
Add frequency lines for all horizontal geometry points, superelevation transition points, profile geometry points, and
profile high/low points.
Designer to add frequency lines at other points of interest such as change of typical section, critical drainage
location, etc.
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces
from the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Corridors - Need to Know!!!
Keep good project organization. Corridors are made up of several objects, changing one Object can greatly affect
the Corridor.
Corridors are used to Create Proposed surfaces. Surfaces are used for many things, including Materials Quantities
and Section Views. It is very important to get good accurate Corridor (etc) surfaces so pay close attention to the
surfaces as they are created.
Corridors can be copied within a DWG file or across a DWG file. This is NOT recommended!
Do not change a Baseline Alignments stationing after it has been used in a Corridor. It could cause problems in the
Corridor or make it obsolete. Try to ensure your Alignment stationing, station equations and location are set before
creating objects using that Alignment.
Corridors can become HUGE. Managing them is imperative:

Do not try to put a HUGE Corridor with multiple intersections in one Corridor. Break it up.
Probably a good idea to only model Roadway approaches and one intersection per Corridor object.
It is harder to manage, but with some work a user can create multiple Corridor Drawing files to make each
file more efficient. Corridors Create Surfaces which are accessible
Stock vBook content

Shows how to create Corridor surfaces using Links. WisDOT workflow promotes the use of Corridor Feature
Lines to create GOOD Corridor Surfaces.
Mentions over modeling your Corridor using closely spaced Corridor Frequencies and that the output of a
Corridor is Sections. This is not true for Wisconsin DOT. We are constructing Corridor models with the idea
they will be usable directly in Automate Machine Guidance with little or no supplemental work. Our Corridor
Frequencies are established with this in mind.
Places emphasis on making sure Baseline Alignments are set before using them as Baselines in a Corridor
Shows how to Explode objects. Do not get in the habit of exploding objects in your Drawing file.
Places emphasis on Creating styles and label styles. Do not worry about these, WisDOT has standard styles
and label styles in the drawing template, use them. If you have need for a new style or label style contact your
local support or Methods Development to get them incorporated into the standard.
Corridors Need to Know!!!

[email protected]
9:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-003.mp4
080.100.003 Corridor example part 1
How to use the WisDOT Palette

Inserting Assemblies and editing
Inserting Subassemblies and editing
Creating a Corridor
Baselines and Regions
Adding Regions
Inserting Regions
Splitting Regions
Removing Regions
Using Inquiry Tool
Applying Assemblies
Frequency
Targets
Turn off Regions that have already been worked on. Turn the other Baselines and Regions back on after you are
done editing
Select and Edit Regions Directly
Corridor Feature Lines
Spikes, waterfalls , gaps/transitions and other problems
Code set styles
9:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-004.mp4
080.100.004 Corridor example part 2
9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-005.mp4
080.100.005 Corrior example part 3
9:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-006.mp4
080.100.006 Corrior example part 4
080.110 Exercise DS0700 - Create assemblies Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-110-create-assemblies.pdf
3:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-001.mp4
1:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-002.mp4
080.110.002 Create corridor dwg
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-003.mp4
080.110.003 Create data shortcut references
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-004.mp4
080.110.004 Create exist surface mask
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-005.mp4
080.110.005 Create profile views
2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-006.mp4
080.110.006 Create assembly object
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-007.mp4
080.110.007 Attach LnGeneric subassembly
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-008.mp4
080.110.008 Attach ShldConstantWidth subassembly
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-009.mp4
080.110.009 Attach GenCF subassembly
1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-010.mp4
080.110.010 Mirror subassemblies
1:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-011.mp4
080.110.011 Change subassembly inputs
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-012.mp4
080.110.012 Label assembly
3:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-013.mp4
080.110.013 Rename subassemblies
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-014.mp4
080.110.014 Copy subassemblies to another assembly
4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-015.mp4
080.110.015 Another way to change subassembly inputs
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-016.mp4
080.110.016 Label assembly
080.120 Exercise DS0800 - Create corridor Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-120-create-corridor.pdf
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-001.mp4
2:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-002.mp4
080.120.002 Open corridor dwg
5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-003.mp4
080.120.003 Create corridor 1
4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-004.mp4
080.120.004 Create corridor 2
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-005.mp4
080.120.005 Review corridor
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-006.mp4
080.120.006 Add second baseline for main road
6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-007.mp4
080.120.007 Add baseline for side road
5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-008.mp4
080.120.008 Add second baseline for side road
3:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-009.mp4

080.130 WisDOT subassembly explanation - superelevation Section updated: 3/1/2013

WisDOT superelevation subassembly guidance
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-130-wisdot-subassemblies-superelevation.pdf
080.130.001 The attached pdf contains guidance on using WisDOT subassemblies that are superelevation-aware. AutoDesk
subassemblies that are superelevation-aware use an alignment attribute called Axis of Rotation (AOR). WisDOT
subassemblies were created prior to the development of AOR and can work incorrectly if not used as described in
the documentation.
While most WisDOT and AutoDesk subassemblies work together, the superelevation-aware subassemblies (lanes
and shoulders) should never be used together. Please read the following documentation for further information.
080.140 WisDOT subassembly explanation - Shoulders Section updated: 3/1/2013

1:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-001.mp4
080.140.001 WisDOT Shoulder Subassemblies
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-002.mp4
080.140.002 WisDOT Shoulders Superelevation Transition
8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-003.mp4
080.140.003 ShldConstWidth - Constant Width Logic
ShoulderSAs-Discussion.dwg
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-004.mp4
080.140.004 ShldConstWidth - Rollover Logic
6:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-005.mp4
080.140.005 SelSubShld = ShldConstWidth + Subgrade Improvement
SelSubShldMultiPave = SelSubShld + Multiple Pavement Options
ShldBrkFrslp = ShldConstWidth - Constant Width + Additional Hinge
080.150 WisDOT subassembly explanation - GenCF Section updated: 3/1/2013

4:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-001.mp4
080.150.001 GenCF Introduction and help file basics
8:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-002.mp4
080.150.002 Cut and Fill basics, Clear Zone, and Rotation Point
1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-003.mp4
080.150.003 Steep and Flat conditions
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-004.mp4
080.150.004 Ditch in Small Fill
4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-005.mp4
080.150.005 Ditch Depth in Small Fill, Minimum Ditch Depth
5:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-006.mp4
080.150.006 Ditch Profiles
7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-007.mp4
080.150.007 Connecting Link Purpose and Minimum Connecting Link Width
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-008.mp4

080.150.008 Ditch Profile Problems
5:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-009.mp4
080.150.009 Final Link Include or Omit, Final Link Slope Override
080.160 Divided highway workflow Section updated: 5/1/2012

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-divided-hwy-corridor-modeling-strategy.pdf
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-start-proj-dataset.zip
Finished project dataset
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-160-finished-proj-dataset.zip
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-001.mp4
080.160.001 The following exercise steps through the best practices for modeling a divided highway with independent
alignments and profiles.
Introduction
5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-002.mp4
080.160.002 Review prepared data
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-003.mp4
080.160.003 Review prepared data 2
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-004.mp4
080.160.004 Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-005.mp4
080.160.005 Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies 2
3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-006.mp4
080.160.006 Setup subgrade shoulder point assemblies 3
6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-007.mp4
080.160.007 Setup subgrade shoulder point corridor creation
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-008.mp4
080.160.008 Setup subgrade shoulder point corridor review
10:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-009.mp4
080.160.009 Setup subgrade shoulder point dynamically linked feature lines
8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-010.mp4
080.160.010 Setup median ditch assembly
1:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-011.mp4
080.160.011 Setup median ditch assembly 2
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-012.mp4
080.160.012 Setup median ditch corridor creation
3:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-013.mp4
080.160.013 Setup median ditch dynamically linked feature lines
5:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-014.mp4
080.160.014 Project median feature lines to profile view
8:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-015.mp4
080.160.015 Develop median ditch profile
2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-016.mp4
080.160.016 Review median ditch profile
9:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-017.mp4
080.160.017 STH 25 4-lane assemblies
5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-018.mp4
080.160.018 STH 25 4-lane assemblies 2
1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-019.mp4
5:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-020.mp4
4:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-021.mp4
5:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-022.mp4
8:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-023.mp4
080.160.023 Create STH 25 4-lane corridor
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-024.mp4
080.160.024 Create STH 25 4-lane corridor 2
4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-025.mp4
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-026.mp4
5:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-027.mp4
080.160.027 Review STH 25 4-lane corridor
4:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-028.mp4
080.160.028 Review exercise workflow
080.170 Controlling corridor daylight slopes with superelevation Section updated: 12/9/2014
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-001.mp4
080.170.001 Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using superelevation. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. An offset
alignment is created for each side of the roadway that requires transition controls. Superelevation data is assigned
to the alignments to control the slopes. A setup corridor is created with generic links that follow the superelevation.
These links are used to create setup surfaces for each of the slopes that need control. The proposed roadway
corridor contains LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies that follow the setup surfaces. GenCF, then parameter
references the slope of the LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies for its slope.
Prerequisites: Offset Alignments, Superimposed Profiles, Superelevation Tabular Editor, Setup Corridors,
Assembly Parameter References
080-170-001 Create Offset Alignments and Superimposed Profiles
Create Offset Alignments

Create an offset alignment of the roadway baseline. The offset should be small, say 0.01. Do this for each
side of the roadway. Example: SlopeControl-L and SlopeControl-R
Create Profile Views for the Offset Alignments

Create a new profile view. Name the profile view as follows <Baseline>-<Side>-<SlopeControl. For
example: STH25-L-SlopeControl and STH25-R-SlopeControl
In each slope control profile view, create a superimposed profile of the proposed baseline profile.
5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-002.mp4
080.170.002 Superelevation
Expand offset alignments in the Toolspace-Prospector. Right click on the alignment and select Edit
Superelevation. In the Superelevation Curve Manager, click the Tabular Editor button. Close the
Superelevation Curve Manager.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window. Type in the beginning station of the project. This
exercise uses GenCF for daylighting. Type in the dominate slope for slopes that need additional control. In
this example, we will control the Connecting Link Slope and the Final Link Slope. We will use the Inside Lane
superelevation to control the connecting link slope and the Outside Lane superelevation to control the final link
slope.
Note: If the alignment does not have any curves, the "Plus" button will not be available. Stations can still
be added manually by right clicking in the Superelevation Tabular Editor window.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window to add another station. Type in the ending station of the
project. Repeat the previous step of typing in the dominant slopes.
Repeat these steps for the opposite side offset alignment.
8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-003.mp4
080.170.003 Create Setup Corridor and Surfaces
Create Setup Corridor Assemblies

From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Setup-Slopes-L and Setup-Slopes-R assemblies and
place them in the drawing. These are the assemblies that will run along the SlopeControl offset alignments
Notice the construction of these assemblies. They consist of a LinkWidthandSlope subassembly that has a
width of 0.01 ft to account for the alignment offset. Then, they include a LinkWidthandSlope for each slope to
be controlled (one for the connecting link slope and one for the final link slope). These subassemblies follow
the superelevation of the offset alignments. The assemblies only include subassemblies for the Connecting
Link slope (Inside Lane) and Final Link slope (Outside Lane), but additional subassemblies can be added to
control other slopes.
Create Setup Corridor

Create a new corridor and name it SlopeControl-Setup. Choose one of the slope control offset alignments as
the baseline. Choose its superimposed profile. Choose the SlopeSetup assembly for that side.
Add another base line to the corridor. Choose the opposite side slope control offset alignment,
superimposed profile and assembly.
There are no targets needed for this corridor. Set the frequency to 2.5 ft. Apply the assembly at all critical
locations.
Create Setup Corridor Surfaces

In the SlopeControl-Setup corridor, go to the Surfaces tab and create two surfaces, SlopeControl-Setup-
ConnectingLink and SlopeControl-Setup-FinalLink.
Define these to surfaces with the ConnectingLink links and the FinalLink links respectively. Check the
Add as Breakline box next to the added links in the surface definitions.
The surface styles can be set to _No Display.
In the Boundaries tab, add a Corridor Shrinkwrap boundary to each corridor surface.
Turn the display of the setup corridor off. Changing the object style to _No Display on the Information tab.
Set the code set style to _No Display on the codes tab. Change the Feature Line style to _No display for
the none style on the Feature Lines tab.

5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-004.mp4
080.170.004 Create Proposed Corridor Assembly
From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Lane Start Slope Control assembly and place it in the
drawing. This is the starting point for creating your proposed roadway assembly. Rename the assembly
appropriately
Notice the construction of the assembly. The assembly consists of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies
(two on each side). These subassemblies target the setup surfaces created earlier as indicated by their
names. The assembly also includes the left a right lanes to start with to assure the LinkOffsetOnSurface
subassemblies are assigned to the proper groups.
Finish creating the proposed roadway assembly by adding additional lanes, shoulders, curb and gutter as
needed. Add GenCF on each side to complete the assembly.
In the assembly properties Construction tab, select one of the GenCF subassemblies. Under the Input
Values, check the Use Parameter Reference button for the following:
Connecting Link Slope = Set to TARGET-ConnectingLink Surf
Steep Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Steep Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
4:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-005.mp4
080.170.005 Create Proposed Corridor
Create the proposed corridor using the proposed corridor assembly. Set the roadway targets as needed.
Pay attention to the surface targets. Target the ConnectingLink-Setup surface and the FinalLink-Setup surface
according to the subassembly names.
7:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-006.mp4
080.170.006 Refine Slopes and Transitions with Superelevation Tabular Editor
Now that the proposed corridor is built, the slopes and transitions can be refined using the superelevation
tabular editor for the Daylight Control Alignment.
Add stations that define the beginning ending locations of the daylight slope transitions. Remember that
FDM 11-15-1.8 states that slopes should not be varied more than 1:1 in 100 ft except in unusual
circumstances.
Rebuild the setup corridor and the proposed corridor. Inspect the slopes.
This workflow can be used for many different situations. For example, the superelevation control can be used to
vary the terrace and daylight slopes in urban areas.
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-007.mp4
080.170.007 Recap
Since the centerline alignment superelevation is already used to control lane and shoulder slope, we made
two offset alignments that contain superelevation data used to control our GenCF slopes. Specifically, in this
example, we use them to control the connecting link and final link slopes. These are the most common slopes
that require variation.
A setup corridor was created that that uses the two offset alignments as base lines. The setup corridor
results in two setup-surfaces. One surface represents the connecting link slopes and the other surface
represents the final link slopes. These slopes vary based on the superelevation entries for the offset
alignments.
Finally, we created our proposed roadway corridor. The assembly for this corridor is like any other roadway
corridor. The difference is the addition of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies. These subassemblies
follow the slopes created by the setup corridor surface. GenCF then parameter references the
LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies.
080.180 Controlling corridor daylight slopes with profiles Section updated: 4/13/2015
6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-001.mp4
080.180.001 Create Assembly
Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using profiles. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. The
elevation data that makes up the profile definition is used to define slope values. A profile is created to represent
the slope of any link in the corridor that varies. The elevation of the profile is equal to the inverse of the desired
slope value.
Prerequisite: Assembly Parameter References
Create Proposed Corridor Assembly
From the WisDOT Assemblies Palette, choose the Road Start Profile Slope Control assembly and place it
in the drawing. This is the starting point for creating your proposed roadway assembly. Rename the
assembly appropriately
Notice the construction of the assembly. The assembly consists of eight ProfileToParameterRef
subassemblies (four on each side). These subassemblies target the profiles that we will create later, as
indicated by their names. The assembly also includes the left a right lanes to start with to assure the
ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies are assigned to the proper groups.
Finish creating the proposed roadway assembly by adding additional lanes, shoulders, curb and gutter as
needed. Add GenCF on each side to complete the assembly.
In the assembly properties Construction tab, select one of the GenCF subassemblies. Under the Input
Values, check the Use Parameter Reference button for the following:
Connecting Link Slope = Set to TARGET-ConnectingLink Surf
Steep Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Steep Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
There are also additional ProfileElevationToSlope subassemblies that are used for beam guard scenarios
(Shoulder Break Slope and Grading Link Slope). We will not use these for this exercise, but there is no
harm in leaving them in the assembly for possible future use.
Note: Avoid attaching the ProfileTopParameterRef subassembly to the baseline of the assembly if they
will not be used. This will cause the section editor to zoom out and the section views to be distorted.
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-002.mp4
080.180.002 Create Profiles and Profile Views
Lock in Primary Profile View

Since we will be creating profiles at very small elevations for the primary roadway baseline, we need to lock
in the profile view height. This will keep the profile view from stretching to a large elevation range. To do this,
go into the profile view properties Elevations Tab, and make sure that User Specified Height is checked.
Create First Slope Control Profile View

Create a new profile view. Name the profile view the same as the slope that will be controlled. Example:
25-L-ConnectingLink
Profile view styles is SlopeControl
Set the profile view height to -1 minimum, 1 maximum. That range works well if using profile slope control
with GenCF because GenCF takes the inverse of the profile elevations to get slope (elevations less than 1).
Other subassembly may use the elevation directly for slope. In that case, the profile elevation view range
would need to be expanded.
For Profile Display Options, uncheck the draw box for all of the profiles. We will be creating slope control
profile per profile view.
For the Data Bands, select the No Display data band set. Data bands do not offer useful information for this
application.
Create First Slope Control Profile

Create a new Profile for slope control. Name it appropriately. Example: 25-L-ConnectingLink
Profile Style is user preference.
Profile label set is SlopeControl.
Use the Profile Station From Plan transparent command to select a location along the alignment before and after
the project limits. For elevation, enter the dominant slope for the project. Example: 0.25 for for 4:1
5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-003.mp4
080.180.003 Create Remaining Slope Control Profiles and Profile Views
Create Remaining Slope Control Profiles

Create the rest of the slope control profiles in the same profile view as the first one. By creating them initially
in the single profile view, it makes creating the remaining profile view easier.
HINT: If the dominant slope is the same for the remaining slope control profiles, you can just use object
snaps to pick the VPI locations the same as the previous profile.
Create Profile Views for Each Slope Control Profile

Select the first slope control profile view created earlier and go into the profile view properties.
In the Profiles Tab, uncheck the Draw box for each profile, except for the one designated for that profile view.
Create a new profile view. Use the same procedure as demonstrated in 080-180-002. In the Profiles Tab,
uncheck the Draw box for each profile, except for the one designated for that profile view.
Repeat this for each slope control profile.
3:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-004.mp4
080.180.004 Create Proposed Corridor
Create the proposed corridor using the proposed corridor assembly. Set the roadway targets as needed. Pay
attention to the Profile targets. Target the ConnectingLink and the FinalLink profiles according to the subassembly
names.
3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-005.mp4
080.180.005 Refine Slopes and Transitions
Now that the proposed corridor is built, the slopes and transitions can be refined using the slope control
profiles.
Add VPI stations that define the beginning ending locations of the daylight slope transitions. Remember that
FDM 11-15-1.8 states that slopes should not be varied more than 1:1 in 100 ft except in unusual
circumstances.
Rebuild the proposed corridor. Inspect the slopes.
080.180.006 Retrofitting Existing Projects
Select the ProfileToParameterRef subassembly from the subassemblies palette.

Then, type I for Insert.
Type B for Before.
Select the lane assembly nearest to the baseline.
Repeat this process for each slope control profile that is needed.
Remember to rename the ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies for easy recognition later.
In the assembly, set up the parameter references as desired so they point to the appropriate
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly.
Create the slope control profiles and profile views as demonstrated in this module.
080.180.007 Converting a Superelevation Slope Control Project to a Profile Slope Control Project
To convert a superelevation slope control project to a profile slope control project, select the
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly from the subassemblies palette.
Type R for Replace at the command line.
Select one of the LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies used for superelevation slope control in the assembly.
Repeat the process for each LinkOffsetOnSurface subassembly used for superelevation slope control.
Remember to rename the ProfileToParameterRef subassemblies for easy recognition later.

In the assembly, set up the parameter references as desired so they point to the appropriate
ProfileToParameterRef subassembly.
Create the slope control profiles and profile views as demonstrated in this module.
The setup corridor used in the superelevation slope control workflow is no longer needed. Go into the setup
corridor properties. In the Surfaces tab, each of these surfaces can be deleted.
Once the surfaces are deleted, the setup corridor can also be deleted.
Open the tabular editor for each superelevation slope control alignment. Export the superelevation data.
Use that information for reference when creating the slope control profiles. Once the slope control profiles
have been established, the slope control alignments used in the superelevation method can be deleted.
Target the slope control profiles and rebuild the corridor.
080.190 Roundabout modeling workflow demo Section updated: 4/13/2015

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-190-proj-dataset-fin.zip
080.190.000 Prerequisite
Have a working knowledge of how to develop baseline alignments, offset alignments, design profiles, assemblies,
corridors with horizontal targets and vertical targets, corridor surfaces, and refinement surfaces within a WisDOT
project structure. .
Workflow
The purpose of this workflow is to create a system of setup corridors which is used to develop the profiles within a
roundabout intersection. The workflow results in profiles for all curbs within the intersection which are used to
control elevation in the design corridor. Roundabout horizontal geometry development is not taught in this training,
this training focuses on development of vertical design, and final modeling of a roundabout intersection.
Objective
In this training session the instructor will demonstrate a roundabout modeling dataset that uses a system of setup
corridors to more easily synchronize the profiles for all curbs within a roundabout intersection. The project data the
instructor uses in the videos is available for download.
3:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-001.mp4
Advanced Civil 3D workflow training

Beginner Roadway Design track is a prerequisite
Workflow concept, not a demonstration
Data available
Roundabout horizontal geometry is established
No vertical geometry yet
Alignments on all curb flange lines
Workflow primary purpose profile development on all curbs
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-002.mp4
080.190.002 Project Data Walk Through
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-003.mp4
080.190.003 Hierarchy of elevation control concept
6:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-004.mp4
080.190.004 The tilted plane controls the circulatory roadway elevation
A single feature line provides elevation controls for the circulatory roadway portion of the intersection.
6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-005.mp4
080.190.005 Circulatory roadway setup corridor
The Top surface from the circulatory roadway setup corridor give the designer the information needed to develop

the splitter island curb profile.
3:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-006.mp4
080.190.006 Setup corridor system purpose
6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-007.mp4
080.190.007 Determining outside quadrant curb profiles
1. Approach roadway setup corridors

2. Determining outside quadrant curb profiles
7:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-008.mp4
080.190.008 Outside quadrant curb profiles come from multiple sources
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-009.mp4
080.190.009 Working with the setup corridor system
With the setup corridor system in place, it can be used to develop the profiles for all curb lines. The dynamic
nature of the data set gives immediate feedback to the designer of how changing one curb profile will affect the
other curb profiles in the intersection.
5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-010.mp4
080.190.010 Elevation Control from setup corridors to design corridors
An explanation of how the setup corridor system provides the elevation control of all curbs within the roundabout
intersection.
4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-011.mp4
080.190.011 An alternate explanation of how elevation control from setup corridors influence the design corridors
8:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-012.mp4
080.190.012 Roundabout modeling workflow concepts overview
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-013.mp4
080.190.013
080.200 Modeling beam guard energy absorbing terminals (BG EATs) Section updated: 6/17/2015
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-001.mp4
080.200.001 General exercise discussion
This exercise steps through modeling BG EATs from developing horizontal geometry to creating corridor surfaces.
Its intent is to combine many pieces of knowledge into a single, very common workflow for WisDOT projects.
Some things to keep in mind with this exercise:
This is not beginner level material.
It should not be considered a replacement for learning the fundamentals of the topics covered in this
exercise.
Common scenarios and best practices will be highlighted, but individual projects may require or benefit from
different techniques.
Four BG EATs will be modeled. Horizontal curve and superelevation will be present. Two EATs will be in full
pavement replacement. Two EATs will be added onto existing shoulders.
This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-000.dwg
1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-002.mp4
080.200.002 BG EAT modeling - requirements
BG EAT geometry is based on SDD 14b44 for the Midwest Guardrail System. This is the system that this exercise
will model.
Cross sections are required for the beginning of the shoulder taper, posts 1, 5, & 9 per FDM 11-45-2.4.1.3. General
design considerations for roadside barrier design can be found in FDM 11-45-2 Roadside Barrier Design Guidance.
Design model requirements pertaining to BG EATs can be found in FDM 15-5-7
3:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-003.mp4
080.200.003 BG EAT horizontal geometry - discussion
To model the BG EAT with a corridor, the following horizontal geometry is needed:
Beam guard flare
Hinge point line
Grading line (extended vehicle runout path)
Edge of shoulder. This edge is the gravel shoulder outside of the hinge point line taper. This edge becomes a
paved shoulder at the BG EAT.
In this exercise, all geometry will be added into the corridor file. This is acceptable practice for WisDOT projects,
but may not be a best practice for a specific project, for specific edgeline objects.
This geometry has been built into parametric blocks for use at WisDOT. There are six of them that model the
following situations:
Left side, tangent section
Left side, left hand curve
Left side, right hand curve
Right side, tangent section
Right side, left hand curve
Right side, right hand curve
The blocks have the following characteristics:
All blocks have an insertion point at the face of beam guard at Post 9.
Left and right side are based on the location of the baseline. For example, if there was a BG EAT on the
inside of a divided highway, it would be considered left side in the cardinal direction.
Proper layer assignment and line display is set by object within the block. Left and right side designations to
certain layers have been added to make corridor targeting easier.
All blocks have been built with Post 1 being the first post that is encountered in the cardinal direction. This
means that blocks may need to be mirrored to locate properly. Left and right side blocks should always be
located on the correct side of the baseline.
All geometry is stored in polylines except for the grading lines. These lines could not be stored as polylines
and made parametric. They are line objects.
The blocks have the following parameters:
Distance from paved shoulder to total shoulder
Curved blocks have a radius of total shoulder
The taper of the paved shoulder from normal width to total width is 10:1
4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-004.mp4
080.200.004 Place BG EAT horizontal geometry
Make the tool palette group "WisDOT Parametric Design" visible.
Click on the BG EAT block to place.
In the EXECUTETOOL command
Type R to immediately rotate the block to the correct angle.
Click two points to set the block angle.
Click to place the BG EAT at the face of the beam guard at Post 9.
Select the block. Open the Properties window. Edit the DistanceFromPavedToTotalShoulder and
TotalShoulderRadius values as necessary.
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-005.mp4
080.200.005 Place BG EAT horizontal geometry (cont'd)
Repeat as necessary.
Blocks added with Post 9 being first on stationing need to be mirrored.
Radius for right side curve total shoulder = 2882.784'

Radius for right side curve total shoulder = 2846.784'
3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-006.mp4
080.200.006 Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting
Any horizontal geometry that will be used for corridor targeting and shared to another file should be turned into
alignment objects. Horizontal geometry that will not be shared can be polyline objects. In this exercise, the
following object types will be used:
Alignments
Beam guard
Total shoulder/Hinge point line
Paved shoulder
Pavement edge
Clear zone
Polylines
Grading line
Break from 4% to 10:1 cross slope for gravel shoulder
Steps
Explode BG EAT blocks by clicking on all blocks to select them and typing X, Enter at the command line to
EXPLODE them.
Select the Grading lines. Right click, on the menu click "Convert to Polyline".
Create offset alignments for pavement edges: 25-L-EP, 25-R-EP
Create offset alignments for paved shoulders: 25-L-EPS, 25-R-EPS
Add widenings through beam guard area.
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-007.mp4
080.200.007 Convert horiz geom into alignments for targeting (cont'd)
** TIP ** Civil 3D will allow alignment objects to have physical gaps. Never have physical gaps for alignments with
stationing or used as targets. They don't work past the first gap. Use masks for visual breaks in objects.
Create object-based alignments for gravel shoulder that follow the hinge line behind the BG EATs: 25-L-
EGS, 25-R-EGS
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-008.mp4
Create object-based alignments for beam guard: 25-L-BG-442, 25-R-BG-442
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-009.mp4
Offset edge of pavement alignments to create clear zone polylines.
Trim the Grading line polylines back to the clear zones. These will be left as polylines.
** TIP ** Create all BG EATs horizontal geometry objects prior to modeling. This will allow targeting all objects with
the same assemblies once and copying the regions to all BG EATs locations.
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-010.mp4
080.200.010 Add slope targeting profile views and profiles
Slope Control Profiles
The slope variation through the beam guard area is controlled by profiles. See training 080-180 for an explanation
of how profiles can be used to control roadway slopes. A slope control profile is needed for the following slopes in
the beam guard assembly:
Shoulder Break Slope
Connecting Link Slope
Final Link Slope
Grading Link Slope
The PVI stations and slopes entered here will vary from project to project, but these are the key minimum locations
that are needed:
Shoulder Break Slope: 25-L-Slp-ShldBreak, 25-R-Slp-ShldBreak
Post 9 = Steep Slope
Post 5 = Clear Zone Slope
Connecting Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-ConnLink, 25-R-Slp-ConnLink
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Clear Zone Slope
Steep Section Behind Beam Guard = Steep Slope. This location is not pre-determined, but rather a project
decision. A good place to start is 100 FT from the Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone.
Grading Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-Grdg, 25-R-Slp-Grdg

Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is determined in a later step. Add this
station to the profile definition at the end of the workflow.)
Final Link Slope: 25-L-Slp-Final, 25-R-Slp-Final

Vary as need per project
Steps
Create one profile view associated with alignment 25 with one of the profiles above. Create a start and end
point of the profile both with an elevation of 0.25 (4:1 slope for flat).
Create the rest of the profiles by snapping to the first profile in the profile view.
Turn off all the slope control profiles but one in the profile view.
Copy and paste the profile view until there is one profile view for each slope control profile. This makes
editing each profile easier.
Name each profile view appropriately and make the associated profile the only one visible for that profile
view.
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-011.mp4
080.200.011 Add slope targeting profile views and profiles (cont'd)
Copy profiles
Select the profile (not profile view).
Right click, click Basic Modify Tools...Copy.
At the command line, type D Enter.
Rename the profile.
Repeat for all slope control profiles
5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-012.mp4
080.200.012 Add slope targeting profile views and profiles (cont'd)

Turn off all profiles except one in the profile view
and set the labels to SlopeControl.
Copy profile views

Select the profile view (not profile).
Click on the square grip, this is a stretch command.
Press the Space Bar to change to a Move command.
At the command line, type C for Copy.
Repeat for all profile views.
** TIP ** If setting slope control profiles for a long station range, stack all profile views in a single column
with left-most outside slope on top moving down to right-most outside slope on bottom.
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-013.mp4
080.200.013 This subtopic starts with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-003.dwg
WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies - discussion
Use conditional subassemblies to automate the corridor modeling through the beam guard areas. There
are left and right assemblies for 2 lane full reconstruction and shoulder only BG EATs that can be found
on the WisDOT Assemblies palette. These assemblies and their subs can be used as building blocks for
custom assemblies if project conditions are different.
Key attributes of these assemblies:
All assemblies use profiles for key slope values that need to vary along the corridor. The WisDOT
sub ProfileToParameterRef is used for this purpose. WARNING: If a different Autodesk or WisDOT
profile targeting sub is used, it will likely display in cross section output and cause section views to
be extremely large. All of the values of the profile will be less than 1.0. This essentially means
using other subs will cause section views to be as tall as the elevation of the project.
All assemblies use ShldBreakFslp for the shoulder. This sub allows the shoulder to have the 10:1 slope
between the 4% top and the shoulder foreslope which varies between 4:1 and 2.5:1. One key item to
understand about ShldBreakFslp is that it is built with the break occurring outside the total shoulder
width.
All assemblies use CFGen. Values for CFGen should always be verified before usage. Override
Ditch Bottom is by default set to "Profile". This is good if a ditch profile has been established.
Change this value to "No" if there is no ditch profile. Clear zone and rotation point values need to be
set correctly for the sub to work correctly for a project.
The Rehab No Lane assemblies also use the ShldBreakFslp sub, but then add a surface targeting
sub to get the start of Datum and Base layers. Design surfaces are created using these points for
corridor feature lines. Corridor links are not used in WisDOT cross sections and surfaces.
7:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-014.mp4
080.200.014 Insert and adjust WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies
Insert the assemblies into the drawing.
Civil Imperial Subassemblies... WisDOT Assemblies tool palette.
BG-L - Profile Slope Control
BG-R - Profile Slope Control
BG-L-Rehab-NoLane - Profile Slope Control
BG-R-Rehab-NoLane - Profile Slope Control
Rename them to something meaningful for the project.
25-L-BG-ShldrOnly, 25-L-FullReplace-BG, 25-R-BG-ShldOnly, 25-R-FullReplace-BG
Establish the desired parameters for pavement structure and for each GenCF subassembly. Parameter
references are preset in the assembly. Do not change the established parameter references. For this exercise,
subassembly value changes:
LnGeneric
Pavement Depth (Inside and Outside Edge) = 0.5 ft
BaseDepth = 0.0'
SubbaseDepth = 0.0'
DepthToSubGrade = 1.5'
ShldBrkFslp
Pavement Height = 0.5'

Base Depth = 0.0'

Subbase Depth = 0.0'
Depth to Subgrade = 1.5'
Paved Shoulder Width = 3.0'
Foreslope of Shoulder = 10:1
CFGen
Foreslope Slope = 6:1
Foreslope Width = 8.0'
Clear Zone Distance = 26.0'
Offset to Measure Clear Zone From = 12'
Minimum Fill Height = 1'
Optional Ditch in Small Fill Situations = Yes
Ditch Depth in Small Fill = 1.0'
Distance to Rotation Point = 26' (same as Clear Zone)
Offset to Measure Rotation Point From = 12'
Override Ditch Bottom Elevation = No
Minimum Width of Connecting Link = 0.0'
Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link = Include
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-015.mp4
080.200.015 Insert and adjust WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies (cont'd)
Follow steps above for NoLane-Rehab assemblies.
6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-016.mp4
080.200.016 BG assembly special features discussion
Show where assembly values are using parameter references to the slope control profiles.
NoLane-Rehab assemblies have additional subs (LinkWidthAndSlope with ExtMultiOpt) to create start of surface
slopes on existing surface.
Conditional subassemblies control behavior within the limits of the grading lines and are used to display beam
guard.
6:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-017.mp4
080.200.017 Edit shoulder break slope control profiles
The PVI stations and slopes entered here will vary from project to project, but these are the key
minimum locations that are needed:
Shoulder Break Slope
Post 9 = Steep Slope
Post 5 = Clear Zone Slope
Connecting Link Slope
Steep Section Behind Beam Guard = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Clear Zone Slope
Grading Link Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is
determined in a later step. Add this station to the profile definition at the end of the
workflow.)
Final Link Slope
Vary as need per project
Add the key transition points above to each appropriate profile.
Change the view configuration to have one Top view over the BG EAT and one view on
the profile view being edited.
Use the transparent command Profile Station from Plan with the Profile Geometry Editor to snap to key
transition points.

9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-018.mp4
080.200.018 Create corridor, baselines, regions, set frequencies
** TIP ** This exercise leaves the assemblies as left and right and builds the corridor accordingly. There
are other ways to structure assemblies and corridors that may be better suited to a specific project.
** TIP ** Civil 3D does not allow overlapping stations on the same baseline. To use the same alignment
for overlapping left and right side assemblies, create 2 baselines with the same alignment and profile
definition: BL-25-R, BL-25-L
Create the roadway corridor 25-BG. The beam guard corridor region should extend to the end(s)
of the 15:1 taper(s). All the subassembly targets in the BG EAT assemblies are named so target
mapping is apparent.
Once target mapping is completed, build the corridor.
5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-019.mp4
080.200.019 Create corridor, baselines, regions, set frequencies (cont'd)
7:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-020.mp4
080.200.020 Create corridor, baselines, regions, set frequencies (cont'd)
** TIP ** If the Clear_Zone or Rotation_Point feature line is not continuous in either direction at the station where
the Grading Line meets the Clear Zone, add a corridor section 0.01 ft before and 0.01 ft after that station.

5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-021.mp4
080.200.021 Initial corridor discussion
** TIP ** If the same assembly is going to be used in multiple regions, all targets can be assigned at
once. Then copy the region by:
Click on the corridor in Modelspace to select it and right-click.
Click "Modify Region" "Copy Regions" to copy a region with targets intact. Regions can also be
copied to different baselines.
7:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-022.mp4
080.200.022 Extend corridor, modify Grading Line for constructability
Build a polyline for a constructable grading link for each BG EAT
Draw a polyline that follows the subgrade shoulder point at Post 9. Set the elevation of the polyline
to 0.
Offset the polyline by 8 ft away from the centerline.
Trim the Grading Line to this polyline.
Rebuild the corridor.
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-023.mp4
080.200.023 Extend corridor, modify Grading Line for constructability (cont'd)
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-024.mp4
080.200.024 Modify slope profiles to fit new grading lines
Grading Link Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is
determined in a later step. Add this station to the profile definition at the end of the
workflow.)
Add the key transition points above to each appropriate profile.
Change the view configuration to have one Top view over the BG EAT and one view on
the profile view being edited.
Use the transparent command Profile Station from Plan with the Profile Geometry Editor to snap to
key transition points.

4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-025.mp4
080.200.025 Create corridor surfaces
In the corridor Properties dialog box, Feature Lines tab
Turn off the connection of the SI, SGSP, Hinge_Cut, Hinge_Fill, Hinge, Daylight_Cut, Daylight_Fill, and any
other feature lines not used for surface creation.
In the corridor Properties dialog box, Surfaces tab
Create the Crdr-Datum, Crdr-Top, and Crdr-Base surfaces. The following lists of feature lines are typical for
these surfaces, but may not be all inclusive:
Datum Top Base

Break_Point Break Base_Start
Clear_Zone Crown Crown_Pave1
Crown_Sub Clear_Zone ETW_Pave1
Datum_Start Daylight EPS_Base (integral shoulder only)
Daylight Daylight_Sub
Daylight_Sub Ditch_Point
Ditch_Point EPS
ETW_Sub ES_Unpaved
GRDG ETW
Rotation_Point GRDG
Rotation_Point
Top_Start
Define the corridor surface boundaries.
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-026.mp4
080.200.026 Verify feature lines in corridor surfaces
** TIP ** Maximum surface triangle length can be modified to remove unwanted interior triangles.
3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-027.mp4
080.200.027 Review surfaces, final comments
This subtopic ends with ProjectID\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-005.dwg
Use the steering wheel to analyze in 3D.

Module 090 Intersections

090.010 Intersection basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
Intersection exercise files
23:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-010-001.mp4
090.010.001 Intersections Overview.dwg
Intersection Overview
The intersection tool is for:
Laying out the horizontal geometry of the corridor
Creating the vertical geometry based on the horizontal layout
Creating the assembly portion of the corridor
The result of the Intersection tool:

A complex corridor with multiple baseline alignments, regions and targets for width and profiles.
The corridor from an intersection is the same as any you create manually. It is just done more quickly,
and the computations of slopes and targets are done for you
Corridor Intersection Concepts

Series of corridor regions
Primary and Secondary alignments and profiles
Generally from centerline to outside
Use different baseline alignments in curb returns
Between 8 and 9 regions (depends on crown-match)
T-intersection Regions
Review Intersection Corridor Design
To use the intersection tool for full design you will need:
Two alignments that intersect
4-way intersections, these alignments should cross
3-way intersections, the secondary road alignment should snap to the primary alignment
A profile for both of the alignments

If you have alignments and no profiles you will only get (2D) horizontal layout of the intersection
Assemblies for the type of design

Generally 4 8 assemblies
Main road design in primary and secondary road
Through the intersection
Curb return areas
Fill areas where regions overlap
Curb return on one side and main road design on the other side
What you CAN have, but dont NEED

Alignment for lane edges
Profiles to create lane slopes
An already existing corridor to add the intersection area to
The intersection can overlap already designed regions
Warning about locked profile

Due to data shortcuts
Just select Continue to Use These Profiles
090.020 Intersection creation Section updated: 10/1/2012

9:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-001.mp4
090.020.001 Intersection Wizard
The Intersection tool is located in the Home tab > Create Design panel > Intersection
You must identify the point of intersection between the two alignments
You will need to identify which alignment is considered primary

General tab of the wizard

Intersection corridor type, all crowns or primary maintained
Geometry Details Tab

Offset Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments or targets existing
For primary and secondary roadways
Curb Return Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments around curb returns
Provides lane widening for incoming and outgoing for each quadrant of intersection
Lane Slope Parameters
Provides profile elevations at offset alignment location with slope calculated, or targets an existing
profile
Curb Return Profile Parameters
Calculates the elevation tie-in points around the curb return alignment
Corridor Regions tab

Can add corridor definition to new corridor or to an existing corridor
Assign a surface for daylight targets
Assembly assignments for the different design needs for the corridor through the intersection
These assignments provide schematics of typical assemblies that are appropriate
Can save the assembly assignments in an Assembly Set for import into other future projects
Warning about locked profile

Due to data shortcuts
Just select Continue to Use These Profiles
21:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-002.mp4
090.020.002 Intersections.dwg
Example discussion
090.030 Intersection editing Section updated: 10/1/2012

23:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-030-001.mp4
090.030.001 Intersection Editing.dwg
Editing Intersections
Intersections create corridor objects which can be edited like any corridor (see videos on Corridor creation and
editing)
Corridor can be manually/graphically adjusted/edited
The settings chosen for the intersection during creation can also be edited
Be Aware! Manual edits will be lost if the intersection is edited and rebuilt
Editing in the Corridor Properties

Parameters tab
Often useful for changing target assignments
Changing frequency
Other indirect Corridor edits

Changing assembly parameters
Changing horizontal alignment geometry
Changing vertical profile geometry
Graphic Editing
Limited to provided grip points
Each region has arrow and diamond grips at its ends
Diamonds shift both regions together
Arrows shift only one region can create gaps
Can shift ends of intersection long corridor

Can snap to the next region or corridor

Direct Intersection Editing

Select the Intersection symbol
Green Context Ribbon > Modify panel
Edit Offsets
Edit Curb Returns
Side Road Profile *
Lane Slopes
Curb Return Profiles
Recreate Corridor Regions *
Modify Tools
Edit Offsets/Curb Returns/Lane Slopes/Curb Return Profiles
Same dialogs as when creating the intersection
No OK/Apply changes are immediate
Selecting fields/names highlight the offset in design
Schematic at bottom to help identify what the selected field needs
Side Road Profile

Controls the automated secondary profile control
If the primary profile is adjusted the secondary should lock to it and adjust as well.
Data shortcut profile data does NOT adjust (the messages we have received)
These are the settings for that adjustment if not using data shortcuts
Recreate Corridor Regions

Same as last page of Intersection Wizard
Create new or add to exiting corridor
Daylight surface
Assemblies/assembly set
Previous changes will be lost
090.040 WisDOT standards - intersections Section updated: 10/1/2012

4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-001.mp4
090.040.001 Intersection object combines selected objects with input parameters to create the geometrics and corridor for an
intersection
The Intersection Wizard guides the user through the process of creating an Intersection
Inputs for the Intersection Wizard

Primary Road and Profile
Secondary Road and Profile

Note if the Intersection is to be used to control the Secondary Road profile within the Intersection the
Secondary Road Profile must be present in the current Drawing File (it cannot be brought into the file as a
Reference to a Data Shortcut)
Intersection type
Primary Road crown maintained
All Crowns maintained
Offsets for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main and Secondary Roads
Slope Parameters for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main Road and Secondary Road
Intersection Quadrant inputs

Curb Return parameters
Type
Radius
Transition and Widening details at Incoming Lane
Transition and Widening at Outgoing Lane
Radii

Secondary Road Profile Rules

Main Road Profile can Control the Secondary Road Profile at the Intersection
Lane Slopes
Cross Fall from Centerline for Main and Secondary Roads
Curb Return Profile parameters
Corridor (Create, append to, or do not build Corridor)
Target Surface
Assembly set
OR Select Assemblies
By Region
Intersection Wizard creates

Intersection Object
Lane Offset
Alignments
Profiles
For Main and Secondary Road
Curb Return
Alignments
Profiles
For all Quadrants
Corridor
Baseline and Regions for Intersection
Note - can add to an existing Corridor
The Intersection Object maintains the relationships between the parent objects, and the child objects using the
input parameters
Intersections will be contained in the Corridor DWG files

Project folder - Corridors are found in
File Naming
Example
great start!

Styles associated with Intersection
Alignments
Profiles
Assembly
Corridors
Label styles
Command Settings for Intersection creation
Layers and symbology for Intersection Objects
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-002.mp4
090.040.002 Intersection example discussion
7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-003.mp4
090.040.003 Naming Intersection Object
Intersection
<Main Road> And<Secondary Road>-<Comment>
STH25And4thAve

Offset Alignments (Offset Profiles named the same)

<Parent Alignment> -<Side>-<Offset>
STH25-Right-12.00
Curb Return Alignments (Curb Return Profiles named the same as Alignments)
<Intersection Name> -<Quadrant>-Quadrant
STH25And4thAve-NE-Quadrant
Corridor Regions
RG-<Assembly Name> -<(Counter)>
RG-STH25-2Lane-Full-Section (1)
WisDOT Sharing the Intersection

Made up of Alignments, Profiles and Corridor(s). All of these objects can be shared in one way or another. The
Intersection Object itself cannot be shared.
Special note for Corridors
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces from
the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Intersections Need to Know!!!

The Intersection object is the glue that holds the Intersection parent objects, Intersection inputs and the Intersection
child objects together. This link can be broken in many ways. For example, you manually edit a Curb Return
Alignment that was Created using the Intersection Wizard. The inputs used to create the Alignment are no longer
valid. If you go back and edit the Intersection inputs to update that same Curb Return Alignment the manual edits
are no longer valid. This is one example of many. It is very important to understand how to edit an Intersection.
WisDOT workflow places the Secondary Road Alignment and Profile in the Corridor DWG file. This is done do the
Intersection object can adjust the Secondary Road Profile to match the Main Road Profile. This cannot be done if
the Secondary Road Profile is Data Referenced into the Corridor (Intersection) DWG file. It is probably easier to
have Civil 3D maintain the relationship between the two profiles than relying on us to go back and adjust them to
match if we make changes.
The Intersection wizard/object is incredibly powerful, but remember it is a start. We will most likely need to modify
the child objects after the Intersection has been created. Our workflow outlines methods to do this. More
specifically, the workflow outlines the procedures to
Add Base Course Shoulder Geometry
Check Curb Return Profiles
Add Adjusted Curb Return Profiles
Add Geometry to better represent Curb Return Alignment Tapers on the Side Road
Edit the Corridor
[email protected]
Intersections Custom content

Talk through the STH25 Intersection and discuss
Show Diagram of Intersection, Baselines and Regions
Quick demo on Intersection
Edit Intersection Objects

Transitions/Tapers for 4th Ave
Profile View for Curb Returns
Corridor
Targets for CABC shoulder

Targets for New Curb Return Profiles
Null Assembly through Intersection along 4th Ave
090.050 Exercise DS0900 - Move alignment source Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-050-move-alignment-source.pdf
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-001.mp4
1:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-002.mp4
2:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-003.mp4
090.050.003 Promote data shortcut objects
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-004.mp4
090.050.004 Remove data shortcuts
0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-005.mp4
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-006.mp4
090.050.006 Delete original object source
090.060 Exercise DS1000 - Create intersection Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-060-create-intersection.pdf
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-001.mp4
1:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-002.mp4
5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-003.mp4
090.060.003 Insert intersection assemblies 1
5:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-004.mp4
4:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-005.mp4
2:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-006.mp4
090.060.006 Create intersection general dialog
3:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-007.mp4
090.060.007 Intersection offset parameters dialog
8:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-008.mp4
090.060.008 Intersection curb return parameters
2:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-009.mp4
090.060.009 Intersection lane slope parameters dialog
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-010.mp4
090.060.010 Create intersection corridor regions dialog
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-011.mp4
4:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-012.mp4
090.060.012 Review exercise
090.070 Exercise DS1100 - Fix intersection geometry Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-070-fix-intersection-geometry.pdf
4:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-001.mp4
2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-002.mp4
5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-003.mp4
090.070.003 Edit region stationing 1
10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-004.mp4
090.070.004 Edit region stationing 2
9:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-005.mp4
090.070.005 Fix southeast quadrant curved taper 1
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-006.mp4
4:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-007.mp4
10:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-008.mp4
090.070.008 Fix northeast quadrant curved taper 1
7:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-009.mp4
090.070.009 Fix northeast quadrant curved taper 2
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-010.mp4
090.070.010 Fix southwest quadrant curved taper 1
6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-011.mp4
090.070.011 Fix southwest quadrant curved taper 2
8:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-012.mp4
090.070.012 Fix northwest quadrant curved taper
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-013.mp4
090.070.013 Explain shoulder geometry deficiency
7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-014.mp4
090.070.014 Fix southeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1
8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-015.mp4
4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-016.mp4
8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-017.mp4
5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-018.mp4
090.070.018 Fix southeast quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry 1
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-019.mp4
8:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-020.mp4
090.070.020 Summary
090.080 Exercise DS1100A - Fix intersection geometry ALL Section updated: 7/1/2010
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-001.mp4
090.080.001 This exercise is optional. It completes the geometry fixes to the entire intersection.
Introduction
5:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-002.mp4
090.080.002 Fix northeast quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.
8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-003.mp4
090.080.003 Fix northeast quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.
9:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-004.mp4
6:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-005.mp4
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-006.mp4
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-007.mp4
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-008.mp4
090.080.008 Inspect northeast quadrant changes.
5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-009.mp4
090.080.009 Fix northwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-010.mp4

4:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-011.mp4
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-012.mp4
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-013.mp4
090.080.013 Fix northwest quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-014.mp4
090.080.014 Fix southwest quadrant 4th Ave shoulder geometry.
4:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-015.mp4
090.080.015 Fix southwest quadrant STH 25 shoulder geometry 1.
6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-016.mp4
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-017.mp4
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-018.mp4
2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-019.mp4
090.080.019 Review exercise.
090.090 Exercise DS1200 - More intersection refinement Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-090-more-intersection-refinement.pdf
3:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-001.mp4
090.090.001 Introduction/unzip project dataset.
2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-002.mp4
090.090.002 Open corridor DWG.
2:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-003.mp4
090.090.003 Identify key station locations.
7:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-004.mp4
090.090.004 Add key stations to corridor frequencies 1.
6:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-005.mp4
090.090.005 Add key stations to corridor frequencies 2.
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-006.mp4
090.090.006 Explain subgrade error in curb fillet regions.
3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-007.mp4
090.090.007 Add curb fillet correct subgrade assembly.
5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-008.mp4
090.090.008 Add parameter reference to curb fillet correct subgrade assembly.
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-009.mp4
090.090.009 Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to northeast quadrant 1.
4:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-010.mp4
090.090.010 Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to northeast quadrant 2.
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-011.mp4
090.090.011 Inspect northeast quadrant subgrade.
8:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-012.mp4
090.090.012 Apply curb fillet correct subgrade assembly to all quadrants.
7:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-013.mp4
090.090.013 Inspect all quadrants subgrade.
090.100 Exercise DS1300 - Refine curb profiles Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-100-refine-curb-profiles.pdf
3:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-001.mp4
090.100.001 Introduction/unzip project dataset.
1:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-002.mp4
090.100.002 Open corridor DWG.
4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-003.mp4
090.100.003 Create curb profile views.
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-004.mp4
090.100.004 Explain minimum/maximum pavement slope profile concept.
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-005.mp4
090.100.005 Create minimum pavement slope profiles from corridor 1.
7:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-006.mp4
090.100.006 Create minimum pavement slope profiles from corridor 2.
6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-007.mp4
090.100.007 Create maximum pavement slope profiles from corridor.
1:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-008.mp4
090.100.008 Inspect pavement slope profiles northeast quadrant.
3:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-009.mp4
090.100.009 Create proposed curb profile northeast quadrant.
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-010.mp4
090.100.010 Apply proposed curb profile northeast quadrant.
7:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-011.mp4
090.100.011 Create proposed curb profile southeast and southwest quadrants.
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-012.mp4

090.100.012 Create proposed curb profile northwest quadrant
3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-013.mp4
090.100.013 Apply proposed curb profiles all quadrants.
6:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-014.mp4
090.100.014 Inspect proposed curb profiles in corridor.
090.110 Intersection object fundamentals Section updated: 4/13/2015
090.110.000 ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-exercise-files.zip 090-110-000-Int-Obj-Rvw.dwg
It is not necessary to use either the Offset and curb returns or the Corridor Regions options to create an
Intersection object. For the WisDOT workflow we will keep these options unchecked in the Create Intersection
Dialog.
The intersecting alignments are displayed on the top of the Geometry Details section of the Create
Intersection tool.
Here you determine the priority to how profile locking occurs for the profiles associated with the

intersection.
You can change the priority of an alignment by selecting an alignment in this list and using the arrows to
the right.
By changing the alignment priority the associated profiles will change, so it is important to note that the
profile associated with the secondary alignment must always be developed in the drawing where the
intersection is being created, and it must be a design profile.
The profile associated with the primary alignment can be either a surface or design profile and may be a
data reference.

Basic Rules for creating Intersection Objects

The Primary alignments and profiles can be data references.
The secondary alignments can be a data reference.
The secondary profiles must be a design profile, and must be developed in the current drawing.
The primary profile can be either a design or surface profile.
Horizontal Geometry Development in the Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Create all specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and tapers) as alignments in
the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed. Typical roadway offsets like ETW, EPS and
EGS have been developed as offset alignments in the AliProf dwg(s) and data shortcuts create for them in the
project
1. Open the drawing named AliProf-25.dwg

2. Review the alignment and profile objects in this drawing.
The primary and secondary stationed alignments have been created.
A proposed profile for just the primary road stationed alignment has been created.
All of the horizontal roadway geometry as offset alignments including lane edges, pavement edges, paved
shoulder, and aggregate shoulder have been created from both baseline alignments
1. Notice a design profile for the side streets are not created in this aliprof drawing.
2. Data shortcuts of all the alignments and profiles in this drawing are created.
Review: Notice the alignments in Aliprof-25.dwg represent major project edge lines of geometry outside the
intersection areas. These alignments are extended along the length of the project and will be masked when
crossing through intersections. The purpose for this masking is to facilitate these alignments to be used as part of
project line work drawings such as Pavt.dwg, which then can then be shared through XREFs. For further
information refer to methods for developing pavement drawings.
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-002.mp4
090.110.002 ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-002.zip
Horizontal Geometry Development - Corridor drawing

Key Concept: Create the alignments for specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and
tapers) in the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed.
Best Practice: Do not create Data Shortcuts for any surface sampled profiles anywhere in the
project. This creates extra data shortcut clutter and creates a static profile that requires manual
synchronizing. If needed create data shortcuts of the surfaces, and then create the surface profile in
the drawing where needed.
1. Save a drawing from the wisdot14.dwt named Crdr-25-4.dwg

2. In this drawing create Data references for the following alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25 Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EPS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EGS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
3. Create the turn lane, taper and curb return alignments following the geometry guidelines described in
the following steps. This exercise shows the alignments being created from objects, but these
could be developing using the alignment tools as well. This is a users preference and accuracy
of the geometry is the required outcome.
4. Lines, arcs, and/or polylines can be used to create the turn lane, taper and curb return geometry.
When creating the geometry, make sure the alignments overlap beyond where they first become
coincidental to the offset alignments. Later in the workflow, intersection objects will be used to lock
down the curb return profiles. These overlaps are necessary for the intersection objects to work
properly.
Create the turn lane/taper alignments to extend through the intersection and connect to the like
geometry on the other side.
5. Make sure the curb return alignments are independent. In other words, they should not be a part of
any other alignment. This is different from the intersection wizard. The intersection wizard would
combine the curb return alignments with any approaching turn lanes and/or tapers.
6. If Autocad entities were used to create the geometry, they can be converted to alignments using the
Alignments from Objects tool.
Home>Create Design>Alignment>Create Alignment from Object - Select the polylines near the
end to be the start.
The TrnLn, ETW, and EGS alignments should run in the same direction as the stationed road
alignment.
All the curb return alignments should run in the direction of travel. This will ensure we only need to
create one set of assemblies for all curb returns.
Create the following alignments as Centerline type with appropriate RDWY styles:
Int-25-L-TrnLn Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4th-L-TrnLn Int-4th-R-TrnLn
Int-4th-L-EGS Int-4th-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR
Save the drawing.
4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-003.mp4

Vertical Geometry Development Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Data Reference a Lane Edge Setup Surface. This surface can be used to create surface profiles
to use as targets by assemblies in the design corridor, and assign profile relationships with the intersection
object.
The dataset pre-setup:

Alignments and profile created in \\12342014\Design\AliProfs\Aliprof-25.dwg have been
added as Data Shortcuts to project 12342014. The drawing has the following
alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25
Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EGS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EPS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
Alignments and profiles created in \\12342014\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-4th.dwg are not

added as Data Shortcuts yet.
Intersection Geometry alignments:
Int-25-L-TrnLn Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-ETW Int-25-R-ETW
Int-25-L-EGS Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4th-L-TrnLn Int-4th-R-TrnLn
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR
1. Create primary road offset profiles from setup surface

Open Crdr-25-4th.dwg
Create a data reference of both the Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top surface (see module 070-025) and the
Exist-25-4 surface
Set the style to _No Display
Home Tab>Design Panel>Profile - Create Surface Profile
Create a surface profile of each of the primary road TrnLN and ETW alignments (there will be 4 total).
For the surface select Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top to create the profile from.
Set the profile styles to PROF Proposed, do not click draw in profile view
Set each then close the dialog.
In the Prospector change the names of each profile to <alignment name>-Prop
2. Create secondary road centerline profile from existing surface
Home Tab>Design Panel>Profile - Create Surface Profile.
Select the side road center line alignment.
Select the Exist-25-4 surface. Click Add.
Press Draw in Profile View. Click Create Profile View and digitize the location on the screen.
3. At this time, you may choose to rename the existing surface profile since that option is not given at the time of
creation.
4. Create the desired proposed side road profile by snapping to the Exist-25-4 surface profile at the beginning and
end of construction limits to create a single tangent profile. Do not provide any other design of the proposed side
road profile until completing the next exercise.
5. Save the Drawing.
5:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-004.mp4
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Secondary road profiles

1. In this section we will design the secondary road profile ( 4th ) using intersection objects to get the
PVI elevations from the main road baseline profile and ETW profiles created in the previous exercise
2. With Crdr-25-4th.dwg open go to Home Tab>Design Panel>Intersection - Create Intersection.

Select the intersection of the main road and the side road center line alignments. (25 and 4th)
When prompted at the command line, Select the 25 alignment as the primary alignment.
Name the intersection Int-25-4

Set the Intersection marker style to Standard and the Intersection label style to _No Display
Go to the Geometry Details page
Uncheck the Offset and curb return profile check box
Uncheck the Create curb return alignments check box
Uncheck the Create or specify offset alignments check box
Verify the main road alignment 25 is shown in Priority row 1
Verify the 25 profile is set to 25-Prop
Verify the side road 4th alignment is shown in the Priority row 2 and select 4th-Prop as the profile.
Click Create Intersection.
3. Notice a VPI has been created on the 4th-Prop profile. Select the 4th-Prop profile and notice the lock
symbol at the VPI. This denotes that this elevation will be controlled by the intersection object where you
assigned the primary road as 25 and the controlling profile as 25-Prop.
4. Home Tab>Create Design Panel>Intersection - Create Intersection.

Select the intersection of Int-25-L-TrLn and 4th alignments.
When prompted at the command line, Select the Int-25-L-TrLn alignment as the primary
alignment.
Name the intersection Int-25-L-ETW-4
Set the Intersection marker style to Basic-WisDOT-NoPlotand the Intersection label style to _No
Display
Go to the Geometry Details page
Uncheck the Offset and curb return profile check box
Uncheck the Create curb return alignments check box
Uncheck the Create or specify offset alignments check box
Verify the main road alignment Int-25-L-TrLn is shown in Priority row 1
Verify the Int-25-L-TrLn profile is set to Int-25-L-TrLn-Prop
Verify the side road 4th alignment is shown in the Priority row 2 and select 4th-Prop as the
profile.
25-L-ETW should appear as the alignment in Priority row 3. Its profile will be set to 25-L-ETW-
Prop.

Click OK.
You will see the following message indicating that the 25-L-ETW will effectively be ignored since it
is coincident to the Int-25-L-TrLn profile. Choose the option to Create intersection with dynamic
profiles.
5. Follow the steps above to complete the intersection object for the 25-R-ETW. The 4th-Prop should
now have three VPI depicting the cross slopes across 25 from left ETW to crown to right ETW.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-005.mp4
Lane Edge Setup Surface - Side Roads

Follow the concepts shown in 070.025 Lane Edge Setup Surface from corridor object to create a
ETW setup surface for the 4th Avenue side road.
Create Surface profiles for the Int-4th-L-TrnLn and Int-4th-R-TrnLn using the corridor setup surface.

9:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-006.mp4
Curb Return Setup
Create an Exist surface profile and a profile view for each of the curb return alignments.
Ensure the profile view extends beyond the beginning and end of the curb return alignment.
Rename the surface profiles if desired.
For each curb return alignment Create a design profile in the curb return profile view.
Snap to the beginning of the profile view near the existing surface and then set the end of the design profile
near the existing surface at the end of the profile view. This step ensures there is a design profile developed
for the intersection object to use to establish a VPI that will match the edge of turn lane profile
Insert the Setup-Curb-Prof assembly from the WisDOT Assemblies palette.
The assembly includes three slope possibilities derived from the LinkWidthandSlope subassembly. The three
slopes represent the maximum (MAX), minimum (MIN), and normal (NORM) cross slopes in the intersections. The
default minimum slope is 1%. The default maximum slope is 4%. The default normal slope is 2%. These slopes
can be modified to match project-specific conditions. Additional slopes can be added using the
LinkWidthandSlope subassembly if desired (superelevation conditions for example). The subassemblies are
named so targeting is easier.
Create a new Corridor and name it CurbReturn Setup

Parameters tab: Use the Curb Setup-Curb-Prof assembly in the corridor. Add a baseline for each of the
curb return alignments. Use the curb alignments' existing surface profile since a proposed profile has not been
created yet.
Parameters tab: Set the frequency to 2 feet. Change Profile Geometry Points to No. Add an additional
frequency at the intersection of the side road alignment and mainline ETW (edge of travelway) alignment.
Width of Offset Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
alignment and side road centerline alignment. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Set the Target for Subassembly Max Slope TARGET Curb Return Ali to the Curb Return alignment
Slope or Elevation Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
setup profile and the side road proposed profile. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MAX. Add the MAX link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MIN. Add the MIN link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-NORM. Add the NORM link to its definition.
Set the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Click Ok to build the setup corridor and surface.
The corridor code set style, the corridor object style and the Feature Line Styles can now be set to No Display.
Home Tab - Design Panel - Profile - Create Surface Profile. Select a curb return alignment. Select the Curb
Return Setup-MAX, Curb Return Setup - MIN, and Curb Return Setup - NORM surfaces. Click Add. Change the
surface profile style to RDWY Lane Edge.
Repeat the previous step for all curb return alignments.
The curb return profile extension on the outsides of the locked PVIs can be adjusted for visual clarity. Best practice
is to not delete these ends. This is because the intersection object is often referencing exactly at that PVI and if
horizontal geometry changes are made that cause the intersection object to reference the profile beyond the
existing PVI it will have no profile to reference. Remember the intersection object is not locking the VPI to the
alignment PC. The profile will need to be stretch and in some cases a new intersection object created.
If you wish to delete profile entities select the profile and go to the Geometry Editor, and use the Delete entity
button.
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-007.mp4
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Curb Returns
Open Corridor drawing Crdr-25-4th.dwg.
Home, Create Deign, Intersections, Create Intersection.

Select the intersection at each end of each curb return. Select the TrnLn alignment as the main road
alignment when prompted
General: Name the Intersections according to the quadrant they are in and the closes centerline, either the
secondary or primary road. (i.e. Int-NE-4 and Int-NE-25 for intersections at both ends of the curb return in the
NE quadrant)
Geometry Details: Make sure all check boxes are un-checked.
Verify the alignment priority and the Profile for each alignment is correct.
Press Create Intersection.
Repeat the previous steps for each curb return. Notice the PVIs (lock symbols) that get added to the curb
return profile as the intersections are created.
Using the Min, Normal and Max profiles created in the last step as a guide to create additional PVIs on the curb
return profiles as necessary.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-008.mp4
Add Intersection Geometry Alignments to Data Shortcuts
Open the Crdr-25-4th.dwg, ensure that masks have been added to all the intersection alignments.
Each alignment that overlaps another alignment or extends through the intersection will require adding a
mask to the alignment in these locations if the alignments are to be used for production drawings.
Each alignment should be in the Centerline Alignments or Miscellaneous Alignments group in the Prospector.
Setting the alignment type to Centerline Alignments will allow you to leverage using superelevation options
without having to make an alignment type change later.
To change the alignment type of any of the alignments so there are Centerline alignments, select the
alignment Properties and change the Type on the Information tab.
Alignments and profiles created in \\12342014\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-4th.dwg can now be added as Data

Shortcuts.
Save the drawing and add the following alignments and profiles as Data Shortcuts;
Secondary Design Profiles
4th-Prop
Intersection Geometry alignments Design Profiles

Int-25-L-TrnLn
Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS
Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4-L-TrnLn
Int-4-R-TrnLn
Int-4-L-EGS
Int-4-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-NE-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SE-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR-Prop
The design profiles developed for the turn lane alignments do not need to be added as Data Shortcuts as
they are only consumed in this drawing by the intersection object and will not be used in another corridor or
other type drawing.
These alignments can be used to create a Pavt-Ultimate.dwg by use of data references and assuring adequate
alignment mask have been developed.
Notice that none of the surface profiles are added to the Data Shortcuts. Adding surface or sampled profiles is
unnecessary since the surfaces and the alignments that developed the surface profiles in this drawing are available
as data references to use in other drawings.
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-009.mp4
1. Fix Broken Intersection Object

Notice some changes have been made to the data set.
Added definition to the 4th Avenue Proposed profile. Vertical curves added within pavement warp
area and curb returns.
Added definition to the Curb return profiles.
In this data set notice one of the intersection objects on the SW curb return no longer holds a locked PVI
on the proposed curb return profile.
The Intersection object appears to no longer control vertical connection. This can happen for a variety of
possible reasons, such as the profile or alignment was shortened past the intersection point, the
alignments no longer intersect, to point out a few items to watch for as you are building and manipulating
the alignments and profiles.
To fix the intersection object do the following:
Select the broken intersection object, using the right-click or ribbon select Intersection Properties.
On the Information tab highlight the name of Intersection and copy. Exit the dialog.
Delete the non-working intersection and create a new one at the same intersection, using paste to name
the new intersection the same name.
The curb return profile is now controlled by the 4 th Avenue turn lane surface profile derived from the
setup ETW surface.

Module 095 Swept path analysis

095.010 Accurate swept paths for complex OSOW vehicles Section updated: 6/25/2013
11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-010-001.mp4
095.010.001 Most vehicles are simplistic, consisting of a simple tractor/trailer configuration with steering at the front axle only.
With sound judgment and guidance from the FDM, these swept paths can be created with relative ease.
More complicated vehicles are appearing statewide. These vehicles include a combination of features or
restrictions that can be difficult to model.
greater than 2 parts (not difficult by itself)
steerable rear axles (either linked or independent)
Independent steerable rear axles are the most difficult because it requires the User, not the
software, to make decisions/judgments about the capability of the vehicle and what is realistic.
ground clearance restrictions (3D modeling is required)
yaw restrictions, also known as articulation angle (not difficult by itself)
pitch and roll restrictions (3D modeling required)
Overview
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics What is the design vehicle or vehicles?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data dimensions, angle, etc.
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths Survey vehicle maneuvers (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model Swept path software
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths Calibrate your model (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company Get feedback from the experts
Step 7: Make refinements Adjust based on comments
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics

Is it on the OSOW freight network?
The OSOW vehicles listed in the FDM may not be all inclusive. Include freight as a topic for your business
outreach
The project may be the last mile
Is your project en route to a large bridge?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data

Body dimensions
Load dimensions/position
Axle spacing
King pin locations
Steering angle(s)
Articulation angle(s)
Ground clearance
Lock to Lock Time
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths (Vehicles with rear steering)

Coordinate with trucking company
Trace the swept path (front and rear tires) through a 90 degree turn
The more of these you do, the more refined the model will be
Survey the painted swept path at the intersection

Observe and document details like rear axle rate of articulation ( steering angle/distanced traveled)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model

Input the vehicle data into the swept path software
Use Methods Development as a resource
Double check your inputs and confirm with trucking company
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Use the survey data as a guide to drive the vehicle through the intersection
This will act as an aid for how to drive other intersections. (Calibration)
Pay close attention to the rate of articulation at the rear.
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company

Share your result with the trucking company. Animate the swept path. Ask them questions like:
Does this look like a realistic way to maneuver this intersection?
Are there any features that would make this intersection easier to drive?
Step 7: Make refinements

Use the feedback from the trucking company to refine the swept path
Make adjustments to the intersection geometry
Send an updated animation to the trucking company.
095.020 Beam transporter Section updated: 6/25/2013

Beam transporter exercise files
11:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-001.mp4
095.020.001 Introduction and Vehicle Background
In 2007, WisDOT in cooperation with Spancrete performed a study to accurately model beam transport trucks with
swept path software. This training package has been assembled to provide guidance to designers on development
of proper swept paths for the beam transport trucks. Included with this training package are the following files:
149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl
This vehicle file can be imported in to AutoTURN and used to practice swept path development.
This is the vehicle that was used in the study and should only be used for training purposes. The
actual design vehicle is located in the WisDOT OSOW library and is called 165' Beam 1.
template.dwg
This drawing contains the actual surveyed path of the 149' Beam truck at two intersections (1 left
turn, and 1 right turn). There are multiple paths from multiple vehicles/drivers shown at both
intersections to represent variability.
16tdq125305_crop.tif, 16tdq125320_crop.tif, 16tdq140320_crop.tif
Cropped USGS aerial imagery to provide background reference
Beam Transporter Training.dwg
This file has the template.dwg and USGS aerial imagery xreferenced into it
This file can be used or copied to practice drawing swept paths.
This file contains two swept paths that have been drawn for the left turn and the right turn to show
what the finished swept paths should looks like.
Import the 149' Beam training vehicle into AutoTURN

-Select Vehicles from the AutoTURN menu.
-At the bottom of the Vehicles dialogue box, choose Import Vehicle.
-Select the 149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl file and click Open.
Helpful Hints and information for creating beam transporter swept paths:
-The rear bogie articulation is completely independent of the front steering and is controlled with hydraulics by the
driver. A typical articulation rate for the bogie over a given travel distance is dependent on the anticipated vehicle
speed. A good starting point for design purposes is to articulate the rear bogie a maximum of 4-degrees for every
17 feet of travel entering and exiting the maneuver. This is roughly the distance between the front axle and the first
king pin.
-The vehicle is capable of articulating the bogie as a stop condition. However, this is highly undesirable and is only

done is extreme circumstances. This action places elevated lateral forces on the girder and bogie, especially on
dry pavement.
-When articulating the rear bogie while entering the maneuver, try to get the bogie to follow the path of the tractor
as long as you can. This will method will help provide a smooth transition.
-Avoid articulating the bogie too earlier or too quickly causing it to swing outside of the tractor path.
-The maximum articulation angle between the jeep and tractor is 45-degrees. The maximum articulation angle
between the jeep and the beam is 45-degrees. These angles are preset in the vehicle template. Exceeding these
angles increases the risk of tipping the beam. The maximum articulation of the bogie is 20-degrees and is limited
by its mechanical capability. This is also preset in the vehicle template.
Animate Swept Path

From the AutoTURN menu, click the Run Animation button. The Run Animation button has standard controls for
play speed, stop, pause, and a slider to move to a specific position in the swept path. The animation will display
best if the aerial imagery is turned off. Watch for erratic or unrealistic movements such as swerves.
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-002.mp4
095.020.002 Video Footage
This section contains actual video footage of the beam transport truck's rear bogie and is intended to give the
audience a better idea of how the vehicle works.
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-003.mp4
095.020.003 Calibration
This is Step 5 from the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this module. Trace the actual
swept path that was surveyed in Step 3 of the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this
module. This section demonstrates how to the Beam Transporter vehicle works by creating a swept path over an
actual surveyed swept path of the vehicle.
Practice drawing swept paths using the 149' Beam training vehicle:
-From the AutoTURN menu, choose vehicles
-In the custom vehicle library, select the 149' Beam (Training Vehicle) in the Vehicles dialogue box and click ok.
-From the AutoTURN menu, click Generate Arc Path
-Place the vehicle on the screen so the front of the tractor roughly lines up with the surveyed point markers
-Click a point in front of the vehicle to define the start angle. Set the start angle so the rear bogie roughly lines up
with the surveyed paths
-In the SmartPath Tools dialogue box, click the Override Angle box. This controls the articulation angle of the rear
bogie. To control the angle in Autocad Civil 3D, hold the Ctrl button down while scrolling your mouse wheel.
Negative override angles are for left turns and positive override angles are for right turns.
15:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-004.mp4
095.020.004 Maneuvering a Roundabout
In this exercise, we will practice maneuvering the beam transport vehicle through a single lane roundabout.
Place the swept path on the proper layer. There are layers available in the wisdot templates for swept paths. They
can be located easily by using the RAB layer filter.
RAB_EB_TURN_Left
RAB_EB_TURN_Right
RAB_EB_TURN_Thru
RAB_EB_TURN_U
Remember: The 165' Beam vehicle located in the WisDOT OSOW library is to be used for design.
Create a swept path without applying an override angle to the rear bogie.
In some cases, minor modifications to the roundabout entry, truck apron, and exit can be made to make this
possible. Adding features like a truck apron to roundabout entry, expanding the central island truck apron, and
widening the roundabout exit can sometimes be done to make it easier for the vehicle. Be sure to have features
like these reviewed by a qualified roundabout designer and get WisDOT approval.
Create the swept path using the rear bogie override angle.
The through maneuver on a roundabout is an S-curve. The key is to make the S-curve as flat as possible for this
vehicle. Maneuvering an S-curve requires the bogie to articulate left, then right, and then back left again. While
doing this, it is important not to exceed the 4-degree/17 ft rule for transitioning the bogie angle. Only articulate the
bogie as much as is needed and no more.
095.030 Ground clearance analysis Section updated: 6/25/2013

Ground clearance exercise files
5:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-001.mp4
095.030.001 Setup
Create DST Lowboy DWG File

C3D=>New=>Drawing
Use wisdot10.dwt template to create the new dwg file
Name the drawing DST Lowboy.dwg
Set working folder to c:/WisDOT/Design/c3d
Set Data Shortcuts folder to 44444444
Xref Edglines
External References Manager
Attach Pavt-RAB.dwg file in the Edgelines folder
Use relative path attachment
Data Shortcut Reference Top Roadway Model surface

Found in Data Shortcuts=>Surfaces area of the Prospector
Right-Click on RoadwayModel TOP
=> Create Reference.
View top surface in Final Top Border style

Select surface => right-click => Surface properties
Surface Properties dialog box => Information Tab
6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-002.mp4
095.030.002 2D Swept Path
Select and edit the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle in the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D or AutoTURN => Configure => Vehicles
Select the WisDOT Library
Select the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle
Click the Edit Vehicle button
Apply a point load to the DST Load 1 vehicle

Click the Define 2D Loads button
Use the white arrows to select the jeep portion of the vehicle
Set Load Type to 1 point
Point location will be at the king pin (0.00 ft left/right, 1.33 ft behind)
Click OK three times to return to the drawing
Create 2D swept path

AutoTURN Pro 3D
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 2D SmartPaths => 2D Arc Path
AutoTURN
AutoTURN => Smart Paths => Generate Arc Path
Make copy of swept path and Hide

Copy and Paste Clipboard
Click on the swept path
Clipboard => Copy with Base Point
Select a reference point location
Right Click => Clipboard => Paste

Select the same reference point location

Hide Object
Select the swept path
Right Click => Isolate Objects => Hide Selected Objects
Create Polyline Path for 3D DST Lowboy 2 part vehicle placement

AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Properties
Make sure the Load is check under the Envelope properties, update the swept path is necessary,
click OK
Explode
Explode command => select swept path => Enter
Join
Home => Modify => Join
Select all of the polyline segments representing the jeep king pin (point load) path ents
Select and delete the remaing exploded swept path elements
11:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-003.mp4
095.030.003 3D Swept Path
Place 3D Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Vehicles
Select the DST Lowboy 2 part 1 design vehicle from the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 3D Terrain => Terrain
Select the RoadModel TOP Surface
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Place 3D => Place Simulation
Select a location near the beginning of the Polyline representing the jeep king pin path
Develop a generalized ground clearance profile

AutoTURN Pro 3D => Clearance Analysis => Vehicle Clearance
Cut a profile along the path of the jeep king pin.
Not representative of the entire vehicle envelope
Only need Ground Clearance checked for this exercise.
Choose desired scale and color scheme
Click Place Report
Cut Cross Sections of Specific Areas of Concern

Home => Draw =>
Draw lines at locations of where you want a cross section. Can be in any direction
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Clearance Analysis => Punch Through
For each cross section, select the path first, then the line
Select the desired elements and color scheme and click OK
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-004.mp4
095.030.004 3D Simulation
Create 3D animation
Orbit
Orbit to desire point of view
Surface Properties
Choose a surface style that shows the TIN
View => Views => View Styles
Select the desired view style (Conceptual works well)
Place the vehicle at desired locations or Animate
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Place Vehicle
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Animate
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-005.mp4

095.030.005 Design Changes
Switch Surface
Data shortcut reference the revised design surface
Delete the data shortcut reference from the drawing
Regenerate Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Edits => Regerate Simulation
Select the path
Select the new terrain (surface)
Recheck Ground Clearance

Punch Through is not dynamic and need to be redone
Typical Problem Areas in Roundabouts

1. Over-tracking at the entry curve/lowboy hitting the curb head
1. Consider Curb and Gutter 4-inch Sloped Type G and a truck apron along the right side
2. Entry and exit rollover
1. Consider flattening the circulatory roadway crown in these areas
2. Avoid steep profiles entering and exiting the roundabout
3. Truck Aprons
1. Consider flattening the truck apron slope
2. See if the vehicle can track more on the circulatory roadway
1. May need to consider 1a.
3. Look at the circulatory roadway profile
1. Keep it as flat/gentle as possible and still maintain drainage
2. Locate the crest away from the area of concern.
Module 100 Viewing and editing corridor sections

100.010 Corridor section editor Section updated: 10/1/2012
Corridor section editor exercise files
17:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-010-001.mp4
100.010.001 Corridor Section Editor Overview
Viewer that shows corridor stations in a section view
View changes UCS to be in line with corridor model
Uses clipping planes to isolate the current station
Freezes some layers to clarify the view
User can navigate stations of the corridor model
Edits can be made in this viewer

Edits are to current station
Edits can be applied to a station range
Troubleshooting of corridor model issues
Opening the Corridor Section Editor

Toolspace > Prospector > Corridor > right-click on corridor name > Corridor Section Editor
Select on the corridor > context ribbon > Section Editor
View/Edit Options
Edit Viewport Configuration
Section Editor
select a corridor feature line it sets at first alignment station
select a frequency line it sets to the chosen station
Section View context ribbon

Close Ribbon when done(!)
Section Editor View/Navigation

The View
Blue grid with relative elevations
Corridor shape represented by Code Set Style

Alignments are marked as vertical colored lines
Surfaces represented by current style
View Configuration
Automatically divides screen into three viewports
Plan/Profile/Section view
Navigation
Section View Context ribbon > Station Selection panel
Advance one station, to next region, to last station
Pull-down menu to choose specific station
Specify Station to create your own
Context Ribbon > Zoom to Extents/Zoom to Offset and Elevation
Section Editor Parameter Editor

Section Editor Context Tab > Corridor Edit Tools > Parameter Editor
Assembly list of subassemblies at current station
Can edit the unlocked Value fields
Edited fields receive an Override TRUE
Design Field displays original setting, pre-overrides
Apply to Station Range repeats edits for current station to stations end
Clearing station overrides

Parameter Editor, change parameters for that station
Corridor properties > Parameters tab > Override column
Remove overridden stations from list
18:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-010-002.mp4
100.010.002 Corridor-STH25-4thAve-12.dwg
Section editor example
100.020 WisDOT standards - corridor section editor Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-001.mp4
100.020.001 Corridor Section Editor works directly on the Corridor Object.
Corridor overrides are created when Edits are made using Corridor Section Editor
Corridor overrides are maintained in the Corridor Object until they are deleted or updated
Corridor Overrides include

Parameter overrides changes to the subassembly inputs
Geometric overrides manual changes to the Corridor Links
Comparison to CAiCE
Corridor Section Editor is similar to View/Edit Xsections
Corridors will be created within their own DWG file or files
Project folder Corridors are found in

File Naming

Example
great start!
WisDOT Standards
See Corridor Styles
Corridor Section Editor Need to Know!!!

We do not recommend doing Geometric edits to a Corridor. The Overrides are not dynamic with the Corridor
changes
Be sure Corridor Overrides are still valid if the overall Corridor is changed
DO NOT press the X (Exit) button on the upper right hand corner of the graphics window when using the Corridor
Section Editor. Use the Close button on the Editor Tab of the Ribbon.
[email protected]
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-002.mp4
100.020.002 Quick demo
Make parameter edit control
Make a geometric edit
Show results
Change corridor and rebuild
Show how edits are still there
Remove edits
Cover what was mentioned in need to know.

Cover what user needs to do if they get their graphics stuck in Corridor Section Editor.
Module 110 Feature lines and gradings

110.010 Grading basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
Grading exercise files
17:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-010-001.mp4
110.010.001 Needed for grading:
Site
Feature line
Grading criteria
Grading group and objects
Grading Feature Fundamentals

Site
Allows several objects to interact
Grading/feature lines, parcels, sometimes alignments
Objects in other sites will NOT interact
Grading groups and feature lines NEED a site to exist
Feature Line
Used for the grading footprint
Basically a 3D Polyline only smarter
Many editing options
Geometry and elevation
Can be added to surface as a breakline (separate from grading tools)

Grading Criteria
Rules for grading from footprint (feat line)
User defines two sides of right triangle
Slope and distance
Slope and elevation
Distance and elevation
Unlocked criteria prompts for user entry, makes criteria more versatile for different uses/projects
Locked criteria takes default, speeds up grading process
Grading Group
Allow separate grading objects to interact
Grading objects and feature lines in different groups will not interact
Allows balancing of site volumes
Do not need to be contiguous
Grading Feature Specifics

Have a site for the grading
Have feature line(s) in place
Have grading criteria available, plan what will be needed
Home tab > Create Design panel > Grading > Create Grading
110.020 Grading workflow Section updated: 10/1/2012

26:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-020-001.mp4
110.020.001 Grading Feature Workflow
Have feature line(s) in place

Have grading criteria available, plan what will be needed
Home tab > Create Design panel > Grading > Create Grading
The Grading command toolbar
Set Grading Group
Set Criteria Set, then first criteria to be used
Select Create Grading command
Creating feature lines

Create 2D polyline, convert to feature line
Will require elevation edits
Draw feature line natively

Requires elevation input for each vertex
Create Grading Command

Select Feature Line
Identify grading side
Will this grading object be for the entire feature line, or just part of it?
Prompts specific to the criteria
Grading Transition
Creates grading objects between areas of different slopes
Select feature line
Select point between the two gradings
Grading Infill
Grading object
Inside closed feature line shape
Can be separate feature lines, as long as its closed
110.030 Editing feature line elevations Section updated: 10/1/2012

24:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-030-001.mp4

110.030.001 Editing Feature Line Elevations Overview
Edit Elevations ribbon panel appears in Feature Line Context tab

Select the feature line you need to edit
In the context menu toggle on the Edit Elevation button
This opens the Elevation Edits panel
All tools will focus on elevation component of the feature line
Feature Line Edit Elevations
Elevation Editor in Edit Elevations panel or right-click menu

Controls elevations of individual vertex points
Can set vertex elevations by assigning grades between vertex points
grade forward or grade back always affects the feature line segment ahead
Can set raise/lower increment to affect several vertices
Can assign several vertices to take surface elevation
Insert Elevation Point Elevation Points are a vertex that has no X/Y control, only elevation
Creates bends or elevation changes
Symbolized as circular grip point on feat. line and in panorama
Delete Elevation Point like delete PI, only for elevation points
Quick Elevation Edit allows immediate feedback of vertex elevation and feat. line slope by hovering cursor near
feat. line
Can hover near any feat line, not just one selected
Edit Elevations Provides tooltip report of elevation nearest feature line vertex or slope of nearest feature line line
segment
Left-clicking allows the nearest vertex/line slope to be edited
Will function for any feature line, not just the selected one
Set Grade/Slope between Points allows vertex elevations to be set by controlling the slope or grade of the feature
line
Can set multiple slopes at one time, along entire portion or portion of feature line
Insert High/Low Elevation Point Calculates a high or low elevation point by assigning grade forward and back
from opposite ends of a feature line
Raise/Lower by Reference Raise or lower the elevation of a feature line by reference to an object with known
elevation
Set Elevation by Reference Sets the elevation of a feature line vertex by reference to an object with known
elevation
Allows for relative grade/slope/difference between the object and the vertex
Adjacent Elevation by Reference Allows editing of an adjacent feature lines elevation in relation to the selected
feature line. Options are Elevation difference, Grade or Slope
Grade Extension by Reference Sets elevations by extending the grade of a segment on another feature line
Elevation from Surface Sets vertex points to surface elevations at their location
Intermediate Grade Break creates an elevation point where the feature crosses a surface triangle (entire
feature line)
Raise/Lower Feature Line specifies elevation difference to raise or lower the feature line, or set to a specific
elevation
110.040 Editing feature line geometry Section updated: 10/1/2012

20:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-040-001.mp4
110.040.001 Editing Feature Line Geometry Overview
Allows for editing of the feature line in XY plane
Can adjust the feature line to represent a grading footprint or surface geometry more accurately
Feature lines are like 3D polylines with more intelligence for grading functions, so editing is similar to Polyline edits
Feature Lines have a measuring stick which uses stationing this is not related to alignments
Open geometry editing tools

Select on the feature line > Edit Geometry toggle > Edit Geometry panel
Feature Line Edit Geometry
Insert PI places a vertex with X/Y/Z location control
Delete PI can delete individual vertex points

Deletes whichever vertex is nearest
Break identify begin and end of gap in feat. line

Results in two separate feature lines
Trim trims feat line against an object, polyline, line, etc.
Join glues two feature lines together

Two lines must have end points that are coincident
Result in one feat line from the two
Reverse reverses direction of feat line direction
Edit Curve adjust curve radius, reports length, chord, and tangent data
Fillet inserts curve tangent to two feature line legs

User identifies the vertex
R to set Radius
A to assign curve radius to ALL vertices along selected feature lines
J for joining two separate feature lines while filleting at that join point
Fit Curve identify 3 or more line vertices and it creates an arc
Smooth automated fit curve routine. No user input
Weed to reduce number of vertices along feat. Line

Grading can hang up over too many small feature line segments
Will remove detail from feature line, user decides how much is appropriate
Stepped Offset horizontal and vertical

Assign horizontal offset distance
Indicate which side of feature line to offset to
Provide vertical offset definition
G=grade, S=Slope, D=Difference (great for 0 or flat) E=Elevation, V=Variable
110.050 WisDOT standards - feature lines and gradings Section updated: 7/1/2010
7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-001.mp4
110.050.001 Grading and Feature Lines explained
The objective of our detailed Corridor (and Intersection) modeling to produce a series of Proposed Roadway
Surfaces that are usable for: final cross section output; earthwork; and Automated Machine Guidance. The Corridor
(and Intersection) modeling tools are very powerful and will allow us to handle very complex situations. Sometimes
using the Corridor modeling tools can be inefficient. Civil 3D offers other tools (objects) to augment the creation of
the Proposed Roadway Surfaces. These tools (objects) include Feature Lines and Gradings.
A Feature Line is a line that represents some important feature in the drawing, such as a ridge line or the bottom of
a swale. A feature line can be drawn with the Draw Feature Line command, or created from 2D and 3D polylines,
lines, and arcs. You can also export feature lines from corridor models (from Civil 3D Online Help)
Feature Lines are stored in a Site. Sites maintain topological relationships between the objects stored in that Site.
Consider a Site that contains Feature Line 1 and Feature Line 2 is added to that Site. Feature Line 2 crosses
Feature Line 1 . Feature Line 2 will have an Elevation Point added at the crossing (and elevation) of Feature Line
1.
Feature Lines can be created from

CAD 2D and 3D Polylines
Feature Line Layout (manual)
Corridor Feature Line
Alignment
Feature Line properties

Name and Style
Civil 3D Gradings
You can use the grading tools to design finished graded surfaces. Gradings are objects that have their own
properties and behavior like other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. You create a grading by selecting a base line in the
drawing, and then specifying a projection method and target, for example, grade at 3:1 to meet an existing surface.
Save time and effort by predefining such values and saving them as grading criteria.
Subsequent gradings you create will use the current criteria. You can also create named grading styles that
combine specific display properties, such as colors. In addition to using the current criteria, any grading you create
uses the current style. (from Civil 3D Help)
Gradings are stored in a Site remember that Sites maintain Topology between the Gradings. If two
Gradings that overlap are stored in the same Site, the overlaps will be resolved (this is super handy for things
like Gore areas)
Gradings are created from Feature Lines and Grading Criteria. They are stored in a Site under the Grading
Group collection.
Grading Groups
Have Descriptions
Can Automatically create Surfaces (dynamic relationship to the Grading Group)
Use Grading Criteria
Slope to Distance
Slope to Elevation
Slope to Surface
Slope to Elevation Difference
Can contain multiple Feature Lines and Gradings
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-002.mp4
110.050.002 Comparing to CAiCE
CAiCE Survey Chains are similar to Civil 3D Feature Lines
CAiCE Site Design Tools are somewhat similar to Gradings
Differences between CAiCE and Civil 3D

Civil 3D Corridor Feature Lines, Feature Lines, Gradings, and Surfaces can be dynamically linked.
Grading Surfaces can be pasted into larger surfaces and the changes are automatically updated when the
grading surface changes
Surfaces can be shared by Reference to Data Shortcuts so all who have access to the Project Folder can use
the proposed surfaces.
Using a combination of Corridor Surfaces, Feature Lines and Gradings to create Proposed Roadway Models are
very powerful
Feature Lines and Gradings are found in Corridor and Corridor Refinements Drawing Files. Access these Modules
for more information on DWG file location and naming.
3:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-003.mp4
110.050.003 WisDOT file standards
WisDOT drawing template (WisDOT12.DWT) contains:

Feature Line Styles

Layers and symbology for Feature Lines
Grading Criteria
Naming Sites
Site - <comment>
Site STH25And4thAVe -NW Quadrant
Naming Feature Line

<What it represents>--<Comment>
NW Quadrant Terrace
Naming Grading Group

Grading-<Comment>-<Comment>
Grading-NW Quadrant
Note: we are not enforcing strict naming standards for sites, feature lines and gradings. Make sure they are named
so you can keep track of them. Equally important, name them so someone else can review your project and figure
out what the Sites, Gradings and Feature Lines represent.
WisDOT Sharing Feature Lines and Gradings
Feature lines and Gradings are created to enhance the Proposed Roadway Models. They are not shared
individually, the resulting Roadway Models are shared.
Proposed Roadway Model surfaces can be shared with anyone who has access to the Project Data shortcuts
using surface Data Shortcuts
Objects derived from Proposed Roadway Model surfaces can be shared with outside organizations using
LandXML or possibly other custom formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Feature Lines and Gradings Need to Know!!!
Keep good project organization. You are beginning to see all of the files, data objects and combination of data
objects that we are dealing with. Civil 3D does a great job of setting us up successfully but the rest is up to us.
Good project organization is a must
Feature Lines and Gradings are used to enhance the Proposed Roadway Models. We can quite easily create
enhancements to details without going through lots of Corridor edits or customization
Sites are VERY important. Remember, the Feature Lines and Gradings contained in a site interact with each
other (Topology). Create separate sites if you want to separate the data.
Feature Lines can be created many different ways. WisDOT Workflow Exercise shows how to create Feature
Lines for Curb Return slope finishing. We have added an example demonstrating creation of Feature Lines and
Gradings that are dynamically linked to the Corridor and the Refined Surfaces.
Module 120 Roadway model

120.010 WisDOT standards - roadway models Section updated: 7/1/2010
Workflow for roadway model and refinement
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-010-workflow.pdf
2:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-001.mp4
Why Roadway Models???
7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-002.mp4

120.010.002 Reduced Design Mistakes

Better Representation of design intent
More detailed design = more problems solved before construction
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-003.mp4
120.010.003 AMG usage reduced construction cost
5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-004.mp4
120.010.004 WisDOT will be making the Roadway Model a design deliverable
6:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-005.mp4
120.010.005 Roadway Model Content
Roadway Models are made up of surfaces which represent 4 concepts:

Existing Ground
Datum
Base Course
Top
One Roadway Model for each Construction Stage
2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-006.mp4
120.010.006 Design Data Progression
1. Geometric Objects
2. Corridors
3. Corridor Surfaces
4. Refinement Surfaces
5. Roadway Model Surfaces
11:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-007.mp4
120.010.007 Civil 3D roadway model development workflow diagram
4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-008.mp4
120.010.008 Surface types
Corridor surface - Datum

Roadway model surface - Datum
Corridor surface - Top
Roadway model surface - Top
7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-009.mp4
120.010.009 Refinement surface - Top
Roadway model surface - Top
Refinement surface - Datum
Roadway model surface - Exist
Corridor model surface - Base course

Refinement surface - Base course
Roadway model surface - Base course
Roadway model surface - Exist
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-010.mp4
120.010.010 Design data progression - another look
6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-011.mp4
120.010.011 Developing refinement top surface

3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-012.mp4
120.010.012 Handling roadway projects that are difficult to process with limited computer hardware
Divide the project into multiple corridors and merge the resultant surfaces together.
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-013.mp4
120.010.013 Continued discussion on dealing with large roadway projects
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-014.mp4
120.010.014 Summary
Why Roadway Models?
Roadway Model Content
Design Data Progression
120.020 Exercise DS1400 - Create corridor surfaces Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-020-create-corridor-surfaces.pdf
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-001.mp4
6:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-002.mp4
120.020.002 Create corridor datum surface
7:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-003.mp4
120.020.003 Add data to corridor datum surface
6:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-004.mp4
120.020.004 Create corridor top surface
4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-005.mp4
120.020.005 Create corridor base course surface
5:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-006.mp4
120.020.006 Inspect corridor surfaces
7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-007.mp4
120.020.007 Add boundary to corridor datum surface 1
4:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-008.mp4
120.020.008 Add boundary to corridor datum surface 2
3:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-009.mp4
120.020.009 Inspect corridor datum surface
5:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-010.mp4
120.020.010 Add boundary to corridor top surface 1
5:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-011.mp4
120.020.011 Add boundary to corridor top surface 2
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-012.mp4
120.020.012 Add boundary to corridor base course surface 1
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-013.mp4
120.020.013 Add boundary to corridor base course surface 2
5:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-014.mp4
120.020.014 Inspect corridor surfaces in model space
5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-015.mp4
120.020.015 Inspect corridor surfaces in corridor section window
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-016.mp4
120.020.016 Fix corridor top surface
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-017.mp4
120.030 Exercise DS1500 - Create refinement surfaces Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-030-create-refinement-surfaces.pdf
2:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-001.mp4
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-002.mp4
120.030.002 Create refinement surface DWGs
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-003.mp4
120.030.003 Data shortcut references to corridor surfaces
2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-004.mp4
120.030.004 Create refinement datum surface
2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-005.mp4
120.030.005 Add data to refinement datum surface
1:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-006.mp4
120.030.006 Create refinement top surface
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-007.mp4
120.030.007 Add data to refinement top surface
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-008.mp4
120.030.008 Relationship of refinement datum and top surfaces
1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-009.mp4
120.030.009 Create refinement base course surface
3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-010.mp4
120.030.010 Inspect refinement surfaces together
1:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-011.mp4
120.030.011 Review

120.040 Exercise DS1600 - Refine refinement surfaces Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-040-refine-refinement-surfaces.pdf
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-001.mp4
4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-002.mp4
120.040.002 Update refinement surface references
4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-003.mp4
120.040.003 Review southwest quadrant refinement needs
6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-004.mp4
120.040.004 Refine southwest quadrant in corridor
7:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-005.mp4
120.040.005 Create ditch flowline feature line southwest quadrant
1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-006.mp4
120.040.006 Add ditch flowline feature line to surface southwest quadrant
3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-007.mp4
120.040.007 Add elevation points to ditch feature line southwest quadrant
7:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-008.mp4
120.040.008 Create clear zone feature line southwest quadrant
7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-009.mp4
120.040.009 Create slope intercept feature line southwest quadrant
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-010.mp4
120.040.010 Inspect southwest quadrant. Swap edges fixes.
7:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-011.mp4
120.040.011 Create featue line breaklines for southeast quadrant
8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-012.mp4
120.040.012 Create featue line breaklines for northeast quadrant
9:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-013.mp4
120.040.013 Create featue line breaklines for northwest quadrant
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-014.mp4
120.040.014 Inspect all intersection quadrants
5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-015.mp4
120.040.015 Swap edges refinement
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-016.mp4
120.040.016 Extract 3D polylines from surface border
1:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-017.mp4
120.040.017 Create boundary feature line from 3D polyline
8:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-018.mp4
120.040.018 Edit boundary feature line geometry
1:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-019.mp4
120.040.019 Add boundary feature line as surface boundary
6:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-020.mp4
120.040.020 Add refined datum to refinement top surface
5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-021.mp4
120.040.021 Swap edges on refinement top surface
120.050 Exercise DS1700 - Create roadway model surfaces Section updated: 7/1/2010
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-050-create-roadway-model-surfaces.pdf
2:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-001.mp4
4:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-002.mp4
120.050.002 Create roadway model DWGs
7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-003.mp4
120.050.003 Create roadway model Exist surface
4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-004.mp4
120.050.004 Create roadway model Base course surface
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-005.mp4
120.050.005 Create roadway model Top surface
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-006.mp4
120.050.006 Create roadway model datum surface
1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-007.mp4
120.050.007 Review
120.060 Corridor tips Section updated: 12/1/2010

8:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-001.mp4
120.060.001 Creating a cleaner corridor look 1
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-002.mp4
120.060.002 Creating a cleaner corridor look 2
120.070 Rural driveways Section updated: 3/1/2013

Exercise project dataset 1
Exercise project dataset 2
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-001.mp4

120.070.001 Combine Refinement-Top Surface with Exist Surface
120-070-proj-dataset1.zip
Create a new drawing using the wisdot template and save the drawing with an appropriate name such as
Surface-STH25-Refinement-Top with Exist.dwg
Data shortcut reference the existing ground surface and the Refinement-Top surface.
Create a new surface named something like STH25-Refinement-Top with Exist
In Toolspace Prospector tab, right click on the surface and choose select.
From the contextual surface ribbon-modify panel, click Edit Surface-Paste Surface
Choose the Existing Surface.
Repeat the command and choose the Refinement-Top Surface.
Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the Refinement-Top with Exist surface
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-002.mp4
120.070.002 Create New Drawing for Driveway Surfaces
Create a new drawing using the wisdot template and save the drawing with an appropriate name such as
STH25-Driveways.dwg
Data shortcut reference the Refinement-Top with Exist surface.
Data shortcut reference alignments for the centerline, edge of pavement, edge of paved shoulder, and edge
of gravel shoulder.
Xreference mapping dwg file(s).
14:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-003.mp4
120.070.003 Create Driveway Horizontal Geometry
Determine the approximate driveway limits (offset). This can be done in multiple ways such as using your
corridor section editor, or creating a quick profile along the driveway. The minimum extent of your driveway
limits should be at the back slope of the adjacent ditch (slope intercept). Also, determine whether you will
need more than one slope to define your driveway for added culvert clearance or rollover control.
Draw the driveway top in plan view on the P_DWY layer. Include the driveway entry radii and tapers. The
driveway can be created with line and arcs, but the driveway edges should ultimately be converted to five
polylines (left side, right side, match location, centerline, and edge of shoulder).
11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-004.mp4
120.070.004 Determine Driveway Elevation/Grade
Create a new Site. Name the site the approximate location of the driveway. For example: 380+75 LT.
Convert the driveway match polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For example:
380+75 LT Match). Assign the Standard style to the feature line. The style assignment determines the
elevation hierarchy of the feature lines in the site. Assign elevation to the feature line from the Refinement-Top
with Exist surface using the Elevations from Surface command. Make sure it is included in the site created for
this driveway.
It is highly recommended that you set up two viewports. One viewport should be set to plan view and the
other should be set to an isometric view of the driveway location.
Set the isometric viewport to a rendered view style such as Conceptual. This will allow you to watch your
driveway surface take shape as you build it.
Convert the edge of shoulder polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For example:
380+75 LT ES). Assign the Standard style to the feature line. Assign elevation to the feature line from the
Refinement-Top with Exist surface using the Elevations from Surface command. Make sure it is included in
the site created for this driveway.
Convert the driveway centerline polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For
example: 380+75 LT CL) Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will adopt its elevations from
the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Convert the driveway left and right side polylines into a feature lines. Name the feature lines appropriately
(For example: 380+75 LT LT and 380+75 LT RT). Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will
automatically adopt elevations from the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Use the Grade/Slope Between Points command to straight-line grade the left and right sides between the
edge of shoulder and the match location.

9:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-005.mp4
120.070.005 Create Gradings
Create a Grading Group in the same Site as the driveway. Name the Grading Group the driveway location.
Check Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name.
Set the Grading Criteria Set to "Rural Driveway". (if your drawing does not have the Rural Driveway criteria
set, use or create a slope to surface criteria)
Create 6:1 Gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines. If the roadway foreslope is steeper than
the driveway side slope, the gradings should extend from the driveway slope intercept (match location) to
approximately +/-10' short of the edge of gravel shoulder. If the roadway foreslope is the same as or flatter
than the driveway side slope, the grading can extend the full length of the feature line.
Tip: When prompted for the grading end location, it is useful to use the Length option at the command line.
The command will then notify you of the length remaining to the end of the feature line.
Create additional gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines that match the roadway foreslope if
the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slope. These gradings should extend from a point
about +/-0.01' from the end of edge of gravel shoulder to the edge of gravel shoulder.
Create Grading Transitions (only if the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slopes)
Select Create Transition from the Grading Creation Tools

Select the feature line.
Select a point between the 6:1 grading and 4:1 grading.
Save the drawing
Create Grading Infill for Driveway Top
Choose the Create Infill command from the Grading Creation Tools.
Select the regions defining the top of the driveway and hit enter.
You will see the completed driveway surface in the isometric view.
Save the file.
12:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-006.mp4
120.070.006 Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Horizontal Geometry
All the steps outlined above apply.

Add an additional polyline representing the slope break in the driveway profile.
7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-007.mp4
120.070.007 Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Determine Driveway Elevation and Grade

Convert the additional polyline representing the slope break in the driveway profile to a feature line. Assign
the feature line the standard style.
Assign this feature line elevation by using the Adjacent Elevations by Reference command.
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-008.mp4
120.070.008 Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Create Gradings
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-009.mp4
120.070.009 Combine Driveway Surfaces into a Single Surface
120-070-proj-dataset2.zip
Extract Driveway Surface Boundaries

Set all of the driveway surfaces to a border only display style

Modify Tab - Ground Data Panel - Surfaces
From the Surface contextual ribbon - Surface Tools Panel, select Extract Objects
Select a driveway surface
Choose Select from Drawing in the Value column. Select the driveway surface boundary. Hit Enter and
then click OK to exit the command.
Repeat this for all of the driveway surfaces to create a 3D polyline for each driveway boundary.
Create Combined Driveway Surface
Draw a poly line that encompasses all of the driveway surfaces.

Create a new surface called STH25-Driveways
Expand the STH25-Driveways surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector, right click on Edits, and choose
Paste Surface.
Select all of the individual driveway surfaces and click OK.
Right click on Boundaries in the STH-25-Driveway surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector. Choose
Add...
Name the boundary Hide and the type should be Hide. Click OK.
Select the polyline that encompasses all of the driveway surfaces.
Right click on Boundaries in the STH-25-Driveway surface definition in the Toolspace Prospector. Choose
Add...
The name should be Show and the type should be Show. Check Non-destructive breakline. Click OK.
Select all of the individual driveway boundaries (3D polylines).
120.080 Extract Design Surface Data Utility Overview Section updated: 6/17/2015
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-080-001-proj-dataset.zip
7:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-001.mp4
The Extract Design Surface Data Utility is used to extract the breaklines that define the design surface.
The tool uses a 2 step process. During the first step, the utility systematically follows through each of
the surface definition operations and extracts the breaklines that were contributed by that operation.
The extracted breaklines are inserted into a new base AutoCAD drawing, as indicated in the Select a
drawing template input. Each breakline is assigned a layer based on its source using the template
SourceFile.SourceObject.ObjectType.
Once all of the source breaklines have been extracted and consolidated into a single dwg file, the tool
proceeds with the validation phase. The tool can be setup to proceed to the validation phase
automatically, or it can be triggered manually by the user. At this stage, the breaklines are in the form of
line segments. The validation phase included four processes that analyze each line segment:
1. Duplicate removal: All line segments that are redundant with another line segment within a
specified tolerance are deleted.
2. Surface Paste: All breakline segments from contributing sources are added to the dwg file. If a
surface paste occurs in the surface definitions, any breakline segments that are within the surface
past boundary and removed and replaced with the breakline segments of the pasted surfaces. For
example: The Rfnt-Top surface has the Rfnt-Datum surface pasted into it. Then, the Crdr-Top
surface is pasted over the Rfnt-Datum surface. The utility will extract breakline segments from both
the Rfnt-Datum surface and the Crdr-Top surface. During the validation phase, the utility will
removal all line segments from the Rfnt-Datum surface that fall within the boundary of the Crdr-Top
surface.
3. Line Segment Validation: Each breakline segment is compared to the TIN edges of the design
surface. If the midpoint of a breakline segment does not fall on a TIN edge within the specified
tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH. If the midpoint of the
breakline segment falls on a TIN edge, but its end vertices do not match the TIN edge vertices
within the specified tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH.
4. Breakline Segment Join: The utility joins the breakline segments if their end vertices are within a
specified tolerance. The end result is a series of 3D Polylines.
7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-002.mp4
120.080.002 Surface Breakline Extraction and Validation
1. Open the refinement surface dwg.

2. Open the utility from Toolbox WisDOT Toolbox WisDOT Macros Design Surface Data Extractor
3. Choose the refinement surface to extract data from.
4. Specify the new breakline drawing location and name. The file should typically be located in the Surfaces
directory of the Civil 3D project. Name the file starting with the refinement surface name and the words
RawData. Example: Rfnt-Top-RawData
5. Acad.dwt is the default template and is appropriate in most cases.
6. Specify the Civil 3D project folder location as the data shortcuts project folder. This is important information
that the tool needs to locate the breakline sources.
7. Set the extraction settings based on preference.
1. Sometimes it is helpful to color so they look similar to their source colors. For example, a common
color for corridor feature lines in the wisdot template is magenta. Therefore, it makes sense to
magenta as the color for breaklines originating from a corridor feature line.
2. In most cases, keep Validate New Drawing After Data Extraction checked. This will validate the
data automatically immediately following data extraction. Unchecking this can sometimes be useful
for troubleshooting.
8. Review the data validation settings. These are the tolerance values used in the validation process. Every
project is unique and these setting can vary. However, we suggest starting with the default values. If the
desired results are not achieved, these settings can be adjusted.
9. Click the extract data button
10. Depending on the size of the data, the extraction and validation process may take some time.
11. Once the process is complete the drawing will open. Take some time to review the drawing, looking for
anything unusual. There should not be a large number of breakline segments on the LINE_NO_MATCH
layers. If gradings were used to develop part of the surface definition, you will notice they are represented by
the TIN edge of the grading surface. Grading breaklines cannot be extracted from Civil 3D, so the TIN edges
will be used for the breakline deliverable in the areas created by gradings.
6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-003.mp4
120.080.003 Check Extracted Breaklines
The easiest way to verify that the extracted breaklines represent the design surface is to make a new surface from
the extracted breaklines. Then, compare the new surface with the design surface.
1. In the breakline dwg file, turn off all of the LINE_NO_MATCH layers.
2. Turn off all of the surface boundary layers, except the design surface layer.
3. Select all of the remaining objects in the drawing. Right Click Clipboard Copy
4. Open a new drawing using the wisdot14.dwt template.
5. Save the drawing in the Civil 3D Surfaces directory. Name the file starting with the refinement surface
name and the words Verification.Example name: Rfnt-Top-Verification
6. Past to original coordinates in the new dwg.
7. Data shortcut reference the refinement surface that the breaklines were extracted from. Set the surface
style to No Display.
8. Create a new surface. Example Name: Rfnt-Top-FromBreaklines
9. Turn off the surface boundary layer.
10. In the Toolspace-Prospector, expand the new surface definition. Right Click on Breaklines and choose
Add
11. Click Ok and window-select all of the breaklines on the screen.
12. Turn on all Layers.
13. Return to the Toolspace-Prospector, and right click on Boundaries in the surface definition. Choose Add
14. Type should be Outer, Non-destructive. Click Ok. Choose the 3D Polyline surface boundary.
15. From the Analyze tab Click Volumes Dashboard.
16. Create a new volume surface. Example Name: Rfnt-Top-Verification
17. Set the Style to Elevations.
18. Set the base surface to the design surface (refinement surface)
19. Set the comparison surface to the from breaklines surface.
20. Dismiss the volumes dashboard.
21. Select the volume surface on the screen and view the Surface Properties.
22. On the Analyze tab, set the analysis type to Elevation. Verify there are 2 ranges. Click the Run Analysis
button.
23. Set range 1 to be the minimum to -0.01
24. Set range 2 to 0.01 to the maximum
25. Set the two range colors to something that will catch your eye, such as red or orange.
26. Click Ok.
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-004.mp4
120.080.004 Results Interpretation
There will be areas that will be greater than 0.01 ft difference from the design surface. A common sense
approach must be used to evaluate these areas. Set the display style for design surface to triangles.
Set the display style for the FromBreaklines surface to triangles. Choose styles that have different
colors so you can distinguish each surface.
1. First, check for areas that are within the subgrade shoulder points. In most cases, these areas
appear based on the way the surface triangulates. To check if the breaklines produced a valid
surface, perform a swap edge command on the TIN edge of the from breaklines surface. Set the
volume surface to Rebuild-Automatic. The color from the volume surface should disappear. If it
does not, further troubleshooting of the breaklines is needed.
2. Once the areas within the subgrade shoulder points have been reviewed, view the Volume
Surface properties. Under the Statistics tab, expand General. Observe the minimum and maximum
elevation. These are the maximum deviations between the design surface and the FromBreaklines
surface. Do they seem reasonable for areas outside of the subgrade shoulder points?
3. If there are areas that significantly differ from the design surface, go back to the extracted
breaklines dwg file. Review any breaklines in the area that are on a LINE_NO_MATCH layer. They
can offer clues regarding the differences or why some breaklines may be different.
TIP: The Extract Design Surface Data utility includes a custom Tooltip toggle. This button will
trigger a detailed tooltip for each breakline that displays additional information about its origin.
4. You may notice areas where breaklines have gaps. If the gaps are small enough where they do
not impact surface triangulation, they are ok.
5. If for some reason, the Extract Design Surface Data utility removed a valid breakline during the
extraction process, that missing breakline can be obtained manually from the source.
6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-005.mp4
120.080.005 Surface Modeling Best Practices & Breakline Extraction Troubleshooting
These best practices for surface model creation will make the breakline extraction much simpler. If
these best practices are not followed, the breakline extraction process will not work as intended.
Links for corridor surface definition. This is a bad practice for the deliverable that we want to
achieve. We want the surfaces to be defined by longitudinal breaklines because these are the
elements that our contractors are looking for. It is not a good idea to mix links and feature lines in
the surface definition because once you include the links, there is not a good way to know if you
have all of the required feature lines. If you have all of the required feature lines, there really isnt
any need for the links. One argument for links is that they help force desired triangulation in certain
situations. An intersection radius is an example of that. However, this can easily be resolved by
adding a single line or 3D Polyline to the refinement surface definition.
Surface edit tools. We do not want designers using the surface edit tools, except is certain
situations.
Added surface definition created by these tools cannot be extracted and delivered for
construction. In the example from the first bullet, the add line or swap edge commands are
often used to clean up the intersection triangulation. However, the proper way to address that is
by adding a line or 3D polyline as a breakline. The commands highlighted in pink should not be
needed for design surface definition. The delete line and delete point command can be used
because they take away previously created elements of the surface definition. Delete line is
often used to remove external triangulation that was not removed by a corridor boundary. Using
the delete point command will cause the points source breakline segment to be no longer valid
and will therefore be excluded from the breakline deliverable by the Design Surface Data
Extractor. Adjustments to the corridor or addition of breaklines should address situations where
the remaining surface edit commands would otherwise be used. When breaklines are extracted
from the refinement surface definition, you should be able to recreate the refinement surface
from those breaklines alone. If these surfaces edits are used, the surface created from the
extracted breaklines will not match the refinement surface. In summary, the surface edits
cannot be extracted and conveyed in the breakline file.
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-006.mp4
120.080.006 Surface Modeling Best Practices & Breakline Extraction Troubleshooting (continued)
Redundant Feature Lines. Avoid creating corridor surfaces with two feature lines from two
difference regions on top of each other. This problem does not become apparent until the breakline
extraction process is performed. Going back to the intersection example again, what typically
happens is we get two feature lines in the red-highlighted portions.
Along the main roadway, you get a Crown feature line from the curb return region and an ETW feature
line from the travel way region. Along the side road, you get a crown feature line from both curb return
regions. The feature lines end up competing to define the surface. Then, when you extract the
breaklines from the refinement surface definition, neither of the competing feature lines are coincident
with the triangle vertices. There are two ways that this can be addressed. The first way is to make sure
that the competing feature lines have all the same vertices. This is probably the more difficult option
because it involves adding special sections in the competing regions to get them to match. In the case
of the intersection example, the easier method is to turn the crown location parameter off in LnGeneric
for the curb return regions. That leaves only the ETW feature line for the edge of travel way portion.
However, now you dont have any feature lines for the crown along the side road. That is addressed by
adding a region along the side road with a simple assembly such as what I have shown below.

Combine Refinement Surfaces. There should be a single refinement surface for each type. In
other words, a single Refinement-Top, a single Refinement-Datum, etc. This makes the surfaces
easier to manage for the contractor. It also makes extracting the breaklines simpler because you
dont need to run the design data extraction utility on multiple surfaces and combine the data in an
additional step.
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-007.mp4
120.080.007 Packaging the Surface Model Breaklines for Delivery
1. In the BreaklineVerification dwg file, set all surfaces to No Display.
2. From the Civil 3D menu, Export DWG - Choose the latest version.
3. Name the file <const ID>-<surface model type>-breaklines-<const stage>.dwg. Example: 12345678-Top-
Breaklines.dwg
4. This dwg file will hold the breaklines and the surface boundary.
120.100 Surface exercise - Create pavement model surfaces Section updated: 3/1/2013
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-100-proj-dataset-finished.zip
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-001.mp4
120.100.001 Create Pavement Surface Model
1. Open Corridor dwg, save as Corridor-Pavement dwg
3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-002.mp4
120.100.002 2. In each Assembly, remove the subassemblies that lie outside the subgrade shoulder point.
2:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-003.mp4
120.100.003 3. Delete all corridor surfaces except Top, Rename Top surface to Pavement
7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-004.mp4
120.100.004 4. Set all Regions to a frequency matching WisDOT 3D Surface Model Standards for Pavement surfaces,
Create Data Shortcut for Corridor-Pavement surface

5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-005.mp4
120.100.005 5. Create Refinement Pavement surface. Review definition of refinement Top surface, replicate edits in
Pavement surface.
0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-006.mp4
120.100.006 6. Create 3D Surface Model surface files (surfaces, breaklines, boundary)
120.110 Beamguard Section updated: 6/25/2013

Example beamguard modeling file
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-110-demo-files.zip
120.110.001 Content for this section can currently be found at ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-

help.pdf#Modeling_Beam_Guard_End_Termina
120.120 Crossovers Section updated: 6/25/2013
120.120.001 Content for this section can currently be found at ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-

help.pdf#Modeling_Crossovers
120.130 Daylight grading with feature lines Section updated: 3/10/2014

9:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-001.mp4
120.130.001 Daylight grading ALTERNATIVE
To create a better transition between daylight slope regions

Subassembly transitions occur between frequency lines not nearly far enough apart
What components are needed?

The assembly
Two conditional subassemblies (per side)
Two GenCF daylight subassembly per conditional subassembly
One with Final Link Inserted, on Omitted
Polyline for length of transition
Identify where 4:1 to 2.5:1 transition occurs

Draw polyline from end of transition to point >100
Add conditional subassemblies and adjusted GenCF to the assembly
Set corridor targets for all conditional subassemblies
Create grading feature line from corridor
Create grading criteria for surface targeting
Grade from corridor feature line to daylight
Begin with 4:1 for 5 of feature line
End with 2.5:1 for last 5 of feature line
Use grading transition in the middle of the feature line
Create Automatic Surface from the Grading Group Properties

Create data shortcut for grading surface
Reference this surface and paste into refinement surface.
2012 versus 2014
16:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-002.mp4

120.130.002 Look for Grading Transition Needs

You need to find where transition areas are too quick. If you arent certain where this might occur you can look for
telltale signs in your corridor design.
Look for a Transition Notch

The transition from 4:1 to 2.5:1 will happen from one frequency line to the next. This sudden transition will create
a notch in the edge of the corridor
Usually there will be two notches, one for the 4:1 to 2.5:1 transition and one for the 2.5:1 to 4:1 transition.
Use the Section Editor to Confirm the Sudden Transition

Select a frequency line near the sudden transition area.
Zoom in the section view to the side that is transitioning.
Select the Zoom Extents button drop-down and choose Zoom to an Offset and Elevation.
In the Section Editor Station Selection, click the single arrow icons to advance one station at a time through the
transition station.
Confirm the 4:1 slope in one station and 2.5:1 slope in the next.
Close the Section Editor
Create the Transition Area Target

You need to create a target (or trigger) for the Conditional Subassembly to begin its work.
Draw a 2D Polyline for the Correct Length

In the Home tab, Draw panel, choose the Polyline tool.
Begin drawing the target polyline at or near where the Transition area ends.
This polyline can be any distance from the corridor. You can snap to the corridor for positioning.
This polyline should be generally greater than 100, suggested closer to 110.
If there is an arc in the corridor this polyline should follow that curve.
Right-click and choose Enter to end the polyline command.
Create a Layer for the Target Polyline

Home tab, Layer panel, Click the Layer Properties Manager
In the left Filter window set the filter to All so that you can see all of the layers.
Check to see if the layer P_Daylight-Transtion already exists.
If it does, make that layer current.
Select the P_Daylight-Transition layer
At the top of the Layer Properties Manager select the green check icon to make it current.
If it does not already exist click the Create Layer icon at the top of the Layer Manager.
Name the layer P_Daylight-Transition
Make sure the Linetype is Continuous
Make sure the No Plot option is turned on.
At the top of the Layer Properties Manager select the green check icon to make it current
Select the target polyline(s)
Change the layer of the polyline to the P_Daylight-Transition layer
Update the Assembly

This is assumed that an assembly is already in place. We will be adding conditional subassemblies to that
assembly and moving the daylight subassembly to the end of the new conditional subassemblies.
Add the Conditional Subassembly to the Existing Assembly

Zoom into the GenCF subassembly that needs the conditional subassembly.
Open the tool palette to place the subassembly.
Home tab, Palettes panel, lower middle button (or <CTRL> 3)
Select the Conditional tool palette tab.
Select the Conditional Horizontal Target subassembly.
Set the side to Left
Leave the Type to Target Found
Attach this subassembly to the Shoulder subassembly. Use the Selection Cycling to properly connect the
subassembly.
In the Properties palette change the Type to Target Not Found.
Attach this conditional subassembly to the Shoulder subassembly. Use the Selection Cycling to properly connect
the subassembly.
Move the GenCF Daylight Subassembly to the Conditional Subassemblies

Select the GenCF daylight subassembly.
Right-click and choose Move To.
Select the attachment point at the end of the Not Found conditional subassembly.
Copy the GenCF to the Found Condition Subassembly

Select the GenCF daylight subassembly.
Right-click and choose Copy To.
Select the newly placed copy of the GenCF.
Right-click and choose Subassembly Properties
Click the Parameters tab.
Rebuild the Corridor

In the Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link and change the setting to Omit.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab expand Corridors
Right-click the corridor name. Choose Corridor Properties
Parameters tab.
Set All Targets.
Under Surface targets click Set All Targets.
Choose the EG surface.
Find the Conditional Horizontal Targets and click in their value field.
Change the type of target to Feature Lines, Survey Figures and Polylines.
Click Select by Layer.
Check mark the correct layer (P_Daylight-Transition)
Repeat these steps for each Conditional Subassembly in the regions. This is necessary for both the Found
and Not Found conditions.
Click OK to rebuild the corridor.
13:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-003.mp4
120.130.003 Extract Grading Feature Line from Corridor
We need to translate a corridor feature at the edge of our design into a grading feature line that the grading tools
will recognize and be able to work with.
Extract the Feature Line

Select the feature line to extract.
From the green context ribbon, Launch Pad panel, select the Feature Line from Corridor.
In the dialog make sure these settings are set:
The Site should be unique, and not one that other grading in this file that our current work might interfere
with.
Check the Name field and name the new feature line Daylight Grading Line West.
Style checkmark and set to Standard.
For Layer set to Use Current Layer.
Make sure the Create Dynamic Link to Corridor is checked. This is the important option in this dialog!
Click OK. Then <Esc>.
Begin the Grading

We will create a grading criteria (rules for the gradings to follow) then apply them to the grading area.
Start the Grading Tools

Home tab, Create Design panel, Grading tools, select Grading Creation Tools.
Select the second icon to set the Surface. Select EG.
In the toolbar select the first icon, Grading Group.
Name the Grading Group Daylight Grading.
Click OK.
Hover over the fourth icon to check the grading criteria set.
Create and Set the Grading Criteria

Select the button just past the drop down menu and select Copy Current Selection.
On the Information tab name the criteria Daylight Grading.
In the Criteria tab
Change the Target to Surface.
Make sure the Slope fields for Cut and Fill areas are both unlocked.
Click OK.
Create the Grading

Select the Create Grading icon.
Select the grading feature line at the edge of the notched area. From the Selection Cycling dialog it is the Auto
Corridor Feature Line.
Left click the Grading Side to the west of the feature line.
Answer NO to the Entire Length prompt.
Snap the Start Point to the beginning of the notch, the end of the daylight location.
Confirm the station location by clicking <ENTER>.
For the length type in 1103, which is ~5 from the start station.
Confirm this station as well by clicking <ENTER>.
Type 4 to set the Cut Slope at 4:1.
Type 4 to set the Fill Slope at 4:1.
Pan to the north of the grading area notch.
Select the grading feature line. In the Selection Cycling dialog this will be the Auto Corridor Feature Line.
Select to the west of the feature line for the grading side.
Click approximately 5 from the end, about where the last non-daylight frequency line is located.
Confirm the station by clicking <ENTER>.
Snap to the end of the grading by snapping to the beginning of the first daylight point.
Confirm the station by clicking on the <ENTER>.
Create the Transition Grading

From the Grading Creation toolbar select the Create Grading drop down button and choose Create Transition.
Select the grading feature line. In the Selection Cycling this will be the Auto Corridor Feature Line.
Click a point between the two gradings.
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-004.mp4
120.130.004 Clean up the Grading Area
Turning off layers so that lines that do not need to be seen, but need to be used by the grading design, do not
distract from the design work.
Turn Off the Conditional Subassemblys Target Line Layer

Home tab, Layers panel, Layer Manager pull-down menu.
Click the lightbulb to turn off the P_Daylight-Transition layer.
Set the Current Layer to something other than the off layer.
Home tab, Layers panel, Layer Manager pull-down, select the 0 layer to make it current.
Create the Surface from the Grading Area

We need to make a surface from the grading tools. This surface will be dynamic to the grading, and any changes
that occur to the corridor design.
Access the Grading Object Diamonds

If you cannot see the grading object diamond symbols:
Zoom out
Type RE to regen your screen.
Zoom in and the grading diamonds should be larger and easier to find.
Select on one of the grading object diamonds.
In the green context ribbon select Grading Group Properties.
Create the Surface from the Grading Group

On the Information tab make sure the check mark is on the Automatic Surface Creation.
In the Surface Creation dialog name the surface Surface-Daylight Grading
In the Styles field click the ellipsis button to change the surface style.
In the Surface Style selection dialog click the drop down and choose Proposed Contours 2
Major .5 Minors.
Click OK.
Create a Data Shortcut for the Grading Surface

So that this surface can be referenced into other files, specifically the refinement surface file, we need to make a
data shortcut for the grading surface.
Save the file.

In the toolspace, Data Shortcut area, right-click on the Data Shortcut area header.

Chose Create Data Shortcuts.

Checkmark the Surface-Daylight Grading surface.
Click OK.
120.140 Curb ramps Section updated: 4/13/2015

0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-000.mp4
Goals
Curb ramp surface models
Dynamic relationship with the roadway design (vertical)
Allows for earlier design of curb ramps
Applicable to projects with dynamic roadway designs
Alternative
Non-Dynamic models using feature line/grading tools
Early design could mean re-design
Applicable to rehab projects with static roadway designs
Workflow Overview
Verify Roadway Design
Create Curb Cuts
Curb Ramp Setup Corridors/Surfaces
Link Roadway/Sidewalk Design to Curb Ramps
Create Alignments/Profiles representing Curb Ramp Break Lines
Create Curb Ramp Corridor/Surface
Grading Object for Daylight
Paste to Refinement Surface
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-001.mp4
Type 2 Curb Ramps. (2 sidewalks with terraces approach an intersection, tapered sides)
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Establish Curb Ramp Alignments in Roadway Corridor File
Alignments are already created in the data set. Most curb ramps will require a landing where the
curb ramp meets the back of curb and gutter. This is typically the triangular area between the
detectable warning field and the back of curb and it must not exceed 1.5%. Suggesting naming:
Int-<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Landing-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example:
Int-MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Landing-MainStAn alignment is required that follows the back of curb around
the intersection radii.
6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-002.mp4
120.140.002 Design Checks

Check Roadway Cross Slopes At Crosswalks

Refer to FDM 11-46-10.1.1. Verify that the roadway longitudinal slope (cross walk cross slope) at is
no more that 1.5%. If the intersection is signalized or uncontrolled, the main roadway can maintain
its profile.
Check Curb Radii Profiles

Verify that the curb radii profiles do not exceed 1.5% at the crosswalk locations. A quick way to
verify these locations is to create AutoCAD points where the crosswalk intersects the curb flange
alignments. Then, project these points to the curb radii profile views. Adjust the curb radii profiles
as needed.
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-003.mp4
120.140.003 Curb Cuts Explained
Notice that instead of using a standard curb and gutter subassembly, a group of generic
subassemblies were used to form the curb. These generic LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies will
follow superelevation data assign to the curb return alignment.
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-004.mp4
120.140.004 Create Curb Cuts
Edit the superelevation for the curb radii alignments. Add the following critical stations to vary the gutter pan
slope and the curb head height:
Beginning of alignment
Right inside lane (gutter) = -6.25%
Right Outside Lane (face of curb) = 5000%
Right Outside Shoulder (top of curb) = 0%
End of alignment
Same as Beginning of alignment
2 before curb ramp
Same as beginning of alignment
Beginning of curb ramp
Right inside lane (gutter) = -4%
Right Outside Lane (face of curb) = 0%
Right Outside Shoulder (Top of curb = 1.5%
End of curb ramp

Same as beginning of curb ramp

2 beyond curb ramp
Same as end of alignment
Rebuild the corridor. The curb cuts will appear in the model.
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-005.mp4
120.140.005 Create Curb Cuts (continued)
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-006.mp4
120.140.006 Create the Crdr-Ultimate Surface
Create a corridor surface that represents the ultimate top. This surface is the top of finished ground of the
entire corridor. Unlike the Crdr-Top surface, the Crdr-Ultimate surface extends all the way to the slope
intercepts. This surface has been created for you in the training data set.
Create a Curb and Gutter Only Corridor and Corridor Suface

A separate setup corridor is needed that represents only the curb and gutter. The purpose of the corridor and
corridor surface is to avoid circular references. Use an assembly that consists of nothing more than the curb
and gutter generic subassemblies from earlier. Create a new corridor called Setup-BOC and a corridor surface
called Crdr-Setup-BOC.
5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-007.mp4
120.140.007 Create Auxillary Alignments for Curb Ramp Setup Corridor
Unless the roadway intersection is a perfect 90-degree, auxiliary alignments will need to be made
for the curb ramp setup corridor base line.
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the primary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the secondary road. Name this alignment <[Primary
Road]>-Aux. For example: MainSt-Aux
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the secondary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the primary road. Name this alignment
<[Secondary Road]>-Aux. For example: FirstSt-Aux
Create an existing surface profile for both Aux alignments.
7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-008.mp4

120.140.008 Create Curb Ramp Setup Corridors

From the WisDOT Assemblies palette, insert the Setup-CurbRamp-L and Setup-CurbRamp-R assemblies
into the drawing.
Create a new corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Primary Road]>. Example: Setup-CurbRamps-MainSt
Set the baseline to the Primary Road Auxillary alignment and existing surface profile.
Choose either the Setup-CurbRamps-L or Setup-CurbRamps-R assembly, depending on the side of the road
the curb ramp is located.
Set the Target Surface to the Crdr-Setup-BOC surface.
In the Baseline parameters, set the start and end stations to the start and end of the curb ramp.
Set the targets. The targeting is described in the subassembly names and should be apparent.
Click Ok to build the corridor.
All curb ramps that are located along the primary roadway can be added to this corridor.
Create a second setup corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Secondary Road]>. Example: Setup-
CurbRamps-FirstSt
Set the baseline to the Secondary Road Auxillary alignment and existing surface profile.
Follow the same steps as the primary road setup corridor outlined above.
All curb ramps that are located along the side road can be added to this corridor.
2:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-009.mp4
120.140.009 Create Curb Ramp Setup Corridor Surfaces
Create a corridor surface called Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-<[Primary Road]>
The Top links can be used to define this setup corridor.
Create a second setup corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Secondary Road]>. Example: Setup-
CurbRamps-FirstSt
The Top links can be used to define this setup corridor.
8:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-010.mp4
120.140.010 Tie Sidewalk Profiles to Curb Ramp Elevation
Determine which curb ramp is controlling. The curb ramp elevation that is controlling (primary
road or secondary road), is the one that is lower.
Create a Surface Profile for the primary roadway and secondary roadway back of sidewalk
alignments. The surface profiles should be created on the controlling curb ramp surface.
Create an intersection object to tie the primary road sidewalk profile to the secondary road back of
sidewalk surface profile created in the previous step.
Home tab, Create Design panel, Intersections-Create Intersection
Digitize the location where the primary road inside sidewalk alignment intersects the
secondary road outside sidewalk alignment.
Select the Secondary Road back of sidewalk alignment as the main road alignment.
In the Geometry Details portion of the Create Intersection Dialogue, uncheck the Create
or specify offset alignments box.
Verify that the secondary road alignment is priority 1 and the primary road alignment is
priority 2.
Verify that the curb ramp setup surface profile is chosen for the priority 1 alignment
Verify that the proposed sidewalk profile is chosen for the priority 2 alignment.
Click Create Intersection

Repeat the previous step to create an intersection object where the Secondary inside sidewalk
alignment intersects the Primary outside sidewalk alignment.
This time, the primary road outside alignment and surface profile are priority 1. The secondary
road inside alignment and proposed profile are priority 2.
The proposed sidewalk profiles are now dynamically locked to the curb ramp upper landing
elevation. When the roadway elevation changes, the curb ramp elevation changes automatically
with it, and so does the proposed sidewalk profile.
Add a PVI to the proposed sidewalk profiles transition down to the curb ramp upper landing.
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-011.mp4

120.140.011 Save DWG and Create Data Shortcuts

Save the DWG file.
Create Data Shortcuts for the following objects:
Surfaces
Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-[<Primary Roadway>]
Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps-[<Secondary Roadway>]
Crdr-Ultimate
Alignments
Back of Curb Alignment(s)
Curb Ramp Lower Landing Alignment(s)
Close the file
2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-012.mp4
Create Curb Ramp DWG 120-140-002-proj-dataset.zip

Create a new dwg and name it Crdr-CurbRamps.dwg (This file has already been created for you in the
training data set)
Data reference the following objects (The data references have already been created in the training data set)
Primary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
Secondary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
All sidewalk alignments
Crdr-Ultimate Surface
Crdr-Setup-Curb Ramp Surfaces
Exist surface
Intersection back of curb alignments
Create Curb Ramp DWG 120-140-002-proj-dataset.zip

Create a new dwg and name it Crdr-CurbRamps.dwg (This file has already been created for you in
the training data set)
Data reference the following objects (The data references have already been created in the
training data set)
Primary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
Secondary Roadway Lower Landing alignment
All sidewalk alignments
Crdr-Ultimate Surface
Crdr-Setup-Curb Ramp Surfaces
Exist surface
Intersection back of curb alignments
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-013.mp4
120.140.013 Create Curb Ramp Alignments

Create the following miscellaneous alignments

Primary Roadway Ramp Alignment
Secondary Roadway Ramp Alignment
Primary Roadway Taper Alignment
Secondary Roadway Taper Alignment
Back of Sidewalk Alignment
The Ramp Alignments are made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int-
<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Ramp-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example: Int-
MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Ramp-MainSt
Intersection of the lower landing alignment and the inside sidewalk alignment
Intersection of the two inside sidewalk alignments
Intersection of the inside sidewalk alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
Intersection of the lower landing alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
The back of sidewalk alignment is made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int-
<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Sdwk-Out. Example: Int-MainSt-FirstSt-SE-
Sdwk-Out
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Intersection of the outside sidewalk alignments
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
5:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-014.mp4
120.140.014 Create Curb Ramp Alignments Continued
The ramp taper alignments are made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int-
<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Taper-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example: Int-
MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Taper-MainSt
Location on the back of curb alignment, adjacent to the ramp, were the curb head is full
(top of taper).
Intersection of the inside sidewalk alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
Location on the inside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Hint for finding the location along the back of curb alignment: Give the Crdr-Ultimate
surface a triangles style. View the surface from a 3D Isometric perspective. Draw a polyline
by snapping to the back of curb. This will reveal the PI locations in plan view when creating
the alignment. Caution: The surface triangle vertices are not necessarily coincident with the
back of curb alignment. The PI location needs to be on the back of curb alignment, so use
the intersection snap to find the intersection of the back of curb alignment and the surface
triangle line.
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-015.mp4
120.140.015 Create Curb Ramp Surface Profiles
Create surface profiles on the controlling curb ramp setup surface for the following alignments
Primary Road Inside Sidewalk
Primary Road Outside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Inside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Outside Sidewalk
Create surface profiles on the Crdr-Ultimate surface for the following alignments
Primary Road Inside Sidewalk
Primary Road Outside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Inside Sidewalk
Secondary Road Outside Sidewalk
Back of Curb
Create a surface profile for the curb ramp lower landing alignments. The surface profile should be created
using the curb ramp setup surface associated with that landing. In other words, the primary roadway landing

should have a surface profile for the primary roadway curb ramp setup surface. The secondary roadway
landing should have a surface profile for the secondary roadway curb ramp setup surface.
5:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-016.mp4
120.140.016 Create Curb Ramp Proposed Profiles
Create profile views for the following alignments
Primary Road Taper
Secondary Road Taper
Primary Road Ramp*
Secondary Road Ramp*
Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk
Create proposed profiles for the alignments listed in the previous step. Pick an arbitrary VPI before the
alignment begin station and after the alignment end station. These VPIs will be deleted in a later step.
Intersection objects will create the actual VPIs for these profiles.
*The Ramp alignment that is on the controlling curb ramp does not need a proposed profile created. Instead,
create a surface profile for this alignment. The surface profile will be on the controlling Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp
surface. Label the surface profile to verify the slopes are correct.
5:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-017.mp4
120.140.017 Create Curb Ramp Intersection Objects
Create the following intersections objects. Notice that all of the Priority 1 profiles are surface profiles and the
Priority 2 profiles are proposed profiles. Refer to the note above regarding the ramp profiles.
Priority 1 Alignment/Profile Priority 2 Alignment/Profile

Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Landing/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Primary Road Ramp/Proposed*
OR
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Primary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Secondary Rd Landing/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Ramp/Proposed*
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Primary Road Taper/Proposed

Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Primary Road Taper/Proposed
Primary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Primary Road Taper/Proposed
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Secondary Road Taper/Proposed
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed
Secondary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp SurfaceCurb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed
Primary Rd Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Curb Ramp Outside Sidewalk/Proposed
For the Alignment/Profile combinations listed in Blue, there are other possible alignment/surface profile
combinations that can be used. The combinations listed in the table are one option. The important thing
is to somehow tie the proposed profile to the surface profile that will represent the curb ramp elevation.

When creating the intersection objects, this notification will be presented. Choose Create
intersection with dynamic profiles.
5:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-018.mp4
120.140.018 Create Curb Ramp Intersection Objects Continued
See 120-140-017
2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-019.mp4
120.140.019 Clean Up Proposed Curb Ramp Profiles
If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.
5:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-020.mp4
120.140.020 Create Curb Ramp Corridor
Insert the CurbRamps-Basic assembly from the WisDOT-Assemblies palette. This assembly consists of the
MarkPoint and LinkWidthAndSlope generic subassemblies. The MarkPoint subassembly is the only
subassembly that will be used by the corridor. The LinkWidthAndSlope is there because the corridor will not
recognize a feature line unless there is at least one link in the assembly.
Create a new corridor called CurbRamps
Select any of the curb ramp alignments as the starting base line. The assembly is CurbRamps-Basic. There
is not a target surface.
Once in the corridor baseline and region parameters dialogue, add each of the curb ramp alignments/profile
to the definition.
Add a region for each of the baselines. The station limits for all of the regions will be the limits of the
alignment. The only exception is the back of curb alignment. Those station limits must be set to the ends of
the radius.
There are no targets to set for the corridor.
Click Ok and rebuild the corridor. Feature lines will now show up along each alignment.
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-021.mp4
120.140.021 Create Curb Ramp Corridor Surface

Select the CurbRamps corridor and click the Corridor Surfaces button from the contextual ribbon.
Create a new corridor surface called Crdr-CurbRamps
Add the Ramp feature code to the surface definition.
Add an Interactive Hide Boundary using the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line. Name the
boundary something to describe what it is. For example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Hide
Since it is a single feature line, Civil 3D will notify you that the boundary is invalid. Click
Ok to return to the boundaries dialog.
Click on the boundary definition ellipsis.
Click the plus button and select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line again. Hit
Enter to return to the boundary definition.
Set the station range so it is 0+00 to 0+00.
The boundary will now be well formed.
Click Ok to exit the corridor surfaces dialogue

View the surface properties definition tab.
Set the max triangle length to something just larger than the triangles in the curb ramp surface.
Say 10. This will allow you to add all of the curb ramps for the project to the same corridor/corridor
surface.
5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-022.mp4
120.140.022 Create Curb Ramp Daylight Surface
A separate grading surface needs to be created for the slope behind the curb ramp sidewalk.
Create a new Site called CurbRamps.
Select the curb ramp corridor
Choose Feature Lines From Corridor from the contextual ribbon.
Select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line and hit Enter.
Put the feature line in the CurbRamps site
Give the feature line a distinguishable name. For Example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Sdwk-Out
Style does not matter and smoothing can be unchecked.
Make sure the Create dynamic link to corridor box is checked.
Click ok and hit enter
The grading will target the existing ground surface. However, MDU has seen on several occasions
that the grading surface will disappear when closing and reopening the drawing. The workaround for
this is to create a new existing ground surface in the drawing.
Create a new surface called Exist-GrdgTarget
Paste the data referenced existing ground surface into the Exist-GrdgTarget surface
Set the surface to rebuild automatically
Create a new grading group in the CurbRamps site. Call the grading group Grdg-CurbRamp-
Daylight. Make sure the Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name boxes are checked. Set
the tessellation spacing to triangle spacing that is desired.
Open the Grading Creation Tools
Set the active site to CurbRamps. Set the active grading group to Grdg-CurbRamps-Daylight. Set
the target surface to Exist-GrdgTarget
Adjust the grading criteria to what is desired.
Place the grading on the dynamically link corridor feature line.
Hint: If you see strange triangulation like this, try increasing the frequency on the corridor baseline used
to get the dynamically linked feature line.
3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-023.mp4
120.140.023 Save the DWG, Create Data Shortcuts, Add Curb Ramps Surfaces to Rfnt-Top
Save the DWG.
Create data shortcuts for the Crdr-CurbRamps and the Grdg-CurbRamp-Daylight surfaces.
Data reference these surfaces in to the project Rfnt-Top dwg.
Paste the surfaces into the Rfnt-Top surface.
120.141 Curb ramps type 4B1 Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-001.mp4
Type 4B1 Curb Ramps. (1 sidewalk with terrace approaches an intersection, tapered sides)
This scenario is the same as the type 2 except an additional alignment/profile is needed to blend the sidewalk into
the roadway without a sidewalk. The data set included in this portion of the training has been completed up to the
point where additional alignment needs to be created for blending.
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Establish Curb Ramp Alignments in Roadway Corridor File

Alignments are already created in the data set. In the same way as scenario 1 (Type 2 Curb Ramps), the
curb ramp landing (triangular 1.5% area) needs to be created in the roadway corridor file.
Unlike scenario 1, the ramp alignment is not created in the curb ramp corridor file. Instead, it needs to be
created in the roadway corridor file. It is put in the roadway corridor file to act as a target for the curb ramp
setup corridor because there is not a crossing sidewalk alignment to act as this target.
3:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-002.mp4
120.141.002 Add Baselines/Regions to Curb Ramp Setup Corridor
Add an additional baseline to the applicable curb ramp setup corridor. This will be a duplicate baseline that
will hold data for the opposite side of the roadway as the first baseline.
Use the CurbRamp-Setup-L (or R) assembly for the station range of the curb ramps.
Target the Crdr-Setup-BOC surface, CG-Back alignment, landing alignment, and ramp alignments
3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-003.mp4
120.141.003 Tie Sidewalk Profiles to Curb Ramp Elevation
Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is on the Crdr-Setup-
CurbRamps surface.
Place an intersection object on the inside sidewalk alignment at the top of the curb ramp
alignment. The priority 1 alignment/profile is the ramp alignment and surface profile.
Save DWG and Create Data Shortcuts

Save the DWG file.
Create Data Shortcuts for the following objects: (already done for you in the training data set)
Alignments
Curb Ramp Alignment(s)
Curb Ramp Lower Landing Alignment(s)
Close the file
5:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-004.mp4
120.141.004 Create Curb Ramp Taper Alignments
Create the curb ramp taper alignments in the Crdr-CurbRamps dwg file.
The inside taper alignment starts at the back of curb, continues to the top of the ramp, and
terminates on the sidewalk at the end of the radius.
The outside taper alignment starts at the back of curb and terminates at the top of the ramp.

7:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-005.mp4
120.141.005 Matching Into the Adjacent Road Slopes
Depending on the design, a few extra steps may be needed to blend the slopes of the two
roadways in the curb ramp area.
In the training example, the roadway without a sidewalk has two slopes behind the curb and gutter.
A 2 ft width at 4% and then the remaining width is 6:1 to match into existing ground.
To blend this to the single slope configuration behind the sidewalk, first create an alignment along
the edge of the 4% slope on the adjacent roadway. As long as the alignment extends beyond the
area where the blending will occur, the length does not matter.
Create the blending alignment. The blending alignment begins somewhere along the profile match
alignment (where you want to match into the adjacent roadway slopes). It follows the profile match
alignment and connects to the Outside Taper alignment. Then, it follows the Outside Taper
alignment up the ramp. It terminates on the outside sidewalk alignment at the end of the radius.

2:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-006.mp4
120.141.006 Create Curb Ramp Surface Profiles
Many of the same surface profiles created in scenario 1 are also needed in this example. Create surface
profiles on the Curb Ramp Setup Surface for the following alignments:
Landing Alignment
Ramp Alignment
Inside Sidewalk Alignment
Outside Sidewalk Alignment
Create surface profiles on the Ultimate Surface for the following alignments
Inside Sidewalk Alignment
Outside Sidewalk Alignment
Profile Match Alignment
Back of Curb and Gutter Alignment
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-007.mp4
120.141.007 Create Curb Ramp Profile Views and Profiles
Create Profile Views

Create Profile Views for the following alignments
Ramp Alignment
Blend Alignment
Inside Taper Alignment
Outside Taper Alignment
Create Proposed Curb Ramp Profiles

Create an arbitrary starting profile for the following alignments. Make the profiles begin and end past the
extents of the alignment. The elevations do not matter because intersection objects will control their elevation
in a later step.
Inside Taper Alignment
Outside Taper Alignment
Blend Alignment
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-008.mp4
120.141.008 Create Intersection Objects
Create the following intersections objects.
Priority 1 Alignment/Profile Priority 2 Alignment/Profile
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Inside Taper/Proposed

Inside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Inside Taper/Proposed
Inside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Inside Taper/Proposed
Back of Curb/Ultimate Surface Outside Taper/Proposed*

Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Outside Taper/Proposed*
ProfileMatch/Ultimate Surface Blend/Proposed*

Outside Taper/Proposed Blend/Proposed*

Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Blend/Proposed*
Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface Blend/Proposed*
*Note that the Outside Taper Proposed profile must be created before the Blend Proposed Profile. The
Blend Proposed Profile is dependent on the Outside Taper Proposed Profile and is tied to it with an
intersection object.
If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.
8:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-009.mp4
120.141.009 Add to Curb Ramp Corridor
Add the following alignments/profiles to the curb ramp corridor as baselines
Landing Alignment/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Profile
Ramp Alignment/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface Profile
Inside Taper Alignment/Proposed Profile
Outside Taper Alignment/Proposed Profile (The region limits for the Outside Taper Baseline are
from the back of curb to the blend alignment.)
Blend Alignment/Proposed Profile
The remaining steps for creating the hide boundary and grading behind the sidewalk are the same as
previous sections.
120.142 Curb ramps type 1A Section updated: 6/17/2015

6:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-001.mp4
120.142.001 Curb Ramp Curb Cut
The key to correctly modeling the type 1A curb ramp is determining the correct critical curb cut locations. Since
the sidewalk it placed directly at the back of curb, the ramp slope is determined by the curb cut taper slopes. The
slope along the curb return alignment must be a consideration when creating the curb cut. As the slope
increases/decreases, the curb cut transitions length must be adjusted to achieve the required ramp slope.
Example: Required maximum slope for Type 1A curb ramp sides = 8.3%
Curb Height = 0.5 ft

For a flat curb return profile, ramp side slope lengths = 0.5/.083 = 6 ft
Actual curb return profile = 1%

Therefore, high side ramp side slope min length = 0.5/(.083-.01) = 6.8 ft
The low side ramp side slope remains at the minimum 6 ft length per SDD 8D5-15a
The curb cuts can be made using the same superelevation method described in the previous curb ramp training.
Sidewalk is added to the back of curb on curb return is assembly. The ultimate surface created by adding the
sidewalk to the assembly is not the final curb ramp surface. This portion of the surface will be used as a setup
surface for the curb ramp.
Create an alignment representing the back of curb. Then, create a surface profile on the using the back of curb
alignment and Crdr-Ultimate surface. Use the surface profile to verify the slopes meet standards. Adjust the curb
transition lengths as needed. We recommend that you do not set the curb transition lengths so the slopes are at
the maximum (8.3%). Provides some level of tolerance so there is flexibility for design refinement in the
intersection.
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-002.mp4
120.142.002 Curb Ramp Setup Corridor
The curb ramp setup corridor for the Type 1A ramp is the same concept covered in the previous curb ramp
modeling training.
Create an auxiliary alignment and surface profile for the curb ramp setup corridor baseline.
The same curb ramp setup assembly can be used. However, since the curb ramp perpendicular to the curb
return, the triangular lower landing does not exist. Therefore, the additional LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly
representing that area can be removed from the assembly.
Create data shortcuts for the curb return back of curb alignments, curb return outside sidewalk alignments, Crdr-
Ultimate surface, and Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-003.mp4
120.142.003 Curb Ramp Corridor DWG Create Curb Ramp Alignments
Open the curb ramp corridor dwg file. Data reference the curb return back of curb return alignment,
Crdr-Ultimate surface, Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.
Create a new alignment representing the outside sidewalk. This can be an offset alignment to the
back of curb or it can be a centerline alignment. It should not be a miscellaneous alignment
because superelevation will be assigned in a later step.
Create a new alignment representing the curb ramp. View the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface
with triangles turned on. This will allow for easy placement of the alignment Pis.
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-004.mp4
120.142.004 Create Curb Ramp Alignments Continued

Turn the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface triangles off. Turn the Crdr-Ultimate surface triangles on.
Orbit around the surface to find the tops of the curb transistions. Mark them with polylines. Return
to Top view
Create the two alignments representing the top of the ramp sides, where the curb ramp matches
into the adjacent sidewalk. Use the polylines created in the previous step to locate the intersection
of the Crdr-Ultimate triangle edge and the back of curb alignment.
Then use the station offset transparent command to locate a second PI so the alignment is
perfectly parallel to the ramp alignment.
The PI can now be moved using the extend OSNAP and snapped to the outside sidewalk
alignment.
Since intersection objects cannot be used at the ends of an alignment, the alignment must be
extended down the back of sidewalk alignment a small distance. The resulting alignments should
look like this:
5:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-005.mp4
120.142.005 Curb Ramp Profiles
Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is created on the Crdr-Setup-
CurbRamps surface.
Create a surface profile for the match alignments. These surface profiles are created on the Crdr-
Ultimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the back of curb alignment. This surface profile is created on the Crdr-
Ultimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the outside sidewalk alignment. This surface profile is created on the
Crdr-Ultimate surface.
Create a profile view for the outside sidewalk alignment. Create an arbitrary profile that extends
beyond the limits of the alignment. These elevations will be determined using intersection objects.
Create intersection objects in the following locations along the outside sidewalk alignment.
Intersections with the two match alignments
Intersections with the two ends of the ramp alignment.
Delete the end tangents from the profile.

5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-006.mp4
120.142.006 Curb Ramp Corridor
Add the back of curb, outside sidewalk, ramp, and match alignments as base lines in the curb
ramp corridor.
Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region for the back of curb baseline. For now, the
region extents should be to the ends of the match alignments or beyond. These extents will be
refined later.
Add three regions to the ramp alignment baseline. Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the first
region should start at the back of curb and end at the outside sidewalk. Using a null assembly, the
second region should follow the portion that is coincident with the outside sidewalk alignment. Using
the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the third region should start at the outside sidewalk and end at the
back of curb.
Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region to each match alignment baseline. The
regions should extend from the back of curb to the outside sidewalk only.

6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-007.mp4
120.142.007 Curb Ramp Corridor: Pedestrian Curb
Make a copy of the CurbRamp-Basic assembly. Rename the copy CurbRamp-PedCurb.
Change the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly to a slope of 5000% and set it to use the Right Inside
Lane Superelevation. Change the point code to Top_Curb.
Add a second LinkWidthAndSlope at the end of the first LinkWidthAndSlope. Set its parameters to
slope = 0%, No Superelevation, Point Code = Back_Curb, Width = 0.5 ft.
Add the appropriate daylight subassembly to the CurbRamp-WithPedCurb assembly.
Using the CurbRamp-WithPedCurb assembly, add a region to the outside sidewalk base line. The
region should extend from one match alignment to the other. Set the frequency for this region to 1 ft.
Set the outside sidewalk alignment superelevation for controlling the pedestrian curb.
Begin alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Match Alignment 1: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Ramp intersection 1: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Ramp Intersection 2: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Match Alignment 2: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At end of Alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%
5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-008.mp4
120.142.008 Pedestrian Curb Transitions
Make another copy of the CurbRamp-Basic assembly. Rename it to CurbTransition. Change the
MarkPoint subassembly point code to Top_Curb. Add the appropriate daylight subassembly to the
end of the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly. Change the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly point
code to Back_Curb and the width to 0.001.
Add another base line for the outside sidewalk alignment. This time, use the Crdr-Ultimate surface
profile.
Add three regions to the new outside sidewalk alignment baseline. Using the CurbTransition
assembly, the first region should start at few feet before the intersection with the match alignment.
Using a null assembly, the second region is the area between the match alignments. Using the
CurbTransition assembly, the third region should start at the intersection with the other match
alignment and extend a few feet past.
Draw a two polylines from the end of the Back_Curb feature lines to the ends of the curb transition
regions. Target the 2 polylines with the CurbTransition assembly.
Make sure the back of curb region limits match the ends of the curb transition regions.
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-009.mp4
120.142.009 Corridor Surface

Add all the necessary feature lines to define the surface.
Create a hide boundary for the concave area outside the daylight feature line.
Module 125 Pipe networks

125.010 Pipe network overview Section updated: 3/10/2014
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-001.mp4
125.010.001 What is a Pipe Network Parts Catalog
The Pipe Network Parts Catalog is comprised of two sub part catalogs, Pipe and Structure. The parts catalog
enables the pipe network parts lists in a drawing to access content for pipe and structure shapes and configuration
parameters. Each Parts List in the WisDOT14-pipe.dwt template references WisDOT pipe and structure parts in
the USWIPipesCatalog.
WisDOT Pipe Network Parts Catalog Settings

To create and edit Pipe Network objects in any drawing created from wisdot14-pipe.dwt, wisdot14.dwt, wisdot14-
etopog.dwt, or wisdot14-plat.dwt the current Parts Catalog folder must be set to: C:\WisDOT\Stnd\c3d2014
\Program\Pipes Catalog
The Pipe catalog must be set to: Pipes_USWI Catalog
The Structures catalog must be set to: Structures_USWI Catalog
On WisDOT workstations, these settings will be checked and reset automatically each time the Civil 3D 2014
application is started, so there shouldnt be any need to set the catalogs manually.
Note: External users that are using the catalogs provided from the WisDOT FTP site should refer to the document
provided with the exe package WisDOT Civil 3D Startup Customization.pdf. This document covers the Pipe
Network Parts Catalog setup and paths.
How the Pipe Network Parts Catalog Affects your Drawing

Parts Catalogs' data links are independent of the drawings. The current Catalog is set by the application through
the user profile settings. Unlike Data Shortcuts, there is no way to attach a drawing to a Catalog. The Parts Catalog
and the drawing remain independent, which means the drawing will only access the active parts catalog. This also
means that there should only be one Parts Catalog per drawing.
IMPORTANT: Everyone editing a drawing that has Pipe Network parts created from the Parts Lists in the wisdot14-
pipe.dwt, template must have Pipes_USWI Catalog set as the active Pipe catalog and Structures_USWI Catalog
set as the active Structure catalog PRIOR to opening or creating a data reference of the drawing.
A pipe or structure is created by selecting a part from the Storm Sewer, Culvert Pipes, Non-Standard, or Full
Catalog Part Lists and then selecting the insertion location in the drawing.
Storm Sewer = WisDOT storm sewer parts
Culverts = WisDOT culvert parts
Non-Standard = WisDOT non-standard parts.
Full Catalog=All above catalogs combined with OOTB parts.
When making any design edits to the pipe network, the pipe and structure objects need to be able to access the
part list that was used when they were created and this part list in turn needs to be able to access the parts catalog
that the parts list references, as well as the pay items and rules assigned the parts. This data relationship must be
maintained in every pipe network drawing to ensure down stream workflows and dynamic capabilities stay intact.
Drawings should not be created without using the USWI Pipes Catalog
The use of the USWI catalog is part of the deliverable requirement. A copy of the Out-of-the-box catalog has been
incorporated into the USWI catalog. This will not address any customization that may have been done to the
OOTB catalog.
1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-002.mp4
125.010.002 Starting a new Pipe Network drawing
To create a new pipe network drawing, start the new drawing using the wisdot14-pipe.dwt template. This is the
only template that contains the WisDOT parts lists. This template only contains the styles, labels, rules, and
setting necessary for designing a pipe network. If additional styles are desired, they can be imported using the
style importer tool. However, if the style import tool is used, be sure that the "Import Settings" box is NOT
checked.
Any drawings that utilize the pipe network (such as for plans production) should be created using the wisdot-14.dwt
template. Before the pipe network is data reference, the pipe network reference alignment(s) and surface(s) must
be data referenced. The pipe network can then be data referenced into that drawing. The pipe network will retain
the assigned styles and labels from the source drawing unless they are overridden in the data reference dialogue
box. Styles and labels may also be reassigned any time after the pipe network is data referenced.
1:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-003.mp4
125.010.003 Creating and Managing Parts for the WisDOT Catalog
In WisDOTs multi-user work environment it is easy to create unwanted changes in drawings if your parts catalogs
do not have consistent contents. Because each drawing references the parts catalog at the local location unwanted
changes in the drawing can occur if a new part is created in the catalog of one computer, and then the drawing is
opened on a different computer, where a new part is not part of the local catalog.
WisDOT has addressed this issue by creating a custom Parts Catalog to be used on WisDOT projects and defined
a default location on the local drive to store the catalog.
WisDOT internal procedure

If a new part is needed or an existing part needs modifications contact Methods Development and they will work
with you to create the part needed and will update and distribute the catalog to all users. At no time should new
parts be added to the USWI_Pipe Catalog or the USWI_Structure catalog by the user. Any part that is added
locally to theses catalogs may be overwritten by the synchronization process described above.
WisDOT external procedure consultants

Consultants should contact WisDOT Methods Development team, to coordinate updates and change requests of
the USWI Parts Catalogs to maintain usability and consistency.
125.015 Introduction to Pipe Networks Section updated: 9/23/2014

10:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-015-001.mp4
125.015.001 What pipe networks do and dont do
Do not
Perform hydrology or hydraulic analysis
Do
Provide an initial layout of the storm sewer system
Provide feedback on geometric feasibility of the system.
Automate plans production
Provide limited clash detection functionality.
The templates

The wisdot14-pipe.dwt should be used for the creation of all pipe networks.
The wisdot14.dwt should be used for all pipe network plans production via data reference.
The pipe network style names are the same in both templates. However, the styles in wisdot14-
pipe.dwt styles display the model and the wisdot14.dwt styles display for plans production.
Creating the pipe network

In most cases, it is best to put the entire storm sewer system into a single pipe network. .
Reasons for a single network
Easier data extraction for misc quantities tables
Easier data transfer to hydrology/hydraulics software such as Storm and Sanitary
Analysis (SSA) or Hydraflow.
There may be reasons to separate the network, perhaps so multiple designers can work on
it. If so, try to separate the network where they do not connect (each side of a high point for
example)
When you create a pipe network, you will be asked to specify a reference surface. This is important because
structures reference the surface to obtain its rim elevation. Pipes reference the surface to determine cover.
The catch is that pipes should reference the datum surface and structures should reference the top surface.
For a storm sewer pipe network it is a best practice to start by layout out all of your structures. Therefore,
choose the top surface when initially creating the pipe network. Once all of the structures are in place, change
the pipe network reference surface to datum and begin placing the pipes.
Understanding Rules
Rules are the basis for the pipe networks logic during initial layout
Account for
Pipe slope
Pipe cover
Max pipe length
Crown matching at structures
Structure sump depth
Max pipe size for structure
Rules make provide an initial layout for the system based on geometrics, not hydraulics
Once initial layout is complete, rules function as a design advisor by informing you of issues. (for
example: cover is too low at a given location) The catch is that you need to check the rules.
Rules can be re-applied at any time, but beware. They may change your design. I recommend using rules for
initial layout. Then, you take control of the design and use the rules for feedback on feasibility.
125.020 Placing a culvert pipe Section updated: 3/10/2014

Project dataset at video segment 1
Project dataset at video segment 3
5:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-001.mp4
125.020.001 Pipe Datum Surface Creation
In the corridor drawing, create a proposed datum surface that extends to the subgrade shoulder points. The
surface can be named Crdr-{Roadway Name}-PipeDatum. This surface will be used to check for the appropriate
amount of cover over the pipe. Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the surface.
6:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-002.mp4
125.020.002 Combined Surface Creation
Create Combined Surface

Create a new dwg file called Surf-Cmbn-Ex-Top.dwg.
Data shortcut reference the Existing ground surface and the Rfnt-Top surface
Create a new surface called Cmbn-Ex-Top
Right Click on the surface in the toolspace-prospector and choose select
From the contextual ribbon - Modify Panel, pick Paste Surface. Select the Exist surface.
Repeat the previous step, but now choose the Rfnt-Top surface

*Note: If the area of the existing surface does not cover the entire drainage basin for culvert, a DEM surface can be
loaded into the drawing. The DEM surface would be pasted into the Composite surface before the Exist and
Refinement-Top surfaces. Refer to 050-190-001 for creating a surface from a USGS DEM.
10:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-003.mp4
125.020.003 Create Pipe Network Drawing and Determine Culvert Pipe Alignment
Create Pipe Network Drawing

Create a new drawing using the WisDOT-pipe template. Save the drawing in the \Design\PipeNetworks\
folder. Name the file Pipe-Culverts.dwg
Data shortcut reference all of the project roadway reference alignments.
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface
Data shortcut reference the Crdr-PipeDatum surface
Determine Culvert Pipe Alignment

Utilize contour styles for surfaces to determine natural channel alignment
Home tab Create Design Panel Feature Line Create Feature Line
All defaults may be accepted in the Create Feature Lines dialogue box. Click ok
Digitize first point for defining the channel/pipe alignment. Hit enter to accept a 0.000 elevation. Elevation
will be assigned at a later step. You can also set the elevation from the Cmbn-Ex-Top if you choose
Digitize the second point defining the channel/pipe alignment. Hit enter twice to exit the command.
Drape the Feature Line over the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface

Select the feature line. From the Feature Line contextual ribbon, click Edit Elevations from the Modify panel.
Click the Elevations from Surface button on the Edit Elevations Panel
Choose the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface from the pull-down menu on the Set Elevations from Surface dialogue
box. Make sure Insert intermediate grade break points is checked. Click OK.
Select the feature line on the screen. Press Enter.
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-004.mp4
125.020.004 Determine Culvert Pipe Elevation and Place Metal Culvert Pipe
Place Metal Culvert Pipe

Orbit to an isometric view. Display only what is necessary. Only the feature line is needed.
Draw a line that will define the flowline of the pipe. Snap to the ditch lines or toes of slopes depending on
your cross section.
Use the MOVE command to move the line in the z direction by the distance of the pipe diameter. At this
stage, estimate the required pipe size. Base point = 0,0,0 Second point = 0,0,[diameter]
Trim the line using the feature line as the cutting object. The line now defines the length of pipe along the
crown.
For concrete pipe, check the Apron Endwall SDDs and shorten each end of the line by the corresponding
endwall "C" dimension. See 0125-020-005 for concrete pipe.
Use the MOVE command again to move the line in the z direction by the distance of the pipe radius. Base
point 0,0,0 Second point = 0,0,[-radius] The line now defines the length of pipe along the centerline.
From the Home tab, select Pipe Network - Pipe Network Creation Tools
Name the pipe network Culverts-<design frequency>. For example: Culverts-25yr
Select the Culverts Parts List
Select the Crdr-PipeDatum surface
Select the roadway alignment
Structure and Pipe label styles can be set to <none>
From the Network Layout Tools menu, choose the pipe size and type from the pipes pull-down box. Also
choose the corresponding apron endwalls from the structure pull-down box.
Choose the Draw Pipes Only draw option. Toggle the Upslope/Downslope button for the direction that you
want to draw the pipe.
Snap to the two ends of the line. The pipe may utilize rules to set its initial elevation. If this happens, use the
grips at the ends of the pipe to snap it to the ends of the line.
You will see the following error displayed in the panorama window. This error is normal. It simply means
that the pipe rule could not located the Pipe Network surface at the ends of the pipe. This is because the Crdr-
PipeDatum surface only extends out to the subgrade shoulder points.
Source: AeccDbNetworkRule::runDotNetScript
Description: Unable to run macro: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2014\enu
\C3DPipeNetworkRules.dll:PipeNetworkRule.PipeCover::ApplyRule
Attach the Apron Endwalls

From the Network Layout Tools menu, switch to the Draw Structures only option. Click on the two ends of
the pipe to attach the endwalls.
To rotate an endwall, select it and use the circular rotation grip and snap it to the feature line.
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-005.mp4
125.020.005 Check Culvert Pipe Properties
Check Design Criteria

Select the pipe, right click, and choose Pipe Properties
In the Rules tab, you can see what the minimum and maximum cover requirements are for the pipe.
Compare those values with the actual values. Choose a different pipe type and/or configuration if these values
are not met. Your roadway profile may also need adjustment.
Pipe slope, length, and elevation data can be found under the Part Properties tab.
In the information tab, name the pipe its station location for easy reference later on. Name the apron
endwalls the station location of the pipe with the suffix In or Out. For example: 100+00-In
Determine Pipe Wall Thickness (Metal Pipe Only)

View the pipe properties. In the Rules tab, view the actual maximum and minimum fill height for the pipe.
Then, switch to the Part Properties tab and set the wall thickness according the fill height tables in the FDM.
This value has little effect on the layout of the pipe, but it can be used later on for reporting purposes.
Create Data Shortcuts for Pipe Networks

Save the drawing
Create a data shortcut for the pipe network.
12:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-006.mp4
125.020.006 ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-help.pdf#Pipe_Networks
Concrete Pipe with Concrete Endwalls

Same as for metal pipe except move the line defining the flowline up by the diameter plus the wall thickness.
Wall thickness can be found on the accompanying Pipe Networks Summary pdf.
The line now represents the top of the concrete pipe. Trim the line against the feature line.
If concrete endwalls are to be used, shorten the concrete pipe on each end by the C distance shown in the
Apron Endwall Standard Detail Drawing.
Concrete Pipe with Metal Sloped Apron Endwalls

Same as above, except do not shorten the pipe by the C distance on each end.
Attach the sloped apron endwalls.
Rotate the endwalls to match the pipe direction.
Select both endwalls. Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the endwalls down by the pipe wall
thickness.
125.030 Culvert design: time of concentration, catchments, peak flow HY8 Section updated: 4/7/2016
Developed in C3D14, proj-dataset1.zip in video
4:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-000.mp4
125.030.000 Suggested methods to design culverts
There are several applications available at WisDOT to complete culvert designs, such as CulvertMaster, HY8,
Hydraflow Express, and Storm and Sanitary Analysis (SSA). A suggested workflow is as follows:
1. Use Civil 3D to create a pipe network for your culvert pipes. This validates the pipe geometry in relation to
the physical surroundings such as cover, slope, elevation, location and length.
2. Use Civil 3D to create catchments. Catchments can be used to develop a time of concentration for the
watershed.
3. Use SSA to compute the peak runoff. Export the pipe network and catchment(s) to SSA. There, peak runoff
can be computed based on the catchment data and additional inputs done in SSA. We do not recommend
using SSA to check culvert pipe hydraulics. SSA uses EPA SWMM as its computing engine. In most cases,
HDS-5 should be used for checking culvert pipe hydraulics on WisDOT projects.. SA can replicate the results
of HDS-5, but it takes extensive knowledge of the application and drainage in general. It is a simpler workflow
to just use an application designed to follow HDS-5.
4. Use HY8 from FHWA or a similar application to analyze the culvert pipe hydraulics. The data computed in
Civil 3D and SSA can be entered in HY8 to complete the analysis.
5. Make revisions to the Civil 3D pipe network as needed to achieve the desired results in HY8.
8:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-001.mp4
125.030.001 Determine watershed boundary
Open the Pipe-Culverts drawing

In Toolspace-Prospector, right click on the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and select properties.
On the Information Tab, change the surface style to Watersheds
In the Analysis Tab, choose Watersheds from the Analysis Type.
Click the down-arrow under Watershed parameters.
If the Range Details do not populate, go back to the Information tab and click the edit style button.
Click OK. The watersheds will be computed. Then go back to the Analysis tab and click the down arrow
under Watershed Parameters again.
Under Range details, click the Light bulb. Turn off Boundary Point and Boundary Segment
Click OK
The watershed boundaries and contours will now be visible.
Inspect the watershed boundaries and contours to determine which watersheds flow to the culvert pipe.
On the P_DRN_Catchment layer, draw a closed polyline that roughly follows the exterior of the contributing
watershed boundaries.
9:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-002.mp4
125.030.002 Determine flow path(s) and create catchment(s)
Determine the flow path from the hydraulically most distant point. On the P_DRN_Flow layer, draw a
polyline representing this flow path. The Water Drop command on the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel -
Flow Path Menu can be a useful tool for determining the flow path. Create several possible paths to determine
which has the highest time of concentration.
From the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel, Click Catchment - Create Catchment Group. Name the
Catchment Group the same as the corresponding culvert pipe.
From the Analyze Tab - Ground Data Panel, Click Catchment - Create Catchment From Object. Select the
Polyline representing the catchment. Then, select the upper end of the polyline representing the flow path.
In the Create Catchment from Object dialogue box, name the catchment the culvert pipe station with a
numbered suffix. 100+00(1) for example.
Verify the correct catchment group is assigned
Do not choose the reference structure at this time unless there is only one possible flow path from the
hydraulically most remote point.
The runoff coefficient does not need to be assigned at this time.
Do not erase existing entities.
Click OK
Select the catchment boundary polyline again. Then, select the upper end of the polyline representing the
alternative flow path. Follow the previous steps in the Create Catchment from Object Dialogue box.
Repeat until a catchment has been created for all of the possible flow paths.
9:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-003.mp4
125.030.003 Time of concentration Adding flow segments
Select the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and go to the surface properties. Choose a surface style with contours.
Select the flow path on the screen, right click and choose Edit Flow Segments.
The flow path will be populated with default values that need to be modified.
Use the add flow segment (plus) and delete flow segment (red X) buttons to add and delete flow segments.
Click the Plus button to add another flow segment. Digitize on the screen where they segments begin/end.
Change each flow segment to the correct flow type (Sheet flow, Shallow Concentrated Flow, or Channel
Flow).
Sheet flow should be no more than 300 ft from the start of the flow path.

You can have up to 3 segments per flow type. For shallow concentrated flow, sub-segments are determined
by significant changes in slope or ground cover. For channel flow, sub-segments are determined by significant
changes in slope, ground cover, or channel shape/size. The more detail you add, the more accurate the time
of concentration will be.
Helpful Links
Online TR-55
http://www.cpesc.org/reference/tr55.pdf
Topo Quads
http://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI&start=A
10:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-004.mp4
125.030.004 Time of concentration Flow segment characteristics
In the Sheet Flow row, enter the 2-yr 24-hr rainfall. This value can be obtained from TR-55 Appendix B,
Figure B-3. It can also be obtained in SSA.
In the Sheet Flow row, enter the Manning's Roughness for that segment. Values can be obtained from TR-55
Table 3-1.
Set the shallow concentrated flow to either Paved or UnPaved. Note that other surface types can be selected,
but they will not transfer to SSA. If another surface type is desired, it can be selected manually in SSA.
In the Channel Flow row, enter the Manning's Roughness value.
Helpful Links
Mannings n for Channel Flow
http://www.fsl.orst.edu/geowater/FX3/help/8_Hydraulic_Reference/Mannings_n_Tables.htm
Aerial Photography
http://www.wisconsinview.org/
13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-005.mp4
125.030.005 Time of concentration Flow segment characteristics continued
In the Channel Flow row, enter the Cross-sectional Area and Wetted Perimeter of the channel. Taking a
quick profile works well for this. Use the No Grid No Exaggeration profile view style so accurate measurements
can be made. Draw a polyline across the channel, connecting the approximate bank full width elevation on
each side. You can also use an alignment and surface profile if you want a more permanent record of the
cross section. The conventional way to cut a cross section of a channel is from left to right facing downstream.
If the slopes are not populated because the surface assignment was forgotten when the catchment was
created, Click on the Surface button. Select the Cmbn-Ex-Top surface and click OK. The Slope column will
then be populated.
Click the green check mark to dismiss Flow Segment editor.
The total Time of Concentration is then computed and assigned to the Catchment Properties.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Repeat the above steps for the various different possible flow paths. Compare the catchment flow paths and
choose the one with the highest time of concentration. The catchment labels will display the time of
concentration for each catchment.
Assign that catchment with the highest time of concentration to the culvert inlet structure. This is done in the
catchment properties.
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-006.mp4
125.030.006 Export to Storm and Sanitary Analysis (SSA)
In Civil 3D, move any raster images that are in the drawing to separate layers. In SSA, you can view the dwg
file in the background for reference. You can also control the display of the images by turning their layers on
and off in SSA.
Click the Edit is Storm and Sanitary Analysis button from the Analyze tab. Click OK to confirm the pipe
network export. SSA will then initialize and you'll be prompted to save the import log file. This is not necessary.
11:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-007.mp4
125.030.007 Watershed properties (TR-20)

If the program opened with the Rational Method as the active Hydrology mode. To switch to TR-20,
Click Project Options from the Design menu. In the General Tab, switch the Hydrology Method to SCS
TR-20. Click OK.
Double click on the subbasin. Notice that the time of concentration was automatically populated form
Civil 3D. IMPORTANT: Check the time of concentration methodology. The default is set to average. If
there is only one subarea per flow segment type, the methodology does not matter. However, if there is
more than one subarea per flow segment type, the methodology needs to be set to Summation.
If Average is used, it will average the flow times of the subareas. This will result in a lower time of
concentration. A lower time of concentration will result in a higher peak flow and possibly a larger pipe
size.
Go to the Curve Number Tab. The basin area can be broken down into subareas to create a
composite curve number. A good way to get the areas is by viewing an aerial image in Civil 3D and
measuring the areas of the different cover types. Enter the areas or percentages so they total 100%.
Enter the corresponding Curve Numbers (CN). You can click on the CN ellipses to select the CN. You'll
need to know the Hydrologic Soil Group of the area. This can be obtained using the USDA Web Soil
Survey mapping tool.
http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm
8:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-008.mp4
125.030.008 Runoff calculation (TR-20)
Save the SSA file as <ProjectID>-TR20-<Return Period>.spf. For Example: 12345678-TR20-25yr.spf

Under Input, Click the Rain gage Ellipsis button. Click Add.
Under Data source, click the Time series Ellipsis button. Click Add and then click the Rainfall Designer...
button.
Choose the SCS Type II 24-hr Unit Intensity. Select the State (Wisconsin), the County, and the Return
Period. Obtain the Return Period from FDM 13-10-1 Attachment 1.1. The rainfall depth will automatically
populate. Click OK. Click Close to exit the Time Series dialogue. Click Assign... to assign the Rain Gage to the
sub-basin(s). Then click Close to exit the Rain Gages dialogue. Click Close to exit the Subbasins dialogue.
From the Analysis menu, click Analysis Options. Under Dates, set the End analysis on date to one day after
the Start analysis on date (24 hours).
From the Analysis menu, click Perform Analysis. You should then received notification of a successful
analysis. The results may be saved to a location that you specify.
Disregard the pipe hydraulic analysis that SSA performed. We will check pipe hydraulics using HY8.
Click Time Series Plot to view specific details about the hydrograph. Check that a smooth curve is
developed. If not, may need to adjust Time Steps under Analysis Option. The Routing Timestep is the time
increment that computations are completed. The Reporting Timestep is the increment that values are reported.
13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-009.mp4
125.030.009 Culvert pipe runoff calculation (rational)
If you have already completed your culvert design using the TR-20 method, you can perform a Save As of
the project and name it <ProjectID>-Rational-<Return Period>.spf. For example: 12345678-Rational-25yr.spf
From the Input menu, click Project Options
On the General Tab - Hydrology runoff specification section, change the Hydrology method to Rational.
From the Input menu, select IDF Curves... Click Load... Select the IDF file for your project county.
Double click on the subbasin(s). You'll notice all of the time of concentration data imported from Civil 3D.
Notice that the time of concentration was automatically populated form Civil 3D. Go to the Runoff Coefficient
Tab. The basin area can be broken down into subareas to create a composite curve runoff coefficient. A good
way to get the areas is by viewing a aerial image in Civil 3D and measuring the areas of the different cover
types. Enter the areas or percentages so they total 100%. Enter the corresponding runoff coefficients (C). You
can click on the ellipses to select the C values. You'll need to know the Hydrologic Soil Group of the area and
the general slope of the terrain Hydrologic Soil Group can be obtained using the USDA Web Soil Survey
mapping tool and Exhibit A-1 in TR-55. http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm
Use Civil 3D to determine the slope of the terrain. Go into the surface properties and select the style called
Slope Arrows. Then, go to the Analysis tab and choose slope arrows under analysis type. Change the number
of ranges to 3 and click the Run Analysis button. Set range 1 maximum slope to 2%. Set range 2 minimum
slope to 2% and maximum slope to 6%. Set range 3 minimum slope to 6%. You can change the range colors
according to your preference or leave the defaults. Click Ok.
From the Analysis menu, click Perform Analysis. You should then received notification of a successful
analysis. The results may be saved to a location that you specify.
Click Time Series Plot to view specific details about the analysis.
When completed, save the file.
8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-010.mp4
125.030.010 Intro to HY8 existing condition
HY8 is one option for checking culvert hydraulics. A couple others include Culvert Master and Hydraflow
Express. The key is to use HDS-5 methodology.
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/engineering/hydraulics/pubs/12026/hif12026.pdf
IMPORTANT: The existing condition culvert must be checked. This is important because you must compare
the proposed culvert headwater to the existing. Do not increase the pipe headwater elevation.
Create new HY8 Project. Save the project as the project ID. Name each culvert crossing the same as the
pipe network pipe with a descriptor. In the case of an existing pipe it would look something like 100+00-
Existing
Discharge Data
Set minimum flow to 0 cfs
Set Design flow to the smaller of the two computed peak runoffs (Rational or TR-20)
Set the Max flow to the larger of the two computed peak runoffs (Rational or TR-20)
Tailwater Data
If the information is available, enter in the irregular channel data for the most accurate results. If
tailwater data is not available, tailwater conditions can be estimated by normal depth approximations.
Use Civil 3D to cut a channel cross sections approximately 1 pipe length downstream. Alignments
and Surface Profiles work well for this.
A Civil 3D surface label can be used to determine the slope along the channel.
Dont forget to enter in the Mannings n values.
5:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-011.mp4
125.030.011 Intro to HY8 Existing Condition Continued
Roadway Data
If the goal is designing to avoid roadway overtopping, a constant roadway elevation can be used. If
roadway overtopping is part of the design, consult your drainage engineer.
Assuming that roadway overtopping is to be avoided, set crest length to 1,000 ft. Set the roadway
elevation to the top roadway elevation. This may be a sag location of the roadway, or some other
feature that should not be overtopped (a driveway for example).

Set the roadway top width.

Culvert Data
Name the pipe Existing
Enter the characteristics of the existing culvert pipe. Obtain this information with a field review.
Site Data
Obtain from survey data
Click Analyze Crossing to obtain the results. Make note of the headwater elevation for reference during the
design of the proposed culvert pipe.
9:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-012.mp4
125.030.012 Intro to HY8 Proposed
IMPORTANT: The existing condition culvert must be checked. This is important because you must compare
the proposed culvert headwater to the existing. Do not increase the pipe headwater elevation. Small changes
in culvert type, size, shape, length, and slope and/or changes in roadway geometry can significantly affect the
headwater elevation.
In the same HY8 project, right click on the existing pipe crossing and choose Duplicate. This allows you to
reuse some of the data from the existing crossing so you dont need to reenter it.
Rename the new crossing to something like 100+00-Alt1
Discharge Data
Discharge data is typically the same as the existing condition. TRANS 233 prohibits increased flows
to WisDOT right of way from a plat of 5 or more parcels. However, if the roadway profile is changing
enough to affect a high point location, the contributing drainage area may change and affect the peak
flow at a crossing.
Tailwater Data
May or may not be the same as the existing condition.
Roadway Data
If the goal is designing to avoid roadway overtopping, a constant roadway elevation can be used. If
roadway overtopping is part of the design, consult your drainage engineer.
Assuming that roadway overtopping is to be avoided, set crest length to 1,000 ft. Set the roadway
elevation to the maximum allowable headwater elevation. This may be the subgrade elevation of the
roadway at a nearby sag, a driveway, sideroad, or some other feature where it is undesirable to
overtop with water.
Set the roadway top width.
Culvert Data
Before entering this data, consult the Charts 1B & 2B in HDS-5. This will give you a starting point for
your design. Start on the right side with HW/D of 1.5. Connect that value with the peak flow and read
the pipe size. That will be the minimum pipe size required under inlet control.
Name the pipe what you are proposing. For example: 42-Inch CPCS
Select pipe shape, material, and diameter. Note: The pipe diameter is entered in feet.
Embedment Depth: 0 (typical)
Inlet Type: conventional (typical)
Inlet Edge Condition: Square Edge with Headwall for metal pipe, Grooved Edge with Headwall
for concrete pipe (typical)
Inlet Depression: No (typical)
Site Data
Use the Culvert Design Properties pipe network label to obtain this information from Civil 3D.
9:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-013.mp4
125.030.013 Intro to HY8 Proposed Continued
Click Analyze Crossing to obtain the results
Display the Culvert Summary Table
Compare the results to the existing condition. If the headwater elevation is increased,
select a different alternative.
If HW/D is over 1.5, select a difference alternative.
If the headwater elevation exceeds the maximum headwater (overtopping), select a
different alternative.
Check to see if the culvert is in Inlet Control or Outlet Control. Different factors affect the
culvert capacity under these conditions. See FDM 13-15-10.3 for a list of factors.
Check the outlet velocity. Refer to HEC-14 do determine energy dissipation needs.
Select the desired alternative and make the revisions to the Civil 3D pipe network.
Take the revised pipe invert elevations and length and update the HY8 project. Verify the results are still
acceptable.
125.040 Storm sewer layout using Pipe Networks Section updated: 4/7/2016
8:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-001.mp4
125.040.001 Create storm sewer Pipe Network
Create a new drawing using the WisDOT-pipe template. Save the drawing in the \Design\PipeNetworks\
folder. Name the file Pipe-StormSewer.dwg
Data shortcut reference all of the project roadway reference alignments. Although not required, it can also be
useful to data reference the proposed profiles for these alignments.
If the network will span past the slope intercepts of the project, it is best to create a combination existing
ground and top surface and a combination existing ground and datum surface.
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface
Data shortcut reference the Cmbn-Exist-Datum surface
Data shortcut reference the Crdr-Commercial-PipeDatum surface
XReference other files that may be needed for the storm sewer design. In this exercise we will xreference the
Pavt.dwg and StormSewer-Sketch.dwg files
From the Home tab, select Pipe Network - Pipe Network Creation Tools
Name the pipe network Storm-<description>. For example: Storm-Begin-To-4thAve
Select the Storm Sewer Parts List
Select the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface
Select the main roadway alignment
Structure and Pipe label styles can be set to <none>
10:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-002.mp4
125.040.002 Layout Pipe Network Structures
From the Network Layout Tools, select Draw Structures Only

Choose the desired structure type for placement. For efficiency, place all of the like structure first. Then,
switch the structure type and place that type, etc. Refer to the Storm Sewer Summary Sheet to determine
which diameter structures should be used based on your first guess at the adjoining pipe size.
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-help.pdf#Pipe_Networks The structure sizes can be
easily swapped later if a different pipe size is chosen.
Use the Station Offset transparent command for accurate structure placement. Refer to Storm Sewer
Summary sheet in the Help Document for assistance when determining structure offsets.
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-003.mp4
125.040.003 Layout Pipe Network Structures Rotate and move
If needed, rotate the structure to the correct orientation using the circular grip. The station/offset transparent
command is a handy tool rotating the structures.
Use the square grip to move the structures. The station/offset command can be used in conjuction with the
move. In this example, we move an inlet structure that drain surface low points. Turn the top surface to a
contour display style to located the low point and move the structure to that location.
Defer the placement of any outlets (apron endwalls) until later.
6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-004.mp4
125.040.004 Layout Pipe Network pipes - Laterals
Open a second viewport. Set one viewport to top view (2D wireframe style) and the other to an isometric view
(Shaded style). This will help you validate the pipe network layout.
In the Network Layout Tools, select Draw Pipes Only.
Change the network surface to Rfnt-Datum.
Place the pipe by connecting the structures. To connect to a structure, hover the crosshairs over a structure
until you see a brown symbol appear. Left click to choose the structure. Then select the other structure to
connect to. Start by placing the laterals. Then proceed to the trunk.
You may place the pipes from upstream to downstream or from downstream to upstream, but you must have
the pipe slope direction toggled correctly in the Pipe Network Layout Tools. There are advantages to always
placing the pipes from upstream to downstream, but it is not required. One advantage is that the pipe start will
always be upstream. This will make labeling the pipe inverts for storm sewer detail sheets easier later on. In
addition, the pipe and structure rules are always calculated from upstream to downstream. So, placing the
network in that direction allow the rules to work as intended.
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-005.mp4
125.040.005 Layout Pipe Network pipes Trunk
Similar procedure as laterals. Best practice is to start from upstream and work in the downstream direction.
Pipes elevations are automatically calculated based on the slope and cover rules.
6:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-006.mp4
125.040.006 Renaming the Pipe Network parts
To take advantage of the labeling functions for plans production, you must rename the pipe network parts. It
also is important for keep things organized when doing the hydraulic analysis. Activating the quick properties
makes renaming the parts go quickly.
To rename the trunk line structures, use the Rename Part command located in the pipe network modify
ribbon. Select the first trunk line structure that you want to rename, then select the last trunk line structure that
you want to rename.
In the command dialogue, keep Rename Structure checked, but uncheck Rename Pipes. Set the value of the
first trunk line structure. The name template should be next counter.
Under Name Conflict Options, Choose Rename Existing Parts. Click Ok.
Once all of the trunk line structures are renamed, proceed to the lateral structures. Use the quick properties
to rename these structures.
When all of the structures have been renamed, use the quick properties to rename the pipes. The pipe
names should follow this format: <UpstreamStructure>-<DownstreamStructure>.
11:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-007.mp4
125.040.007 Inspect the Pipe Network Crown matching
Generally, the pipes and structures should be placed to comply with the rules automatically. There are some
cases where this will not happen.
The wisdot-pipe.dwt includes a label called Design properties. It is recommended that you label each
structure that has more than one connecting pipes. The label can help you verify that the outflow pipes have
the lowest crown elevation.
If you need to apply rules, go to the Modify tab Design panel select Pipe Networks. On the Modify fly-out
is the Apply Rules command.
The way you select the parts to apply rules is very important. Here are the key points:
Always start upstream.
Do not select lateral parts and trunk parts together.
If laterals and the trunk both need rules applied, start with laterals, and then move on to the trunk.
If the outflow pipe crown does not have the lowest elevation for a particular structure, that can be adjusted in
the structure properties. Go the structure properties Connected Pipes tab. Select the outflow pipe and the
pipe crown that it should match in the list and right click. Choose Match Crowns. Select the pipe crown to
match and click ok. Alternatively, you can manually enter the elevations.
6:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-008.mp4
125.040.008 Inspect the Pipe Network Review rules
Some pipe and structure rules do not affect the network during layout, but they provide valuable feedback to
the designer on potential issues.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, select Pipes or Structures under the Pipe network. The first column shows
each parts status. If a rule flags a potential issue, that status will have a number in it indicating the number
of issues.
The Length Check pipe rule does not control network geometry during layout. After layout, if there is an
issue, it will appear as an issue in the part status.
The Maximum Pipe Size Check structure rule does not control network geometry during layout. After layout,
if there is an issue, it will appear in the part status. IMPORTANT: This rule is set up to indicated the true
maximum pipe size for any given structure. The max pipe size for this rule is based on 180-degrees of pipe

separation at the structure. Smaller degrees of separation may require a smaller pipe and/or a larger
structure.
The status shown in the Toolspace Item View for the pipe network parts is not always accurate. If there is a
potential problem, review the pipe and/or structure properties.
7:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-009.mp4
125.040.009 Inspect the Pipe Network Pipe separation at structures
The Maximum Pipe Size Check structure rule is an aid to make sure the correct size structure is selected for
a pipe run. However, that rule only applies for pipe with 180-degrees of separation.
To check pipe connections at all angles at a structure, we will convert the pipes to 3d solids.
At the command line, type CONVERTTO3DSOLIDS.
Select each pipe that is connected to the structure. Hit Enter.
Choose No so the pipe network objects are not deleted.
At the command line, type SOLIDEDIT
Choose Face
Choose Offset
Select one pipe and hit Enter. For elliptical pipe, you need to select all four faces (2 large radii and
2 small radii)
Type in the offset distance of 0.5
Choose Offset again to repeat the previous steps on the next pipe.
When finished, hit Enter twice to completely exit the command.
Switch the current layer to P_DRN_Interfere (for C3D 2016 and later, you will need to either import this
layer or create it)
At the command line, type INTERFERE
Select each of the previously created pipe 3d solids
Hit enter twice
On the Interference Checking Dialog box, uncheck Delete interference objects created on Close
Click Close
Zoom to the structure in question in Top view. Set OSNAPZ to 1. Use the DISTANCE command to roughly
measure from the center of the structure to the outside of the most exterior interference (shown in red).
Multiply that value by 2. That is the minimum structure size for that location.
Swap the structure for the required size.
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-010.mp4
125.040.010 Pipe Network rule overrides
There may be situations where you may want to override a rule. For example, all of the pipes have a
minimum slope rule of 0.3%. This is just a starting point. You may want steeper slopes for smaller pipe sizes
or flatter slopes for larger pipe sizes.
Go into the part properties Rules tab.
Uncheck the Use Values from Rules Set button
Set the rule as desired.
At this point, you can either adjust the pipe network geometry manually, or you may choose to re-run the
rules.
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-011.mp4
125.040.011 Outlets Compare system elevation to outfall elevation
Check the outfall ditch elevation. Compare that elevation to the invert elevation at the last structure. You may
need to adjust the system elevation to match the ditch or match the ditch to the system.
In the training example, we look for opportunities to raise the system to match the ditch elevation. The
system elevations are then adjusted manually in the part properties by checking the cover and slope values
along the pipes.
15:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-012.mp4
125.040.012 Outlets Place outlet pipe and endwall
Adding the outlet pipe is similar to the culvert pipe workflow.

View the triangles for the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface.
Draw a line representing the flow line of the outlet pipe. Snap to the bottom of the upstream pipe and to the
surface triangles at the ditch location.
Turn the surface triangles off
Set the elevation of the line at the upstream structure to the flow line elevation using ACAD properties.
Create a feature line using the feature line from object command. Use the line previously created.
Drape the feature line on the Cmbn-Exist-Top or Cmbn-Exist-Datum surface.
Move the line up in the z-direction by the pipe diameter plus wall thickness.
Trim the line against the feature line.
Move the line down in the z-direction by half the pipe diameter plus the wall thickness.
Shorten the line by the endwall c dimension.
Using the Network Layout Tools, change the reference surface to Crdr-PipeDatum
Place the outlet pipe by snapping to the last structure and the end of the line.
Verify the pipe elevations. The rules have have overridden your intentions.
Place the apron endwall on the end of the pipe and rotate appropriately.
Rename the pipe and endwall.
5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-013.mp4
125.040.013 Reconstructing and adjusting structures
Existing storm sewer structures that will be either Reconstructed or Adjusted are placed in the pipe network
like any other proposed structure. Choose the structure/cover combination from the parts list that matches the
existing structure.
In the structure properties:
Change its display style to either Existing Inlet or Existing Manhole.
Assign the correct name (structure number)
Change the description to either Reconstruct or Adjust
Change the Rule Set to No Rule
In Part Properties, set Control Sump By: to Elevation. Then set the sump elevation to the flowline
elevation of the existing manhole.
Open the QTO Manager from the Analysis tab - QTO panel. Click the Edit Pay Items on Specified Object
button. Select the structure. Remove the pay items that no longer apply. Add the pay items for either adjusting
or reconstructing.
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-014.mp4
125.040.014 Inlet surface elevation adjustment
When structures are inserted, their rim elevation is coincident with the reference surface. For inlets that
elevation will typically fall somewhere in the curb and gutter pan. For consistency and reporting purposes, a
Surface Adjustment Value should be assigned to the inlets so the rim elevation is correct for the cover flange.
Refer to the Storm Sewer Summary Sheet to determine what the Surface Adjustment Value should be for
each inlet cover type.
Using the Prospector window, sort the structures, so the inlet types are grouped together. Then select like
inlet types.
In the AutoCAD properties window, the Surface Elevation Adjustment can be set for all of the like inlets at
one time.
2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-015.mp4
125.040.015 Miscellaneous structure properties
All WisDOT inlet and manhole structures have been constructed as flat-top structures to account for the
maximum size footprint. By doing this, the cone height parameter could be repurposed. For WisDOT
structures, the cone height parameter is used for adjustment ring height. By default, this parameter is set to 6-
inches in each structures properties. However, depending on your project needs, this parameter can be set
from 2 up to 10 in the structures properties.
For inlets, the default placement characteristic is On Grade. For inlets that are in a sag situation, you must
set them to On Sag in the structure properties. This is important when its time to check the pipe network
hydraulics.

8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-016.mp4
125.040.016 Manhole variable tee and manhole variable special
The Manhole Variable Tee and Manhole Variable Special structures are unique structures that require a
slightly modified workflow.
When using these structures, start by placing the structures in the desired locations. The horizontal insertion
point is the center of the lower portion of the structure where the pipes connect.
The structures default to a 48-inch pipe connection (the smallest size). Select the structures in model space,
go into the structure properties, and changed the Structure Diameter (located at the bottom) to the pipe size
desired. For the Manhole Variable Special, you also need to check the Floor Thickness value. For pipe sizes
48 84, the floor thickness is 13-inches. For pipe sizes greater than 84, the floor thickness is 15-inches. The
Manhole Variable Tee floor thickness changes automatically according to the pipe size.
After placing the structures and setting their size parameter, connect them up with the pipes.
Once the pipes have been placed, the structures can then be rotated so they are correctly oriented with the
pipe. The extension Osnap is useful for aligning the structures with the pipes.
Finally, since the manhole covers are offset from the center of the pipe, a Surface Adjustment Value must be
entered in the structure properties to the rim is coincident with the top surface. To calculate the Surface
Adjustment Value, find the Cover Center Offset in the structure properties. Multiply this value by the cross
slope from the center of pipe to the manhole cover. This is the Surface Adjustment Value.
3:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-018.mp4
125.040.018 Swap parts
There are two methods for swapping parts. Civil 3D comes with a swap parts command that swaps one part at a
time. WisDOT includes an additional tool that swaps multiple parts at one time.
To swap multiple parts, first select all of the parts that you want swapped to the same new part. This can be
done by picking them on the screen, selecting them, in the prospector window, or by using the AutoCAD quick
select tool.
Type SWAPPARTS at the command line.
In the dialogue, choose the parts list that contains the desired part.
Choose the part family for pipes if pipes are being swapped, or structures if structures are being swapped.
Finally, choose the specific part to swap to in that part family.
125.050 Pipe Network tables Section updated: 9/23/2014

4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-001.mp4
125.050.001 Pipe Network tables - Culverts
Culvert pipe quantity tables can be produced using the custom WisDOT Pipe Network Tables tool. The tool
combines QTO functionality with Pipe Network data. It is intended to be used with pipe networks created with
WisDOT custom parts. Other parts may not produce the same result.
Open the Pipe-Culvert.dwg file.
If not already done, review each of the metal culvert pipes.
Check the rules tab to see how much cover the pipe has.
Using the FDM, determine the appropriate wall thickness for the culvert pipe.
Set the wall thickness under the Part Data section of the Part Properties.
From the Toolspace-Toolbox, located the Pipe Network Tables tool under WisDOT Reports. Execute the
custom tool.
Choose All Pipes and Structures if all pipe networks in the dwg are to be included in the table. Choose
Pipe Network(s) if only certain pipe networks are to be included in the table.
Under Report Type, choose Culvert Summary
Se the file name and file locations.
Click Create Report.
The report creates an Excel spreadsheet.
The Location column populates the alignment name that the pipe references. Change location can quickly be
changed using the Find/Replace functionality in Excel. For example: Find: 25 and Replace with: STH 25
If the culvert pipe lands completely on one side of the alignment and LT/RT designator will automatically be
placed along with the station.
The wall thickness that was chosen in Civil 3D will show up on the right side of the table. These columns can
be deleted if only concrete pipe is required.
For the Culvert Pipe bid items, both the Aluminum Thickness and Steel Thickness columns will need to be
filled in.
Fill in the number of joint ties required for concrete pipe. This column can be deleted if only metal pipe is
required.
3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-002.mp4
125.050.002 Pipe Network tables Storm sewer
Storm Sewer quantity tables can be produced using the custom WisDOT Pipe Network Tables tool. The tool
combines QTO functionality with Pipe Network data. It is intended to be used with pipe networks created with
WisDOT custom parts. Other parts may not produce the same result.
Open the Pipe-StormSewer.dwg file.
From the Toolspace-Toolbox, located the Pipe Network Tables tool under WisDOT Reports. Execute the
custom tool.
Choose All Pipes and Structures if all pipe networks in the dwg are to be included in the table. Choose
Pipe Network(s) if only certain pipe networks are to be included in the table.
Choose the Report Type. Storm Sewer Pipes, Storm Sewer Structures, or Both Storm Sewer Pipes and
Structures
Set the file name and file locations.
Click Create Report.
The report creates an Excel spreadsheet.
The Location column populates the alignment name that the pipe references. Change location can quickly be
changed using the Find/Replace functionality in Excel. For example: Find: 25 and Replace with: STH 25
In the Pipes Table, fill in the number of joint ties required for any outfall locations.
Module 130 Cross-sections and quantities

130.010 Sample lines, sections, and volumes Section updated: 10/1/2012
10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-010-001.mp4
130.010.001 General Steps:
1. Start NEW drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt
1. Save to SheetsPlan directory
2. Use Data Shortcuts to make a reference to the alignment & profile.
3. XREF Corridor drawing
4. Create Sample Lines
5. Create Section Views and/or compute materials
Frequency Lines vs Sample Lines
Frequency Lines
Used to compute slope intercept and other cross section info (i.e. super elevation slope)
Corridor data can be overridden at frequency stations
Will vary in length depending on assembly or distance to slope intercept
Frequency distance depends on design situation (i.e. 5 frequency in intersections)
Sample Lines
Used in preparation to show data in section views for plotting
Needed to compute end area volumes
Best practice is to have all of your sample lines at a uniform length
No design changes can be made via sample lines
Section Views
Primarily used for plotting
Great place to verify your design
No design changes can be made from section views
Design changes must be made in the corridor drawing
Laid out on Sheets
A Sheet refers to the grid, print area and sheet border

The section view refers to the supporting information shown with the section; offset text, elevation text, and station
value.
The section refers to station-specific data that is coming in for the surfaces and corridor.
Quantities
Earthwork Quantities
All you need is:
1. An Existing Surface
2. A Final Datum surface
Other surfaces such as rock, marsh, excavation below subgrade (EBS) and embankment are optional
Material Quantities
Material quantities come from Corridor Shapes
130.020 Sample line creation Section updated: 10/1/2012

16:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-001.mp4
130.020.001 Before you create sample lines:
1. Start a new drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt
Save new file to SheetsPlan folder
2. Create data shortcut reference to the centerline alignment & design profile
3. XREF corridor drawing
Data References and Cross Sections

Dont I need more data references? What about my existing surface?
Corridors do not have the ability to be shared via data shortcut.
Sample lines are unique objects that can pull data through the corridor XREF.
The corridor and any surfaces associated with it will come over automatically when you create sample lines.
Existing surface
Corridor Top
Corridor Datum
Sample Line Terminology:

Swath Width: length of one side of a sample line as measured from the centerline.
Use the default of 150 if you plan to plot at 1=20
Use swath widths of 75 if you plan to plot at 1=10
Sampling Increment: Standard distance between sample lines
Additional Sample Controls: optional additional stations where sample lines can be automatically generated
Exercise: Create Sample Lines

1. Extract the example files to your local Civil 3D projects folder.
1. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
2. Start a new drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt.
1. Save the file to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan\090100_xs.dwg
3. From the data shortcuts area of prospector, expand Centerline alignments.
1. Expand the alignment USH 51 Best Fit from Exist
2. Expand Profile
3. Right-click Proposed Profile Final and select Create Reference.
4. Click OK to the Create Profile Reference Dialog.
5. Zoom extents to view the alignment.
Because you go for the profile, you will not have to repeat the process for the alignment. The
data for he profile is not available in the drawing but we do not need to see the profile to proceed.
If you wish, you could make the profile visible by going to Home tab > Profile & Section Views
panel and selecting Profile View > Create Profile view.
4. Open the XREF manager by keying-in XREF at the cad command line (or your preferred method if it differs)
1. Click Attach DWG
2. Browse to c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design\Corridors and select Corridor-USH51 North
Segment.dwg.
3. Click Open.
1. Set the reference type to Overlay.
2. Be sure all checkboxes for Specify on screen are clear.
3. Set the Path type to relative path
4. Click OK.
1. Click the save icon from the quick access toolbar to save.
2. From the Home tab > Profile & Section Views Panel, click Sample Lines.
1. When prompted to select an alignment, press enter (to pick from a list).
2. Highlight USH 51 Best Fit from Exist (this will be the only available alignment) and click OK.
3. In the Create Sample Line Group Dialog box:
1. Expand the Data source column so you can see the full names of the data you are working with.
2. Set the style for the surface Exist to EX Ground.
3. Set the style for USH 51 Best Fit from Exist corridor to XS Sheets with Links
4. Set the Style for the corridor Top surface to Final Top
5. Set the style for the corridor Datum surface to Final Datum.
6. Click OK.
You will now see the Sample Line Tools toolbar.
8. From the Sample Line creation methods icon (pulldown) select the By Range of Stations option.
In the Create Sample Lines - By Station Range dialog box:
1. Set the Start Station to 191+00.00
2. Set the End Station to 214+00.00
3. Scroll down and change the At Superelevation critical stations to False.
4. Click OK.
5. If you receive a warning message indicating that the corridor is out of date, just close it.
6. Press Escape if needed to exit the sample line creation tools.
You should now see sample lines and labels near the southern portion of the drawing.
8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-002.mp4
130.020.002 Situations where you may need to make changes to your Sample Lines:
You need to add sample line stations
You need to change the swath widths
For example to 75 from 150 (or vice versa)
More section information is available
Examples: a new corridor surface is generated; a pipe network needs to be shown
#1 Rule of Sample Lines and Cross Sections:

Always look for a way to makes changes to the group as a whole.
Exercise: Modify Sample Lines

1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg
Adding a Sample Line

2. On the Home tab > Profile & Section Views panel, click Sample Lines
3. Press enter to pick an alignment from the list.
4. Highlight USH 51 Best Fit from Exist and click OK.
Because a sample line group already exists for this alignment, you will not need to set styles as you did in
the previous example. Any stations you create will be added to the existing group.
5. Key-in 19753.5 and press enter. (Note: do not use station notation such as 197+53.5, as Civil 3D will not
accept this entry.)
1. Press enter to accept the swat width of 150 to the left
2. Press enter again to accept a swath width of 150 to the right.
4. Close the panorama dialog box if you receive a corridor is out of date warning.
Changing Sample Line Lengths

6. Select any sample line in the drawing.

7. From the Sample Line contextual tab > Modify panel, click Group Properties.
8. Switch to the Sample Lines tab.
1. Highlight the first row in the listing of sample line stations.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the listing.
3. Hold down shift and select the last row of the listing.
4. Click one of the left offset values and edit the entry to 75. Press enter.
5. Click one of the right offset values and edit the entry to 75. Press enter.
At this point, all rows should read 75 for both left and right swath widths.
6. Click OK.
You should see all sample lines in your drawing become shorter.
Add More Data; Sample More Sources

To mimic the effect of more project data being added after sample lines are created, you will import a
LandXML file containing pipe information. You will then use the Sample More Sources tool to ensure that
pipes will appear as part of the sampled data.
9. Go to the Insert Tab > Import panel and click Land XML.
10. Browse to the file 130-020-002-pipes.xml and click Open.
11. Click OK to the Import land XML dialog.
1. You will receive panorama messages indicating that the part geometry was found but optional
parameters were not. Click the green checkbox to dismiss this message.
1. Click Any sample line in the drawing.
2. From the Sample Line contextual tab, select Sample More Sources.
1. Highlight the drainage item listed under Available sources.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.
3. Save the Drawing.
End of Exercise.
130.030 Calculate and report volumes Section updated: 10/1/2012

5:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-001.mp4
130.030.001 Computing Volumes
You can compute volumes as soon as you have:
Proposed Data
Datum surface
Corridor
Sample Lines
Sample lines must see the proposed data, so use Sample More Sources as needed.
Find Compute Materials under:

Analyze > Volumes and Materials
When computing volumes for the first time:

1. Click the Edit Style button.
2. Click OK
You will then see materials listed in the compute materials dialog box.
Never click OK with the compute materials dialog box empty! It WILL crash otherwise.
Exercise: Calculate Volumes

folder.
2. On the ribbon, go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Compute Materials.
3. Click the Edit Style button.

1. You do not need to make any changes.
2. Click OK.
The Compute Materials dialog will now have spots for different materials. You do not need to fill in every type of
surface, but you do need to fill in at least the Existing Surface and Datum surface.
4. Click the <Click Here to Set All> field next to the Exist surface.
1. Choose the surface named Exist.
5. Click the <Click here to set all> field next to Final Datum.
1. Choose the USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Datum.
6. Click OK.
7. You will receive a message indicating that Not all of the named surfaces or corridor shapes have been
mapped to an object in the drawing Click OK.
Graphically, no change should be apparent.

9. End of Exercise.
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-002.mp4
130.030.002 Volume Reports
A Volume Report creates a text file that will open in Internet Explorer.
Volume Tables& Material Volume Tables
Total Volume Table and Material Volume table place information directly into AutoCAD.
The Style sheet determines the format and what information is shown when generating a volume report.
Exercise: Report Volumes
folder.
2. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Volume Report.
3. Click the folder icon next to Select a Style sheet.
1. Select Earthwork.xsl
2. Click OK.
4. When Internet Explorer pops up, it may ask you if you would like to run scripts. Click Yes.
5. You should now see the volume report with data in most of the columns.
6. Right-click anywhere in the browser window and choose Select All.
7. Right-click again and select Copy.
8. Launch Microsoft Excel. (Keep Civil 3D and the Internet Explorer Window open.)
9. Right-click and paste using the Match Destination theme option.
10. Save the Excel Spreadsheet as Earthwork 11-10-2012.xls in C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design
\Quantities\EWKDetailWorkbooks\
11. Close Excel.
12. Save the Civil 3D dwg.
End of Exercise.
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-003.mp4
130.030.003 Exercise: Calculate & Report Structure Volumes
folder.
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Compute Materials.
1. Click OK.
Since you have already computed earthwork for this, you will see a material list showing in the Edit

Material List dialog,
3. Click Add New Material.

1. You may need to expand the listing using the + sign.
2. Rename the New Material to Asphalt.
3. Change the Quantity Type to Structures.
This step is very important. If you forget to change the type to structures, it will not allow you to add a
corridor shape to the earthwork table.
d. Change the Data Type to Corridor Shape.
e. With USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Pave 1 as the active corridor shape, click the + sign.
f. Change the Corridor shape to USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Pave1_Shoulder and click the +
sign.
By adding both of these corridor shapes to the Asphalt material, they will be lumped together for one
overall asphalt volume - of course if these need to be separate pay items in real life you can make a
separate material entry for the different types of asphalt.
4. Click Add New Material again.

1. Rename the material to Base.
2. Change the Quantity Type to Structures.
3. Change the Data Type to Corridor Shape.
4. With USH 51 Best Fit from Exist - (1) Base as the active corridor shape, click the + sign.
5. Click Add New material again and name it Subbase.

1. Repeat the previous steps to make sure this is a Structure-type computation.
2. Add the subbase corridor shape to this material.
6. Click OK.
If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects, dismiss
panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
7. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Volume Report.
Click the folder icon next to the Select a Style Sheet field.
1. Click the Select Material option.
2. Click OK.
8. Click YES to the message that displays.
9. Using the same techniques as the previous exercise, select all of the information and paste it into an excel
spreadsheet.
1. Save the excel spreadsheet as Corridor.xls in C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\Design\Quantities
\EWKDetailWorkbooks\
2. Close Excel.
10. Save the AutoCAD file.
130.040 Modify sheet style Section updated: 10/1/2012

6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-040-001.mp4
130.040.001 Exercise: Modify Styles
1. For this example, use the file ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-040-xs-styles-

example.dwg. This is a self-contained example project where you will have a chance to experiment with
changing style options.
2. Select one of the section views or sheets.
3. From the Section View contextual tab, click Section View Properties menu > Edit Group Plot Style.
1. When prompted to pick a graph, the simplest thing to select is the magenta offset labels along the
bottom of any view.
2. Press enter.
4. Switch to the Array tab.
1. Change the Row spacing to 1.5 and click OK.
2. You should see that the spacing between each view has increased.
5. Go back to the Group plot Style dialog the same way you did in step 3.
1. Switch to the Display tab.
2. Click the light bulb next to Minor Horizontal Grid.
3. Click the light bulb next to Minor Vertical Grid.
4. This will hide or turn off these items.
5. Click OK.
6. Change the annotation scale of the drawing to 1IN 20 FT.
7. Select one of the sheets or views and click Update Group layout.
8. Go back to the Group plot Style dialog the same way you did in step 3.
1. Switch to the Array tab.
2. Change the Column spacing to 0.01 and click OK.
3. You should see that two columns dont quite fit on a page.
9. Feel free to experiment with some of the other settings you find in the Group plot style dialog box.
10. Hit undo in the Quick Access toolbar until all changes have been undone.
End of exercise.
130.050 Section view creation Section updated: 10/1/2012

7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-001.mp4
130.050.001 Section Views and Scale
When creating views it is important that all of the scales you choose agree with each other:
Annotation Scale
Section View Style
Section Template
Exercise: Create Section Views

folder.
2. In the lower-right corner of the screen, change the annotation scale to 1 in:10FT.
1. Give the drawing a moment to adjust the text and any other annotative features.
2. Save the file.
3. On the Home tab > Profile & Section Views panel, click Section Views > Create Multiple Views.
4. On the General page of the wiszard, set the Section view style to Sheets 1 In 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert
1. Click Next.
5. On the Section Placement page of the wizard, click the ellipsis next to Template for Cross Section Sheet.
1. Click the ellipsis again to browse to the file wisdot12-09-xs.dwt.
2. This will be located in: C:\Users\<your_name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Template
\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
6. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
7. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
8. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
9. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
10. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
11. Click off to the side in an empty location on your drawing.
1. You should have many pages of cross sections.
End of exercise.
7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-002.mp4

130.050.002 Adding an additional sample line

Do not graphically delete section views!
Use the Delete option from the right-click menu in prospector!
#1 Rule of Sample Lines and Cross Sections:

Always look for a way to makes changes to the group as a whole.
In other words, if you a repeating a task on multiple stations there is probably a better way!
Exercise: Add n Additional Sample Line & Add it to the section views.
folder.
2. On the Home tab > Profile and Section Views panel, click sample lines.
1. Press enter to select USH 51 Best Fit from Exist and click OK.
2. When prompted to key-in a station along the alignment, type in 19155 and press enter.
3. Type in 75 for the left swath width and press enter.
4. Type 75 for the right swath width and press enter.
Feel free to experiment by adding stations on your own. Just remember to set the swath widths to
the uniform 75 for both the left and right sides. If you add a sample line where one already
exists, civil 3d will ask if you wish to delete the old one.

3. Start the rectangle command from the Home tab > Draw panel.
1. Trace the first sheet by drawing a rectangle directly over it.
1. In Prospector, go to the alignment listing.
1. Expand USH 51 Best Fit from Exist.
2. Expand Sample Line Groups
3. Expand Section View Groups.
4. Right-click section view groups and select Delete.
2. Go back to the Home tab of the ribbon > Profile & Section Views
1. Click Section Views > Create Multiple Views.
3. On the General page of the wiszard, set the Section view style to Sheets 1 In 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert
1. Click Next.
4. On the Section Placement page of the wizard, click the ellipsis next to Template for Cross Section Sheet.
1. Click the ellipsis again to browse to the file wisdot12-09-xs.dwt.
2. This will be located in: C:\Users\<your_name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Template
\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
5. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
6. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
7. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
8. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
9. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
10. Using the rectangle you created earlier as a guide, place the section views in the same location by
snapping to the lower-left corner of the rectangle.
7:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-003.mp4
130.050.003 ROW and Utilities
The example uses Beam Guard but the technique can be used for:
Utilities
Right-of-way labels
Any item that needs to be shown in section with a unique style.
Overview of Steps
An alignment is needed for the horizontal location
A profile is needed for the elevation component
Usually developed from a surface
Use the Section View Group Properties
Add Profile Grade
Set Marker style as needed
Exercise: Showing Beam Guard in Section

folder.
2. On the insert tab > Import panel, click Land XML.
1. Import the file 130-050-003-beamguard alignments.xml with all the default settings.
2. Click ok.
3. Go to the Manage tab.
2. On the Styles panel, click Import.
3. Browse to file Beam Guard Style.dwg in the files included with this chapter.
4. Clear all other style options except for Beam Guard Left and Beam Guard right.
5. Clear the checkbox for import Styles.
6. Click OK.
4. Click any sheet or section view.
1. From the contextual tab, click View Group Properties.
5. You should be in the Section View Group Properties dialog box looking at the Section Views tab.
1. Scroll over and find Profile Grade.
2. Click the ellipsis.
6. From the Alignment list, pick Beam Guard North.
1. Click Add.
2. Set the Marker style to Beam Guard R.
7. From the Alignment list, pick Beam Guard South.
1. Click Add.
2. Set the Marker style to Beam Guard L.
8. Click OK.
9. Click OK.
You should now see beam guard at every station.
End of exercise.
7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-004.mp4
130.050.004 The only thing to remember at this point is to add the sheets to the sheetset manager.
Click the ellipsis and browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan
Exercise: Create Sheets
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines and multiple section
views, you may continue working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to
your local Civil 3D projects folder.

2. On the Output tab > Plan Production Panel, click Create Section Sheets.
3. Under the sheet set area of the Create Section sheets dialog box, switch the radio button over to Add to
Existing Sheet set.
1. Click the ellipsis.
2. Browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan\planproduction.dst
3. Click Open
4. Click Create Sheets.
5. Click OK to confirm that the drawing will be saved.
6. After a moment multiple tabs will appear for each sheet. If you do not see the new tabs right away, close the
drawing and go back in.
8. End of Exercise.
130.060 WisDOT standards - Section views Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-001.mp4
130.060.001 Section Views for Plan Sheets File Management
File location = {ProjID}\SheetsPlan folder
4:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-002.mp4
130.060.002 Section Views for Plan Sheets Data Referencing
Data Shortcut References:
Baseline Alignments
Roadway Model Surfaces
Utility Surface Profiles
Ultimate Right-of-Way Surface Profiles
Corridor dwg file
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-003.mp4
130.060.003 Section Views for Plan Sheets Graphic Content
Proposed objects are represented by the Roadway Model Surfaces
Corridors provide automated labeling
6:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-004.mp4
130.060.004 Corridor links are typically not visible
XSSheets code set style
XSSheets With Links code set style
4:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-005.mp4
130.060.005 Utilities and RW markers are tied to surface profiles
Edge of lane markers
1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-006.mp4
130.060.006 Section Views for Plan Sheets Adding Labels
Why do we need manual labels?
Because the corridor isnt always visible, so automated labeling needs to be supplemented with manual
labels.
Elevation-Offset labels
Slope-Percent labels
Slope-Ratio labels
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-007.mp4
130.060.007 Adding labels - elevation/offset

3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-008.mp4
130.060.008 Adding labels - slope percent
1:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-009.mp4
130.060.009 Adding labels - slope ratio
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-010.mp4
130.060.010 Section Views for Plan Sheets Custom Text Markers
Single Custom Text Marker Using Block
10:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-011.mp4
130.060.011 Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 1
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-012.mp4
130.060.012 Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 2
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-013.mp4
130.060.013 Section Views for Plan Sheets Conclusion
File Management
Data Referencing
Graphic Content
Labels
Custom Text Markers
130.070 Exercise DS1800 - Create section views for plans Section updated: 7/1/2010
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-070-create-plan-production-section-views.pdf
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-001.mp4
3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-002.mp4
130.070.002 Ensure corridor surfaces are current
4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-003.mp4
130.070.003 Ensure refinement surfaces are current
4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-004.mp4
130.070.004 Ensure roadway model surfaces are current
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-005.mp4
130.070.005 Create section view DWG. Create references
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-006.mp4
130.070.006 R/W object in section views explanation
6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-007.mp4
130.070.007 Create ultimate r/w surface profiles
4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-008.mp4
130.070.008 Data shortcut reference ultimate r/w profiles
2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-009.mp4
130.070.009 Create utilities profiles for section views DWG
6:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-010.mp4
130.070.010 Create utility alignment from survey feature lines
4:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-011.mp4
130.070.011 Create utility surface profiles
3:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-012.mp4
130.070.012 Data shortcut reference utilities
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-013.mp4
130.070.013 Matchline layout explanation
7:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-014.mp4
130.070.014 Create matchline alignments
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-015.mp4
130.070.015 Create sample lines by range of stations 1
8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-016.mp4
130.070.016 Create sample lines by range of stations 2
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-017.mp4
130.070.017 Create multiple section views
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-018.mp4
130.070.018 Inspect section views
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-019.mp4
130.070.019 Add special stations to section views
8:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-020.mp4
130.070.020 Add r/w and utilities to section views
2:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-021.mp4
130.070.021 Review
130.075 Projecting 3D objects onto cross sections Section updated: 4/13/2015

8:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-075-001.mp4
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-001-proj-dataset-fin.zip
** NOTE ** This method should only be used if a survey database is not available. If a survey database is
available, that provides a shorter workflow for projecting survey figures onto cross sections. That method is found
at 130.075.002.
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for feature lines.

Obtaining Data from Utilities File

Data found in existing conditions utilities files can be inserted into a cross section drawing for use with projection
styles.
1. Open the existing Uti-Ex.dwg file found in C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData.
Each of the utilities line work groups (electric, gas, etc.) will need to be converted to feature lines.
2. Isolate each separate utilities linework layer one at a time by picking one polyline in a group and picking the
Isolate button in the Home tab of the ribbon.
Once a utility layer is isolated go to the Home tab of the ribbon and pick Feature Line>Create Feature
Lines From Objects. Then select all visible linework.
In the Create Feature Lines dialog box, check the Style box in order to select the proper style. From the
drop-down list select the appropriate E UTL layer for each utility group.
Check the Erase existing entities box so that the old linework is replace with feature lines and there is
no redundant linework.
3. Save the Uti-Ex.dwg file, and close it. This file will be inserted into your cross sections drawing later in the
workflow.
Setting Up the Cross Section Drawing for Projections
4. Open the training cross sections drawing Crdr-25_xs.dwg
Ensure that the corridor file is an XREF in the cross section drawing.
Ensure that the following data has been referenced:
Existing Ground surface while the section data for the existing ground surface can be
obtained from the corridor XREF file, we will need the surface itself referenced from a data
shortcut in order to sample its elevations for the projection markers.
Note: All projections will use the existing ground surface to set elevations.
Proposed centerline alignment and design profile
All existing ROW alignments
Ensure that your sample line group has been created, and that your section views exist in the
drawing.
Create Feature Lines from Existing ROW Alignments
Alignments cannot be projected in Civil 3D, but feature lines can be created from the existing ROW alignments,
and these can be projected.
5. Home, Feature Line, Create Feature Line From Alignment.
Uncheck the Weed Points option
Select E RW Existing Right-Of-Way for the style, and select OK. This will need to be done for each
separate existing ROW alignment.
Insert Uti-Ex.dwg Into Cross Section Drawing
The Uti-Ex.dwg file will now need to be inserted into the cross section drawing, and the feature lines from that file
will need to be assigned to a site.
6. Go to Insert , Block, Insert.
Browse to the Uti-Ex.dwg file for the project, and make sure none of the boxes are unchecked for
Insertion Point, Scale, or Rotation.
Be sure to check the Explode option.
click OK.
7. Right-click in model space and select Quick Select.
In the Quick Select dialog box select:
Apply to: Entire drawing
Object type: Feature line
Operator: Select All
8. Select OK to create a selection set of all feature line.
9. Right-click in model space and select Move to Site
10. Choose the same site which was created for the existing ROW feature lines created from alignments and select
OK. This will ensure that all of the newly inserted feature lines are associated with a site. If this is not done, these
feature lines will not get projected.
Applying Utilities Projection Styles to Cross Sections
11. To project all feature lines to the cross section views type the command PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT.
Select either a section view or a sample line from model space.
When the dialog box appears, uncheck all object types from the list except feature lines.
Keep the Style as Use Object.
Elevation Options should be set to surface Exist.
Label Style should be set to <None>.
12. Check your section views to confirm that the markers for utilities and ROW are showing up.
Editing Projection Styles
Projection styles can be edited after being applied, and can also be removed or added.
13. Run the PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT command again.
Uncheck everything but feature lines.

Set the setting just as detailed in the last step, and click OK.
A message will appear with an option to overwrite the definition of already existing projections, or to leave them as
they are. If any feature lines were deleted in plan view, the user can choose to overwrite the definition in order to
remove the corresponding projection markers in the section views. If new feature lines were added to plan view
then these will now be added into the section views.
5:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-075-002.mp4
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-002-proj-dataset-fin.zip
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module.
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for survey figures.
Obtaining Utilities Data from Survey Database

Survey figures representing existing conditions utilities found in the project survey database can be inserted into a
cross section drawing for use with projection styles.
1. Open the training cross sections drawing (Crdr-25_xs.dwg)
This dwg should already have the corridor file as an XREF within it, and the section sheets created.
The Exist surface is data referenced into the drawing.
2. Click on the Survey tab in toolspace, and right-click on Survey Databases and choose Set Working Folder.
When prompted for a working folder location, navigate to C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData
\Survey and click OK.
3. Right-click on Projection Styles Training which is under the Survey Databases heading in toolspace, and
select Open for edit. This will open the example survey database to give you access to insert data into your
current drawing.
Each of the utilities survey figure groups (electric, gas, etc.) will already have a survey query created for it. You
can choose which of these utilities groups you would like to add to your cross section drawing. These are
found under the Survey Queries heading.
4. Right-click on each query you would like to insert and select Insert into drawing.
If you would like to insert them all at once, you can right-click on the Figures heading and select Insert
into drawing.
Confirm that the survey figure have been inserted into model space in your cross sections drawing, and then
right-click on the Projection Styles Training survey database and select Close survey database.
Applying Utilities Projection Styles to Cross Sections

5. To project all survey figures to all cross sections type the command PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT.
Select either a section view or a sample line from model space.
When the dialog box appears, uncheck all object types from the list except survey figures.
Keep the Style as Use Object.
Elevation Options should be set to surface Exist.
Label Style should be set to <None>. Click OK.
6. Check your section views to confirm that the markers for utilities are showing up.
Reloading Survey Figures After Survey Database Update
When inserting survey figures to a drawing from survey database, these inserted figures are not live. This means
that if there is a change to the survey figures made within the survey database, those changes will not
automatically take place within the drawing they have been inserted into.
Once notification from survey is received that the survey database has been updated, the survey database will
need to be opened for edit as was done in the original steps for inserting the survey figures. You will have to be
working in the cross sections drawing when completing the following steps.
If only one utility group was modified, just the electric lines for example, then you will only need to reload that one
query.
7. Right-click on the query for that utility group and select Remove from drawing.

8. Right-click on the query a second time and select Insert into drawing. This will effectively give you the newest
survey figures from the survey database.
9. If changes were made to many of the utility groups it will be quicker just to do the above steps on the Figures
heading in the Survey tab of toolspace. However, this will add all survey figures to the drawing so in many cases
this may not be desirable.
Updating Projection Styles

Projection styles will need to be updated if changes have been made to the survey database.
10. Run the PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT command again.
Uncheck everything but survey figures.
Set the setting just as detailed in the original steps, and click OK.
A message will appear with an option to overwrite the definition of already existing projections, or to leave them as
they are. If any feature lines were deleted in plan view, the user can choose to overwrite the definition in order to
remove the corresponding projection markers in the section views. If new feature lines were added to plan view
then these will now be added into the section views.
130.077 Managing cross section labels Section updated: 6/17/2015

Exercise file
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-077-exercise-file.zip
2:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-001.mp4
** WARNING ** Lines representing surfaces in cross-sections should NEVER be modified from the cross section
only. Changing the representation of design surfaces only in the cross sections and not in the original surface
introduces a conflict in design data provided to the contractor. The design model surfaces should always be
reflected accurately in cross sections.
Automatic and manual labels

Grade and Elevation/Offset labels either can be automatic or manual. Automatic labels are managed by the Code
Set Style and keep synchronized with changes to the corridor and section views. Manual labels keep synchronized
with the section view, but not the corridor.
Manual labels should generally be avoided and only used when necessary and it is certain there will be no more
edits to the corridor.
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-002.mp4
130.077.002 Code set styles
Code set styles manage many objects. For this topic, it is sufficient to know that they manage automatic
grade and elevation/offset labels. Code set styles can be applied to many different objects. They
include:
Subassemblies
Assemblies
Corridors
Section views (including the corridor section editor)
Section view groups
The wide reach of code set styles is important to understand for this topic because changes to code set
styles will be seen throughout a file, not only in the object that is currently being worked on.
Rebuild corridor to make sure corridor is up-to-date.
Methods to manage automatic label sets in code set styles
Create modified code set style to apply to section view or section view group
** TIP ** It is good practice to make a copy of a standard code set style before editing it. That way, the
original code set style is always available if mistakes are made.
In Toolspace Settings Tab, code set styles are found under General Multipurpose Styles Code
Set Styles. Right-click on the code set style to copy and click "Copy".

Custom code set styles should be named either for the section view group they are being applied to or
some unique feature that they have. Some examples would be XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2, XS
Sheets - ElevOff left only.
4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-003.mp4
130.077.003 Add, remove, change marker label styles on section view group
This method is good for making changes to specific point codes across an entire section view group or
selected section views.
Open a code set style for editing. That can either be done from:
Toolspace Settings
General... Multipurpose Styles... Code Set Styles
or from the Section View Group properties.
Right-click on the Section View Group for the cross-sections and click "Properties".
Click on the "Sections" tab and click on the Style for the referenced corridor.
Select the appropriate code set style and click the "Edit Style" button.
Grade labels are associated with links. Elevation Offset labels are associated with point codes. Label
styles can be changed for any point or link codes used in the section view group.
** TIP ** View a section with point and/or link codes visible while working on code set style edits. The
standard code set styles that include these attributes are "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" and "CRDR
Proposed - Point and Link codes".

There are 2 methods to accomplish this in a typical cross sections file.

Change the code set style of one section view in a section view group, make the changes, and
then change the code set style for the one section view back to the rest of the section view group.
This can be done by selecting a section view in modelspace by clicking on the station value of the
section. Right-click and click on "Section View Properties" In the Sections tab, override the style of
the corridor section.
Create a full or partial copy of the section view group being worked with and set the code set
style to "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" or "CRDR Proposed - Point and Link
codes".
Once a code set style is created that looks correct, it can be applied to an entire section view group or
override specific section views as shown above.
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-004.mp4
130.077.004 Custom point codes and marker label styles
This method is good for changing the layout of an elevation/offset label for a point code.
There are 8 point codes and associated marker label styles specifically built for elevation/offset label
customization. They are:
ElevOff000 ElevOff045 ElevOff090 ElevOff135 ElevOff180 ElevOff225 ElevOff270 ElevOff315

East Northeast North Northwest West Southwest South Southeast
The second row describes the direction from the point that the label offsets.
** INFO ** The following label styles were added to wisdot14. dwt in May 2014.
There are 4 series of label styles available to use. The XXX designates one of the eight angles above.
ElevOff-RoTxt-NoLeadXXX (Default) Rotated text, no leader
ElevOff-RoTxt-ExtLeadXXX Rotated text, extended leader
ElevOff-Txt-NoLeadXXX Top-aligned text, no leader
ElevOff-Txt-ExtLeadXXX Top-aligned text, extended leader
The marker label style of any point code can be changed to one of these styles to change the layout of an
elevation/offset label.
6:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-005.mp4
130.077.005 Add a MarkPoint sub to an assembly with an elevation/offset point code

This method is good for placing elevation/offset labels at points in assemblies that do not have point
codes assigned to them. It can also provide a method to label the same point on the left and right sides
differently.
MarkPoint is a subassembly that places a point code in an assembly at whatever location can be
snapped to. It is located on the Generic subassembly tool palette. In conjunction with the custom point
marker label styles, MarkPoint will allow placing an elevation/offset label anywhere on a section without
building unwanted corridor feature lines.
In the Toolspace Prospector, Right-click the code set style to edit XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2
In the Codes tab, change the label style of that Daylight point code to <none>.
The MarkPoint subassembly is found in Tool Palettes... Civil Imperial Subassemblies Generic
MarkPoint. Click the subassembly to select it and click the location on the assembly in the file where
the label is to be placed.
Then select the subassembly and change the Point Code of the MarkPoint subassembly to the
style of label desired. In this example, ElevOff000 for labels on the right side and ElevOff180 for
labels on the left side.
Rebuild the corridor to apply the MarkPoint subassemblies.

2:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-006.mp4
130.077.006 Create and use custom marker label style in code set style
This method is good if the provided elevation/offset labels do not meet labeling needs.
Similar to creating custom code set style, custom marker label styles can be created by copying
standard marker label styles and modifying them. These styles can then be applied to point and link
codes in a custom code set style.
Label styles are found in Toolspace... Settings tab Multipurpose styles Label styles Marker.
Click a style that is very similar to what you want, right-click, click "Copy" to make a custom label
style.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-007.mp4
130.077.007 Modifying individual automatic labels in a section view
This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group. If more than 10-20
labels need to be modified in the same way, methods that can modify multiple labels at once should be
considered.
Dragging a label
A single automatic label can be selected in a section view with a Ctrl+Click. Once selected, a blue grip
will appear that can be dragged to a more visible location.
** TIP ** Be careful of objects snaps (osnaps) when dragging labels. To avoid snapping to grid lines or
surface links, either turn osnaps off (F3 toggle on/off) or temporarily override osnaps with Shift+Right
Click.

Change a label style or visibility

Selecting an automatic label to change its style or visibility is different than dragging it. Click on the
entire label set to select it. Then right-click over the label to be changed.
From the Label Properties dialog box, the style, flip, and visibility of the label can be changed.
** WARNING ** Once a label is made invisible, it cannot be selected for editing. To retrieve the label:
Click the section view labels to select them
Right-click, click "Edit Corridor Section Properties"
Click the "Codes" tab and click the "Reset Labels" button. Click "OK" button.
This will reset all of the labels for the section view.
3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-008.mp4
130.077.008 Creating manual section view labels
This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group and the corridor is
no longer changing. If more than 10-20 labels need to be created in the same way, using the MarkPoint
sub in the corridor assemblies should be considered.
Click on the section view labels to select them. Labels can then be added from the contextual ribbon.
Manual labels can be dragged and changed with standard grips similar to automatic labels. In addition,
manual labels can be moved. The diamond grip moves the point being labeled. The square grip drags
and rotates the label.

** WARNING ** Manual labels that are moved do not stay dynamic to the corridor.
130.080 WisDOT standards - Earthwork Section updated: 7/1/2010

24:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-001.mp4
130.080.001 Earthwork File Management
File location = {ProjID}\Design\Quantities folder
File naming
Drawing Template
Earthwork Data Referencing

Data Shortcut References:
Baseline Alignments
Roadway Model Surfaces
Subsurface
Corridor Marsh Excavation Surface
Xreferences:
Corridor dwg file
Earthwork Matchline Alignments

Why?
Matchline Layout
Matchline Alignment Naming
Earthwork Sample Line Groups and Sample Lines
Sample Line Groups

Naming
SLG - Parent Alignment Name
Surfaces
Corridors
Display Styles

Sample Lines
Naming
SL Station Value
Spacing
14:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-002.mp4
130.080.002 Earthwork Assign Materials List
Material List
Naming does it matter?
Surfaces
Corridor Shapes
Check out SLG - Sections
Earthwork Create Reports

File Type
XML
File Naming
EwkDetail-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKDetailReports folder
Why?
25:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-003.mp4
130.080.003 Earthwork Create Earthwork Detail Excel Workbooks
File Naming
EwkDetail-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKDetailWorkbooks folder
Why?
Earthwork Create Earthwork Summary Excel Workbooks

File Naming
EwkSummary-Alignment Name or Sample Line Group Name
Folder Management
Place in \Quantities\EWKSummaryWorkbooks folder
Why?
Earthwork Checking the Results
Surface to Surface
Why wont the numbers be exact?
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-004.mp4
130.080.004 Earthwork Summary
Earthwork DWG file

Data to Xreference and Data Reference
Create Matchline Alignments
Create Sample Line Groups and Sample Lines
Assign Material Criteria to Sample Line Groups
Create Earthwork Detail XML Reports
Create Earthwork Detail Excel Workbooks
Create Earthwork Summary Excel Workbooks
Check your work

130.090 Exercise DS1900 - Create earthwork reports Section updated: 7/1/2010

ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-090-earthwork-quantities.pdf
14:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-001.mp4
130.090.001 Create Marsh Excavation surface
9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-002.mp4
11:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-003.mp4
130.090.003 Create matchlines 1
7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-004.mp4
130.090.004 Create matchlines 2
10:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-005.mp4
130.090.005 Create sample lines 1
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-006.mp4
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-007.mp4
8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-008.mp4
130.090.008 Assign materials 1
1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-009.mp4
130.090.009 Assign materials 2
7:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-010.mp4
130.090.010 Create reports
6:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-011.mp4
130.090.011 Create earthwork detail report 1
12:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-012.mp4
130.090.012 Create earthwork detail report 2
6:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-013.mp4
130.090.013 Create earthwork summary report 1
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-014.mp4
130.090.014 Create earthwork summary report 2
15:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-015.mp4
130.090.015 Check earthwork summary

Module 140 Parcels

The segments in this module use files found within the zip files linked to sections. If you want to do the exercises
in the same file as the instructor, do the following prior to starting the section:
Extract the zip file to the following local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d
After extraction, there should be a folder called "12345678". This is a Civil 3D project folder.
You will be able to create/open files in the same locations as the instructor.
140.010 Parcel basics Section updated: 10/1/2012
14:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-010-001.mp4
140.010.001 Parcels are areas, not objects
Labels are their point of access
Parcels can share boundary lines
Closed shape is CRITICAL!
If more than one parcel or parcel line contributes to a closed shape external to an existing parcel a new
parcel will be created
Information tab
Name field not editable from here there is a renaming tool
Use Name in Template in Parcel Style
Composition Tab
Area Label selection
Parcel Statistics
Analysis Tab
Mapcheck or Inverse Analysis
Reset Point of Beginning, or turn counterclockwise
Legal Description
User Defined Properties tab

Data for labeling
Includes WisDOT custom data
Allows hatching in parcel area

Beware of pattern and scale
Fill Distance allows hatching to be observed in a set distance from the boundary
Parcel Naming Template
Parcel Segment Marker Style for displaying in sections
140.020 Parcel creation and editing Section updated: 10/1/2012

21:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-020-001.mp4
140.020.001 Creating parcels works best if from objects
Use polyline (2D or 3D), Lines, Arcs (no feature lines)
Make sure to snap ends together, or C for Close
Home tab...Create Design panel...Parcel...Create Parcel from Object
Creation dialog
Site is important dont cross grading in same site
Parcel Style hatching and can lend its name to the parcel name
Area Label
Line/Curve labels
Edit Drop down is icon left of center on Parcel Creation Tools toolbar
Insert PI
Select parcel line
Identify location of added PI
Delete PI
Select parcel line

PI nearest to cursor will highlight left-click
Delete Sub-entity
Delete lines
Opens area, could destroy parcels
Parcel Union
Home...Create Design...Parcel...Parcel Creation Tools
Toolbar button just right of center
First select Destination parcel
Second select the parcel to dissolve into the destination
You may need to Delete Sub-entities to clean up leftover boundaries
Area Label
Line and Curve Labels

Single or multiple line/curve labels
Tag labels
140.030 WisDOT standards - parcels Section updated: 7/1/2010

7:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-030-001.mp4
140.030.001 Civil 3D Sites
A site is a container for related data.

Parcels can only be created in sites.
There can be multiple sites in one file or project.
Sites Contain
Name
Description
Alignment (can exist outside of a site)
Feature Lines
Parcels
Parcels and alignments within the same site will affect each other.
No two parcels can occupy the same space, separate them by site or file.
Existing parcels
Proposed parcels
Easement parcels
Alignments created in a site with parcels will automatically split the parcels.
Proposed right-of-way lines in the proposed parcels site
Civil 3D Parcel Properties
Parcel Properties Include:

Name (Limited manual control)
Description
Style
Labels
Area
Segments
User Defined Properties
Civil 3D Parcel User Defined Properties
Set Manually
Parcel Number (Name and Schedule of Lands & Interests SLI)
Parcel Address

Parcel Tax ID
WisDOT Specific
Owners Name (SLI)
Volume/Page/Document Number
Utility Name
Utility Volume/Page/Document Number
Existing Right-of-way (SLI)
Interest Required (SLI)
Custom macro to copy
Civil 3D Ultimate Right-of-way
In order to display right-of-way on some sheets (such as cross sections), an ultimate right-of-way alignment must
be created and shared.
The ultimate right-of-way will follow existing and proposed right-of-way lines to make a consecutive line that
can be projected on sheets.
Not in a Site
Alignment(s) data shortcut
Project folder (\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\RW)

Standard Names (FDM 15-5-3)
Rwex.DWG
Rwpl.DWG
Rwpr.DWG
Others
Rwgis.DWG (imported GIS data)
Rwsec.DWG (section lines)
WisDOT Standards
Template WisDOT12.DWT (\Templates\USWI)

Object Styles
Label Styles
Command settings
Layers and Symbology
Site naming - name them what they are:

ROW
Easements
Parcels (automatic) parcel number
Alignments
RWLR# - Right-of-way, left or right, number = RWL4
URWLR# - Ultimate ROW, left or right, number = URWL2
Parcels Need to Know!!!

Sites! No two parcels can occupy the same space and alignments will affect parcels!
Parcels
Must be closed areas or they will not act as a parcel
Parcel areas that over lap will create a third parcel
Select parcels by the area label, the default display is parcel number
Parcels cannot be graphically split and count as one (properties split by highway)

140.040 Exercise - Create existing base plat Section updated: 3/19/2013

9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-001.mp4
140.040.001 Begin the Existing Base Plat File
Start a file with the wisdot12.dwt template file.
Optional: Create a shortcut in the open dialog box by dragging the Project folder into the left blue shortcut ar.
Save the new file in the projects RW folder as 81100024-ExistBasePlat.dwg
Connect to the Project

Set the Working Folder
Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Propsector tab.
Browse to where the project folder is stored, and select the c3d folder.
Hint: This is two folders above the Projects _Shortcuts folder.

Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder
Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Prospector tab.
Choose Set Data Shortcuts Project Folder.
Select the Project folders number.
Xref Base Data Files

Attach the Base Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Base Data folder Mapping folder Orig folder.
Select the Base Map.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0
Zoom Extents to see the file location
Attach the Section Information file
Go to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Base Data folder Survey folder
Select the Section Information.dwg
Set the Scale to 1
Attach the Data Reference of the Existing ROW Reference Alignments

In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Under Data Shortcuts, Expand Alignments, and Expand Centerline Alignmetns
Right-click on STH64-ExistingROWRefLine and choose Create Reference.
Accept the defaults unless you have a preference of label set assignment.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignmetns, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on CTH T-ExistROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
To prevent accidental updates to the Base Plat File, Promote the data shortcuts into this file
Select the alignment in the file.
From the green context ribbon, Modify panel, choose Promote Data Reference
An alternative method is to select the name of the alignment in the toolspace Prospector tab, right-click
and choose Promote.
Open the Titles and Other Legal Documents

In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder rw plans 6424 - rwplat
Open the rwplat.pdf file.
In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder titles folder.
Open the title pdf files.
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-002.mp4
140.040.002 Drawing the ROW Polylines
Turning Off the XREF Fading

Insert tab of the ribbon Reference panel pull-down menu toggle off the XREF Fading.
Set the Layer for the ROW Polylines

Home tab of the ribbon Layers panel upper left icon is Layer Property Manager.
In the left column of the Layer Property Manager, select the Right of Way layer filter.
Scroll though the layers in the right window to find the E_RW_Existing layer.
AutoCAD Editing Commands

Offset the Alignment to the ROW Width
Check the title documents and the rwplat document PDFs to find the ROW distances in the project area.
Start the Offset command
Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Offset.
Enter 33 for the ROW distance.
Select the ROW Ref Alignment.
Click to the side of the offset.
Repeat this for the appropriate offsets on each side.
Selection Cycling
Turn in the Selection Cycling option at the right end of the status buttons.
Hover the cursor pick-box over the alignment. A blue double box glyph will appear to indicate selection cycling is
on. Left click.
A selection cycling box will open with a list of all of the objects in that selection. Click on the alignment option.
Trimming the Offset Lines

Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Trim command.
Select the STH64 alignment as the first cutting edge. Click <ENTER>.
Click on the parts of the lines that need to be removed. Click on the offset lines south of the STH64 alignment.
Repeat this for each offset line that needs to be trimmed.
8:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-003.mp4
140.040.003 Drawing with Station/Offset
Start the Polyline Command

Start the polyline command.
Home tab of the ribbon Draw panel Polyline command.
The polyline command must be active for the next step, the station/offset transparent command to
begin.
Using the Station/Offset Transparent Command

With the polyline command active click on the station/offset command on the transparent commands toolbar.
Select the STH64 alignment. You may need to use the Selection Cycling to accomplish this.
Type in the first station of the polyline to be drawn. This will be 240+00.
Type in the offset for the first station of the polyline. Offsets to the right are positive and left offsets are negative.
This offset is -50.
Enter the station for where the jog begins. This is station 250+00.
Enter the offset for the beginning of the jog. This will be a straight line from the first offset, -50.
Enter the station of the jog again. This is 250+00.

Enter the jogged offset distance of -80.
Further AutoCAD Editing Tools

Fillet Two ROW Lines to Trim or Extend
Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Fillet command.
Make sure the Radius is set to 0.00.
Select the Inside of the first line.
Select the inside of the second line.
Those two lines will be joined together at their common point, as a single polyline.
Repeat this for each corner that you need to extend/trim and that you want to paste together into a continuous
polyline.
Remove All Non-ROW Linework and References

Detach the XREFS
Insert tab of the ribbon Reference panel Options arrow (lower right corner).
Right-click on the XREFd drawings and choose Detach. Repeat this for each XREFd drawing.
Delete the Alignments

Select on the alignments and erase, or delete them.
Final Cleanup
With the references gone review all of the linework and trim/fillet where appropriate.
140.050 Exercise - Create proposed r/w geometry Section updated: 3/19/2013

5:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-000.mp4
140.050.000 Updated Template File Added
Template wisdot12-plat.dwg
Located in USWI folder with other original templates.
Updates in the template

Point Creation Updates
Point Style Updates
Point Labe Style updates
Using the New Template

Start a new file with the template
In the Menu Browser (big A button) choose New.
This allows you to choose a template rather than using a default.
In the dialog open the USWI folder, select on the wisdot12-plat.dwt.
To use the updated points

In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, choose the Points flyout menu.
Choose the Point Creation Tools.
In the Point Creation toolbar click the chevron (arrow icon) on the far right of this toolbar.
Expand Default Styles
Select the default styles field, click the ellipsis button.
In the dialog click the list drop down and choose the style of point that is appropriate. There are many new
and more appropriate point styles in this list for plat production workflow.
You can leave the chevron open while you use the point creation toolbar. You can also close the chevron and
still use the point creation tools.
Special Point Styles and Label Styles

The styles with No Plot suffix will appear in the drawing file, but not appear in your plots.

Point styles that are not appropriate for plat development have been removed from this template.
Point styles that are appropriate for plat development have been added to this template. For example, point
styles P MARK Control Point, P MARK GPS Monument, P MARK NGS Monument, etc.
4:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-001.mp4
140.050.001 Workflow outline
Creating Proposed ROW Alignments

Begin the Proposed ROW Alignments file
Commands
XREF
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel)
Attach the Data Reference of the Surface
Rwplat pdf
Title pdfs
Create Proposed ROW alignments
Commands/Tools
Alignment Creation tools
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Transparent Command - Station Offset
Endpoint and nearest object snaps
Creating Ultimate ROW Alignments

Begin the Ultimate ROW Alignments file
Create Ultimate ROW alignments
Commands/Tools
End point Object Snaps
Create TLE Alignment
Commands/Tools
Create Data Shortcuts of Alignments
Commands/Tools
Creating Takings Parcels

Begin the Takings Parcels file

Commands
XREF
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel)
Create the Takings Parcels by Object
Commands/Tools
BPOLY
Create a Site
Creating the Takings Parcels by Parcel Creation Tools
Commands/Tools
Parcel Layout Tools Toolbar
Fixed Line (Two points)
Create the TLE Parcel by Object
Commands/Tools
BPOLY
Editing Parcel Label Styles
Editing Parcel User Defined Properties
Export Parcel Data to Excel for table creation
Commands/Tools
WisDOT Parcel Extract Macro
Create Table in Excel to bring into Civil 3D
Commands/Tools
Paste Special
SC (scale)
Creating Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment

Continue with the Takings Parcels file
Create Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment
Commands/Tools
Endpoint and nearest object snaps
Create Points along the Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment
Commands/Tools
Create Points Toolbar
Create Manual Points
Create Points along the TLE Alignment
Commands/Tools
Create Point for the Traverse project start point
Commands/Tools
Create Data Shortcuts of Traverse Alignment
8:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-002.mp4
140.050.002 Begin the Proposed ROW Alignments file

Optional: Create a shortcut in the open dialog box by dragging the Project folder into the left blue shortcut area.
Save the new file in the projects RW folder as 81100024-ProposedROWAlignments.dwg



Key in XREF in the command line, click attach icon on top right of external reference palette
Browse to the Projects RW folder.
Select the 81100024-ExistROWRefLines.dwg
Set the Scale to 1
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel) to see the file location
Attach the Base Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon
Select the 81100024-ExistBasePlat.dwg
Set the Scale to 1

In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Under Data Shortcuts, Expand Surfaces
Right-click on RoadwayModel-Datum and choose Create Reference.
Change the Style to Slope Intercept.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignments, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on STH64-ProposedROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Hint: Toggle off show and hide Lineweight to seethe lines as all same thickness/weight
Save the file.
20:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-003.mp4
140.050.003 Continue with Proposed ROW Alignments file
Continuing from the previous exercise with the 81100024-ProposedROWAlignment.dwg file

In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder rw plans 6424 - rwplat
Open the rwplat.pdf file.
In a Windows Explore window browse to the project folder, Base Data Other folder titles folder.
Open the title pdf files.
Create Proposed ROW Alignment Southwest

Home tab of the ribbon Create Design panel Alignment drop down Alignment Creation Tools
Create Alignment Layout dialog opens.
Name Proposed ROW RT Southwest.
Type - Miscellaneous.

Site None
Alignment Style RW Proposed
Alignment Layer P_RW-Base
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Start the Transparent Command Station Offset
Hint: If you dont see the Transparent Command Toolbar go to the View Tab
Toolbars dropdown Civil fly out Check Transparent Commands
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 260+00 offset to Existing ROW line Enter station
262+00 offset 75 station 264+50 offset 75 hit escape once to get out of the Transparent
command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command Select the
Tangent Tangent (No Curves) - Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select
CTH T for the alignment Turn object snaps on and select endpoint snap to the endpoint
where we left of in the last command snap that point a second time for the offset enter station
98+00 select nearest to Existing ROW line.
Create Proposed ROW Alignment Northwest

Name Proposed ROW LT Northwest.
Site None
Click Ok
262+00 offset (-100) station 264+00 offset (-100) hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command
Select the Tangent Tangent (No Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue,
Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select CTH T for the alignment - enter
station 102+25 select nearest to Existing ROW line for the offset.
Create Proposed ROW Alignment Northeast

Name Proposed ROW LT Northeast.
Site None
Click Ok
101+50 offset 40 hit escape once to get out of the Transparent command and escape a
second time to get out of the draw tangent command Select the Tangent Tangent (No
Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue, Select Station Offset Transparent
Command again and select STH 64 for the alignment - enter station 266+70 select nearest to
Existing ROW line for the offset.
Create Proposed ROW Alignment Southeast

Name Proposed ROW RT Southeast.
Site None
Click Ok
268+00 offset 90 Enter station 266+80 offset 90 - hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and escape a second time to get out of the draw tangent command
Select the Tangent Tangent (No Curves) Select the endpoint of the alignment to continue,
Select Station Offset Transparent Command again and select CTH T for the alignment - enter
station 98+00 select nearest to Existing ROW line for the offset.
7:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-004.mp4
140.050.004 Begin the Ultimate ROW Alignments file
Continue with the ProposedROWAlignments.dwg from the previous exercise.
Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Southwest

Name Ultimate ROW RT Southwest.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Click Ok
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the
Proposed ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the
existing ROW linework to the end.
Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Northwest

Name Ultimate ROW LT Northwest.
Site None
Click Ok


Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the Proposed
ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the existing ROW
linework to the end.
Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Northeast

Name Ultimate ROW LT Northeast.
Site None
Click Ok
Create Ultimate ROW Alignment Southeast

Name Ultimate ROW RT Southeast.
Site None
Click Ok
Save your drawing.

Name TLE 1.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Temp Limited Easement
Click Ok
Select STH 64 Alignment Enter Station 262+50 offset to 75 Enter station 262+50 offset
125 station 263+00 offset 125 station 263+00 offset 75 hit escape once to get out of the
Transparent command and select the endpoint to close the alignment

Toolspace Prospector Tab Data Shortcuts Rt. Click Select Create Data Shortcuts
Create Create Data Shortcuts Dialog opens.
Check all alignments that apply.
13:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-005.mp4
140.050.005 Begin the Takings Parcels file
Save the new file in the projects RW folder as 81100024-ProposedROWAlignments.dwg


Attach the Base Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Select the 81100024-ExistROWRefLines.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Attachment
Set the Scale to 1

Right-click on RoadwayModel-Datum and choose Create Reference.
Change the Style to Slope Intercept.
Hint: Toggle off show and hide Lineweight to seethe lines as all same thickness/weight
21:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-006.mp4
140.050.006 Continue with the Takings Parcels file
Open or continue with 81100024-TakingsParcels.dwg
Creating the Takings Parcels by Object

Create a parcel by object by first creating a polyline for the boundary of the parcel.
Key in the BPOLY command, Boundary Creation dialog box opens, Uncheck Island Detection, Click Pick
Points Icon, Click inside the Proposed ROW RT Northwest Alignment and Exist Base Plat line for the
Northwest side of the Intersection, click enter.
Go to the home tab of the ribbon, Create Design panel, Parcel dropdown, select Create Parcel from
objects, Select polyline, click enter, Create Parcels From Objects dialog box opens,
Select TakingsParcels for the site
Change Parcel Style to RW Property Fee S45
Change Area Label Style to Parcel Number
Check Erase Existing Entities, click ok
Creating the Takings Parcels by Parcel Creation Tools

Go to the Home tab of the ribbon, Create design panel, Parcel dropdown, Parcel Creation Tools.
Parcel Layout Tools toolbar opens, Click Create Parcel Icon, Create Parcels- Layout dialog box opens
Change Site to TakingsParcels
Click Ok
Select Fixed Line (Two points), with endpoint object snaps on trace parcel boundary, click
escape
to end the parcel creation tool.
Go to the Home tab of the ribbon, Create design panel, Parcel dropdown, Parcel Creation Tools
Click Ok
escape
Go to the Home tab of the ribbon, Create design panel, Parcel dropdown, Parcel Creation Tools.
Click Ok
escape
Creating the TLE Parcel by Object

Create a parcel by object by first creating a polyline for the boundary of the parcel.
Key in the BPOLY command, Boundary Creation dialog box opens, Uncheck detect Islands, Click Pick
Points Icon, Click inside the TLE1 Alignment and Proposed ROW RT Southwest Alignment line for the
Southwest side of the Intersection, click enter.
Go to the home tab of the ribbon, Create Design panel, Parcel dropdown, select Create Parcel from
objects, Select polyline, click enter, Create Parcels From Objects dialog box opens,
Select TakingsParcels for the site
Change Parcel Style to RW TLE Proposed
Change Area Label Style to Parcel Number
Check Erase Existing Entities, click ok
Save the File.
Editing Parcel Label Styles

Select Parcel Label Right Click select parcel properties Parcel Properties dialog box opens
Go to the Composition tab, change Area selection label style to Owner ID Number, repeat for all Parcels.
Editing Parcel User Defined Properties

Select Parcel Label Right Click select parcel properties Parcel Properties dialog box opens
Go to the User Defined Properties tab, change Owner ID Number to a 2 for the TLE 1 Parcel, click apply,
click ok.
Save the file.

Export Parcel Data

Go to Toolspace Toolbox tab Expand WisDOT Toolbox Expand WisDOT Macros Right click Parcel
Extract
Click execute - Manage Parcel Properties Toolbar opens
Check all the boxes Select the Click this button to export the selected rows to a specified file Icon
Save file as 81100024-ParcelInfoTable.csv.
Create Table in Excel to bring into Civil 3D

Open 81100024-ParcelInfoTable.csv and Schedule of L&I Template.xslx
Copy Parcel Information from 81100024-ParcelInfoTable.csv to Schedule of L&I Template.xslx
Format date in the Schedule of L&I Template.xslx file
Save as 81100024-ParcelInfoTable.xslx
Copy Formatted table from 81100024-ParcelInfoTable.xslx
Open 81100024-TakingsParcels.dwg
Paste copied table into 81100024-TakingsParcels.dwg using paste special command
Home tab of the ribbon Clipboard Panel Paste dropdown paste special
Paste special dialog opens Select Paste Select As: Microsoft Excel Worksheet Click ok
Insert Table Type SC for scale Select bottom corner of inserted table the type in scale
number that matches the current annotation scale.
Save the file.
9:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-050-007.mp4
140.050.007 Continue with the Takings Parcels file
Open or continue with 81100024-TakingsParcels.dwg.
Create Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment

Name ProposedROWTraverse
Site None
Alignment Style RW Traverse
Click Ok
Start at the PI 259+88.04 of STH 64 Alignment- Continue by selecting first point of
ProposedROW LT Northwest, picking each point, crossing CTH T continue picking points from
ProposedROW LT Northeast, picking each point, cross STH 64 continue picking points from
ProposedROW RT Southeast, picking each point, cross CTH T continue picking points from
ProposedROW RT Southwest to the end of the alignment then end back at the PI 259+88.04.
Save the File.
Create Points for Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment

From the Home tab of the ribbon Create Ground Data Panel Points dropdown Points Creation Tools
Create Points dialog box opens click chevron to expand the point creation dialog box
Expand Default Styles set Point style to P RW Circle Filled set Point Label Style to Point Name 45
Expand Default Name Format set Point Name Template to PRW set starting number to 1
Expand Points Creation set Prompt for Point Names to Automatic
Click Chevron to close expanded dialog box
Select manual Point Creation Icon pick all vertex points from ProposedROW Traverse Alignment
except
for the PI Start Point

Create Points along TLE Alignment

Expand Default Name Format set Point Name Template to TLE set starting number to 1
Select manual Point Creation Icon pick all vertex points from TLE Alignment
Create Point for the Traverse project start point

Expand Default Name Format set Point Name Template to TRAV set starting number to 1
Select manual Point Creation Icon pick PI 259+88.04
Close Create Points Toolbar
Save the file.
Create Data Shortcuts of Proposed ROW Traverse Alignment

Toolspace Prospector Tab Data Shortcuts Rt. Click Select Create Data Shortcuts
Create Create Data Shortcuts Dialog opens.
Check ProposedROWTraverse alignment click ok.
Save the file.
140.060 Exercise - Create plat sheet Section updated: 3/19/2013

14:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-060-001.mp4
140.060.001 Connect Referenced Data
Create a Shortcut to the Project in the Open Dialog Box

Click the Open Command.
At the top of the dialog open the Look In drop-down menu.
Browse to the location of the project folder 12345678. For this exercise it is in the WisDOT Design C3D
folder.
Click and drag the folder for the project 12345678 into the left shortcut bar in the Open Dialog.
Click on the newly made shortcut.
Expand the RW folder.
Open the Takings Parcels.dwg
Connect to the Project Data Shortcuts

In the Toolspace right-click on the Data Shortcuts choose Set Working Folder.
Set Working Folder to C:\WisDOT Design C3D folder (2 folders above the projects _Shortcuts folder).
In the Toolspace right-click on the Data Shortcuts choose Set Data Shortcut Project Folder.
Select the Project folder 12345678. It should have a green check mark next to it when properly selected.
Create Alignment References

Check to see if the alignments are already referenced into this file.
Scroll the Toolspace up into the drawing area.

Expand Alignments Centerline Alignments.

If the alignments STH 64 PropROWRefLine and CTH T PropROWRefLine are listed they are already
referenced.
If the alignments are not already referenced, create the data shortcut references.
In the Toolspace expand the data shortcuts, alignments
Right-click on STH 64 PropROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Accept the defaults and choose OK.
Right-click on CTH T PropROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Promote Alignment References

In the Toolspace, scroll up to the drawing area.
Expand Alignments Centerline Alignments
If there is a data shortcut emblem next to the alignments do the following
Right-click on the alignment name
Choose Promote
Repeat for the other alignment.
Plan Production Sheet Creation

Create View Frame(s)
Output tab of the ribbon Create View Frames
Set the alignment to STH 64 PropROWRefLine
Select Automatic Range
Switch to Plan Only type.
Click on the template path file ellipsis button.
Select the template file ellipsis button
In USWI Planproduction - Plats folder
1 in 200 feet option. Select the Wisdot12tpp34.dwt template.
View Frame Group name default
Change the View Frame Name to 0401<next counter>
Click the template button to check the counter number is set to 1.
Turn off match lines for this example.
Create View Frames button to place the frame.
Create Sheets
In the Output ribbon select the Create Sheets button.
Select the proper View Frame Group.
Select number of layouts per new drawing, and set this to 1.
Change the layout name to 0401<next counter>.
Check the layout name template and check the name counter is set to 1.
In the Sheet Set Option you MUST select Add to Existing Sheet Set.
Select the ellipsis to choose the sheet set.
Browse to the project shortcut then to the Sheets Plan folder planproduction.dst.
Change the sheet location to the RW folder of the project.
The Sheet File name needs to be changed to 0401 and the suffix to _rp.
Click Create Sheets. Click OK to save the file during this process.
Adjust the View Frame

You can shift the name with the diamond grip point.
You can rotate the frame with the green grip point.
You can shift the frame in any direction with the square grip point.
Plotting Options
Single Sheet Plotting
The plat is NOT ready for printing yet. There are labels that need to be placed.
If you need to plot this single sheet, go to the Quick Access Toolbar and choose the plot icon.
Alternatively, you can right lick on the layout tab and choose Plot.
Alternatively, you can go into the Sheet Set Manager (type SSM at the command line) and right-click on the name
of the single layout tab and choose Publish to PDF.
Multiple Sheet or Batch Publishing

The plat is NOT ready for printing yet. There are labels that need to be placed
If you need to plot this as a group of pages you can plot multiple pages (known as Publish) from the Sheet Set
Manager.
You can right-click on the individual layout name and choose plot.
You can right-click on the subset header to plot all of the drawings under that subset, but not all of the
drawings in the project.
You can right-click on the project name to plot the entire project.
In all of these cases choose Publish - Publish to PDF from the context menu.
Close this file. The frame is in place for helping to place labels inside the plotable area of this page.
140.070 Exercise - Dressing up plat sheets Section updated: 3/19/2013

7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-001.mp4
140.070.001 Connect Referenced Data
Create a Shortcut to the Project in the Open Dialog Box

Click the Open Command.
At the top of the dialog open the Look In drop-down menu.
Browse to the location of the project folder 12345678. For this exercise it is in the WisDOT Design C3D
folder.
Click and drag the folder for the project 12345678 into the left shortcut bar in the Open Dialog.
Click on the newly made shortcut.
Expand the RW folder.
Open the Takings Parcels.dwg
Connect to the Project Data Shortcuts

In the Toolspace right-click on the Data Shortcuts. Choose Set Working Folder.
Set Working Folder to C:\WisDOT Design C3D folder (2 folders above the projects _Shortcuts folder).
In the Toolspace right-click on the Data Shortcuts. Choose Set Data Shortcut Project Folder.
Select the Project folder 12345678. It should have a green check mark next to it when properly selected.
Create Alignment References

Check to see if the alignments are already referenced into this file.
Scroll the Toolspace up into the drawing area.
Expand Alignments Centerline Alignments.
If the alignments STH 64 PropROWRefLine and CTH T PropROWRefLine are listed they are already
referenced.
If the alignments are not already referenced, create the data shortcut references.
In the Toolspace expand the data shortcuts, alignments
Right-click on STH 64 Proposed ROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Right-click on CTH T Proposed ROWRefLine and choose Create Reference
Promote Alignment References

In the Toolspace, scroll up to the drawing area.
Expand Alignments Centerline Alignments

If there is a data shortcut emblem next to the alignments do the following

Right-click on the alignment name
Choose Promote
Repeat for the other alignment.
Change Point Label Styles
Change the Point Label Styles Through the All Points Point Group
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Point Group, right-click _All Points. Choose Properties
Point Label Style to PRW Point Number 140 90 Degrees.
In the Toolspace, Prospector, Point Groups, right-click on _All Points and choose Edit Points
In the Panorama Window left click in one of the point number fields.
Click <CTRL> A
Scroll over to Point Label Style columns
Right-click on the column header and choose Edit.
Select <NONE> as the Label style
Set TLE Point Labels

Select the points around the TLE parcel
Right-click and choose Edit Points
Highlight all of the points in the Panorama. Right click on the Point Label Style header. Choose Edit.
Select the TLE Point Number 140 90 Degrees
10:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-002.mp4
140.070.002 Adding a Line to the Point Label Style
Adding a Line to the PRW Point Label Style

Toolspace Settings tab - Expand Point expand Label Styles
Right-click on PRW Point number 140 90 Degree style and choose Edit.
Layout tab, Add Component. Choose Line
Visibility set to True
Anchor set to <Feature>
Use Start Point Anchor set to True
Start Anchor Point to Middle Center
Use End Point Anchor Point set to PRW Point Name
End Point Anchor Point to Middle Left
Dragged State Tab
Display option, set to As Composed.
Adding a Line to the TLE Point Label Style

Toolspace Settings tab - Expand Point expand Label Styles
Right-click on TLE Point number 140 90 Degree style and choose Edit.
Layout tab, Add Component. Choose Line
Visibility set to True
Anchor set to <Feature>
Use Start Point Anchor set to True
Start Anchor Point to Middle Center
Use End Point Anchor Point set to PRW Point Name
End Point Anchor Point to Middle Left
Dragged State Tab
Display option, set to As Composed.
Placing Station Offset Labels From Alignment to Traverse Labels

Place the Station Offset Labels
Annotate tab of the ribbon Add Labels Alignment Add Alignment Labels
Select Single Segment
Station Offset Fixed Point

Set label style to RW Sta Offset 120 90
Click ADD.
Select the alignment
Turn on the End Point snap.
Click to place a label at each traverse vertex point where labels that stand straight up should be placed.
In the Add Alignment Labels dialog select the style RW Sta Offset 120 135. Click ADD.
Repeat the steps to place the appropriate labels.
Repeat this for the label style of RW Sta Offset 120 270, and other angles as appropriate.
Rotate Point Labels to Match Station Offset Label Angles

Left click on the point label
Hover (do not click on) the cursor over the point grip to access the tooltip. Select Rotate Label.
Rotate the label to match the angle of the Station Offset label.
Repeat for each label.
11:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-003.mp4
140.070.003 Adjusting Labels
Position the Alignment Geometry Labels

Click on the alignment geometry label.
Select on the square grip point to drag the label away from the label layout location
Edit the Alignment Geometry Label

Select the alignment, or the alignment label..
Right-click and choose edit Alignment Labels.
Find the Geometry Label, select on the Standard style label tag.
Click the second button to select Create a Child Style
Name the new style Standard 0 Rotation
In the Dragged State tab change Display from As Composed to Stacked.
Change the text height to .06.
Fix the Drawing Scale to What the Plat Page to the Plotting Scale
Set the Drawing Scale to Analyze Label Placement

In the lower right select on the drawing scale
Set the scale to 1 = 200
Rotate the Labels to fit the New Scale

Select on the Station Offset label
Hover over grip point to select Rotate the Label.
Rotate the label to an appropriate location.
Select the Point Label style
Hover over the grip point to select Rotate the Label.
Rotate the label to an appropriate location.
Create Traverse Labels

Annotate tab of the ribbon Add Labels Alignment Add Alignment Labels
Single Segment, Bearing Over Distance 120.
Click Add to place the labels.
Turn on the Selection Cycling to make selecting the overlapping lines easier.
In the status bar click on the Selection Cycling to toggle on the option.
When selecting the alignment to label then select the Alignment from the Selection Cycling menu
Click on the alignment segment where the label could place.

Adjust the Traverse Label Placement

Right-click Options
If you need to reverse the label (example: south and west to north and east)
Left click on the label
Right click, choose Reverse Label
If you need to flip the label over the line (example: from below the line to above the line)
Left lick on the label
Right click, choose Flip Label
Dragging Options
To move the label along the line
Select the diamond grip point and slide the label along the line segment
To drag the label from the line
Select the square grip point and drag it to a more appropriate location.
You may need to change the dragged style to one that supports a leader line
Right click Label Properties
Line Label Styles
Change the style to RW Bearing Distance Horizontal with Leader
Resizing Text
To resize the label to better fit a congested area:
Right-click and choose Label Properties
Choose Label Style Options
Select Label RW Distance Over Bearing 100
Dragging Point Labels

Select the square grip point and drag it away from the layout position.
The dragged state leaves a slight jog in the leader line.
The Station Offset label will also need to be dragged and rotated to meet the new leader location.
Left-click on the station offset label
Choose the square grip point to drag the label to the proper location.
Hover over the grip point to choose rotate.
Rotate the label to the appropriate location.
4:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-004.mp4
140.070.004 Labeling the TLE Parcel
Segment Labels for the TLE Parcel Lines

Annotate Tab, Add Labels, Alignment, Add Alignment Labels
Choose Single Segment Type, Bearing over distance 100 style.
Select on the TLE parcel lines to place the line labels.
Create a table for the line label tags

Annotate Ribbon, Add Table, Add Line
Choose the Traverse Table 120 style
Click the Select from Screen button to select individual tag buttons.
Select the labels in the order the tags should be created, west edge, south edge and east edge labels.
Click a point to place the Line Table.
Sorting by column
Select on the table, right-click and choose Edit Table Style

Data Properties tab.
Turn on Sort Data By, Column 1 (or whichever is appropriate).
Positioning TLE Labels

Select on the line label tags and grip edit drag them outside the TLE parcel.
Select on the parcel area label, right-click Parcel Properties.
Composition tab, set the label style to _No Labels.
12:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-005.mp4
140.070.005 Placing Section Corner Data
XREF Takings Parcels Into Section Information Drawing

Quick Access Toolbar, Open
Project Folder, Base Data folder, Survey Folder, Section Information drawing file
Insert tab, Reference panel, Attach.
Browse to project folder, RW, Takings Parcels.dwg.
Attachment type is Overlay due to probable circular referencing.
If XREF fading is turned on, you can turn it off in the Insert tab, Reference panel pull-down. Click the end
button to turn off the fading.
Section Corner Data
Placing the Section Corner Block

Home tab, Palettes panel, Tool Palettes panel.
Click on Label Section Corner block in tool palette.
S to Scale insertion block.
Type .5 for half scale.
Edit Attribute dialog, enter Town/Range data.
Attributes are 27, 34, 26, 35 for upper right, lower right, upper left, lower left.
Town is 31, Range is 17, N,W.
Northing/Easting for Section Corner

Annotate tab, Add Labels, Notes, N E style
Click Add and snap to actual section corner location.
Select on the N E label and grip drag the label into the frame area below the Section Corner block.
Left click on the Note label, right-click Toggle Leader off.
Add Marker Information to Label

Select on the N E Note label.
Right-click and choose Edit Label Text.
Add space to the top of the label.
Add SEC801 for the corner point number.
Add a row of text Railroad Spike.
Repeat these steps for each section corner related to the project area.
8:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-006.mp4
140.070.006 Section Line Labeling
Add Bearing label for Section Lines

Annotate tab of the ribbon, Labels and Tables panel, Add Labels.
Add Line and Curve labels, Single Segment, Bearing style.
Click on the section line to place the label.
Update label text

Select the label, right-click and choose Edit Label Text.

Select the text again to begin the editor.
Highlight the right-side text.
Under the properties set the precision to 1 second.
Set the Format to the DDMMSS format.
Click the arrow to update your label.
Left click at end of note, <space>, add General Segment Length property. Click the arrow to pace this at the end.
At the front of the label type SECTION LINE=.
Repeat for the other side of the section line.
Markers that represent section corners
Place the Markers

Home tab, Tool Palette panel, Tool Palette icon.
In tool palette select the SEC block.
Shift Right-click to select the Nearest temp OSNAP.
Place marker on section line near the edge of the view frame.
Place a Leader Line to the Section Information

Begin the polyline command.
Draw the polyline from the SEC block and draw to the Section Corner block and Marker information.
Draw a polyline that indicates a break in the section line.
Repeat for the other side of the section line.
8:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-007.mp4
140.070.007 Create a Traverse Tie-in Label
Distance from Section Corner to Traverse Tie-in

Start the Line command. Draw a line from the section corner to the traverse tie-in point.
In the Annotate tab, Add Labels, Line and Curve label, select the Bearing style.
Select on the line to place the Bearing label.
Select the label, right-click and choose Flip Label to put the label below the line.
Use the diamond grip point to slide the line label along the line to an appropriate location.
Draw a Leader Between the Section Corner and the Traverse Tie-in Point.
Start the polyline command.
Draw a polyline from the representative section corner, down below the section line, toward the traverse tie-in,
then angled back to end at the traverse tie-in point.
Edit the Line Label Text

Select the line label text, right-click and choose Edit Label Text.
Set the precision to 1 second, the format to the compact DDMMSS format.
Add the General Segment Length to the end of the label.
Explode the text so that it can be separate from the line.
Select the line and delete the line.
Use the Move command to position the text on the leader polyline.
Use the Break command to open a space for the text in the polyline.
Move the Section Labels into the Sheet Frame
Change the size of the Section Label text.

Select the section text and move it into the sheet frame.
Double-click the section text highlight the text.
In the green context ribbon select the 140 text style to assign it to the selected text.
Repeat this process for the other three sections text.

Detach the XREF

Detach the Takings Parcels.dwg XREF.
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, click the Settings arrow in the lower right.
In the XREF manager right-click the Takings Parcels attachment, choose Detach,
7:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-008.mp4
140.070.008 Return to Takings Parcels and Cleanup Labels
XREF in Updated Section Drawing

Open the Taking Parcels.dwg file
Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach.
Attach the Section Information.dwg
Attachment type is Attach (not Overlay), and Relative Path.
Review Label Placement

Find any labels that are overlapping or crowded and adjust them with the grip edits.
Shift the View Frame. This is not connected to the plat drawing file that is to be plotted. That will have to be
updated separately.
Insert Road Bearing Labels

Annotate tab of the ribbon, Add Labels, Line and Curve type, Bearing style.
Click ADD then select on the centerline of CTH T.
Select on the label right-click and choose Edit Label Text.
Set the precision to 1 second,
Set the more compact DDMMSS format
Repeat these steps for the south half of CTH T
Change the Alignment Geometry Labels to Point of Intersection

<CTRL> select the individual geometry point label
Select the first half of the label. Type PI,
Repeat steps for the other alignment PI points.
Adjust the Plat Printing Page to Match View Frame

At the command line type SSM at the command line.
Double-click on the Plat sheet listed in the Sheet Set.
Click on the XREF and Data Shortcut synch messages to reload and synch the references.
Double-click inside the viewport to make it active.
Next to the Scale chooser click the Lock function to UNLOCK the viewport.
Pan the view over slightly to match what the view frame shows in the Takings Parcels.dwg.
Lock the viewport.
Save and close the plat drawing.
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-009.mp4
140.070.009 Adding More Labels
Place the XY Locations for Alignment PI Points

Annotate tab of the ribbon, Add Labels, Note type label, N E style.
Use OSNAPS (example: Center snap) to ensure the XY Labels are inserted at the actual PI point.
Drag the XY label into an area that it can be read in relation to the original PI point label.
Select the label and right-click and choose Toggle Leader so the leader is turned off.
Repeat for each PI point.

Dimension Measurements of the Right-of-Ways
Dimension Tool Alternative

Annotate tab, Dimension Panel.
Set dimension style to Plat_ConvNoExtl.
Click on the Dimension tool.
<Shift> right-click, Nearest Snap to snap to the middle of one of the road lines.
<Shift> right-click, Perpendicular snap so the dimension will be appropriate.
Select the label text, right-click and choose Properties.
In the Properties, Text value, type in 80 to override the dimensioned distance.
In the Properties, turn off the Dimension Lines.
Pre-Defined Text Alternative

Type <CTRL> and 3 to open the tool palette.
Open the Wis-Right-of-Way tool palette tab.
At the bottom of the tool palette click on the Text Notes.
Draw a text box. Type the measurement text into the text box.
Move the text box into an open area in one side of the road.
Use the Rotate command to rotate the text for the north-south road (CTH T).
Use the Copy command to copy the text in the other sides of the road.
Repeat these steps for the other ROW text that need to be placed.
12:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-010.mp4
140.070.010 Adding Right-of-Way Information
Attach the Existing ROW Drawing

Insert tab of the ribbon, Block panel, Insert Block.
Browse to location of the file that holds the block
Project shortcut folder, RW folder, Existing Parcel file.
XY of 0, Scale of 1, Explode turned on.
Click OK to place the block
Place the Road Names

Annotate tab of the ribbon, Multiline text.
Create a text box in the STH 64 part of the road way.
In the Text Editor blue context ribbon set the text style to 175.
Type STH 64 in the text box.
Copy that text to the other side of STH 64.
Create a text box in the CTH T part of the road way.
Type CTH T in the text box.
Rotate the text to align with CTH T.
Copy the rotated text to the other side of CTH T.
Change the PL Labels to EXISTING ROW

Find the PL labels that inserted with the Existing ROW dwg.
Delete an PL labels that are not needed (example: the PL labels around the intersection offset).
Any PL label that is along the ROW
Select the PL label
Change the text to Exist R/W
Move the labels so they fit along the right-of-way line.
For any PL Label that is inside the ROW.
Select the PL label, drag it along the property line it is tied to.
Select on the PL label, right-click and choose Flip Label so they are on the outside of the parcel lines.

Bring in Utility Blocks

Project shortcut, BaseData folder, Mapping, Orig, BaseMap.dwg
Attachment type, Relative Path type.
Home tab of the ribbon, Layer panel, Layer Properties Manager.
The layer filters on the left, select the XREF filters.
Right-click in the layer names and choose Select All.
Click OFF.
In the Layer Properties Manager, XREF filter, select on the Section Information XREF.
Right-click a layer and Select All.
Turn On.
In the Layer Properties Manager, XREF filter, select on the XREF filter.
In the layer manager search bar type *LEVEL 14* to search for any level 14 layers.
Turn those ON.
In the Layer manager search bar type *LEVEL 12* to search for any level 12 layers.
Turn those layers on.
Recreate Buildings and Utility Poles

Type NCOPY at the command line.
Select on the building lines that are inside the view frame area.
Type ADCENTER at the command line to open the Designcenter.
Browse to Program Data\Autodesk\C3D2012\enu\data\symbols\USWI\etopog12.dwg Blocks
Select on the PPOLE block,
right-click and choose Insert block.
Insertion Point on screen, and scale to .5.
Snap the block to the Center OSNAP, center of the pole.
Copy the PPOLE blocks to the other power pole markers. Use the OSNAPS to center them appropriately.
Open the XREF Manager by typing XREF at the command line.
Detach the BaseMap.dwg.
8:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-011.mp4
140.070.011 Adjust the Parcel Lines
Adjust the Layer Filter to Reveal Parcel Layers

If the Layer that you are looking for is not available there may be a filter that is suppressing it.
Home tab of the ribbon, Layer panel, Layer Properties Manager.
In the Layer Filter and select Right of Way filter (or the All filter will also work).
Open the Layer pull down list
Type P_RW this will begin to filter the layer list by the letters that you type. Use this to easily find the
layer that you want to control.
Select the P_RW_Property Line layer
Draw a Polyline for the Parcel

Draw a polyline that snaps to the west edge, south edge and east edge of the parcel.
Change the Parcel Style to Aid the View

In the Toolspace, Prospector, expand Sites, expand Existing Parcels.
Right-click on Parcels, choose Properties.
Go to the Composition tab.
Site Parcel style set to _No Display.
Change the Individual Parcels to Aid the View

In the Toolspace, Prospector, expand Sites, expand Existing Parcels.
Right-click on Parcel 1. Choose Parcel Properties.
On the Information tab change the Parcel Style to _No Display.
Repeat this for each of the parcels in the Existing Parcels site.
Move Parcel Labels

Turn off the OSNAPS.
Select on the parcel label.
Select the square grip point to drag it to a better position.
Click on the arrowhead grip point.
Drag the arrowhead to a better location.
Adjust other labels so these will fit in the drawing appropriately.
Repeat for each of the parcel labels.
Add Alignment Curve Label and Data

Select on the alignment
In the green context ribbon, select Add Labels.
Choose Single Segment.
Select on the alignment where you want the label to originally be placed.
Click on the alignment curve label.
Grab the label grip point and drag it away from the original location. Place it somewhere in the drawing that has
room. You may need to adjust other labels to accomplish this.
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-070-012.mp4
140.070.012 Utility Labels
Attach the Utilities XREF

Project folder, BaseData folder, Survey folder, Utilities folder.
Select the CTHT Utilities drawing.
Attachment type, and relative path.
Place the labels

Annotate tab of the ribbon, Add Labels, Add Note Labels.
Set the note label style to Utility Parcel Label. Click ADD.
Click the labels at the location where the leader line arrowhead will be located.
Select the Utility Parcel Label. Select the square grip point to drag this to a better location. (If you have room you
do not need to drag this away, and the leader line is not added).
Fix the Leader Line Connection.

Select the leader, right-click and choose Properties (or Label Properties will work as well).
Turn the Leader Tail Visibility to Always Hide.
Click the grip point at the end of the leader line and drag it back to the edge of the circle.
Repeat this for each label. (You can select multiple leaders and make this change all at the same time).
Set the Proper Text in the Label

Select the label, right-click and choose Edit Label Text.
In the right-hand window click to highlight the XX text.
Type 40 to fill the text. Click OK.
Repeat for each label.
Place the Label on the Proper Layer

Select the labels, right-click and choose Properties (or Label Properties will work as well).
Click in the Layers field.
You can scroll to the proper layer, or type P_RW_Text to filter the list of layers for easier selection.
You can select several labels to do this all at once, or one at a time.

140.080 Plat COGO Point Creation - COGO Editor Alternative Section updated: 9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
7:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-001.mp4
140.080.001 COGO Editor Overview
The COGO Editor dialog box

Open the dialog box
Analyze tab > Ground Data panel > Survey icon pull-down
Type COGOEDITOR at command line to open
Entering COGO data for lines and curves
Format of bearing data
Setting the begin and end points
Setting the adjustment
Creating polylines and points
Sideshots
Saving a traverse
Editing using the COGO Editor

Populating the dialog from existing polylines
Populating the dialog from a saved traverse
Tools to navigate in the drawing
Making changes to a traverse or polyline
Editing As You Go
Entering Curve Data
20:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-002.mp4
140.080.002 Create View Frames for Sheets
The first step to creating the COGO Plat sheet is to reference the proper material and create view frames..
Referencing Data
Start a new file
Menu Browser, New, USWI folder, wisdot14-plat.dwt.
Save the file to the project, Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Other.
Open the CSM legal description 20130809070724376.pdf.
Attach an XREF.
Insert tab of ribbon, Reference panel, Attach
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Other, Plymouth.dwg,
Click Open.
Make sure to choose Relative Path, and Overlay
Zoom to the Section 26, the southeastern corner.
Attach the Iron Pipe file
Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Survey folder, 401519_PROP1.dwg.
Enter the Plat Data into the COGO Editor Dialog

Open the COGO Editor dialog
Analyze tab of the ribbon, Ground Data panel, Survey drop down, Coordinate Geometry Editor. (or type
COGOEDITOR at the command line)
Provide the Beginning Point.
Click the Select from Screen button.
Snap to the intersection of the Section Lines.
Do NOT choose the End Point as the same as Begin Point.
Entering Data into the COGO Editor Dialog
In the first Angle/Direction field enter the bearing N 0 0 49 W
In the first Distance field type 95.03.

Tab through the fields to the next Angle/Direction field.

Enter the next description as Angle/Direction S 44 45 31 W, Distance 133.71
In the COGO Editor dialog, top center select on the Create Polyline from Traverse button.
Close the COGO Editor dialog to inspect the polyline.
Reopen the COGO Editor dialog to enter the plat description.
Select from Screen to enter the Point of Beginning. Choose the last traverse point.
Accept the Closing the Traverse Loop.
Enter the Angle/Direction and Distance information as below:
Angle/Direction N 89 58 22 W, Distance 505.05
Angle/Direction N 0 02 07 E, Distance 1321.1
Angle/Direction N 89 57 35 E, Distance 593.00
Angle/Direction S 0 04 06 E, Distance 718.58
Angle/Direction S 0 30 37 E, Distance 508.25
In the COGO Editor dialog, top center select on the Create Polyline from Traverse button.
Edit the Data in the COGO Editor Dialog

Reopen the COGO Editor with In-Place Data for editing
Type COGOED at the command line.
In the COGO Editor dialog, upper left corner select the Load the Traverse from a polyline button.
Select the polyline that represents the plat description.
Edit the New Traverse Data Graphically
Click on line 1 of the traverse. Select the Distance field from this row of data.
In the middle left icon bar, select the Set Locations from Direction or Distance.
Snap to the end point of the first traverse line end.
Snap to the intersection of the first traverse line and the south section line.
Select on the second line of the traverse data, click in the Direction field.
In the middle left icon bar, select the Set Locations from Direction or Distance.
Snap to the intersection of the first traverse line and the section line.
Snap using the Nearest snap somewhere along the south section line to the west of the first
point.
Replace the Polyline with the New Data
In the COGO Editor dialog, top center select on the Create Polyline from Traverse button
Delete the first polyline to clean up the file.
11:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-003.mp4
140.080.003 COGO Editor Edit as you go
Tour of the Navigation and File Tools

These are tools that will make navigation around the traverse easier during the editing process.
Description of the Navigation Tools

In the middle left icon bar click on the Zoom Extents button.
Select a line for data in the dialog. Click on the Zoom to Selection.
In the upper left icon bar select the Save Traverse to File.
Save the .TRVX file to the project Design\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Other.
In the upper left icon bar click Open and open the TRVX file that you just saved.
Accept that this will overwrite the original data.
Edit As You Go
Instead of completing the traverse description then returning to edit it, you can just enter the data mixing the legal
description with graphic selection to follow the legal callouts.
Enter the Data Using the Editing Tools as an Aid

Delete the polylines left from the last exercise.
Open the COGO Editor by typing COGOED at the command line.
Select From Screen the Point of Beginning.
Snap to the Section Corner intersection point.
Do NOT accept the Closing of the traverse.
Click in the Angle/Direction field for line 1.

From the middle left icon bar select the Select the Direction Distance from Drawing.
Snap to the section corner intersection.
Nearest Snap to the east section line.
Type in the distance of 95.03.
Insert Polyline from the icon bar at the top right.
Select in the line 2 Angle/Direction field.
Snap to the end of the first polyline.
Snap to the node of the iron pipe block.
Select in the line 2 Distance field
Snap to the end of the first polyline.
Snap to the node point of the iron pipe block.
Insert Polyline from the icon bar at the top right
Enter Traverse Callouts

Type COGOED at the command line to reopen the COGO Editor dialog.
Place the Point of Beginning at the end of the last line (at the IP block point).
Accept the Closing of the Traverse point.
Select in the Line1 Angle/Direction field. Enter S 44 45 31 W
Select the Distance field and enter 133.71.
Select the Polyline from Traverse button.
Select in the line1 Distance field.
Snap to the first traverse line start point.
Snap to the intersection of the polyline and the section line.
Select in the line2 Angle/Direction field.
From the middle left icon bar select the Select the Direction Distance from Drawing
Snap to the intersection of the polyline and the south section line.
Snap to the Nearest point along the south section line somewhere west of the first snap.
Select in the Line2 Distance field and type 505.05.
Save the traverse to a TRVX file in the BaseData\Other folder.
4:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-004.mp4
140.080.004 Entering Curve Data with the COGO Editor
This exercise beings with the traverse in progress. Open the TRVX file and begin adding data where the original file
left off.
Open the COGO Editor with the Traverse in Progress

Open the POS.PDF document to preview the curve data.
Type COGOED at the command line.
Click Open, and open the Curve In Progress.TRVX
Select on line 3
Change the Line field to Chord Curve
In the Angle/Direction enter N 33 02 22 E
In the Distance field enter 511.73
In the Radius field enter 766.51
Select on line4
Enter the Angle/Direction of S 76 27 38 E
Distance of 12.
Select on line5
Change the Line field to Chord Curve
Enter the Angle/Direction of N 15 40 11 E
Enter the Distance of 183.54
Enter the Radius of 778.51.

140.090 Plat COGO editing Section updated: 9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14
13:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-090-001.mp4
140.090.001 Open Template and Save to Project Location
The first step to creating the COGO Plat is to Open Template, Save to Project Location and Reference data
Referencing Data
Start a new file
Attach an XREF.
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Other, 401519_PROP1.dwg,
Click Open.
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Survey folder, Plymouth.dwg.
Hint: To view external reference as faded or non-faded go to OPTIONS> display tab> fade control -90 is
Non-faded 90 is fully faded.
Enter the Plat Data to POB

Select correct layer
Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, Layer Manager. (or type Layer at the command line)
Select P_RW_MinorLotLine.
Start Line command
Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, Line drop down, Create line by bearing.
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the intersection of the section lines.
Enter quadrant 4, bearing 00.0049, and distance 95.03
Enter quadrant 3, bearing 89.5911, and distance 58.98 to Point of beginning (POB).
Enter the Plat Data

Select E_RW_CSM.
Start Line command
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the POB.
Edit the Data Graphically

Reopen the COGO Editor with In-Place Data for editing
Stretch endpoint of existing line back to section line.
Move rest of traverse to match new end point distance.
Rotate line to match section line with rotate and reference command.
Home tab, modify panel, and select rotate command
Select line to be rotated, type r for reference, select start of line then endpoint of said line, Shift
right click
Select nearest as the object snap override, select section line.
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-090-002.mp4
140.090.002 Open Template and Save to Project Location
The first step to creating the COGO Plat is to Open Template, Save to Project Location and Reference data
Referencing Data
Start a new file
Attach an XREF.
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Other, 401519_PROP1.dwg,
Click Open.
Design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder, Base Data, Survey folder, Plymouth.dwg.
Hint: To view external reference as faded or non-faded go to OPTIONS> display tab> fade control -90 is
Non-faded, 90 is fully faded.
Enter the Plat Data to POB

Select P_RW_MinorLotLine.
Start Line command
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the intersection of the section lines.
Enter quadrant 4, shift rt. click select Nearest, select easterly section line, and distance 95.03
Enter quadrant 3, shift rt. click select Node select pin for bearing, shift rt. click select Node select pin for
distance to Point of beginning (POB).
Enter and edit the Plat Data

Select E_RW_CSM.
Start Line command
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the POB.
Escape out of the current command select previously drawn line grab endpoint vertex and
stretch it back
to the section line.
Start line by bearing command, select the endpoint of previous line
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-090-003.mp4
140.090.003 Continue from Project file in part 2 exercise
Navigate to the project, design folder, c3d, 12345678 folder Base Data, Other, Plat Description.dwg
Open references
Open the POS pos2.pdf for curve reference.
Enter Curve Plat data

Start ARC command
Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, ARC drop down, Create ARC form start, end, angle.
Select endpoint of line to start from
Select transparent command Bearing and Distance
Enter quadrant 1, chord bearing 33.0222 and distance of 511.73, hit escape then enter, key in the angle
39.
Select line from bearing command
Select endpoint of previous arc, select transparent command bearing and distance
Key in quadrant 2, bearing 76.2738, distance 12.
Select ARC from start, end, and angle command select end point of previous line
Select bearing and distance transparent command, key in quadrant 1, bearing 15.4011, distance 183.54,
and hit
escape then enter, key in angle 13.3222.
Module 150 Plan production

This module contains zip files. If you want to do the exercises in the same file as the instructor, do the following:
After extraction, there should be a folder called "150-exercise-files" or similar. The exercise files are located
here.
150.010 WisDOT standards - plan sheets Section updated: 7/1/2010
12:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-010-001.mp4
150.010.001 Civil 3D 2010 Plan Production Wizard
Used with sheets that follow a horizontal alignment.

Plan and Profile or Plan Automatic Sheet Creation:
Cutout File
References
View Frames
Match Lines
Sheet File
Data Reference
Cutout X-Referenced
Layout
Map 3D 2010 Map Book Wizard

Used with sheets placed in a grid.
Cross Section Automatic Sheet Creation:

Sheet File
Data Reference
X-Referenced
Layouts
Civil 3D 2010 Reference Types
Data Reference
A reference to the source file data, not graphics.
Alignments required for cutting plan area
Profiles required for cutting profile area
Surfaces
X-Reference
A reference to the source file graphics.
Corridors
Parcels
Mapping and Topography
Civil 3D 2010 Project Specific

Styles
Displays the design data referenced
Alignments
Profiles
Surface
Profile view settings
Automatically split profiles and data bands
Sheet Set
Sheet border project data
Project folder (\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder)

\Design\ViewFrameGroups
Cutout files
Named by sheet type - ex: plandetail.DWG or planprofile-sth25.DWG
\SheetsPlan
Sheets to be included in plan
Naming defined in FDM 15-5-3 ex: 090101_xs.DWG
\SheetsOther
Sheets for displays, working copies, etc.
Templates (\Templates\USWI\planproduction\sheet type)

Users select sheet template.
Sheet types; plan, planprofile, plats, and xsection.
WisDOT10-sheet type, full size scale
Cross Sections, 20 scale = wisdot10-xs20.DWT
Plan, 50 scale = wisdot-pl50.DWT
Plan & Profile, 100 scale = wisdot10-pp100.DWT
Plat, 200 scale = wisdot10-rw200.DWT
WisDOT10-sheet type, sheet size, rotation, scale

TPP 34 x 22 sheet, 100 scale = wisdot10-tpp34100.DWT
TPP 30 x 22 rotated sheet, 50 scale = wisdot10-tpp30r50.DWG
Naming Sheet Objects (Automatic)

View Frame group name = alignment name - <number>
Alignment STH 25 = STH25 - 1
View Frame name = VF Sheet number

Sheet 05012_pp.DWG = VF 05012
Match Lines = ML Station value (when created, does not update)
Sheet file name = 0501<Incrementing number>_pp.DWG

05013_pp.DWG


Layouts
Sheets are 11 x 17 except for plats
Setup to print/publish to WisDOT PDF
Custom paper size
PDF can be printed any size any printer.
Naming
Plan Production = Sheet type Full(Half) Scale
Map Book (manual) = XS-<letter>-<incrementing number>
Plan Production Need to Know!!!
Always attach the data reference for the vertical profile to follow first, you cant set or change this later. If you
attached the existing ground profile first, your profile view will center on the existing instead of the proposed!
Naming and descriptions, use something that will make sense to any users (including yourself months from now).
All sheet sets are not created equal, always create a new sheet set through the wizards.
150.020 Exercise PR0105 - Create plan & profile sheets w/annotation Section updated: 7/1/2011
2:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-001.mp4
150.020.001 Delete project data and download and unzip this exercise.
Create plan and profile sheets with annotation
Create a sheet set file.

View tab...Palettes ribbon...Sheet Set Manager button.
In Sheet List, right click down arrow, click "New Sheet Set..."
Begin - create a sheet set using an example sheet set. Click Next.
Sheet Set Example
Select a sheet set to use as an example: planproduction. Click Next.
Sheet Set Details

Name of new sheet set: "050201"
Description: "4th Ave Plan & Prof"
Store sheet set data file (.dst) here: "C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan, Click Sheet Set
Properties.
Under Sheet Set Properties...Sheet Set Custom Properties

County: "BARRON"
Highway: "STH 25"
Project No: "1234-56-78"
Title Plan Profile: "FOURTH AVENUE"
Click OK.
Click Next.
Click Finish.
2:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-002.mp4
150.020.002 Toolspace...Data Shortcuts, right click "4th Ave" alignment and click Open Source Drawing.
Annotate alignments and profile by adding annotation to Description.
Right-click on either object and click Properties.

Click on the Information tab and enter the annotation in the Description box.
1:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-003.mp4

150.020.003 Save the file.
Refresh the data shortcuts
Toolspace...Data Shortcuts, right click "4th Ave" alignment and click Remove.
Manage tab...Data Shortcuts ribbon...Create Data Shortcuts button
Create Data Shortcuts dialog

Make sure 4th Ave alignment and profiles are checked. Click OK.
Save new file for Sheets. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan\050201.dwg
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-004.mp4
150.020.004 Set annotation scale to 1 IN:40 FT.
XREF topo data into view frame group file.
Freeze any unnecessary layers (Home tab... Layers ribbon... Freeze button)
2:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-005.mp4
Data shortcut 4thAve alignment and profile into view frame file.
Right-click 4thAve alignment under data shortcuts... Create Reference.

Create Alignment Reference dialog...
Alignment style "ALI Proposed"
Description "F"
Alignment label set "Ticks 100' Major:25' Minor[DESC]".
Right-click 4thAve-EXIST profile under data shortcuts... Create Reference.
Select Profile style "Existing" and Profile label set "_No Labels".
Right-click 4thAve profile under data shortcuts... Create Reference.
On Create Profile Reference dialog...

Profile style "Proposed", Profile label set "Standard [ALI DESC]".
**NOTE** Profile label set "Standard [PROF DESC]" available for ditch and miscellaneous profiles.
View annotations.
Do not add profile view. Profile views for layouts are created automatically and managed by ViewFrameGroup.
1:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-006.mp4
Add alignment PI labels.

Annotate tab...Labels & Tables ribbon...Add Labels button (picture, not text to get full dialog box)
Add Labels dialog

Feature: "Alignment"
Label type: "Multiple Tangent Intersections"
Tangent intersection label style: "PI Station[DESC]".
Click "Add" and select the alignment "4thAve" in model space.
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-007.mp4
150.020.007 Create View Frame Group - Output tab...Plan Production ribbon...Create View Frames button.
Create View Frames - Alignment dialog...
Alignment
Alignment "4thAve"
Station Range "Automatic". Click Next.
Sheets
Sheet Settings "Plan and Profile"
Template "wisdot10-pp40.dwt|PlanProf 1 IN 40 FT". Click Next.

View Frame Group

Name "0502 Fourth Ave"
View Frame Name "VF - 0502<[Next Counter]>". Click Next.
Under Match Lines

Verify values and click Next.
Click "Create View Frames".
1:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-008.mp4
Verify and modify station range of Profile Views to better fit sheets. It is much easier to change view frame location
prior to creating profile views and sheets.
Slide location with diamond grip. Rotate with circle grip.
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-009.mp4
150.020.009 Create Sheets - Output tab...Plan Production ribbon...Create Sheets button.
Create Sheets dialog...

View Frame Group and Layouts
Layout Creation "All layouts in the current drawing"
Layout name "05020<[Next Counter(CP)]>". Click Next.
Sheet Set
Sheet Set "Add to existing sheet set: 0502". Click Next.
Profile Views
Other profile view options "Choose settings:". Click "Profile View Wizard..."
Create Multiple Profile Views- Profile Display Options
Profile 4thAve
Layer "P_Prof-Base"
Style "PROF Proposed"
Labels "Standard [ALI DESC]"
Profile 4thAve-Exist
Layer "P_E_PROF"
Style "PROF Existing"
Labels "_No Labels"
Under Create Multiple Profile Views - Data Bands

Select band set: Elevation Both (Exist Left Proposed Right)
Set band properties: 4thAve - Set Profile1 and Profile2 to 4thAve.
Click Finish.
Click Create Sheets.
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-010.mp4
150.020.010 Results
View Frames automate the creation of sheets, but do not provide a live link to them.
Changing view frame location will probably mean re-creating sheets.
Profile views split at matchline. No overlap. Overlap can be achieved by changing the station range. However,
alignment of plan and profile views may not be exact.
150.040 Exercise PR0205 - Create cross section sheets Section updated: 7/1/2011
3:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-001.mp4
150.040.001 *** WARNING *** This exercise should only be used with Civil 3D 2010. An improved workflow for creating cross
sections can be found at 190.010

Delete project data and download and unzip this exercise.
Create plan and profile sheets with annotation
Create a sheet set file.

View tab...Palettes ribbon...Sheet Set Manager button.
In Sheet List, right click down arrow, click "New Sheet Set..."
Begin - create a sheet set using an example sheet set. Click Next.
Sheet Set Example - Select a sheet set to use as an example: planproduction. Click Next.
Sheet Set Details - Name of new sheet set: "090101", Description: "STH 25", Store sheet set data file
(.dst) here: "C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan, Click Sheet Set Properties.
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-002.mp4
150.040.002 Sheet Set Properties...Sheet Set Custom Properties
County: "BARRON"
Highway: "STH 25"
Project No: "1234-56-78"
Title Cross Section: "STH 25"
Click OK.
Click Next.
Click Finish.
Right-click the sheet set "090101" and click "Close Sheet Set"
Open file C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan\090101_xs.dwg
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-003.mp4
150.040.003 Freeze all unnecessary corridor layers - This will eliminate a lot of unneeded file space in your plot.
Home tab... Layers ribbon... Layers Properties button

Click XREF "Corridor-STH25-4thAve"
Select layers "Corridor-STH25-4thAve|P_XS-Base" and "Corridor-STH25-4thAve|P_XS_Text"
Right-click and click "Invert Selection"
Click Freeze column to freeze for the rest of the layers
Close Layer Properties dialog
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-004.mp4
150.040.004 Create cross section layouts with a Map Book
Open the Map workspace by typing "mapwspace" and press Enter. Select the "On" option for the Task Pane.
Click on the Map Book tab. Click "New". Click "New Map Book".
Create Map Book dialog
Source... Model Space
Book Name:"xs"
Sheet Template... Settings

Choose a Sheet Template:"C:\Documents and Settings\%username%\Local Settings\Application Data
\Autodesk\C3D 2010\enu\Template\USWI\planproduction\xsection\wisdot10-xs20h-20v.dwt"
Choose a Layout: "X-Section 1 IN 20 FT Horiz 20 FT Vert"
Layout Options: Uncheck the two includes. Set the Scale Factor: to 20. This number should always
match the scale of the sheet template.
3:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-005.mp4
150.040.005 Tiling Scheme...By Number
Click "Pick Upper Left >>". Snap and click on the top left corner of the first cross section sheet.
Count the number of rows and columns (sheets).
Columns: 10
Rows: 1
% overlap of each tile: 0
Naming Scheme...Columns and Rows

Rows: Leave the defaults.

Columns: Change the 'Start with' and 'Increment by' both to 1.

Key and Legend: Leave set to "None"
Sheet Set...Create New Subset

Choose Sheet Set file: "C-WisDOT-design-c3d-12345678-SheetsPlan-090101.dst"
Position new subset: Can be left as is or changed to user preference.
Click "Preview Tiles >>"
The dialog will disappear and show dashed lines around the area to become sheets. If you zoom or
pan, the dashed lines will disappear, key-in [r] to refresh them. Press Enter to return to the map book
dialog. If your tile preview was not correct, make the necessary changes in the dialog until it previews
correctly.
Click 'Generate'.
Save the file.
4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-006.mp4
150.040.006 Editing Map Book settings for cross-sections
If there were any errors made when creating the cross-sections or if changes need to be made, access the map
book in the Map Task Pane... Map Book. Right-click the map book "xs". Click "Edit Settings and Rebuild".
Changes can then be made in any of the settings and the layouts and Sheet Set can be regenerated.
150.050 Title sheet Section updated: 4/10/2013

Plan production exercise files
5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-001.mp4
150.050.001 *Note* - This exercise creates a new file in a project folder. There are no connections to this file and the rest of the
project, so an exercise project dataset is not included. Save the file in an existing training project.
Starting a Title Sheet

Start the file with the wisdot12-SHT10.dwt
Menu Browser New
USWI folder PlanProduction folder Title folder
Save the started file to the proper directory

Menu Browser Save As
Project Folder SheetsPlan
Name the title sheet 010101_ti.dwg
14:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-002.mp4
150.050.002 Chippewa.pdf
Attaching a Location Sketch

Attach as an External Reference (XREF)
Most common file types
DWG
DGN
PDF
Need to scale DGNs and PDFs
Hide/Display Model/Layout tabs

Right-click on tabs to hide layout tabs
Right-click on the model
Attaching a PDF in Modelspace

This method will work for PDF, DGN or DWG XREFs
In the Model tab
Choose Insert tab of the ribbon Reference panel Attach
In XREF Manager click attach button drop down.- choose Attach PDF.
Project folder BaseData Mapping Orig Chippewa.PDF

Clear the Specify on screen option for Insertion Point

Clear the Specify on screen option for scale
Clear the Specify on screen for Rotation
Path Type should be Relative Path
Scaling the XREF

Scale Command
Home tab of the ribbon Modify panel Scale command
Select the XREF
Base Point is 0,0
Reference Option in the Scale Command
During the Scale command after the base point assignment type R for REFERENCE.
Find the bar scale (or some known quantity of distance) on the XREF.
Snap to the first point, then second point to graphically identify the reference length.
Type in the distance that the reference points were supposed to be
Enter this in feet, so for a mile you would type 5280.
Zoom Extents to see the scaled XREF. Double check distances.
Change the color of the XREF to Monochrome

Select on the edge of the XREF.
From the green context ribbon, Adjust panel, choose Monochrome.
18:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-003.mp4
150.050.003 Title Sheet Refinement
Setting the attached sketch in the layout tab viewport.
Adding Begin/End Project Notes and Project indications in the sketch area.
Setting the Sketch in the Layout Viewport

Switch to the layout tab.
Activate the viewport by double clicking inside the viewport.
Unlock the viewport - click the small padlock icon next to the viewport scale list.
Inside the active and unlocked viewport double click (or use zoom extents) to zoom the viewport to the
extents of the attached sketch.
Creating a scale for the viewport

If the scale of the sketch area does not exist select on the scale list and choose Custom.
Type in the appropriate name of the scale. Example: 1 = 1/2MI
Paper Units should be 1 unit
Drawing Units should be 2140 (for half mile in feet).
In the scale list select that new scale.

Inside the active viewport pan to the where the location sketch should display.
Lock the viewport. Next to the scale list, click the padlock icon.
Set the titleblock notes per project information

Titleblock Multiline Text
The scale information in the titleblock is MTEXT (multiline text). Double click on the text to edit it. Enter the
correct distance. Example 1/2 (the MI is already there).
Double click on the Total Lengthtext to edit. Enter the length of your project.
Titleblock Attribute Text

Double click on any part of the titleblock block. This opens the Enhanced Attribute Editor to access the attributes
associated with the titleblock.
Enter the Values for the appropriate fields.
Placing Markings on the Location Sketch

Placing Begin/End Project Multileader Text

Annotate tab of the ribbon Leaders panel.
Select the Multileader style drop down. Choose Begin End Project to choose that style.
Change the active layer to the layer that the notes should be on
In the Layer Manager pull-down select P_MISC.
Home tab - Leader panel - Multileader icon.
Select first where the arrowhead should be.
Select second where the beginning of the text should be.
Type the proper note, BEGIN PROJECT STA. 99+00. Click outside the text box to end typing and see
the final format on the screen.
Set the End Project location. END PROJECT STA. 102+50. Click outside the text box to end typing and
see the final format of the text.
Placing Project Location Line

Make sure you are in Paperspace, not working through the viewport in Modelspace.
Check the status bar for the Model/Paper toggle reads Paper. If it does not click the Model button and it
switches to Paper.
Start the polyline command and draw in where the project road location is.
Home tab of the ribbon - Modify panel pull-down Edit polyline tool.
Choose W for width and set the polyline width to something appropriate for the scale of the location sketch. In
this example the width was .25.
15:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-004.mp4
150.050.004 Title Sheet Finishing Touches
Editing the viewport information.

Double click inside the viewport to activate it.
Click the padlock icon next to the scale list to unlock the viewport for scaling and panning.
Select the scale list and choose a new scale.
Pan as necessary. You may need to select the scale again to ensure this was not bumped during the panning.
Lock the viewport with the padlock next to the scale list.
Zooming in now will hold the viewport scale but allow you to see the page closer.
Delete the original polyline that marks the project road location.
Redraw the polyline and set the width to something appropriate to the new sketch scale.
Move the Begin/End Project notes to the new locations.
Double click on the Begin and End Project MTEXT to edit the location stations and other details.
Edit any titleblock information that may have changed due to the changes in the project. Double click on the
titleblock to access the Enhanced Attribute Editor.
Placing Town-Range numbers at sketch margins

Placing the Town Line Marker
Find where the section corners are located in the sketch.
Start the line command
Home tab of the ribbon - Draw panel - Line command - Create Line icon
OR type L or LINE at the command line.
You can turn on the ORTHO function by typing <F8> to keep the line straight to the cardinal directions.
Draw a line of appropriate length near the location sketch viewport.
Placing the Town Text

The Annotate tab of the ribbon - Multiline text icon (or type MTEXT)
Place a text window near the Town-Range line.
In the text editor ribbon select the 120 scale text style.
From the text editor ribbon select the Justification tool and choose MC for middle center.
In the text box type the Town numbers: T-10-W T-9-W.
Click outside the text box to end the typing

Move the Town Text and Line to the Proper Location

Select on the text, select the middle grip point and snap it to the midpoint of the Town line.
Copy the text and town line to the next town corner location.
Double click the text to edit the contents for the next town: T-9-W T-8-W.
Copy Town Text to Create Range Text

Copy the Town text and line near where the Range corner is located.
Rotate the Range text using -90 as the angle.
Use the MOVE command to move the line and range text into its proper location.
Double click the range text and type in the range information: R-29-N R-28-N
Copy the range text to the next range corner.
Copy Town and Range Text to Other Side of Location Sketch

Copy the range text and lines to the other side of the location sketch.
Use the MOVE command to refine the location of both.
Copy the Town text and lines to the other side of the location sketch.
Use the Move command to refine the text and line location.
Change the name of the layout tab

Double click on the layout tab text to edit.
Type the new name of the tab.
Plotting the Title Sheet as a Single Page.

Plotting a single page
You can right-click on the layout tab and choose plot.
Or you could go to the Quick Access Toolbar and choose the plot icon.
In the Plot dialog:

Make sure the plotter is set to WisDOT PDF.pc3
Make sure that the paper size is set correctly.
Make sure the plot area is set to Layout.
Make sure the scale is set to 1:1
Make sure the Pen Style Table is set to WisDOT gshade (for greyscale) or wisdot monochrome (for
black/white plotting).Make sure the plot with linetypes and plot styles are turned on.
Click the preview button to double check how the plot will look.
Check the preview for the edges of the titleblock fitting on the page, text location, color, general
readability.
You can zoom and pan inside the plot preview.
You can choose the plot icon from the preview or click the X to close the preview and return to the plot
dialog.
When you click plot you will choose a location for where the PDF file is to be saved. This should be in the
project SheetsPlan folder.
5:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-005.mp4
150.050.005 Adding the Title Sheet to the Sheet Set Manager.
Opening the Sheet Set Manager

In the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, click the Palettes panel pull-down. Select the Sheet Set icon. Or
type SSM at the command line.
In the Sheet Set Manager tool palette, at the top click the OPEN drop down.
Select Open from this location.
Browse to the project folder, SheetsPlan folder. Select the planproduction.dst file.
Create a Subset in the Project

Right-click on the title of the project.
Choose Create New Subset

Name the subset name Title Sheet
Adding a Layout Tab to the Sheet Set Manager.

In the Sheet Set Manager right-click on the title of the project (or the name of the appropriate subset)
Choose Import Layout as Sheet. Browse to the file location and select the file.
Or with the sheet set manager open right-click on the layout tab and choose Import Layout as Sheet
Check mark the appropriate layout tabs from the drawing(s) you are adding.
Check that the layout tabs you are adding do not have a status that this drawing is already in another sheet set.
Plotting or Publishing from Sheet Set Manager

You can plot individual sheets from the sheet set manager, by right clicking on a subset or the project name and
choose Publish Publish to PDF.
Or publish groupings of pages by right clicking on a subset or the project name and choose Publish Publish to
PDF. This will create a multipage PDF file.
150.060 Exercise PLPR0305 - Printing Section updated: 7/1/2010

3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-060-001.mp4
150.060.001 Printing
150.070 Exercise PLPR0350 - Create roll plot Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-070-001.mp4
150.070.001
150.080 Exercise PLPR0400 - Import and export with MicroStation DGN Section updated: 7/1/2010
10:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-080-001.mp4
150.080.001 Civil 3D to AutoCAD DWG
AutoCAD DWG to MicroStation DGN (4:42)
MicroStation DGN to Civil 3D (6:58)
150.090 Construction detail sheet Section updated: 5/3/2013

9:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-090-001.mp4
150.090.001 Starting a Construction Detail Drawing
Create a New File

1. Create a new file using wisdot12.dwt
Add Drafting Guidelines and Viewframes
2. Make sure you are on the model tab.
3. From the Insert tab > Block panel, click insert. Insert 021000_cd.dwg into it.
1. Clear the checkboxes for Insertion Point, Scale and Rotation.
2. Place a checkmark next to Explode.
4. There are sample construction details in the upper left and pre-set view blocks for you to place your details
in. Do not remove or delete the view outlines.
Overview of Design Center
Design Center is a tool we will use extensively in this module. Design center is a tool that will allow you to move
items from a source drawing to your current drawing.
Many types of base ACAD elements can be moved between drawings using Design Center:
Blocks
Text Styles
Annotation Styles
Layout tabs
Table Styles
Layers
Multileader Styles
Linetypes
How Design Center Works

Design center acts like a special version of Windows Explorer. On the left, you will see drives, folders and files that
you can browse to. What makes Design Center different is that it will only show you AutoCAD DWG and DWT
files. Once you find the file you are looking for, you can browse into the file to view blocks, layers, layouts, etc.
Create a Favorites List in Design Center

Since some files will be difficult to locate, you can add paths to the favorites list. Right-click the directory you wish
to add, and select Add to favorites.
In this module we will use design center to select blocks representing construction details and layouts.
Add Layout Tabs

5. Open design center drag & drop layout tabs into new file from 021001_cd.dwg.
You can drag and drop all needed layouts at once, but it will take longer to drag and drop. If you drag
multiple sheets at once, BE PATIENT!
6. Save as 021001_CD.dwg in the SheetsPlan directory.

7. End of Exercise.
28:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-090-002.mp4
150.090.002 Review of Base AutoCAD Commands
Always draw and dimension in modelspace at full size.
Preparing to Draw
1. Continue working from the drawing you started in exercise 150-090-001.
2.
3. Set your current layer to P_MISC_CONSTD
4.
5. Set your annotative scale to 1IN:10FT
4. On the Status Bar, turn on tools that will help you draft. You will want Polar Tracking, Object Snaps, Object
Snap Tracking and Dynamic Input
The object you are about to draw is a simple shape. However, because this is a construction detail, there
are several rules that we will break. For example, all of the objects, hatching and text will go on the same
layer. You will use the Properties to change linetypes and lineweight when needed.
5. Start the Rectangle command from the Home tab > Draw Panel. Click inside one of the viewframes to
start it off.
6. Key-in 6.5, 6.5. Because you have dynamic input on, this will draw a rectangle that is 6.5 x 6.5 (if you did
not have dynamic input turned on, you would need to key in @6.5,6.5 otherwise, AutoCAD interprets the input
as going to the coordinate 6.5, 6.5)
7. Start the Offset command, located on the Home tab > Modify panel.
1. When prompted for an offset distance, key-in 1.
2. When prompted to select an object to offset, click the rectangle you just created.
3. When prompted to specify a point on the side to offset, click inside the rectangle.
4. Press ESC to end the command.
8. Start the Hatch command, located on the Home tab > Draw panel.
1. In the Hatch Creation Contextual tab, set the pattern to AR-CONC.
2. Set the scale to 0.1
3. Click in the area formed between the two rectangles and press ESC to complete the command.
9. Start the offset command.

1. Offset the outside line 0.5 to the inside. Press escape to complete the command.
10. Select the new line and right-click.

11. Click Properties from the right-click menu.
12. Change the lineweight from Bylayer to 0.40 mm.
13. Verify that you have polar tracking turned on, since you will need it to change the shape of the new thick
rectangle.
1. Click the skinny grip at the center-bottom of the polyline.
2. Push straight up until you see the green polar tracking line.
3. Key-in a distance of 1.17 and press enter.
14. On the Home tab > Modify panel, click Explode.
15. Use the offset command to offset the horizontal lines 0.5 from bottom to top.
1. Hint: Use the Multiple option in the offset command to save clicks as you copy the lines for the
grate.
16. Use the offset command again to offset one of the vertical bars 2.75
17. Select all of the inside bars for the grate.

1. There should be 9 lines selected in total.
2. Open AutoCAD properties if you closed it earlier.
3. Change the lineweight to 0.30 mm.
Text
18. On the Annotate Tab > Text Panel, set the current text style to 175.
19. Click the Multiline Text tool.
20. When prompted, click to create an imaginary rectangle representing the text box. It doesnt matter exactly
where you place this, as we will position it in a later step.
21. In the Text Editor Contextual tab:

1. Turn on the Underline formatting.
2. Set the Justification to Top Center.
22. Key-in BOX CULVERT GRATE DETAIL
23. Click Close Text Editor to complete the command.(Do not press escape.)
24. Use Properties to set the lineweight to 0.35.
25. Use Object snap tracking (using the midpoint OSNAP) to place the text centered at the bottom of the box
culvert.
Multileaders
26. On the Annotate tab > Leaders panel, verify that 140 DOT is the active style.
27. Start the Multileader command and click to place the first multileader at the outer grate (one of the thicker
lines).
1. Click a second time to set the landing location.
2. Type in 1" STANDARD PIPE FRAME OR 1" ROD
3. Use the symbol menu in the Text Editor to get the diameter symbol to appear.
4. Click Close Text Editor to complete the multileader.
28. Start the multileader command and click to place the arrowhead near one of the thinner, inner grate lines.
1. Click a second time to set the landing location.
2. Type in 0.8" STANDARD PIPE 6 O.C.
3. Use the symbol menu in the Text Editor to get the diameter symbol to appear.
4. Click Close Text Editor to complete the multileader.
5. Add a leader.
Dimensioning
29. Set the current dimension style to Plat_Bearing.
30. Add dimensions to the top and sides of the culvert.
End of exercise.

13:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-090-003.mp4
150.090.003 Getting Started
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing you started in
exercise 150-090-001. Otherwise, open up the file 021001_CD.dwg from your class files.
2. Verify your drawing settings before continuing:
Open Design Center

3. Open Design Center. (HINT: You can type DC <enter>at the command line or click the icon from the Home
tab > Palettes panel.)
4. On the left side of design center, browse to the following path:
1. On Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
2. On Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All User\Application Data\ Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu
\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
1. Once you have located the Construction Details folder, right-click and select Add to Favorites so will not
have to browse to this location in the future.
File Name Type of Details
Cdbemgrd12.dwg Beam guards and related details

Cdcrbgtr.dwg Curb and gutter, transition details
Cddrnage12.dwg Drainage, culverts
Cdexcgrd12.dwg Excavation and grading
Cdinlman12.dwg Inlets, manholes
Cdintshl12.dwg Rumble strips, shoulders, cul-de-sac and intersections
Cdislmed12.dwg Islands, medians
Cdjoints12.dwg Pavement joints
Cdmisc12.dwg Anchor bolts, demolition
Cdtraffc12.dwg Traffic control
Cdtyps12.dwg Common typical sections
Cdwldvrl12.dwg Driveway details, concrete steps
6. Locate the drawing Cddrnage12.dwg.

1. Highlight the Blocks category.
2. Highlight block named 10.
3. The preview will show and the description indicates that this is an end grate for a pipe.
7. Drag block 10 into the drawing.

8. Close Design Center.
Placement & Scaling

Next you will need to make sure that the size of the detail is in line with your desired plotting scale.
9. If it is not already inside the first viewframe, use the grip to position the new block.
10. Start the scale command from Home > Modify panel.
1. Use a base point that is anywhere on the block.
2. Scale the block up by a factor of 9. You will need to key-in this value.
11. Reposition the block if needed.
16:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-090-004.mp4
150.090.004 Work with Layout Tabs
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing. Otherwise, open
up the file 021001b_CD.dwg from your class files.
2.
3. Switch to the layout tab labeled 021001_CD.

4. Double click the text items to modify titleblock information..
1. Set the Project Number to 1234-56-78
2. Set the HWY to USH 51
3. Set the County to Sauk
Single Sheet Plot
5. Right-click the layout tab and select Plot

1. Click Preview
End of Exercise
14:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-090-005.mp4
150.090.005 Sheetset Manager vs Publish Command
Plot/Print
The terms plot and print are used interchangeably throughout AutoCAD lingo. The Plot and Print commands
usually refer to creating a single, one-off print from either modelspace or from a layout. If you had many pages to
print, this would be extremely tedious!
Both Sheetset manager and the Publish command will plot multiple pages at once. In both cases, you have the
ability to print directly to a printer, or PDF file.
Always Print to PDF First

Printing to a PDF file is your best option for several reasons:
1. If something is incorrect on the page or the plot, the PDF will reflect the problem. You will save paper and
ink by catching problems in the PDF!
2. Creating a PDF is much quicker than plotting to a printer.
3. Creating a PDF is less likely to cause performance or crashing issues.
Sheetset/Publish
The advantage of the Sheetset manager is that the listing of related pages is saved to a DST file. Ideally, all
layouts related to a project will get added to the sheetset manager for that file. For example, for a completed
project cross-sections, profiles, construction details and typical sections can all be seen in the sheet set listing.
Additional Plotting Information

1. Open the file 021001c_CD.dwg. Even if you have completed previous exercises, additional tabs have been
set up for you to experiment with.
Open Sheetset Manager
2. Click the sheetset manager pulldown and select Open.
3. Browse to the SheetsPlan folder and select PlanProduction.dst.

The top of the sheetset manager should show the name of the sheetset as ProjectSheetData.
4. Right-click the tab and select Import Layout as Sheet
Working with Multiple Layout Tabs

5. Select the tab 021001_CD.
6. Hold down the shift key on your keyboard while selecting 021006_CD.
Even though it is very subtle, all 6 tabs will be selected.
7. Right-click on one of the tabs and select Add Layout to Sheet.
8. Click Import Checked.

Similar to the previous exercise all sheets will be added to the sheetset manager.
9. Right-click the tabs again.
This time, select Publish selected Layouts.
150.100 Typical section sheet Section updated: 5/3/2013

9:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-001.mp4
150.100.001 Starting a Typical section Drawing
Create a New File

1. Create a new file using wisdot12.dwt
Add Drafting Guidelines and Viewframes
2. Make sure you are on the model tab.

From the Insert tab > Block panel, click insert. Insert 020300_ts.dwg into it. This file is located in C:
\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Data\Symbols\USWI\plansht.
1. Clear the checkboxes for Insertion Point, Scale and Rotation.

2. Place a checkmark next to Explode (as shown).
3. This is how your file should look. There are sample typical sections in the upper left and pre-set view blocks
for you to place your details in. Do not remove or delete the view outlines.
Overview of Design Center
Design Center is a tool we will use extensively in this module. Design center is a tool that will allow you to move
items from a source drawing to your current drawing.
Many types of base ACAD elements can be moved between drawings using Design Center:
Blocks
Text Styles
Annotation Styles
Layout tabs
Table Styles
Layers
Multileader Styles
Linetypes
How Design Center Works

Design center acts like a special version of Windows Explorer. On the left, you will see drives, folders and files that
you can browse to. What makes Design Center different is that it will only show you AutoCAD DWG and DWT
files. Once you find the file you are looking for, you can browse into the file to view blocks, layers, layouts, etc.
Create a Favorites List in Design Center

Since some files will be difficult to locate, you can add paths to the favorites list. Right-click the directory you wish
to add, and select Add to favorites.
In this module we will use design center to select blocks representing typical sections and layouts.
Add Layout Tabs

4. Open design center drag & drop layout tabs into new file from 020300_ts.dwg.
You can drag and drop all needed layouts at once, but it will take longer to drag and drop. If you drag
multiple sheets at once, BE PATIENT!
5. Save as 020301_ts.dwg in the SheetsPlan directory.

6. End of Exercise.
14:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-002.mp4
150.100.002 Drawing a Typical Section From Scratch
Review of Base AutoCAD Commands

Always draw and dimension in modelspace at full size.
Preparing to Draw
1. Continue working from the drawing you started in exercise 150-100-001.
2. Set your current layer to P_MISC_TYPS or P_MISC_TYPS_Dashed or E_MISC_TYPS as appropriate.
4. On the Status Bar, turn on tools that will help you draft. You will want Object Snaps, Object Snap Tracking
and Dynamic Input. Polar tracking may get in the way, so you can turn that off.
Check which object snaps you have active before proceeding. To draw a typical section some particularly
helpful osnaps will be:
Endpoint

Extension
Intersection
Base AutoCAD commands you will use in this section:

Line/Polyline
Offset
Trim/Extend
Mirror
Hatch
Circle
Dimensioning
Multileaders
Civil 3D Specific commands you will use in this section:

Add Labels
Flip Label
Edit Label Text
Drawing Lines at a Specific Length & Angle

There are no tools built into base AutoCAD that will allow you to draw using a length and a percent slope or length
and run:rise value. Therefore we need to remember some quick math to get our change in Y value.
Given length (L) and percent slope (P):
Y = L*P
For example, a 12 lane at 2% would be 12*0.02 = 0.24
Given length (L) and run:rise value:
Y = L/Run
For example, a 5 shoulder at 4:1 would be 5/4 = 1.25
Use Dynamic Input!
Once you know the change in elevation and the length, you can easily key this into AutoCAD. Use Dynamic Input
to ensure that the numbers you enter are relative to the first click of your lines.
Decide on your start location and try to utilize the CAD tools as efficiently as possible.
5. Start the Line tool. Be sure that Dynamic input is turned ON.
Click inside the first rectangle representing the view frame.
Key-in 12,0.24. Press Enter.
You should now have a lane 12 in length at a 2% slope.
6. Press F8 on your keyboard or click the Ortho icon in the status bar.
Draw a line 3 units long going straight down. (Our lane really wont be 3 thick - but we will use this
line as a construction line.)
Press enter or escape to complete the command.
Press F8 to turn off ortho mode.
7. Start the offset command.

Key-in an offset distance of 0.5.
Click the 12 line.
Click below to place the offset.
Repeat one more time to form a third line 0.5 away.
Press escape to complete the command.
8. Start the offset command again.

Key-in a distance of 1.
Click the lowest line and offset it down 1
Press escape or enter to complete the command.
9. Start the copy command.

Use the endpoint snap at the top of the vertical line, copy the line to the west end of the lane.
On each end, there are pieces that need cleaning up.
10. Start the Trim command.

Press Enter right away to tell Autocad to use every line as a cutting edge.
Zoom into the right side of the lane and trim back the three lines that overhang.
Hold down shift and click the left ends of the lines. Shift will cause the trim to act as an Extend tool.
Let go of shift and trim back the vertical lines.
At the end of the process your lane will look like the following:
11. Start the Mirror command.
Select all of the lines comprising the lane and press enter.
Snap to the crown of the road and then the bottom of the vertical line to establish the mirror line.
Press Enter to confirm that you do not want to delete the source objects.
12. Using similar techniques as you used to create the lane, draw the top part of the shoulder as shown here.
Dont add dimensioning just yet. The dimensions shown here are just to give you the geometry that
you need to draw.
We will add the drain later on.
Remember that to go to the left and down, you will need to key-in negative numbers as shown here:
Another good trick to know if that you can divide right in the text field (as long as you use Dynamic
input).
Use the Extend command to extend the base and subbase to the 4:1 slope.
Next we will tackle the underdrain.
13. Start by drawing the drain off to the side.

Draw a 1.25x4 rectangle (use dynamic input).
Start the circle command and use object snap tracing to place the circle 0.75 from the bottom
center of the drain.
Key-in a radius of 0.33 for the radius of the drain pipe.
14. Offset the left vertical line 2 feet to the left.
15. Move the drain into place using the Move command.
Use the line that you offset in the previous step to locate the drain in the correct position.
16. Go to Insert tab and click Insert.

With your class files is a block named TYPE-A 30in. Insert that block into the drawing.
Click OK and insert the block at the right edge of the lane.
Use the Mirror command to copy the underdrain to the right side of the road. (Hint: Use the crown of
the road with a vertical mirror line to place the drain.)
17. Delete the vertical construction lines created in step 14.
18. Use the trim/extend command to clean up the underdrain with the base course.
19. Use the line tool and rectangle tool to draw a line representing the slope intercept to earth. Both the line
and the rectangle can be eyeballed in, i.e. no specific length or size is needed for these shapes.
20. Start the Hatch command. Use a solid hatch to fill in the asphalt
21. Start the hatch command again. Use the gravel hatch at 0.5 scale to fill in the base and underdrain area.
22. For the subbase, use the DOTS pattern at 5 scale.
23. Fill in the rectangle you created in step 19 with the EARTH hatch pattern, using a 45 degree angle with a
scale of 2.
24. Draw a final line 10 in length at a 2% slope to the right.
17:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-003.mp4
150.100.003 Drawing a Typical Section From Scratch Continued
Next it is time to dimension the assembly.

Dimensioning
25. Verify that your annotation scale is set to 1IN:10FT.
26. Set the current dimension style to Plan_Bearing.
27. Use the same layer (P_MISC_TYPS), and start the Linear dimension tool. Add a dimension to the newest
line on the right.
The first and second clicks establish the measurement, so be sure to use the endpoint snap to place
this.
The third click establishes the dimension line location above the object. Place the dimension line
approximately 7 feet above the typical section.
28. Click the Continue command. Working right to left add dimensions by snapping to each endpoint. The
continue command will automatically measure from the previous dimension and line up the dimension lines.
Use the grips that appear when selecting dimensions to reposition the text on the shorter segments.
Dimension Overrides
Civil 3D Annotation
30. On the Annotate tab, click Add Labels.
Set the Feature to Line and Curve.
Set the Label type to Single Segment
Set the Line Label Style to Cross Section Slope only.
Click Add.
Click along the median, roadway and shoulder top to place slope labels.
Press Escape when complete.
31. Change the Line Label style to Cross Section Run:Rise Label (no arrow).
Add labels to the steep part of the shoulder and the line leading out of the ditch.
Modifying Civil 3D Text
32. Click the label on the far left.
From the contextual tab, click Edit Label Text.
Click the label again.
Clear the text and replace it with VARIES.
Click OK.
Press escape to clear the selection.
Finishing Touches and Multileaders

33. Select all of the text, dimensions, lines, hatching and everything else that is part of your typical section.
34. Use mirror to mirror the typical section across the median.
35. Set the Multileader style to 140 DOT (that is the minimum acceptable text style size). Add the text.
36. If any of the finished typical section goes outside of the view rectangle, use the move command to relocate
it. Alternately, you could adjust the text editor width to create a hard return. This shortens the width of the text
box, and puts text on a second line.
37. Place multileader text just below the median as shown in the image below.
Click on the text to see the leader grips.
Hover over the landing leader grip to expose the control tooltip.
Select the Add Leader option from the control tooltip.
Add a leader to the other side of the median.
22:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-004.mp4
150.100.004 Using a Typical Section from Design Center
Getting Started
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing you started in
exercise 150-100-001. Otherwise, open up the file 020301c_CD.dwg from your class files.
1. Set your current layer to P_MISC_TYPS
Open Design Center

3. Open Design Center. (HINT: You can type DC <enter>at the command line or click the icon from the Home
tab > Palettes panel.)
4. On the left side of design center, browse to the following path:

1. On Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
2. On Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All User\Application Data\ Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu
\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
5. Once you have located the Construction Details folder, right-click and select Add to Favorites so will not
have to browse to this location in the future.
File Name Type of Details
Cdbemgrd12.dwg Beam guards and related details

Cdcrbgtr.dwg Curb and gutter, transition details
Cddrnage12.dwg Drainage, culverts
Cdexcgrd12.dwg Excavation and grading
Cdinlman12.dwg Inlets, manholes
Cdintshl12.dwg Rumble strips, shoulders, cul-de-sac and intersections
Cdislmed12.dwg Islands, medians
Cdjoints12.dwg Pavement joints
Cdmisc12.dwg Anchor bolts, demolition
Cdtraffc12.dwg Traffic control
Cdtyps12.dwg Common typical sections
Cdwldvrl12.dwg Driveway details, concrete steps
6. Locate the drawing Cdtyps12.dwg.

1. Highlight the Blocks category.
2. Highlight block named 9.
3. The preview will show and the description indicates that this is 4 Lne Urban with parking.
7. Drag block 9 into the drawing.
8. Close Design Center.
Placement & Scaling

Next you will need to make sure that the size of the detail is in line with your desired plotting scale.
9. If it is not already inside the first viewframe, use the grip to position the new block.
10. Start the scale command from Home > Modify panel.
1. Use a base point that is anywhere on the block.
2. Type in R for reference.
3. Click the length between the driving lanes. (These two clicks establish the current length).
4. Type in 12 as the new length.
11. Reposition the block if needed.

12. Explode and edit text as needed.
End of Exercise.
21:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-005.mp4
150.100.005 Layout preparation
Work with Layout Tabs

1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing. Otherwise, open
up the file 020301d_TS.dwg from your class files.
1. Set your current layer to P_MISC_TYPS
3. Switch to the layout tab labeled 020301_TS.
4. Double click the text items to modify titleblock information.
1. Set the Project Number to 1234-56-78
2. Set the HWY to USH 51
3. Set the County to Sauk
Single Sheet Plot

5. Right-click the layout tab and select Plot

End of Exercise
13:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-006.mp4
150.100.006 Plotting
Sheetset Manager vs Publish Command
Plot/Print
The terms plot and print are used interchangeably throughout AutoCAD lingo. The Plot and Print commands
usually refer to creating a single, one-off print from either modelspace or from a layout. If you had many pages to
print, this would be extremely tedious!
Both Sheetset manager and the Publish command will plot multiple pages at once. In both cases, you have the
ability to print directly to a printer, or PDF file.
Always Print to PDF First

Printing to a PDF file is your best option for several reasons:
1. If something is incorrect on the page or the plot, the PDF will reflect the problem. You will save paper and
ink by catching problems in the PDF!
2. Creating a PDF is much quicker than plotting to a printer.
3. Creating a PDF is less likely to cause performance or crashing issues.
Sheetset/Publish
The advantage of the Sheetset manager is that the listing of related pages is saved to a DST file. Ideally, all
layouts related to a project will get added to the sheetset manager for that file. For example, for a completed
project cross-sections, profiles, construction details and typical sections can all be seen in the sheet set listing.
Additional Plotting Information

1. Open the file 020301d_CD.dwg. Even if you have completed previous exercises, additional tabs have been
set up for you to experiment with.
Open Sheetset Manager
2. Click the sheetset manager pulldown and select Open.
3. Browse to the SheetsPlan folder and select PlanProduction.dst.

The top of the sheetset manager should show the name of the sheetset as ProjectSheetData.
4. Right-click the tab and select Import Layout as Sheet
Working with Multiple Layout Tabs

5. Select the tab 020301_CD.
6. Hold down the shift key on your keyboard while selecting 020303_CD.
Even though it is very subtle, all 6 tabs will be selected.
7. Right-click on one of the tabs and select Add Layout to Sheet.
8. Click Import Checked.

Similar to the previous exercise all sheets will be added to the sheetset manager.
9. Right-click the tabs again.

This time, select Publish selected Layouts.
150.110 Traffic control sheets Section updated: 3/10/2014

10:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-110-001.mp4

150.110.001 Traffic Control Sheet Workflow

Reference alignment and Edgelines files
Placing Lines with Linetypes
Placing blocks (Designcenter)
UCS Manipulation (view rotation)
Dimensioning and labeling
Editing placements in viewport
Drawing details in paperspace
Setting Up the Traffic Control Sheets

The Traffic Control sheets need to have plan sheets made so that the markings can be displayed across the entire
project. This process begins with creating the plan only sheets with the plan production tools.
Starting the File and Referencing Data

Start a new file with the wisdot14-plat.dwt.
Save the file in the project folders, Design, c3d, 12345678, Design, View Frame Groups folder.
Data Shortcut References

In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Data Shortcuts area and choose Set Working Folder.
Select the working folder in the project folders, Design, c3d folder (two folders above the _Shortcuts for
the project).
Expand the Alignments, expand the Centerline Alignments
Right-click on the STH25BestFit alignment name and choose Create Reference.
In the dialog change the style to No Display.
In the dialog change the label set to No Labels.
Click OK.
Attaching the XREF Data.

Insert tab in the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the project folder, Design, c3d, 12345678, Design, Edgelines folder,
Select the Edgelines.dwg file.
Set the XREF to Relative Path, and Attached.
Zoom Extents.
Creating the View Frames

Output tab of the ribbon, Create View Frames.
On the General tab:
Select the STH25BestFit alignment.
Set the station range to User Specified.
Select stations from screen button.
Select the beginning station and the end station from the screen.
On the Sheets tab Select Plan Only.
For the Template for Plan Sheet, select the Ellipsis button.
Make sure the template file is wisdot14-02-pd.dwt.
Select the Plan 1 IN 40 FT.layout.
In the View Frame Group tab change the Name field to read VF-0201<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
Click the Edit Layout Name button to check that the counter is starting at 1 of 1.
In the Match Lines tab unselect the Add Match Lines.
Click the Create View Frames button.
Set the scale of the drawing to 1 IN : 50 FT.
Graphically shift the view frames so they cover the project area more efficiently.
Save the file.
16:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-110-002.mp4
150.110.002 Placing the Traffic Control Linetypes
Set the Modelspace Scale

Access the Annotation Scale pop-up.
Select 1IN 50FT.

Creating the Traffic Control Lines
Set the Layer for the Special Linetype

Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, Layer Properties Manager.
In the left column select the Pavement Marking filter
In the layer area on the right find the P_PM_4 layer.
Double-click that layer to make it current.
Draw the Polylines with the Special Linetype

Home tab, Draw Panel, Polyline tool.
Draw in the polylines that should be on the P_PM_4 (4 line width) layer.
Home tab, Layer panel, select the Layer pull-down list.
Select the next layer (P_PM_8).
Draw in the polylines that should be on the P_PM_8 (8 line width) layer
Repeat drawing the lines in the file.
Repeat switching layers and drawing polylines as necessary.
Set the Linetype Scale for Special Linetypes

Linetypes that have special symbols or dashing needs a linetype scale adjustment.
Home tab, Layer panel, select the Layer pull-down list.
Select the next layer (P_PM_SGLDelineator_25_100).
At the Command Line type LTSCALE
Set the scale to 1/50 (or .02).
Draw the polyline as necessary.
Home tab, Layer panel, Layer Properties Manager icon.
Left panel, select the Traffic Control-Staging layer filter.
Double click the P_TC_Drumes_25_50 layer to make it current.
Draw the polyline as necessary.
Entering Blocks to Finish Special Linetypes

Linetypes that use symbols, and indicate spacing, sometimes need a block the finish the linetype.
Insert tab, Block panel, and choose Insert.
Select the TCDRM bock
Make sure the Insertion is set to Choose from Screen
Make sure the Scale is set to 1.
Make sure the rotation is set to 0.
Click OK
Place the block on the last special linetype symbol.
Make sure the Selection Cycling is turned on.
Second to last icon in status bar.
Select on the block, and choose Block Reference from the Selection Cycling dialog.
Home tab, Modify panel, Move command.
Move the block starting from its insertion point
Aim the movement vector to the end of the line.
Type 20 to move the barrel 20 past the end of the linetype.
Alternate: Setting the Individual Linetype Scale
Setting the Polylines Scale

Select the polyline(s) that have special linetype symbols.
Right-click and choose Properties
Check the Linetype Scale field. Make sure it is set to .02 (1/50).
Type LTSCALE at the command line.
Set to 1.
Creating the Sheets in the Sheet Set

Output tab of the ribbon, Create Sheets.
Set the view frame group.

For Layout Creation set to 1 layout per drawing.

Change the Layout Name so it reads 0201<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
In the Sheet Set tab change to Add to an Existing Sheet Set.
Click the ellipsis button to browse to the project, Design, c3d, 12345678, Sheets Plan.
Select the PlansProduction.dst.
Change the sheet name to 0201<[Next Counter(CP)]_tc.
Click the Edit Layout Name button to check that the counter is starting at 1 of 1
Click Create Sheets. Click OK to save the file.
In the Sheet Set Manager double click on one of the files to open it.
19:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-110-003.mp4
150.110.003 #Adjust the Traffic Control Sheets
There are some parts of the traffic control detail plan sheet that will not be correct. They will need slight
adjustments.
Adjust the Titleblock Data

Double-click on the Grey-box Xs at the lower right (where the sheet Title should be).
In the text editor type TRAFFIC CONTROL DETAILS.
Adjust the Viewport

Select on the viewport. It will be under the edge of the titleblock. Select the Viewport of the lines that were there.
Click one of the grip points and adjust the viewport to be a more appropriate size.
Double-click inside the viewport to activate it.
Next to the viewport scale click the grey lock icon to unlock the viewport.
Pan the viewport so that the project is better positioned in the view.
Click on the lock icon to relock the viewport.
Insert Sign Blocks
Adjust the UCS (View Rotation)

Type UCS at the command line
Type V for View
Insert Sign Blocks into the Viewport Modelspace

Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, panel pull-down, Designcenter icon (or type DC).
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2014\enu\Data\Symbols\USWI\signsw12.dwg
Expand the Blocks area.
In Designcenter find W6-3.
Drag that into the file
Fill out the attributes. Click OK.
Click on the block and click in the dark blue grip point to move the block appropriately.
In Designcenter, signsw12.dwg\blocks, find W57-5-1.
Drag this into the file.
Click on the block and select the light blue grip to move the text around the block.
Place the block below the first block.
In Designcenter, signsw12.dwg\blocks, find W-16-9P.
Click the block and select the light blue arrow grip point to change the sign to the REMOVE option.
In Designcenter, signsw12.dwg\blocks, find W-11-50P.
Click the block and select the light blue arrow grip point to change the sign to the REMOVE option.
In the etopog12.dwg\blocks find the SGN block.

Drag this to the file.

Adjust the location of the signs by selecting the blocks and type M for MOVE.
Place Leader Lines to the Signs

Annotate tab, Leader panel, Select the Leader Style drop-down.
Choose the 140 style.
Click the Multileader command.
At the command line type H to place the arrowhead first.
Place the leader from the sign to the representative block.
Left-click to skip placing text.
Repeat for each sign.
Adjust the UCS (View Rotation)

Type UCS at the command line
Type W for World (or View tab, Coordinates tab, World UCS button)
Add Text and Dimensions
Place Callout Bubbles

Annotate tab, Leader panel, in the Leaders drop-down menu choose the 140 style.
Click the Multileader command.
Type H to place the arrowhead first.
Select where the leader should start.
Type the appropriate note in the text. Left-click outside the text box.
Home tab, Draw panel, Rectangle tool.
Draw a rectangle around specific text.
Annotate tab, Leaders panel, style pull-down menu.
Choose the Callout Bubble style.
Select the Multileader command.
Type C for content first.
Left-click a placement spot
Type the number of the callout bubble.
Click a position for the leader.
Select the multileader leader,
Right-click, and choose Remover leader
Select the leader to remove it.
Add Dimensions
Switch to the Paperspace.
Annotate tab, Dimensions panel,
In the style drop-down choose Pavement Marking dimstyle
Select the Align dimension command.
Select the middle of one barrel, then the middle of the second barrel.
Manually Adjust the Dimension Text

Left-click on the dimension. Right-click and choose Properties.
Under the Text area find the Text Override field.
Type 50\PTYP. To create a two line text. Click <ENTER>.
Select the dimension and adjust its position with the grip points.
12:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-110-004.mp4
150.110.004 Create a Small Detail on the Sheet
Draw the polylines

Home tab, Draw panel, Polyline tool.
Draw the polyline(s) as necessary. Use Ortho (F* toggle), COPY, TRIM/EXT, and other drafting tools to
simplify the drawing process.
Home tab, Draw panel, Line Line Create tool.
Place lines at the edge of hatched areas.
Home tab, Draw panel, Hatch command.
Click the Solid Hatch style.

Left-Click in the closed area to hatch it.
Place Text for the Detail

Annotate tab, Text panel, Style drop-down.
Choose 140.
Click the Multiline tool
Place a text box.
Type TYPICAL ROAD SECTION DIMENSIONS
Double-click on text.
In the Text Editor ribbon choose the Underline tool.
Add Dimensions to the Detail

Annotate tab, Dimension panel, Dimension style drop-down.
Choose Plan_Conventional.
Select the Linear Dimension tool.
Place dimensions at the proper locations.
Annotate tab, Dimension panel, Continue Dimension.
Snap to the other dimension locations.
Manually Adjust the Dimension Text

Click on the dimension that needs to be adjusted.
Right-click and choose Properties.
In the Text Area, the last field is Text Override. Click in that field.
Type in the needed text. If two text lines are needed add a \P as a <return> character.
Example: 50\PTYP. For 50 TYP.
Grip edit the placement of the dimension as necessary
Add Special Text

Annotate tab, Text panel, Style drop-down.
Choose 120.
Click the Multiline tool.
Place a text box.
Type 4:1
Left-click Outside the Text Editor box.
Home tab, Modify panel, the Rotate command.
Left-click the text.
Click a rotation point near the text.
<Shift>-Right-click and choose Parallel.
Hover near the line that is being labelled to get the parallel OSNAP marker.
Move the cursor until the Parallel OSNAP dotted line appears. Left-click to place the text.
Repeat for the other slope text.
Place Other Leader Text in Detail

Annotate tab, Leader panel, Leader Style drop-down.
Choose 140.
Choose the Multileader command.
Click to place the leader lines.
Type EDGELINES
Left-click outside the Text Editor box to end the text.
Annotate tab, Leader panel, Add Leader icon.
Select on the first leader line.
Place the second (and more) leaders.
Grip edit to adjust text placement.
Repeat as necessary.

150.120 Pavement marking sheets Section updated: 3/10/2014

20:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-120-001.mp4
150.120.001 Setting Up the Pavement Marking Sheets
The Pavement Marking sheets need to have plan sheets made so tha the markings can be displayed across the
entire project. This process begins with creating the plan only sheets with the plan production tools.
Starting the File and Referencing Data

Start a new file with the wisdot14-plat.dwt.
Save the file in the project folders, Design, c3d, 12345678, Design, View Frame Groups folder.
Data Shortcut References

In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on the Data Shortcuts area and choose Set Working Folder.
Select the working folder in the project folders, Design, c3d folder (two folders above the _Shortcuts for
the project).
Expand the Alignments, expand the Centerline Alignments
Right-click on the STH25BestFit alignment name and choose Create Reference.
In the dialog change the style to No Display.
In the dialog change the label set to No Labels.
Click OK.
Attaching the XREF Data.

Insert tab in the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the project folder, Design, c3d, 12345678, Design, Edgelines folder,
Select the Edgelines.dwg file.
Set the XREF to Relative Path, and Attached.
Zoom Extents.
Creating the View Frames

Output tab of the ribbon, Create View Frames.
On the General tab:
Select the STH25BestFit alignment.
Set the station range to User Specified.
Select stations from screen button.
Select the beginning station and the end station from the screen.
On the Sheets tab Select Plan Only.
For the Template for Plan Sheet, select the Ellipsis button.
Make sure the template file is correct.
Select the Plan 1 IN 40 FT.
In the View Frame Group tab change the Name field to read VF-0201<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
In the Match Lines tab unselect the Add Match Lines.
Click the Create View Frames button.
Set the scale of the drawing to 1 IN : 50 FT.
Graphically shift the view frames so they cover the project area more efficiently.
Save the file.
Create the Pavement Marking Lines

Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, Layer Properties Manager icon.
Set the layer filters to Pavement Markings.
Find the P_PM_Centerline40. Double click on this layer to make it Current.
Home tab, Draw Panel, Polyline icon.
Draw in the centerline line location. Adjust its location as necessary.
Select the linetype, right-click and choose Properties.
Change the Linetype scale to 1/50 (or .02).
Home tab, Layers panel, Layer pull-down.

Select the P_PM_LaneLine_50.

Draw in where the lane line should be
Select the lane lines and the dashed centerlines.
Change the Linetype Scale to 1/50.
Select the P_PM_4.
Draw in where the double line should be.
Home tab, Modify panel, Offset command.
Type in distance of 1.4.
Select the line.
Click to the side the offset should go.
Set the layer to P_PM_18.
Home tab, Draw pane, Line command, Line Create Line.
Draw in where the Stop Lines are located.
Save the file.
Creating the Sheets in the Sheet Set

For Layout Creation set to 1 layout per drawing.
Change the Layout Name so it reads 0201<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
Click the Edit Layout Name button to check that the counter is starting at 1 of
Change the sheet name to 0201<[Next Counter(CP)]_pm.
Click the Edit Layout Name button to check that the counter is starting at 1 of
In the Sheet Set Manager double click on one of the files to open it.
18:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-120-002.mp4
150.120.002 Adjust the Pavement Sheets
There are some parts of the pavement detail plan sheet that will not be correct. They will need slight adjustments.
Adjust the Titleblock Data

Double-click on the Grey-box Xs at the lower right (where the sheet Title should be).
In the text editor type PAVEMENT MARKING DETAILS.
Adjust the Viewport

Select on the viewport. It will be under the edge of the titleblock. Select the Viewport of the lines that were there.
Click one of the grip points and adjust the viewport to be a more appropriate size.
Double-click inside the viewport to activate it.
Next to the viewport scale click the grey lock icon to unlock the viewport.
Pan the viewport so that the project is better positioned in the view.
Click on the lock icon to relock the viewport.
Place the Callout Bubbles in the File

Annotate tab, Leaders panel, Leader style pull-down.
Choose the Callout Bubble style.
Annotate tab, Leaders panel, choose the Multileader tool.
Type H to set the arrowhead first.
Select where the leader is pointing.
Select where the text landing should be.
Type in the bubble number.

Create a Legend on the Sheet

A legend needs to be created to describe the callout bubbles and the linetypes.
Place the Legend Title

Annotate tab, Text panel, set the style to 200.
Annotate tab, Text panel, choose the MTEXT icon.
In the sheet select a point then select a second point to create a text editing box.
In the Text Editor ribbon, Formatting panel, select the U icon to underline this text.
Type LEGEND. Click outside the text editor to end the text creation.
Place the Callout Bubbles in the Legend

Annotate tab, Leader panel, select the Multileader tool.
Type C for Content First.
Select where in the legend the bubble should be.
Type the proper number for the first bubble.
Select a location for the leader to be placed.
Select the multileader that you just place and right-click.
From the right-click menu select Remove Leader.
Select the leader that you just placed to remove it, leaving the bubble alone.
Repeat these steps for each bubble or copy the first one then edit the numbers.
Double-click on the bubble to type in the proper number.
If you need to line-up the bubbles, go to the Annotate tab, Leader panel, Align tool.
Select all of the bubbles.
Select the first bubble and align the others to it.
Place the Linetypes in the Legend

Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, Layer pull-down.
Select the layer that represents the first bubbles linetype.
Home tab, Draw panel, Line tool, Create Line.
Draw a line left to right next to the appropriate bubble.
Copy this line next to any bubbles where they would be appropriate.
Copy the first line for the double line type.
Place the Blocks in the Legend

Open the Designcenter by typing DC at the command line (or the Home tab, Palettes panel, panel pull-down,
Designcenter icon).
Browse to Program Data\Autodesk\C3D 2014\enu\Data\Symbls\USWI\ewdot12.dg\blocks. (or copy some from
the file)
Scroll through the blocks until you find blocks representing ones that will be used in your file.
Click and drag these blocks into your file. Line them up with the bubble that represents them.
Place the Description Text in the Legend

Click the MTEXT tool.
Select two points to create a text editor box near the callout bubbles and linetypes.
Type in the appropriate description. Click outside the text editor box to end the text creation.
Select the text, right-click, Basic Modify tools, Copy.
Left click text locations next to each linetype.
Double click on each text to edit the text to what is descriptive of the linetypes.
14:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-120-003.mp4
150.120.003 Create a Small Detail
Create a detail sketch of some special line layouts.
Draw in the Detail

Home tab of the ribbon, Draw tab, Polyline command.
Draw the detail lines.
Home tab, Modify panel, Offset command.
Offset the double lines through the detail.
Home tab, Modify panel, Extend command
Extend the subgrade material lines to the sketched surfaces.

Home tab, Modify panel, Rotate command.
Rotate the top line, rightclick to accept.
Place a rotation point somewhere in the middle of the line.
Type C for copy inside the rotate command.
Type -45 for the rotation.
Left-click the polyline and use the rectangular grip to move the polyline.
Home tab, Modify panel, Copy command.
Copy the rotated line to represent the striping.
Home tab, Modify, Copy command.
Select both rotated polylines.
Copy these over to represent the offset pavement marking. Repeat as necessary.
Home tab, Modify, Trim command
Select the pavement lines as cutting edges and trim back the striping.
Home tab, Draw pane, Hatch command.
Solid Hatch the striping.
Dimension the Detail

Annotate tab, Dimension panel, select the dimension style drop-down.
Choose the Plan_Conventional style.
Select the Linear dimension command.
Dimension the front of the detail, and the spacing between the striping.
Dimension the front of the first striping.
Place Leader Text in the Detail

Annotate tab, Leader panel, Select the Style drop down.
Choose the 140 style.
Select the Multileader command.
Place leaders for text describing the line types.
Placing Free Text and Blocks in the Detail

Annotate tab, Text panel, select the text style drop down and choose 140.
Select the MTEXT command.
Create a text editor box. Type the appropriate free text.
Open the Designcenter by going to the Home tab, Palettes panel, pull-down, Designcneter icon.
Browse to ewdot-14.dwg file, blocks folder.
Find the TSTFA block. Drag that into the file.
Copy this block to the opposite travel direction.
Annotate tab, Text panel, select the text styles drop down.
Select the 200 style
Select the MTEXT command.
Below the detail type the detail name
Set the Dimension Text

Select one of the dimension text.
Scroll down and find the Text Overrides field.
Type in the proper text.
Repeat for each dimension.
Last Cleanup of the Legend

Create the Dashed Line for the Legend
Home tab, Modify panel, panel pull-down.
Choose the Break command.
Break the line creating a single dash.
Repeat this step for the other line(s).
Home tab, Modify, Copy command.
Select any of the dashes.
Copy the dash in line to simulate a dashed linetype.
150.130 Erosion control sheets Section updated: 9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14
8:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-001.mp4
150.130.001 Begin the Erosion Control File
Save the new file in the projects SheetsPlan folder as 12345678-STH25-ErosionControl.dwg

Right-click on the Data Shortcuts area in the Toolspace, Prospector tab, choose Set Working Folder.
Select the Project number from the list.
Attach the Data References

Right-click on STH-Refinement-Top and choose Create Reference.
Change the Style to _EX Border.
Right-click on 4thAve and choose Create Reference
Under Description enter -4thAve, choose 1IN 100FT-Ticks200Major:100Minor-NoPCPT for the label set.
Click OK.
Select the PT label, Click the delete button.
Right-click on STH25BestFit and choose Create Reference
Under Description enter STH25, choose 1IN 100FT-Ticks200Major:100Minor-NoPCPT for the label
set.
Click Ok.
Hint: Toggle off show and hide Lineweight to see the lines as all same thickness/weight
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, View Frame Groups
Right-click on STH25BestFit DBL 100Sc and choose Create Reference
Under View frame style select Standard, Match line style select _Line,
Match line labels can be default
Select STH25BestFit for the alignment.
Click Ok.
Xref Mapping files

Attach the Edgelines Files by xref in the command line, then picking the attach dwg icon on the top left corner of
the External References dialog box.
Browse to the Projects Mapping folder.
Select the 3109.dwg, 3110.dwg, 3111.dwg and 3112.dwg, select open
Set the Scale to 1
Xref Edgelines File

Attach the Edgelines File by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Edgelines folder.
Select the Edgelines.dwg


Set the Scale to 1
Xref Storm Sewer File

Attach the Storm Block File by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Select the Storm Block.dwg
Set the Scale to 1
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel) to see the file location.
22:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-002.mp4
150.130.002 Add Erosion Control Measures using Design Center
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_EC_SiltFence layer to be current
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, select polyline command,
Draw polylines to represent the Silt Fence
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_EC_RipRap layer to be current
Open the Design center on the home tab, palettes panel, palettes drop down (or key in DC in the
command line). In the Design center folders tab navigate to:
C:\WisDOT\stnd\c3d2014\Blocks\ErosionControl14.dwg, expand blocks to see the available
blocks.
On the design center select ECRR, place riprap block in front of desired culverts
On the design center select ECCPDC, place Ditch Check block in front of desired culverts
On the design center select ECBALE, place Bales block in behind desired silt fence
On the design center select ECWFA, place surface water flow arrows were necessary
Hint: Change the STH-Refinement-Top surface style to P Contours 5 Major: 1 Minor and add contour
labels to determine what direction the surface water is flowing.
Add Erosion Mat with Hatch

Select the layer dropdown and select the P_EC_MatClass1 layer to be current
Draw polylines to represent the Erosion Mat
Select the previously drawn polyline,
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Layers Panel, Select Layer Isolate command
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, Select Hatch command or type H in command line
Go to the hatch pattern drop down of the contextual ribbon select the DGN_ECMC1P
Pick inside the polyline boundary
Add Silt Fence Alignment Offset Labels

On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Labels & Tables tab,
Select the top portion of Add Labels, on the Add Labels dialog box,
Feature will be Alignment
Label type Dropdown, select Station Offset
Station offset label style select Silt Fence Sta Off 100 000 LT for the left side of the alignment
Station offset label style select Silt Fence Sta Off 100 000 RT for the Right side of the alignment
Marker style select No Display
Select Add, pick the alignment needed for the offset, place labels at points on the silt fence as needed
If the Add Labels dialog box is still open change the label style to the opposite side from your first
selection, proceed to place labels on the silt fence as needed for the other side.
7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-003.mp4

150.130.003 Creating the Erosion Control Sheets

For Layout Creation set to All layouts in current drawing.
Change the Layout Name so it reads 0220<[Next Counter(CP)]>-ec.
Change the sheet name to 0220<[Next Counter(CP)]-ec.
In the Sheet Set Manager double click on one of the files to open it if they were created in a separate file.
Edit North Arrow Direction

Move north arrow block from the right side of the sheet onto desired location of viewport
Double click in viewport
Draw line true north
Double click outside viewport to get back to paper space
Select north arrow, move insertion point to endpoint of previously created line
Select north arrow, rotate from insertion point using rotate then Reference
Create Second Viewport

Select Viewport, and north arrow
Go to home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel, select copy command
Select upper right hand corner of viewport, copy to lower right hand corner of same viewport
Crop viewport to fit sheet by moving bottom line up
Select viewport, select unlock from properties, move model space to fit desired location
14:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-004.mp4
150.130.004 Draft Erosion Control Block Legend
On the Home Tab of the ribbon Draw panel,
Select the Rectangle command,
Draw a rectangle near the bottom right side of the sheet.
On the Layer Panel of the Home Ribbon Set the current layer to P_MISC_TXT
Insert text for the Legend
On the annotate tab of the ribbon, Text panel,
Select the text style 120
Select the multiline text command
The command line will prompt to specify first corner and opposite corner
(a rectangle representing the area for the text field)
Type LEGEND, select all the text and click the underline command then the center command
Left click outside the text box to finish the multiline command
Hint: Match Properties (MA) to place text on same layer as rectangle.
On the Insert tab of the ribbon, block panel, click Insert
On the Insert dialog box click the Name drop down scroll to ECBALE
Leave Insertion Point checked, enter .5 for the x scale
Leave the rest default, make sure explode is unchecked, click ok
Select place to put block in legend box.
Select the multiline text command
Command line prompts to specify first corner and opposite corner
Type EROSION BALES,
Repeat these steps for all the blocks in the erosion control plan sheet.
On the Home tab of the ribbon, layer panel, select the P_EC_SiltFence layer

On the Home tab of the ribbon, draw panel, select Polyline command
Draw a polyline next to text under previous block inserted
This should represent the Silt Fence
select the multiline text command
command line prompts to specify first corner and opposite corner
Type SILT FENCE,
On the Home tab of the ribbon, layer panel, select P_EC_MatClass1 layer
On the Home tab of the ribbon, draw panel, select Polyline command
Draw a polyline next to text under previous polyline created
This should represent the Class I, Type B Erosion Mat.
select the multiline text command
command line prompts to specify first corner and opposite corner
Type EROSION MAT CLASS I, TYPE B,
Hint: Use WIPEOUT Command to hide model space data behind legend table.
150.140 Joint detail sheets Section updated: 9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14
9:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-001.mp4
150.140.001 Begin the Joint Detail File
Save the new file in the projects SheetsPlan folder as 12345678-STH25-JointDetails.dwg


Change the Style to _No Display.
Under Description enter -4thAve, choose 1IN 50FT-Ticks100Major:50Minor[DESC] for the label set.
Click OK.
Under Description enter STH25, choose 1IN 50FT- Ticks100Major:50Minor[DESC] for the label set.
Click Ok.
Under View frame style select Standard,
View frame label style select VF Name,

Match line style select _No Display,

Select STH25BestFit for the alignment.
Click Ok.
Xref Edgelines File

Attach the Edgelines Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Set the Scale to 1
Hint: Use NCOPY to bring in all pavement linework from XREF.
15:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-002.mp4
150.140.002 Create Manual Points
In the home tab of the ribbon, create ground data panel, Points dropdown, Select Point Creation Tools
Click the chevron to expand the Create Points Properties,
Change the Default Layer to P_RDWY_Text_Grades
Expand Points Creation, Default Description to PAV,
Prompt for Elevations to Automatic
Prompt for Point Names to Manual
Prompt for Description to None
Expand Default Styles, change Point Style to P PM Pavement Marker,
Point Label Style to Pave Grade Bottom
Expand Default Name Format, Change Point Name Template to PAV<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
Close the chevron.
On the Create Points Toolbar, Alignment Point dropdown, select Measure Alignment
Select Alignment STH25BestFit, Enter Start Station, Enter End station, Enter Interval.
On the Create Points Toolbar, Alignment Point dropdown, select Measure Alignment
Select Alignment 4thAve, Enter Start Station, Enter End station, Enter Interval.
On the Create Points Toolbar, Miscellaneous Point dropdown, select Measure Object
Select a Pavement line, Enter Start Station, Enter End station, Enter Interval.
On the Create Points Toolbar, Miscellaneous Point dropdown, select Manual Point
Pick at the vertice points on the Pavement lines that were not inserted with previous commands.
Select a Point, on the contextual ribbon, Modify panel select Elevations from Surface,
Select STH25-Refinement-Top for the surface,
Type in an A for all the points.
Type an A for all the points.
Expand Default Styles, change Point Style to P PM Pavement Marker Radius,
Point Label Style to Point Name Circled
Expand Default Name Format, Change Point Name Template to PAV<[Next Counter(CP)]>.
Expand Points Creation, Change Prompt for Point Names to Manual
Close the chevron.
Pick at the Center points of each curb and gutter arc and the endpoints of each Arc
6:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-003.mp4
150.140.003 Generate Point Data for Point Tables (Macro)
In the Toolspace, Toolbox, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros,
Rt. click Point-Station Offset to UDP, select execute

In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Select Points and check Create Point Group
Enter Radius,
Select STH25BestFit in the Alignment dropdown
Select as Alignment 1,
Click apply and select all the radius points, click enter
In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Point Group
Select Radius as the point group,
Select 4thAve in the Alignment dropdown
Click apply.
In the Toolspace, Prospector, expand point Groups, select Radius, Rt click Edit points
Panorama opens to look at the info created for the point table that will be created.
Create Point Tables

In the Annotate tab of the ribbon, Labels & Tables Panel select Add Tables dropdown, select Add Point table
On the Point Table Creation dialog box under the Table style dropdown
select STA OFF STA OFF NE RADIUS
Click icon next to no point group selected and select Radius point group, click ok
Click ok, pick a spot for table to reside.
24:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-004.mp4
150.140.004 Create Sheets
In the Output tab click Create Sheets, On the Create Sheets View Frame Group and Layouts dialog box
Under View frame group select STH25BestFit
View frame range select Selection, click Choose View Frames
In the Select View Frames dialog box click the green box icon to select view frame from drawing
Click Ok
Select All layouts in the current drawing
Click next
Click Create Sheets; click ok to save the current drawing.
Insert Radius Dimensions

On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Dimension panel,
Select Radius from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 RADIUS from the Style dropdown
Insert Radius dimensions as needed.
Select Arc end points on Curb and Gutter
Create Joint Lines

On the Home Tab of the ribbon Layers panel,
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_RDWY_Joint layer to be current
Draw polylines to represent Joints marks
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel, select Offset command, key in a distance,
select side to be offset to, click enter twice to start the offset command again
Key in new distance, select side, and repeat until all joint lines are complete.
Hint: Use Layer Isolate command to only show the layers needed
Hint: Use trim and extends command to clean up joint lines.
Hint: Use Layer un-isolate command to bring back the previous layers
Insert Joint Dimensions

Select Aligned from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 Plan Joints_NoDimLines from the Style
Dropdown, Insert Joint dimensions as needed.
Select joint end points on joint lines
Hint: Use DIMCONTINUE command to speed the dimension process up.
Select Aligned from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 Plan Joints from the Style Dropdown,
Insert Joint dimensions as needed.
Select joint end points on joint lines.
150.150 Intersection detail sheets Section updated: 9/23/2014

Developed in C3D14
7:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-001.mp4
150.150.001 Begin the Intersection Details File
Save the new file in the projects SheetsPlan folder as 12345678-STH25-IntersectionDetails.dwg



Change the Style to _No Display
Click ok
Click ok.
Under Description enter -4thAve, choose 1IN 50FT-Ticks100Major:50Minor[DESC] for the label set.
Click OK.
Under Description enter STH25, choose 1IN 50FT- Ticks100Major:50Minor[DESC] for the label set
Click Ok.
Right-click on STH25BestFit-40Scale and choose Create Reference
Under View frame style select Standard, Match line style select _No Display,
Select STH25BestFit for the alignment
Click Ok.
Xref Edgelines File

Attach the Edgelines Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Set the Scale to 1
Click ok.
24:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-002.mp4

150.150.002 Create Manual Points

In the home tab of the ribbon, create ground data panel, Points dropdown, Select Point Creation Tools
Change the Default Layer to P_RDWY_Text_Grades
Expand Points Creation, Default Description to PAV,
Prompt for Elevations to Automatic
Prompt For Point Names to Manual
Prompt for Description to None
Expand Default Styles; change Point Style to P PM Pavement Marker Radius,
Point Label Style to Point Name Circled
Expand Default Name Format, Change Point Name Template to PAV<[Next Counter(CP)]>
Set Starting Number to 1.
Close the chevron.
Select Curb and gutter arc endpoints and radius points.
Pick at the taper points on the Pavement lines.
Type in an A for all the points.
Generate Point Data for Point Tables (Macro)

In the Toolspace, Toolbox, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros,
Rt. click Point-Station Offset to UDP, select execute
In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Select Points and check Create Point Group
Enter Radius Points, into the Point Group name box
Select STH25BestFit in the Alignment dropdown
Click apply and select all the radius points, click enter
In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Point Group
Select Radius Points as the point group,
Select 4thAve in the Alignment dropdown
Click apply.
In the Toolspace, Prospector, expand point Groups, select Radius Points, Rt click Edit points
Panorama opens to look at the info created for the point table that will be created.
Create Point Tables

In the Annotate tab of the ribbon, Labels & Tables Panel select add tables dropdown, select Add Point table
On the Point Table Creation dialog box under the Table style dropdown
Select STA OFF STA OFF NE RADIUS
Click icon next to no point group selected and select Radius Points point group, click ok
Click ok, pick spot for table to reside.
Hint: Rerun Macro with overwrite checked to see alignment station DESC changes.
Insert Radius Dimensions

Select Radius from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 RADIUS from the Style dropdown
Insert Radius dimensions as needed.
Select Arc end points on Curb and Gutter
Hint: Toggle ANNOAUTOSCALE Icon to add scale of sheet.
Edit Point Info for Tables

In the Toolspace, Prospector, Expand Point Groups, Rt click Radius Points, Select Edit Points,
Panorama opens with point editor, locate the radius column, Add radius lengths to points
17:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-003.mp4
150.150.003 Create Sheets
In the Output tab click Create Sheets, On the Create Sheets View Frame Group and Layouts dialog box
Under View frame group select STH25BestFit-40Scale
For View frame range select Selection, click Choose View Frames
In the Select View Frames dialog box click the green box icon to select view frame from drawing
Click Ok
Select all layouts in the current drawing
Click next
Click Create Sheets; click ok to save the current drawing.
Insert Lane & Shoulder Dimensions

Select Aligned from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 LANE & SHLD DIMENSION for the style
Insert dimensions as needed.
Hint: Toggle ANNOAUTOSCALE Icon to add scale of sheet
Add Miscellaneous Labels

On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Leaders panel,
Select DOT 175 BEGIN END PROJECT for the style, Select Multileader
Insert labels/leaders as needed.
Hint: These labels should be placed on paperspace to insure correct rotation of label text.
Hint: Toggle ANNOAUTOSCALE Icon to add scale of sheet.
150.160 Storm sewer plan and profile sheets Section updated: 9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
4:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-001.mp4
150.160.001 Create File and Attach References
Set the data shortcuts working folder

In the toolspace, Prospector tab, scroll to near the bottom and right-click on the Data Shortcuts header.
Select Set Working Folder.
Browse to the location that the project dataset has been stored. Expand the 87654321 project and find the
_Shortcuts folder. You should select the C3D folder that is two levels above that _Shortcuts folder.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab, scroll to near the bottom and right-click on the Data Shortcuts header.
Select the Set Data Shortcut Project Folder.
Select the project folder 87654321. Click OK.
Create the drawing File and Attach References

In the Quick Access toolbar select the NEW drawing file icon.
Save this new file as 022501-ss.dwg in the folder path 87654321 Sheets Plan.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab, under the Data Shortcuts area, expand the Pipe Network area.
Right-click on the Storm-10yr pipe network name.
Choose Open Source Drawing.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the drawings Pipe Networks area.
Expand Networks, and expand the Storm-10yr network.
Left-click on the Pipes.
In the toolspace preview area (at the bottom) look for the Reference Alignment column.
Scroll down through that column to find the alignments that this network references.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand the drawings Pipe Networks area.
Expand Networks, and expand the Storm-10yr network.
Left-click on the Structures.
The process of searching names can be made easier if you left click the Reference
Alignment column header. This will sort the table by this column.
In the toolspace preview area (at the bottom) look for the Reference Surface column.
Scroll down through that column to find the surfaces that this network references.

The process of searching names can be made easier if you left click the Reference
Alignment column header. This will sort the table by this column.
11:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-002.mp4
150.160.002 Create File and Attach References
Create the drawing File and Attach References

In the Quick Access toolbar select the NEW drawing file icon.
In the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the folder path 87654321 Sheets Plan
Save this new file as 022501-ss.dwg.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab, under the Data Shortcuts header:
Expand surfaces.
Right-click on Surface Exist and choose Create Reference.
In the Style field click on the style name, then select the ellipsis button.
Set the style settings as No Display and click OK.
Zoom extents so you are near the project.
Repeat this for the surfaces:
Cmbn-Exist-USGS-Top
Crdr-Commercial-PipeDatum
Ex-USGS-DEM
Exist
Rfnt-Commercial-Datum
Rfnt-Commercial-Top
Expand Alignments, and expand Centerline type.
Right-click AlexanderDr and choose Create Reference.
Set the Label Set to 1IN 100FT-Ticks 200' Major:100' Minor-NoPCPT
Click OK to create the reference.
Repeat this process for the alignments:
CarriageDr,
CastleOakDr,
Commercial
OldeSchoolRd,
RegentPl,
SParkAve.
Expand Pipe Networks.
Right-click on Storm-10yr and choose Create Reference.
Leave all of the defaults (including the parts list) and click OK.
If there is any other data that you need data referenced into the file repeat these steps for the appropriate objects.
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel select Attach.
Browse to 87654321/Design/Edgelines/Pavt.dwg and click Open.
Make sure Xref Attach dialog is set to:
Attachment Type: Overlay.
Path Type: Relative.
Click Ok.
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel select Attach.
Browse to 87654321/BaseData/Survey/Topo-EX_Survey.dwg and click Open.
Make sure Xref Attach dialog is set to:
Attachment Type: Overlay.
Path Type: Relative.
Click Ok.
If there are any other dwg files that need to be XREFd into this file go to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference
panel, and click Attach.
6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-003.mp4

150.160.003 Create Alignments for Each Pipe Run

Alignments need to be created above each pipe network to capture the profile data above all the pipes and
structures, and to project the pipe data onto the profile views. These alignments will also serve as the baseline for
the view frames that will be used to create the plan and profile sheets of these pipes. These alignments should be
created from south to north and west to east.
Create an Alignment and Profile for the Pipe Trunk

Pan and zoom to the south end of the project.
Select the apron end wall structure just south of the SParkAve alignment. This is structure number 7.
In the green context ribbon, Launch Pad panel, select Alignment from Network.
Pan north to the next eastbound turn (RegentPl alignment), and select on the manhole in that intersection. This is
structure 1.
Name the alignment Trunk 7-1.
Set the alignment style to anything appropriate.
Set the Alignment Label Set to _No Labels
Make sure the Create Profile and Profile View is check-marked.
In the Create Profile from Surface dialog make sure the Alignment assignment is Trunk 7-1,
and the Exist surface is selected.
Click Add.
Click OK. (if you need to confirm, or see the profile with the pipes click Draw in Profile View,
then follow that dialog through the profile view creation wizard).
Close the Event Panorama if it opened.
Create an Alignment and Profile for the Pipe Laterals

Select the structure at the north end of the Trunk 7-1, to the west of Commercial Road. This is structure 1B.
From the green context ribbon, Launch Pad panel select Alignment from Network.
Pan east and north to the structure at the east side of Commercial Road. This is structure 1A.
Name the alignment Lateral 1B-1A.
Set the alignment style to anything appropriate.
Set the Alignment Label Set to _No Labels
Make sure the Create Profile and Profile View is check-marked.
In the Create Profile from Surface dialog make sure the Alignment assignment is Lateral 1B-1A,
and the Exist surface is selected.
Click Add.
Click OK. If you need to confirm, or see the profile with the pipes click Draw in Profile View,
then follow that dialog through the profile view creation wizard.
Close the Event Panorama if it opened.
5:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-004.mp4
150.160.004 Create View Frames for the Sheets
The view frames will be created along the Trunk pipes so that the sheets have a base as they are being created.
Create the View Frames

In the Output tab of the ribbon, Plan Production panel, select the Create View Frames button.
In the Create View Frames dialog select the Trunk 7-1 alignment from the drop-down list. Click Next.
Make sure the Plan and Profile option is selected.
For the Template for Plan and Profile Sheet, select the ellipsis button (three dot button).
Make sure the template file is set to C:\WisDOT\stnd\c3d2014\SheetTemplates\02-SS-
wdot14.dwt. If this is not the path appearing in the Drawing Template File Name box click the
ellipsis button (three dot button) to browse this path and select this template file.
In the Select a Layout to Create New Sheets window select SS 1 IN 100 FT and click OK.
On the left side of the dialog select the Profile Views hypertext to advance to that page of the wizard.
You could also advance through the pages by clicking Next three more times.
In the Profile Views page make sure that the Select Profile View Style is set to Storm Sewer. If it is not
select the name drop down arrow and select it from the list.
In the Profile Views page make sure that the Select Band Set Style is set to No Display. If it is not select
the name drop down arrow and select it from the list.
Click Create View Frames.
Repeat these steps for other trunk alignments in the file.
Turn the Alignment Display Off

After the frames are created make sure the alignments over the trunks and laterals are not visible.
In the toolspace, Prospector, Alignments and select the Miscellaneous type alignment header.
In the toolspace, at the bottom, in the preview area, <SHIFT> select the trunk and lateral alignments
from the list.
Scroll to the right to find the Style column.
Right-click the header of the style column and choose Edit.
Select _No Display and click OK.
9:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-005.mp4
150.160.005 Create Sheets from the View Frames
The Create Sheets command makes use of the stacked profiles process, which is slightly different than the
process used for road design plan and profile sheets.
Create Sheets
In the Output tab of the ribbon, Plan Production panel, select Create Sheets.
Make sure the correct View Frame Group is selected (VFG-Trunk 7-1)
For the Layout Creation option, select the All Layouts in the Current Drawing. This is important, and will
not work with a different setting.
For the Layout Name, select the layout name template button to the right.
In the Name field add the sheet name 0225
In the Name Field, place the cursor immediately after the name 0225 (no space between) then
click the Insert button to add the <[Next Counter]> to the name.
Make sure the Number Style is set to 01,02,03
Make sure the Starting number is correct. In this case it should be 1.
Click OK.
Click Next.
For the Sheet Set select Add to an Existing Sheet Set, and click on the ellipsis button (three dot button)
to the right of this field.
Browse to project 87654321, SheetsPlan folder, and select the 87654321.DST file. Click Open.
At the bottom, select the Sheet File Name icon
In the Name field add the sheet name 0225
In the Name Field, place the cursor immediately after the name 0225 (no space between) then
click the Insert button to add the <[Next Counter]> to the name.
In the Name field, place the cursor immediately after the <Next Counter> and type ss.
Make sure the Number Style is set to 01,02,03
Make sure the Starting number is correct. In this case it should be 1.
Click Next.
In the Other Profile View Options area, click Choose Settings, then click the Profile View Wizard.
On the left side, select the General page.
At the bottom of the page select the Show Offset Profiles By Vertically Stacking Profile
Views to turn this option on.
On the left select the Stacked Profile page.
Number of Stacked Profiles should be switched to 2.
Gap between views should be 0
Set all three styles to Storm Sewer.
Click Next.
With the Select Stacked View to Specify Options set to Bottom View, make sure there
is nothing set to Draw.
With the Select Stacked View to Specify Options set to Top View, make sure the Trunk
7-1 profile is set to Draw, the Style is set to PROF Existing, and the Labels are set to
_No Labels. Click Next.
In the Pipe/Pressure Pipe Networks page:
Change the Stacked Profile to Top
Click the Select From Screen icon.
Type P at the command line for individual parts
Left-click each pipe and structure that is part of the trunk sewer and belongs
in the trunk profile view.
Click <ENTER> to end the selection set.
Click Finish for the dialog box. This will return you to the Create Sheets Wizard.


Select a location to the east of the project to place the profile views. Close the Panorama Event
Viewer if it opens.
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-006.mp4
150.160.006 Adjust the Profile Views
The profile views will generally come in too small for the viewport provided. Some minor station and elevation
adjustments may be necessary.
Lengthen the Profile View to Fit the Sheet

Select the 022501 layout tab.
Double click in the profile view viewport to make it active.
Select the top profile view. Remember there are two profile views stacked on top of each other so select higher
rather than lower.
In the green context menu select the Profile View Properties icon.
Select the Stations tab.
Select User Specified Range.
Change the Start Station to -300. Change the End station to add 300 to whatever the end station is
(1361.42 in this case). Click Apply so more adjustments can be made.
Change the Start station to -240, and the End station to 1275. This fits the profile view inside the
viewport so the labels can be read. Click OK.
Select the lower profile view and in the green context ribbon choose Profile View Properties.
Select the Station tab. Select the User Specified Range.
Set the Start and End Stations to the same as the profile view above (-240 to 1275 in this case). Click
OK.
Adjust the Elevation of the Profile Views

In the 022501 layout tab, make sure the viewport is (still) active (double click inside it if it is not).
Select the top profile view. Remember there are two profile views stacked on top of each other so select higher
rather than lower.
In the green context ribbon click on the Profile View Properties icon.
Open the Elevations tab.
Make note of the height value. It is grayed out, but whatever changes you make you need that value to be the
same as it is at the start. In this case the value is 25.
Change the Minimum elevation to a lower value to push the profile view and the pipes displayed upward. Change
this to a higher number if you need to push the view and pipes down. In this case 750 is appropriate.
Repeat this step until the view and the structures appear in the view properly.
In the Maximum field change the value until the Height field reads what it did at the beginning. In this case 775 is
necessary.
At the top of the profile view there is an elevation label that we need to remove (half off the page). To do this
change the Maximum elevation to 0.01 less than what it is now. In this case it will be 774.99.
7:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-007.mp4
150.160.007 Create Profile Views for the Storm Laterals
You will be placing profile views for the laterals below the overall profile view for the trunk.
Create Profile Views

Switch to the Model tab, and pan to the stacked profile view.
Check the lowest elevation grid line for the top profile view. This elevation will become necessary in a future step.
In this case it is 750.
Select the lower of the stacked profile views.
In the green context ribbon select the Profile View Properties button.
In the Elevation tab, in the User Specified Height make sure the elevations match the top stacked view.
In this case they are Minimum of 750 and maximum of 775.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Profile & Section Views panel, select the Profile View drop down and choose
Create Profile View.
In the General page:
Select the alignment of the lateral for this view. In this case its Lateral 1B-1A.
Set the profile view style to Storm Sewer.
In the Profile View Height set the Profile View Height option to User Defined.

Set the Minimum elevation to the lowest elevation of the top profile view. In this case it is 750.
Set the Maximum elevation to the same top elevation as the top profile view. In this case that is
775.
In the Profile Display Options page, make sure that the Labels are set to _No Labels
In the Pipe/Pressure Network page check mark Select for the Storm-10yr network.
Uncheck Show Only Parts.. in the lower left.
Uncheck the Select option for the Storm-10yr network.
Individually select the lateral pipes and structures for the first lateral profile you wish to display.
In this case we have done the 1A-1 and 1B-1 laterals.
Individually select the structures for the first lateral. In this case they should be 1, 1A and 1B.
Click Next.
At the top of the Data Bands page Change the Select Band Set to No Display.
Click Create Profile View.
Place the profile view somewhere near where the profile view will ultimately be placed.
Select the Profile View grid and select Profile View Properties.
In the Station tab set the User Specified Range to be just longer than the actual data. In this case that is -20 for
the Start, and 75 for the End. Click OK.
Remove Profile View Band

Select the laterals profile view grid.
In the green context ribbon select Profile View Properties.
In the Bands tab click the Import Band Set.
Choose the No Display option. Click OK.
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-008.mp4
150.160.008 Create Pipe Network Labels
Place the Pipe Network Plan Labels

Select the layout tab 022501.
Double click in the top plan viewport to access the model.
Select on one of the pipe network parts. Either pipe or structure doesnt matter.
In the green context ribbon, Labels & Tables panel, click the Add Labels drop-down and choose Add Pipe
Network Labels.
In the Add Labels dialog:
Change the Label Type to Entire Network Plan.
Set the Pipe Label Style to PLAN Storm Multiple Arrows.
Set the Structure Label Style to Structure Desc Circle Left.
Click the Add button, then select one of the parts of the network.
Select the structure labels and grip-edit move them to locations that are readable and appropriate.
Several of the structures have labels that are in tight locations.
Select the labels that need to be flipped, right-click and choose Properties.
In the Structure Label Properties change the Structure Label Style to Structure Desc Circle Right.
Grip-edit move these labels to be appropriately placed.
Repeat as necessary to place all of the labels appropriately.
When finished click Close on the Add Labels dialog box.
10:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-009.mp4
150.160.009 Fix Structure Styles
Select on the end wall structure, right-click and select Structure Properties.
From the Information tab change the style to Proposed End Wall (Storm Sewer).
Click OK.
Create Pipe Network Labels
Place the Pipe Network Profile Labels

In the 022501 layout tab, activate the profile view viewport by double clicking inside of it.
Network Labels.


Change the Label Type to Single Part Profile.
Set the Pipe Label Style to PROF Storm.
Set the Structure Label Style to Structure Profile.
Click Add.
Select on each pipe and structure that needs a label.
Adjust Pipe Labels

Move labels so they are more appropriately placed.
Pipe labels can be shifted along the pipe by the diamond grip point.
Pipe Labels can be dragged and dropped with a leader if you select the square grip point.
Structure labels can be individually adjusted by selecting on the label.
Select the diamond grip point and adjusting the distance of the label line.
Add Pipe Invert Labels

Network Labels.
Set the Pipe Label Style to Invert - End.
Set the Structure Label Style to Rim Elevation.
Click Add.
Select on each pipe and structure that needs a label.
Check the label elevation, and which end of the pipe it is actually labeling (start and end are drafting terms, not
downslope flow).
Set the Pipe Label Style to Invert - Start.
Click Add.
Adjust the Invert Elevation Labels

Select on an invert elevation label.
Use the diamond grip to slide the label to the edge of the structure.
Use the Nearest OSNAP to snap to the edge of the structure.
Grab the labels square grip point and drag the text away from the structure.
Grab the labels plus shaped grip point to add a vertex to the leader line.
Use the Endpoint OSNAP to snap this new vertex to the pipe invert where it meets the structure.
Repeat for each pipe invert elevation label.
Adjust the Rim Elevation Labels

Select the rim elevation label.
Use the rhombus (diamond) grip point to drag the label straight up from the rim location.
In the labels grip points select the rhombus grip point to adjust the leader location slightly to the side.
With the rim elevation label selected right-click and choose Label Properties.
In the Label Is Pinned field set to True.
Grab the rim elevation labels square grip point and drag the label to the side to a more appropriate location.
9:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-010.mp4
150.160.010 Place the Elevation Labels in the Lateral Profile View
Place the Elevation Labels

Go to the Model tab.
Zoom to the lateral profile view.
Select on a pipe or structure.
From the green context ribbon, select the Add Labels drop down, then select Add Pipe Network Labels
In the Add Labels dialog, switch the Label Type to Single Part Profile.
Set the Pipe Labels to PROF Storm style.
Set the Structure Labels to Structure Profile style
Click Add.
Click on each pipe and structure.
In the Add Labels dialog
Switch the Pipe Labels to the Invert End style
Switch the Structures to Rim Elevation style
Click Add.
Select on each pipe, and on each structure.
In the Add Labels dialog switch the Pipe labels to Invert Start style.
Click Add, then select each pipe.
Adjust the Structure Rim Elevation Label Locations

Select the structure number label.
Grab the top grip point and drag the label to a better location.
Select the structure Rim Elevation labels, click the square grip point and drag them straight up from the rim
location.
Grab the rhombus (diamond) grip point for each structure rim elevation label, and adjust the leader line
slightly off to the side.
With all of the structure rim elevation labels selected, right-click and choose Label Properties.
In the Label is Pinned field, set to TRUE.
Select the square grip point for the rim elevation labels and shift them where they are appropriate.
Adjust the Label Locations

Select on the Structure labels that may need to have their position adjusted.
Select the top rhombus (diamond) grip point and adjust the label location appropriately.
Select the rim elevation labels and adjust them straight up from the rim location. Leave these for later position
adjustment.
Click on any pipe labels that are tool long for the pipe they are labelling.
Use the square grip point to drag the label to a more appropriate location
Select the Pipe Invert elevation labels, and use the square grip point to drag them away from the pipe.
Identify which label should go to which side of the pipe, based on elevation.
Select the first invert elevation label.
Use the diamond grip point to drag the label, and Nearest OSNAP to the structure.
Repeat or the other invert elevation labels.
Select on the invert elevation labels, and click the plus shaped grip point in the middle of the leader.
Use End Point OSNAP to snap the new leader bend to the pipe invert at the structure.
Repeat for each invert elevation label.
Move Lateral Profile Grid to Sheet Profile Location
Move the Profile Grid

Select the lateral profile view.
Use the grip point to move the profile grid.
Use the Nearest OSNAP to snap the profile view grip point to the bottom of the Trunk profile view grid.
Adjust the Pinned Labels

Select the rim elevation labels.
In the green context ribbon select Toggle Label Pin. If all of the labels are selected this will pin all of the
rim elevation labels.
Select the square grip point of a rim elevation label and adjust it appropriately.
Repeat for each rim elevation label.
Select each label and use the square grip point to move it to a more appropriate location. Finer label placement
can happen in the layout tab through the viewport so that it looks more appropriate on the sheet.
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-011.mp4
150.160.011 Final Sheet Cleanup
Move Profile Grids Below Pipe Network

In the Model tab, select the profile view grids.
Right-click and choose Display Order Options, Choose Send to Back..

Place and Rotate North Arrow

In the Model draw a line near the north end of the profile view frame.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, select the Line command, Line function.
Turn on the Ortho status option (<F8> or from the status bar).
Draw a line near the top inside of the frame
In the 022501 layout tab zoom to the top of the plan viewport.
Turn on the OSNAP End Point from the status bar.
Select the North Arrow block.
Grab the grip point and move the North Arrow near the line that was drawn on model.
Use the End Point OSNAP to snap to the left end of the line.
With the north arrow block still selected right-click and chose Rotate.
Select the left end of the line as the rotation point.
At the command line type R for reference.
Select the bottom of the north arrow block then select the top of the north arrow block.
Select on the right end of the line to rotate the north arrow correctly.
Double-click inside the plan view port to make it active. Select the line that was drawn in model.
Click the <Delete> key to erase it.
Double-click outside the viewport to close the active viewport.
150.170 Sign block fundamentals Section updated: 4/13/2015

2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-001.mp4
150.170.001 Where can Sign Blocks be found
Sign blocks can be found on the Tool Palette and the Design center.
Getting Blocks from the Tool Palette

On the home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, select the Tool Palette Icon.
On the gray side bar of the Tool Palette, rt. Click select WisDOT Manage, on the flyout select Wis-Signs
Getting blocks from the Design center

On the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes Panel flyout, select the Design Center Icon (Ctrl+2 or type DC in the
command line) Navigate to C:\wisdot\stnd\c3d14\blocks. Select block and place in paperspace.
5:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-002.mp4
150.170.002 How to use Dynamic Blocks
Select the block, select the down arrow grip (visibility state)
Blocks contain multiple visibility states. Each visibility state changes the layer (inside the block definition) and the
color so to plot correctly.
Sign Blocks in Paper Space

Sign blocks should be placed in paper space as they are scaled correctly and can be manipulated on each sheet
individually
Sign Blocks in Model Space

Sign blocks can be placed in paper space. This option come with several drawbacks including rotation and
placement.
4:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-003.mp4
150.170.003 How to use blocks with attributes
Double click on attribute text to bring up the Attribute Editor dialog.
With the block selected, attributes can be accessed in the Properties dialog.
150.180 Signing plan sheets Section updated: 4/13/2015

5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-180-001.mp4
150.180.001 Open the Existing plan sheet drawing
From the Applicaton menu, select open
Navigate to C:\WisDOT\Design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan folder, select 023201-ps.dwg, click open.

Creating the Permanent Sign Sheets

From Output tab of the ribbon, Plan production panel, select Create Sheets.
For Layout Creation set to All layouts in current drawing,
Change the Layout Name so it reads <[Next Counter(CP)]>,
Click the Edit Layout Name button to change the single digit to double digit for the counter and check that
the counter is starting at 1 of 1,
Click OK.
Select the 023201.dst.
Hint: If there is not a sheet set already associated with the project refer to video 150.020.001
Change the sheet name to 0232<[Next Counter(CP)]-ps.
10:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-180-002.mp4
150.180.002 Add Permanent Signing using Tool Palette (WisDOT Manage)
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_SGN layer to be current
Hint: select the Permanent Signs filter to sort out unnecessary layers
Switch to Model space
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, select Tool Palettes (Ctrl+3)
Change UCS to align with view frame\paper space view
On the View tab of the ribbon, Coordinates panel, select UCS object command
Select view frame border as the object
Change View (model space) to orient with object
On the View tab of the ribbon, Coordinates panel, select small arrow next to Coordinates (UCS Properties)
On the settings tab of the UCS dialog box, check "Update view to plan when UCS is changed"
Click OK
Select World from the Named UCS combo control dropdown,
Select UCS object command
Select view frame border as the object
Rt click on the gray side bar of the tool palette, select WisDOT Manage, select wissigns,
Select Wis-Signs M tab
Select M1-6, Place on sheet in paper space, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE-2N,
Double click block to open annotation, type 25 for Value, and click ok.
Copy M1-6, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL-2N.
Switch to Paper space Layout 11,
Double click in the viewport,
On the tool palette select Wis-Signs R1-R3 tab,
Select R1-1, Place in model view near intersection, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE,
Copy R1-1, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL
5:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-180-003.mp4
150.180.003 Create a Legend on the Sheet (optional)
Some offices and/or projects use a legend to describe the blocks shown in the sheet.
Place the Legend Title

Annotate tab, Text panel, set the style to Legend.
Annotate tab, Text panel, choose the MTEXT icon.
In the sheet select a point then select a second point to create a text editing box.
In the Text Editor ribbon, Formatting panel, select the U icon to underline this text.
Type LEGEND. Click outside the text editor to end the text creation.
Place the Blocks in the Legend

Open the Tool Palette if it has been closed (Home tab, Palettes panel, Toolpalette icon).
Select and drop the blocks from the WisDOT Manage, Wis-Signs Tool Palette tabs representing blocks
used in your file.
Alternately the block previously used in paper space for ech sheet can be copied to the legend.
Line them up under the legend text.
Place the Description Text in the Legend


Click the MTEXT tool.
Select two points to create a text editor box to the right side of the blocks.
Type in the appropriate description. Click outside the text editor box to end the text creation.
Select the text, right-click, Basic Modify tools, Copy.
Left click text locations next to each block.
Double click on each text to edit the text to what is descriptive of the block.
150.190 Staged signing plan sheets Section updated: 4/13/2015

3:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-001.mp4
150.190.001 Creating the Staged Sign Sheets
From Output tab of the ribbon, Plan production panel, select Create Sheets.
For Layout Creation set to All layouts in current drawing.
Change the Layout Name so it reads 0260<[Next Counter(CP)]>-s1.
the counter is starting at 1 of 1.
Select N for the north arrow block.
Select the 023201.dst.
Hint: If there is not a sheet set already associated with the project refer to video 150.020.001
Change the sheet file name to 0260<[Next Counter(CP)]-s1.
the counter is starting at 1 of 1.
2:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-002.mp4
150.190.002 Edit xref block as existing signage
On the home tab of the ribbon, layers panel, select layer properties
Use the layer filters to select only the 023201-ps xref layers,
Scroll to the P_SGN_Text, freeze this layer
Scroll to the P_SGN_Cell, change the viewport plot style to existing
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-003.mp4
150.190.003 Add Permanent Signing using Tool Palette (WisDOT Manage)
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_SGN layer to be current
Hint: select the Permanent Signs filter to sort out unnecessary layers
Switch to Layout tab 026008-s1
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, select Tool Palettes (Ctrl+3)
Rt click on the gray side bar of the tool palette, select WisDOT Manage, select wissigns,
Select Wis-Signs M tab
Select M1-6, Place on sheet in paper space, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE-2N,
Double click block to open annotation, type 25 for Value, and click ok.
Copy M1-6, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL-2N
Select Wis-Signs R1-R3 tab
Select R1-1, Place on sheet in paper space, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE,
Copy R1-1, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL
Module 160 Dressing up drawings

160.010 Styles, labels, and tables Section updated: 7/1/2010
12:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-010-001.mp4
160.010.001 Styles
Style Labels
Annotation Labels
Tables

160.020 Importing PDF and XLS files Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-020-001.mp4
160.020.001 Insert (PDF) and Paste (XLS)
160.020.002
160.030 Working with spatially referenced DWG, image, and GIS files Section updated: 10/1/2012
160.030.001 Assign coordinate system to active DWG and any DWG files to be attached
Click on Application Menu... Drawing Utilities... Drawing Settings.

In the Drawing Settings dialog box, go to the Units and Zone tab.
In the zone area at the bottom of the tab, change the category to "USA, Wisconsin".
Change the available coordinate system to the one desired. Make sure that the units are set correctly.
Click OK.
If other DWG files are to be georeferenced, repeat this process for all DWG used to be used.
Open the Map task pane
The rest of the commands required to attach files correctly georeferenced are part of Civil 3Ds Map functionality.
These commands can be found in the "Planning and Analysis" workspace, but that workspace does not contain the
Tool space. Therefore, open the Map task pane to add required functionality to the "Civil 3D" workspace.
At the command prompt, type "MAPWSPACE + Enter. Press Enter at the next prompt to set the task pane on.
The Task Pane should be visible.
The rest of the commands can all be found in the same area, but have slightly different options depending on what
type of file is being attached.
Attach DWG
In the Map Task Pane, make sure that Display Manager tab is active.
Click Data... Add Drawing Data... Attach Source Drawings. This will open the Define/Modify Drawing Set
dialog box.
Click the Attach... button. This will open the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box.
The first time this dialog is used, an alias will need to be set for any drives other than the C drive.
Set N drive as an alias
In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, click the Create/Edit Aliases button.
It can be found two buttons to the right of the drive letter dropdown. This will open the Drive Alias Administration
dialog box.
For Drive Alias Details
Drive Alias: N
Actual Path: \\wis31fp1\n3public (This is an example in drive for the Wisconsin Rapids office. A users
individual in drive can be found by looking at the path after the N drive in My Computer in Windows
Explorer.)
Click the Add button. The alias letter and path should appear in the Drive List window.
Click the Close button.
Select the alias letter where the DWGs are in the Look in: window.
Navigate to the folder with the DWGs. Highlight the files to attach. Click the Add button.
When all of the DWGs have been selected, click the OK button. This will return the user to the Defined/Modify

Drawing Set dialog box.
Click on the drawings to be attached, or click the Select All button. Click OK.
The files may not display immediately. If this occurs, in the Task Pane, click the Map Explorer tab. The attached
files should show up under Drawings. Right-click on the file name and click "Quick View" to view the file.
Attaching files
In the Map Task Pane, click Data... Connect To Data... this will open the Data Connect dialog box. This dialog box
provides a number of different data connections to different file types. The one that will be most common will be
Add the Raster Image or Surface
Add SHP Connection
The "Add ArcGIS Connection" is for ESRIs personal geo-database file format (*.gdb). This connection requires
ArcMAP be installed on the computer to work.
How to use a data connection
All types of data connections work in a similar manner. The following instructions will use a shape file for an
example. Data connections to local files can either be at the folder level or at the file level. A folder full of shape
files can be managed through one data connection.
Click Add SHP Connection.

Connection name: Set this to something meaningful. "Dane County Tax Parcels for instance.
Source file or folder: Click either the Open File or Browse Folder buttons to navigate to the correct location.
This field will then fill in with the correct information.
When the source is populated, the Connect button will be enabled. Click the Connect button. This will open
the AddDatatoMap dialog.
The available files will display in a window. If Civil 3D can read the files projection information, it will show up here
under Coordinate System. If a coordinate system is not found,<unknown > will be displayed.
To set the coordinate systems for files, click on the file to set under Schema, then click the Edit Coordinate
Systems button. This will open the Edit Spatial Contexts dialog box.
Click on the files to set the coordinate system for and click the Edit... button. This will open the Coordinate
System Library dialog box.
In the Category: window, select the appropriate category of coordinate systems. For example, USA,
Wisconsin.
In the Unit: window, select the appropriate unit. For example, US Survey Foot.
In the main window, click the coordinate system to be assigned to the referenced file.
Click the Select button. This will bring back the Edit Spatial Contexts dialogbox.
Click the OK button. This will bring back the AddMaptoData dialog. The correct coordinates system should
show up in the main window.
Click the Add to Map button. The contents of the file should show up in model space and also show up in the
Task Pane. Raster images will also show up in the AutoCAD reference dialog.
Working with GIS data

This section will not attempt to go into all of the different options available to work with GIS data in Civil 3D. In
Task Pane... Display Manager, right-click on any data layer to see all of the possible options associated with it.
From this right-click menu, data display, selection, labeling, data table viewing, and other options can be accessed.
160.035 Turning off frames on overlapping images Section updated: 1/15/2013
160.035.001 If frames are showing up on overlapping attached image or PDFs, the following settings will turn them off:
There are two settings that control frames for images. They are FRAME and IMAGEFRAME.

On the command line type FRAME <enter>, 0 <enter>
If that doesnt shut off the frames , type IMAGEFRAME <enter>, 0 <enter>
That should turn off the frames and set them so they dont plot.
160.040 WisDOT tool palettes Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-040-001.mp4
160.040.001 WisDOT tool palettes
160.050 Exercise DD0100 - Import table on layout Section updated: 7/1/2010

2:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-050-001.mp4
160.060 Exercise - Annotate cross sections Section updated: 7/1/2011

3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-060-001.mp4
160.060.001 Modify and set Section View Group settings including annotations
Delete project data and download and unzip this exercise.
Open file C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan\090101_xs.dwg
Set section view group bottom to top

From Prospector, right-click "Section View Group - 1" and click Properties...
Under Group Plot Style, click "By Page Top to Bottom". Change to "By Page Bottom to Top". Click OK. Click
OK.
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-060-002.mp4
160.060.002 Annotate section station labels
From Prospector, click "Section View Group - 1"
Click one of the sections in the list below. Press Ctrl+A to select all sections.
Right-click the selected sections and click "Select". Press Ctrl+1 to view the Properties window of all
sections.
Change Description to "F"
Change Style to "Sheets 1 IN 20 FT Horiz 20 FT Vert"
Press Esc to clear the selection
Description can also be entered in Create Section View workflow.

Home tab Profile & Section Views ribbon Section Views button Create Multiple Views.
Create Multiple Section Views dialog

General
Description: F
Module 170 Reports

The segments in this module use files found within the zip files linked to sections. If you want to do the exercises
in the same file as the instructor, do the following prior to starting the section:
Extract the zip file to the following local location. C:\WisDOT\design\c3d
After extraction, there should be a folder called "12345678". This is a Civil 3D project folder.
You will be able to create/open files in the same locations as the instructor.

170.010 Civil 3D stock reports Section updated: 8/24/2012

Summary of stock Civil 3D reports
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/170/rpt-sum-stock.xls
11:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-001.mp4
170.010.001 WisDOT C3D Reports worksheet explained 0:00
StockReportSummary worksheet explained 1:46
Alignment_Curve Report Explained 2:32

Setup Project data for Reporting 4:00
Pick the Correct drawing file 6:44
Run the Report from Toolbox 7:55
Export to XML Report dialog 8:15
HTML Report Review 9:00
Save the CivilReport.HTML file 9:48
Summary, things to remember 11:34
14:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-002.mp4
170.010.002 Stock alignment reports
Alignment Design Criteria verfication Report 0:20

Open Drawing File 0:39
Prespector Toolbox - Run Report 1:32
Fill Dialog 1:50
Save File 2:38
Review Report 3:30
General Legal Description for Alignment 4:16

Skip this
Incremental Stationing Report 4:30

Select Alignment
Start/End Sta 5:10
Save to 5:20
Review Report 5:40
PI Station Report 6:12

Select Alignment 6:30
Start End 6:54
Save to 7:05
Review Report 7:20
Stakeout Alignment 7:34

Points 7:40
Store the Points 7:56
Insert Points Manually 8:30
Review Points Collection 8:56
Run Report 9:04
Select Points 9:40
Stationing start/end 10:00
Save to 10:30
Review Report 10:48
Alignment Station and Curve 11:25

Alignment Station and Curve Report requirements 11:35
Run Report 12:00
Review Report 12:50
Compare running without all check boxes on 14:00
10:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-003.mp4
170.010.003 Stock corridor reports
Corridor Reports Summary 0:20
Feature Line Report 0:40

Switch Project 1:00
Run Report 1:20
Corridor Points 2:18
Report Name and Location 2:50
Create Report 3:38
Review Report 3:50
Feature Line Report - Corridor Links

Corridor Links 4:24
Link Code 4:42
Review Report 5:06
Feature Line Report - Surface Report 5:25

Sample Line Group 5:36
Select Surface 5:46
Review Report 5:06
Slopestake Report 6:36

Requirements 7:05
Create some Sample Lines 7:14
Sampling Surfaces 7:45
Station Range 8:12
Run Slopestake Report 9:00
Create Report 10:06
Review Report 10:28
Summary 10:36
9:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-004.mp4
170.010.004 Stock parcel reports
Parcel Report Summary 0:10
Parcel Area Report 0:40

Generic Legal Description 1:06
Inverse Report 1:28
Report Review 2:20
Save as 3:04
Metes and Bounds 3:38

Report Review 3:56
Save as 4:08
Pacel Area in CSV 4:12

Report Review 4:44
Save As 4:56

Parcel Map Check 5:20

Description 5:32
POB 6:00
Save As 6:32
Report Review 7:00
Parcel Volume Report 7:34

Surveyors Certificate 7:56
Run Report 8:04
Report Review 8:32
Save As 9:04
7:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-005.mp4
170.010.005 Stock point reports
Point Report Summary worksheet 0:10

Points in CSV 0:35
Switch to Corridor-STH25-4thAve. DWG file 0:40
Report Review 1:54
Save as 3:10
Points List 3:21

Report Review 3:38
Save as 3:54
Radial Stakeout 4:00

Allow Blocked content 4:36
Report Review 5:30
Save as 5:45
Station Offset Report 6:12

Report Review 6:54
Save as 7:18
4:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-006.mp4
170.010.006 Stock profile reports
Profile Report Summary worksheet 0:10

Incremental Station Elevation Difference 0:25
Report Review 0:48
Incremental Stationing Report 1:12

DWG File Data Referencing a Profile 1:28
Report Review 2:20
Profile Design Criteria Check does not work

Profiles in CSV 2:40
Report Review 3:20
Save as 4:00
PVI Station 4:08

Report Review
PVI Station and Curve

Report does not work

Vertical Curve Report

Report does not work
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-007.mp4
170.010.007 Stock surface reports
Surface Report Summary worksheet 0:20

Select Earthwork-STH25BEstFit.DWG for surface reporting 1:45
Surface Points to CSV 2:21
Report Review 2:48
Surface Report 3:12

Report Review 3:43
170.020 WisDOT custom reports Section updated: 8/24/2012

Summary of WisDOT Civil 3D reports
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/170/rpt-sum-wisdot.xls
21:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-020-001.mp4
170.020.001 WisDOT report summary, alignment and point reports
ReportSummaryWisDOT.xls review 0:20

Alignments - SuperElevation Transition Report
Select DWG (Earthwork-STH25-BestFit.DWG) 1:10
Running Reports if Toolbox does not work 2:00
Command: Netload 2:20
Select Reports.DLL 2:40
Command: SETransitions 3:20
Report Super Transitions at even stations
Save as 4:05
Report Review 5:00
Run SETransitions Again 5:35

Report Slope Change
Save as 5:50
Review Report 6:25
Parcel -Legal Descriptions Report

Switch to Corridor-STH25-4thAve.DWG 7:00
Run LegalDescriptions command 7:20
Custom Header 7:50
Save AS 8:30
Review Review 8:50
Points Reports Summary (ReportSummaryWisDOT.xls) 9:00

Points - Describe Points Report 11:16
Run DescribePoints command 11:36
Create Points 11:50
Run DescribePoints command 13:05
Individual Points selection
Review Report 13:45
Run DescribePoints command 14:10 (use spacebar to repeat last)

Offset Alignment selection
Save as 14:40
Rerun Report because Offset limits were too limited 15:00
Rerun Report because Offset limits were too limited 15:20

Review Report 15:40
Points - Stakeout - From Remote Point

Run Stakeout command 16:00
From Remote Point 16:20
Review Report 17:00
Points - Stakeout - Even Stations

Review Report 17:30
Points - Stakeout - Offset Alignment

Review Report 18:06
Points - SOE
Run SOE command 18:40
Do Not Select Boundary Limits 19:25
Review Report 19:54
Points - Course Table

Run CourseTable command 20:40
Review Report 21:20
11:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-020-002.mp4
170.020.002 WisDOT report summary, profile and corridor reports
ReportSummaryWisDOT.xls review 0:20

Reported from Corridor-STH25-4thAve.dwg
Profile - Profile Grades
Run ProfileGrades command 1:21
Station Limits 1:50
Offsets 2:20
Save as 3:40
Open Report from Windows Explorer 5:00
Review Report 5:20
Change File to EArthwork-STH25BestFit.DWG

Corridor - Topsoil Computations
Summary 6:40
Explain Differences betwwen Sample Line Group and Station Spacing 7:16
Run Topsoil command 7:40
Please PARDON HILL FARMS announcements!
Select Boundary Limits 8:30
Real Offset inputs 9:30
Save as 9:40
Review Report 10:10
16:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-020-003.mp4
170.020.003 WisDOT Feature Line reports and Import Station Offsett Depth file
Reported from Earthwork-STH25BestFit.DWG

Feature Line Report - Offset from Alignment
Summary 0:20
Open Surface-STH25-Refinement.DWG 2:30
Netload Reports.dll 3:17
Featureline command 3:30
No Alignments
Data Reference 4thAve 4:00
Run FeatureLine command 4:10
Report Offset from Alignment - 4:40
Report 4:45
Feature Line Report - Feature Line

Run FeatureLine command 5:05
Report feature line 5:14
Review Report 5:30
Summary 6:00
Import Station Offset Depth file 6:30

Create a New DWG file 7:00
Save As Exist-Sub.DWG 7:20
Create Reference to 4th Ave alignment 7:40
Create SOD file (4thAveSub.txt) 9:30
Save File as 4thAveSub.SOD
Netload Importsoe.dll 11:20
Run ImportSOE Command 11:30
Create Reference to EXIST surface 11:58
Rerun ImportSOE command 12:30
Import 13:30
Create MarshSurface 13:56
Add Point Group 14:12
Add Point Group to Surface 14:56
Change Marsh Surface style 15:10
Review Surface 15:3
170.030 Station Offset Elevation (SOE) file import Section updated: 8/26/2012
170.030.001 Creating SOE files
170.030.002 Importing SOE files
170.040 SOE file export Section updated: 8/27/2012
170.050 Superelevation Reports Section updated: 1/13/2013

5:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-050-001.mp4
170.050.001 Export Superelevation Transition Data to Excel
This segment will demonstrate how to create a Data Shortcut reference of the baseline alignment and then create a
superelevation transition data report by using the export to CSV tool in the Superelevation tabular Editor.
Create drawing from template

Create a new drawing using the wisDOT12.dwt template.
Save the drawing in the projects Construction folder.
Create the Alignment Data Shortcut Reference
Navigate in the Toolspace, on the Prospector tab and expanding the Data Shortcuts collection. Select the
alignment under the Alignment/Centerline Alignments collection, then right-click and select Create Reference.
The default alignment style and Alignment label set will work fine for visual reference.
Select OK
Save the drawing.
Export Superelevation Transition Data in the Superelevation Tabular Editor to an Excel file
Select the alignment from the drawing
Select Superelevation in the contextual ribbon
Select View Tabular Editor button
The Superelevation Tabular panorama displays all the superelevation transition data for each
curve.
In the panorama select the Export superelevation data button and save the data as a CSV file in the
Construction subfolder of the project.
Review the CSV file data and format in Excel.
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-050-002.mp4
170.050.002 WisDOT Toolbox, Superelevation Transition Macro
This segment will demonstrate how to use the WisDOT Superelevation Transition Macro to create an Excel file
using the Even Station Increment report setting and then the Slope Change report setting.

Create a new drawing using the wisdot12.dwt template.
Save the drawing in the projects Construction folder.
Create the Alignment Data Shortcut Reference
alignment under the Alignment/Centerline Alignments collection, then right-click and select Create Reference.
The default alignment style and Alignment label set will work fine for visual reference.
Select OK
Save the drawing.
Create an Excel file using the Even Station Increment Report Setting
On the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, under the WisDOT Toolbox collection, Reports, expand the Alignment
Reports, right-click on SuperElevation Transition and select Execute.
Select the alignment(s) in the tabular area, or use the Select button to pick from the drawing.
There are two report options. One is to report by even station increments and the other is to report by
increments of cross slope change.
To create an even station increment report, select the Use Even Stationing under Report Settings, and
supply the desired Station Increment.
To create a cross slope change report, select the Use Slope Change under Report Settings, and supply
the desired Slope Change frequency.
Choose which Lane and Shoulder section locations you wish to include in the report.
Supply a name for the Output file and save it in the project construction subfolder.
There is an option to Auto open report upon completion .
Press the Create Report.
Review the CSV file data and format in Excel.
170.080 Inquries used in construction Section updated: 1/13/2013

15:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-001.mp4
170.080.001 Cutting Quick Cross Sections
This segment will demonstrate how to use the Quick Cross Section tool, and the Quick Profile command to create
quick cross sections. These tools can cut cross sections across multiple surfaces, so at least one tin surface must
exist in the drawing.
The Quick Cross Section tool creates a temporary cross sections view for instant viewing, with no select, or data
extraction capabilities the view will disappear once any key is pressed.
Note: The Transportation Extension must be installed. This is an add-on available from the Autodesk
Subscription site.
Open or create the drawing that has the project alignment and surface you wish to query the data from, along with
any location reference objects.
From the Toolbox tab on the Toolspace, navigate to Transportation Extension Utilities, expand the Cross Section
list, select Quick Cross Sections, and press Enter to execute the command.
Select the surface (multiple surfaces may be selected) and press the space bar
This tool has two cross section options;
3p, which creates a single cross section by selecting 2 points as the cutting plan, and the last point
to define the direction the cross section is viewed from.
Multiple, option allows the user to create a path for multiple sections by selecting points, then
prompts for frequency, and left and right widths, to create multiple section along the defined path.
Note: The section(s) may be viewed using zoom and pan only.
Notice once the mouse is clicked or a key pressed, the cross section view no longer exists.
The Quick Profile command, under Home, Create Design, Profile, can use the following objects as the cutting
plane to build a cross section; 2D or 3D lines or polylines, Lot lines, feature lines, Survey figures, and a series of
points. This command creates a temporary Profile View and samples selected surfaces.
Select an object listed above as the cutting plane, or select a series of points in the model space.
Select the surfaces to sample, along with a visual style in the dialog.
Select the Profile view Style.
Press OK and pick a point in the drawing area to place the Quick Profile.
Note: the Quick Profile view and surface profiles created do not disappear once the mouse is clicked or a
key pressed. The Quick profile remains as an object until the save drawing command is used.
The elevation data can be extracted from the Quick Profile using the same tools as a profile. Use the
Profile Station and Elevation at Point option in the Inquiry Tool under Profile.
When using an object as the cutting plane, the relationship between the object and the quick profile is dynamic.
This means the object can be moved, stretched, vertices added or subtracted and the quick profile updates the
profiles and view automatically and instantaneously.
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-002.mp4
170.080.002 Extracting Grades from the Roadway Model
Open or create the drawing that has the project surfaces you wish to query the data from.
Navigate to and select the Inquiry Tool found on the Analyze ribbon tab and expand the Surface list.
Select Surface Elevation and Grade at Point
Select the surface in the pull down list next to Surface Name
Select point by coordinate
Press the Object Select icon next to Point Coordinate to pick the location in the drawing area, or type the
coordinates into the textbox.
Notice a temporary slope area symbol shows the direction of the grade at the picked location.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box
can also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click,
Copy to Clipboard option.
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-003.mp4
170.080.003 Extracting Elevations from X-sections
This segment will demonstrate how to use the Inquiry Tool to extract Elevation data from Sections and Section
Views.
Open the drawing that has the project sections you wish to query the data from.
To extract elevation information in a section view that is not on a surface use the Section View Offset and

Elevation at Point option by selecting a section view in the drawing area, then select Inquiry on the contextual
ribbon.
Select the Section View Offset and Elevation at Point as the inquiry type.
When prompt to select section view, chose the section from the list or use the Object Select icon to pick the
section view from the drawing area.
Note: pick the grid or the labels of the section view and not the sections.

Press the Object Select icon next to Point Coordinate to pick the location in the section view, or type the
coordinates into the textbox.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box
can also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click,
Copy to Clipboard option.
To extract elevation from a point on a surface section use the Section Offset and Elevation at Point option by
selecting a surface section in a section view, then select Inquiry on the contextual ribbon.
Select the Section Offset and Elevation at Point as the inquiry type.
When prompt to select the section, chose the section from the list or use the Object Select icon to select the
section from one of the section views.
Note: pick the surface section, not the section view.
Select the offset point in a section view by using the Object Select icon next to Offset and selecting the offset
location in a section view. Once a location in the section view has been picked, typing the offsets into the
textbox will produce elevation data along the selected surface section in that section view.
Note: Select inside a different section view to inquiry elevation information about the same surface section
in a different section view.
A different surface section can be selected at any time, or picked from the list.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box can
also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click, Copy to
Clipboard option.
2:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-004.mp4
170.080.004 Extracting Coordinates, Stations and Offsets of any Location
Open or create the drawing that has the project alignment and surface you wish to query the data from.
Navigate to and select the Inquiry Tool found on the Analyze ribbon tab and expand the Alignment list.
Select Offset and Surface Elevation at Point
Select the alignment in the pull down list next to Alignment Name
Select the surface in the pull down list next to Surface Name
There are two option for initially picking the location
Press the Object Select icon next to Point Coordinate to select the location in the drawing area,
or type the coordinates into the textbox
Select point by station
Press the Object Select icon next to Station and select the station location in the drawing area, or
type in the station in the textbox. Then select the offset location in the drawing area, or type the
offset in the textbox.
Notice the pick for the station point, and the pick for the offset point are independent of each
other.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box can
also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click, Copy to
Clipboard option.
170.090 Earthwork finals - borrow pit Section updated: 1/13/2013


11:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-090-001.mp4
170.090.001 Earthwork finals - borrow site
This section will demonstrate three ways to obtain final site volume information and how to create the two surfaces
needed; a Borrow site surface created from point and breakline files, and an existing surface built from a data
reference. This workflow can also be used for almost any earthwork site volume calculations.

Create a new drawing using the wisDOT12.dwt template.
Save the drawing.
Creating the Borrow site surface from an SRV file

Ensure the Final SRV file has been placed into the project folder structure.
(Refer to WisDOT project folder structure for recommended folder structure)
The SRV file contains point and break line information that will be used to create a surface.
Run Convert SRV to PNT/FLT macro from the WisDOT toolbox, in the Toolbox tab of the Toolspace.
(The Autocad 2012 VBA Enabler needs to be installed for this macro to run)
Respond No to the save dialog that appears at the end of running the macro.
This macro will build point and Breakline/Fault files with extension PNT and FLT in the same folder
location as the original SRV file. These file can now be used as definitions for a surface.
Create a new surface and name it ACME Borrow Site.

Select the Final Top Border as the surface style.
Add Point file definitions to the surface using PENZD (Space Delimited) file format. Press the Plus
icon/button and select the PNT file.
Select break link to file and OK.
Add Breakline definitions to the surface using the From file option and select the FLT file.
Select break link to file and OK
The ACME Borrow Site surface is created. Zoom extents to see the surface.
Save the drawing.
Create the Existing Surface by creating a Data Reference

Exist surface under the Surface collection and right-click and select Create Reference.
Select the EX border surface style for best drawing performance and for visual reference.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site volume using the Composite Volumes tool

Select Analyze>Volume tool, to create a new volume entry.
Select the Exist surface as the base surface and ACME Borrow Site as the comparison surface to be
used.
Notice the cut and fill volumes shown in the panorama are a calculation and do not represent a volume
surface. This data is not saved with the drawing and must be re-calculated once the Composite Volumes
panorama is closed.
This information can be exported to an xml file by using the export button on the top menu of the
composite volume panorama.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site Volume using the Volume Dashboard tool

(This is an add-on for version 2012 and may be downloaded from the Autodesk Subscription Center)
Open the Volume Dashboard from the command line by typing VOLUMEDASHBOARD. This tool can also be
accessed in the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, under the Subscription Extension Manager collection. Expand
Volumes Dashboard Extension for AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 and right-click on Volumes Dashboard for AutoCAD
Civil 3D 2012 and select Execute.
Create a new Volume Surface. Select the Exist surface as the base surface and ACME Borrow Site as the
comparison surface to be used.
Review the cut and fill volumes that are shown in both tabular and graph form on the Dashboard. This
information is derived from a Volume surface. This new volume surface is saved in the drawing.
Generate a Volume Report by selecting the Generate Cut/Fill Report button on the Dashboard.
A report is created for viewing. The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into an excel

worksheet.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site volume from Section areas using the Average End-Area Method
Create an Alignment that extends down the middle of the longest direction of the borrow pit surface.
The alignment should extend past the surface area on both ends.
Create a Sample Line Group from Ribbon>Profile & Section Views>Sample Lines
Select the newly created alignment
Set the data sources to sample in the Create Sample Line Group dialog. Verify the Exist surface and
ACME Borrow Site surface are selected and close dialog.
Create Sample lines by range of stations
Define the swath width and station frequency of sample lines so they extend beyond the width of the borrow
site surface.
Set the sample increments. A 10 increment is appropriate for most sites.
The sample increments are in direct correlation to the desired volume precision.
Select Ok and close the Sample Line Tools dialog.

To add more sample lines for critical location and site irregularities select the sample method At a Station,
then pick on screen the location desired for an additional sample line. Follow the command line prompts for
left and right swath width, then select another location or press enter to quit the command
Note that both these sample line methods create sample lines that are perpendicular to the alignment.
Erase all the Sample lines in the model that do not cross over both surfaces, except for the first sample line
on each end that cuts beyond the ACME Borrow Site surface.
Open the Sample Line Group Properties Dialog by selecting one of the sample lines, then selecting Group
Properties on the contextual ribbon.
In the Material List tab, Click on Import another criteria and use the WisDOT Mass Ordinate
Quantity Takeoff criteria.
Choose <Click here to set all> next to Exist surface and assign the Exist surface.
Choose <Click here to set all> next to Final Datum surface and assign the ACME Borrow Site
surface.
Not all material will be assigned.
Press OK to continue
Set Volume calculation method to Average End Area and click Ok to exit.
The material volumes have now been computed.
On the sample line contextual ribbon, select Generate Volume Report.

Verify the alignment, sample line group, and material list is correct.
Generate Volume Report using the earthwork.xls style sheet.

The cumulative volumes in the report can be compared with the volumes developed using the Volume
Dashboard.
The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into an excel worksheet.
Save the drawing.
170.100 Earthwork finals - project Section updated: 1/13/2013

30:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-100-001.mp4
170.100.001 Earthwork finals - Project
This section will demonstrate two ways to obtain final project cut volume(s) information:
Surface Comparison by creating a Volume Surface
Calculate Average End Area Volumes, using sections along a baseline alignment
For this exercise, a final survey was performed after the base/pavement had been placed. This
workflow can also be used for almost any earthwork project volume calculations.
Create a drawing from the template using wisDOT12.dwt.

Save the drawing.
The subgrade and final survey drawings are to be located in the 3DModelDeliverable folder of the
project. Verify that a Data Shortcut has been created of the following surfaces:
Final survey surface
Existing ground surface
Design subgrade surface
Note: If the final survey was completed prior to base and pavement placement, the subgrade
surface is not needed and the final survey surface can be used as-is without creating a composite
surface.
Create Data References of the Surfaces

Expand the Surfaces list below Data Shortcuts in the Prospector tab on the Toolspace.
Highlight the existing surface,
Right-click and choose Create Reference.
Use the default name and style settings and press OK.
Repeat the previous steps to create a data reference for the all surface needed
Zoom extents if necessary to see the surfaces.
Create the Final Earthwork Composite Surface

Navigate to Surfaces from the Home ribbon and selecting Create Surface.
Name the composite surface something similar to Final Earthwork Composite
Add Final Survey surface definition to the Final Earthwork Composite surface using the Paste tool
Press Surface on the Modify Ribbon above Ground Data.
This will open the default Surface contextual Ribbon.
From Edit Surface select Paste Surface.

Press the space bar to open the dialog box and select the surfaces from a list.
Note: The first surface to select is the main or base surface, and the second surface is the one
to paste onto the base surface.
Highlight the Final Earthwork Composite surface in the list, as the base surface, then press OK
Highlight the Final Survey surface in the list, as the surface to paste onto the base surface, then
press OK
Add 3DSurfaceModel-Subgrade surface definition to the Final Earthwork Composite surface

Press Surface on the Modify Ribbon.
This will open the default Surface contextual Ribbon.
From Edit Surface select Paste Surface.

Press the space bar to open the dialog box to select the surfaces from a list.
Highlight Final Earthwork Composite surface in the list, as the base surface, then press OK
Highlight 3DSurfaceModel-Subgrade surface in the list, as the surface to paste, then press OK
Surface Comparison by creating a Volume Surface

Calculate Final Earthwork Volume from Surface Comparisons by Creating a TIN Volume Surface
Press Surface on the Home Ribbon, and select Create Surface.
Set the Type to TIN Volume Surface.
Name: Final Earthwork Volume
Select the Existing surface for the Base Surface.
Select the Final Earthwork Composite surface for the Comparison Surface.
Go to the Surface Properties Statistics tab and review the TIN Volume numbers.
Information here may be copied to the clipboard using the right-click menu for comparison with
the Average End Area calculations.

Create Volume Report using the Volume Dashboard Tool

(This is an add-on for version 2012 and may be downloaded from the Autodesk Subscription Center)
Typing VOLUMEDASHBOARD at the command line to show the dialog.
The Volume Dashboard can be accessed in the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, under the Subscription
Extension Manager collection. Expand Volumes Dashboard Extension for AutoCAD Civil 3D
2012 and right-click on Volumes Dashboard for AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 and select Execute.
Press the Add Volume Surface button.

The first one on the left, and select the Final Earthwork Volume surface.
Select the Final Earthwork Volume surface

Here you can review the cut and fill volumes that are shown in both tabular and graph form and
generate a Volume Report by selecting the Generate Cut/Fill Report button on the Dashboard.
A report is created for viewing. The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into
an excel worksheet.
Matchline Alignments (for end area method)

Matchline alignments should already exist as part of the design process.
Data reference all the matchline alignments for the project, including any side roads into the
drawing.
Highlight each matchline alignment, one at a time in the Prospector tree, right-click and select
Promote. The matchline alignment should be in the Miscellaneous Alignments collection
Verify that each matchline alignment extends beyond the final survey surface and edit the
alignment to extend if necessary, ensuring that the tangent angle is preserved.
For a tee intersection a left and right matchline alignment should exist as a data shortcut within the
project.
Create Sample lines through intersections along the main roadway
When working with the Sample line groups a good practice is to set each surface display style to a
border only or no display style.
Create a Sample Line Group from Home ribbon, Profile & Section Views, Sample Lines
Select the main road centerline alignment.
Verify the Exist surface and Final Composite surface are checked as data sources to sample.
Create Sample lines by range of stations.

Set the From alignment start and the To alignment end settings to False.
Select the Start Station to reveal the select-from-drawing button.

Pick the radius point of the curb return with the lowest Station along the selected alignment.
Select the End Station to reveal the select-from-drawing button.

Pick the radius point of the curb return with the highest Station along the selected alignment.
Set the Left and Right Swath Width; Snap to alignment to be True
Define the left and right swath width target alignment by clicking on the ellipse button to access
the drop down list or use the select-from-drawing button and select the matchline alignment for
each.
Set the Sample Increments to 5 for rural intersections and 2.5 or less for urban areas.
In the Additional Sample Controls, set the At Range Start to True, the At Range End to True,
and the rest of the controls to True.
Select Ok to close, or repeat these steps for other intersections along the alignment.
Create Sample lines through intersections along the crossing roadway

Repeat the same procedures for sample lines through intersections along the main roadway,
selecting the cross road centerline alignment, as well as accompanying matchline alignments for
swath widths
Create Sample Lines along Roadway

Select a Sample Lines from Home ribbon and select the centerline alignment
Verify the Exist surface and Final Composite surface are checked as data sources to sample.
Create Sample lines by range of stations.

Set the From alignment start and the To alignment end settings to False.
Select the Start Station to reveal the select-from-screen button.

Pick the start station of the area to be sampled, this may be the start of the project or it may be
the radius point of the down station intersection.
Select the End Station to reveal the select-from-screen button.

Pick the end station of the area to be sampled, this may be the end of the project or it may be
the radius point of the up station intersection.
Define the swath width and station frequency of sample lines so they extend beyond the border of
the Final Survey surface.

Set the sample increments.
A 50 increment for rural locations, while 25 or less may be appropriate for urban areas.
Under the Additional Sample Controls;

Set the At Range Start to True if the range start is at the beginning of the projectSet the At
Range End to False, if the range end is at the beginning of an intersection area. Set it to True if
the range end is at the end of the project.
Set the rest of the controls to True.
Select Ok and close the Sample Line Tools dialog.
To add more sample lines for critical location and site irregularities select the sample method At a
Station, then pick the location desired for an additional sample line. Follow the command line
prompts for left and right swath width, then select another location or press enter to quit the
command
Both of these sample line methods create sample lines that are perpendicular to the alignment.
In a situation where two baseline somewhat parallel each it may be necessary to use a longitudinal
matchline as a swath width target between the two baselines to ensure the two sample line groups
do not overlap. Some examples of this are divided highway, frontage road, or ramp situations.
Calculate Final Earthwork Volume from Sections using the Average End-Area Method
Open the Sample Line Group Properties Dialog by selecting one of the sample lines, then
selecting Group Properties on the contextual ribbon.
In the Material List tab, Click on Import another criteria and use the WisDOT Mass Ordinate
Quantity Takeoff criteria.
Choose <Click here to set all> next to Exist surface and assign the Existing surface.
Choose <Click here to set all> next to Final Datum surface and assign the Final Earthwork
Composite surface, if created, otherwise assign the final survey surface
Not all material will be assigned.
Press OK to continue
Set Volume calculation method to Average End Area and click Ok to exit.
The material volumes have now been computed.
On the sample line contextual ribbon, select Generate Volume Report.

Verify the alignment, sample line group, and material list is correct.
Generate Volume Report using the earthwork.xls style sheet.

The cumulative volumes in the report can be compared with the volumes developed using the
surface comparison method by creating a volume surface.
The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into an excel worksheet.
Module 180 Project data

180.010 WisDOT standards - Project structure and file naming Section updated: 8/24/2012
WisDOT Project Folder Structure
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct.pdf
WisDOT Multi PS&E Project Folder
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/proj-fldr-struct-multi-pse.pdf
WisDOT Civil 3D Naming Conventions
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/180/c3d-naming-conv.pdf
2:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-001.mp4
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-002.mp4
180.010.002 Base project folder structure
See project folder structure document.
6:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-003.mp4
180.010.003 Folder structure for multiple PS&E
See multi-PSE project folder structure document.
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-004.mp4
180.010.004 Network vs local project storage
3:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-005.mp4

180.010.005 Why segregate project data into many DWGs?
Allows for multiple users to work with different aspects of a project simultaneously
Improves system performance
3:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-006.mp4
180.010.006 Data shortcuts and Xrefs
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-007.mp4
180.010.007 Interobject awareness
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-008.mp4
180.010.008 Interobject awareness 2
6:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-009.mp4
180.010.009 Read-only DWGs
2:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-010.mp4
180.010.010 Avoid renaming files and objects when possible
6:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-011.mp4
180.010.011 Naming conventions
See naming conventions document.
180.020 CAiCE import tools Section updated: 6/25/2013

CAiCE import exercise files
3:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-001.mp4
180.020.001 General items
The workflow to import CAiCE data deals with many different objects in Civil 3D. It is recommended to have
that training before importing CAiCE data.
CAiCE project needs to be unarchived to import data from it.
If you dont know the naming conventions used on the CAiCE project, look for the metadata document in the
project.
Dont bring in all data all at once. Better to run import process multiple times.
Easier to set layers and styles prior to import rather than fixing them later.
Set active layer before import
For survey surface data, if you have items in their original formats (SRV, PAC, CAiCE points and survey
chains), it is better to bring those items in directly to C3D rather than using the CAiCE DTMs. This is because
the surface comes in as a snapshot and you cant see the items that built the surface.
2:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-002.mp4
180.020.002 Unzip CAiCE project
Unzip the project to a folder that has the same name as the zip file.
Look for metadata.doc file.
4:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-003.mp4
180.020.003 Points and survey chains: Convert CAiCE Survey to Text (*.PT4)
Points and survey chains should be brought into a survey database. This is not necessary for design or plat
based points, but it needs to be done for survey chains, survey points should be with the survey chains, and it
is easy to extract and delete the design or plat based points from the survey database.
Create a new file from wisdot12-etopog.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-

files\cas-survey.dwg

Create text file

Toolspace Toolbox CAiCE Tools Import Convert CAiCE Survey to Text (*.PT4)
Select CAS.PT4. Click Open.
Make sure all point types are selected and select all of the survey chains to be processed. Click Next >.
Make sure the destination file format is CAiCE. Create the destination file C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training
\180-020-exercise-files\cas-caice-import.txt. Click Convert.
Cancel the option to import another file.
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-004.mp4
180.020.004 Importing data into a survey database
Home tab Create Ground Data panel Import Survey Data
Specify Database
Click Create New Survey Database
Type CAS. Click OK.
Click Edit Survey Database Settings.
Coordinate zone - Should be set for the survey database. Coordinate systems that start with
Wisconsin County Systems are Wisconsin County Coordinate (WCCS) definitions.
Distance - US Foot (unless known to be otherwise)
Click on CategoriesSelect USA, Wisconsin
Click on Available projection systems dropdown..Select Wisconsin County Systems:
Portage County, US Foot. Click OK.
Units: US Foot
Survey Command Window
Auto-point numbering: Do not use unless neeeded
Extended Properties
Create new definitions automatically - Yes. This setting will automatically create new data
fields if they dont already exist in the database.
Click OK. Click Next.
Specify Data Source

Data source type: Point File
Click grey cross button.
Browse to C:\WisDOT\design\C3D-training\180-020-exercise-files\cas-caice-import.txt
Click Next.
Specify Network: Click Next.
Import Options
Point file format: CAiCE
Current figure prefix database: WisDOT12-etopog
Process line work during import: Yes
Current line work code set: WisDOT
Process line work sequence: By import order
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-005.mp4
180.020.005 Right-click on the objects or group of objects to be inserted and click Insert into drawing
If points all come in identical, apply point description key set
ToolspacePoint GroupsRight click _All PointsClick Apply Description Keys
Review data
Recommend removing design/plat points from the file
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-006.mp4
180.020.006 Geometry chains-alignments: Import CAiCE Project (*.PT4)
Create a new file from wisdot12.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-files\Ali-

Profs-CAS.dwg
Imports will be performed feature code by feature code. For each feature code, set the active layer and

default styles appropriately. For proposed reference lines:

Layer Property Manager: set active layer to P_ALI
Toolspace Settings Alignment Commands CreateAlignmentLayout
Default Styles
Alignment Style: ALI Proposed
Toolspace Toolbox CAiCE Tools Import Import CAiCE Project (*.PT4)
Select C:\WisDOT\design\C3D-training\180-020-exercise-files\cas\cas.pt4. Click OK.
Unselect all points, survey chains, and DTMs
Unselect all geometry chains and then select those with the feature code PRL. Click Next.
Profiles will be matched up with alignments that have the same beginning characters. Drag any unassigned
profiles to their appropriate alignments. Click Import.
11:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-007.mp4
180.020.007 Run AUDIT to clean up objects.
Curves that have tangents in and out come in as free curves.
Some profiles may give an error due to length the differences.
Any superelevation data will be applied to the alignments.
Geometry chains-edgelines: Import CAiCE Project (*.PT4)

Repeat the process with other feature codes (CZ and SI used in exercise). Create a new file from
wisdot12.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-files\Edgelines-CAS.dwg.
Make sure to set active layer prior to import.
Any geometry chains that are default set to feature lines should be moved to Miscellaneous Alignments.
Feature lines are 3D objects and do not support true curves while geometry chains are 2D and can have
curves. There are also far more styles available for alignments.
Styles and label sets seem to be hardcoded. Select an alignment. Right-click.

Click Select Similar.
Go to Properties window, change style for CZ alignments to AREA Clear Zone.
Select a label set. Right-click.
Click Select Similar. Press Delete.
Repeat for SI, set style to RW Proposed-SlopeIntercepts.
Important to remember
Think about which files you want which objects in. It is far easier to import geometry chains into the correct
file than try to move them later on.
Rename any alignments before creating data shortcuts for them.
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-008.mp4
180.020.008 Surfaces: Import CAiCE DTM Points (*.PT4)
There are 3 different options for importing surfaces from CAiCE (*.PT4,*.TRI,*.XY). Use *.PT4 because it
will retain breaklines the same as what it was in CAiCE.
Unless you know surfaces are very small, only import one surface at a time to one surface per file.
If you have all of the source files for an existing surface, it is better to create the surface in Civil 3D from
those files. Edits can then be made if needed.
Create a new file from wisdot12.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-files

\Surface-CAS-Exist.dwg
Set the active layer and default style appropriately. For existing ground:
Layer Property Manager: set active layer to E_SURF
Toolspace Settings Surface Commands CreateSurface
Default Styles
Surface Default Style: EX Border
Toolspace Toolbox CAiCE Tools Import Import CAiCE Project (*.PT4)
Select C:\WisDOT\design\C3D-training\180-020-exercise-files\cas\cas.pt4. Click OK.
Unselect all points, survey chains, and geometry chains
Select DTM: CASMIR6
Click the option to Import points and breaklines
Click Import.
An XYZ point file is created associated with the DWG and a breakline set is created as well.
Rename any surfaces before creating data shortcuts for them.
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-009.mp4
180.020.009 Import CAiCE Cross Sections (*.EAR)
File needs to have an alignment in it or data shortcutted in it for the cross sections to be associated with.
Cross sections are imported into a static corridor. They can then be viewed on a section view group.
Create a new file from wisdot12.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-files

\Sections-CAS-prrmp10.dwg
Set default code set styles to CAiCE codes
Toolspace Settings Corridor Commands CreateCorridor
Default Styles
Code Set Style: CAiCE codes
Toolspace SettingsCorridor Commands ViewEditCorridorSection
Default Styles
Toolspace SettingsCorridor Right clickEdit Feature Settings
Default Styles
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-010.mp4
180.020.010 Import alignment rmp10 with Import CAiCE Project (*.PT4).
Toolspace Toolbox CAiCE Tools Import Import CAiCE Cross Sections (*.EAR)
Select C:\WisDOT\design\C3D-training\180-020-exercise-files\cas\prrmp10.ear. Click OK.
Alignment: rmp10
Create sample lines: yes (youll make sure to catch any odd stations)
Create section views: no (they dont come out with grid in this process or size correctly).
Review static corridor prrmp10

Prospectorprrmp10right clickCorridor Section Editor
CAiCE color should show up.
Labels not exactly the same
Left and right widths 150 FT (this equals sections 1IN:20FT Horiz)
Prospectorprrmp10right clickProperties
Codes tab: Link and Point codes showing up are what are actually in the corridor. Anything
with no Style does not have a corresponding code in the code set style.
5:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-011.mp4
180.020.011 Home tab Profile & Section ViewsCreate Multiple Views
General
Alignment: RMP10
Sample line group name: prrmp10
Section view style: Sheets 1 IN 20 FT Horiz 20 FT Vert
Click Next
Section Placement
Placement Options: Production: wisdot12-09-xs.dwt|X-Section 1 IN 20 FT Horiz 20 FT Vert
Click Next
Offset Range
Automatic: Left -150 Right 150
Click Next
Elevation Range
Click Next
Section Display Options
Verify Style: CAiCE codes
Click Create Section Views
Change labels (add Elev Off label for right clear zone break point)
Elevation Offset labels controlled by point codes. Slope labels controlled by link codes.
ToolspaceProspectorCorridorsprrmp10Right click. Click Properties
Codes tabClick Edit Current Selection button.
Right click Point. Click Add
Click OK for Marker Style: _No Display
Code will come up as NEW CODE Click to edit and change to CZR.
Change Label Style to Elevation Offset Rotated. Click OK
Click OK (3x).
You may not be able to get labels to match identically since they are controlled differently in Civil 3D
than CAiCE.
Module 190 Civil 3D version upgrade

190.010 10 to 12 Section Sheet Generator Section updated: 4/18/2012
8:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-010-001.mp4
190.010.001
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-010-002.mp4
190.010.002
190.020 10 to 12 Alignments from exisitng alignments Section updated: 4/18/2012

3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-020-001.mp4
190.020.001 When tying your proposed design existing alignments
Copies portions or entire alignments
Prevents recreating design work
Existing alignment in drawing

Select the alignment graphically or from a list
Select split point or entire tangents or curves
Then select the end split point or all the way to start or end
Select F for Finish to create the new alignment
The new alignment can be edited as normal
190.030 10 to 12 Best fit alignment Section updated: 11/29/2012

4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-030-001.mp4
190.030.001 Best Fit Alignment Creation Functionality
Builds straight or curved alignments from positional data

Useful when creating centerlines from field gathered data
Can use:
Civil 3D COGO points
Feature Lines
AutoCAD points
AutoCAD blocks
AutoCAD lines arcs and polylines
Alternate method: WisDOT DS0200 Workflow Video
Best Fit Alignments Process
Begin with positional definition in the drawing file

Select the objects:
COGO points by point group or graphic selection

Feature lines or other AutoCAD entities by graphic selection

Define curve or spiral parameters
The maximum curve or spiral radius allowed
Preview the definition report
Close the report to create the alignment
190.040 10 to 12 Implied alignment intersection Section updated: 11/29/2012

3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-040-001.mp4
190.040.001 Alignment Implied Intersection Functionality
Alignment Implied Intersection Functionality

Alignment creation method specifies the geometric definition
Alignment respects original geometric definition points
Implied intersection allows the point of intersection to be created for alignments where that information was
not used originally
This functionality is set per alignment
Alignment Implied Intersection Process
The alignment was not created by the tangent-tangent tool.

Make the functionality available in the alignments properties
Point of Intersection tab
Select the appropriate function for this alignment
By Change in alignment direction (compound curves are treated as one curve)
By individual curves and curve group (compound curves are treated as individual curves)
Find the implied point of intersection grip (gray triangle)
Hover your cursor over the grip
Move cursor to tooltip and select Solve PI
190.050 10 to 12 Superelevation changes Section updated: 11/29/2012

26:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-050-001.mp4
190.050.001 Subassembly tools have superelevation intelligence
Alternate rotation point
Use Superelevation to assign lanes/shoulders
Wizard interface for parameter assignment
Superelevation table editor
Superelevation View
Subassembly tools have superelevation intelligence

When placing or editing subassemblies
Potential Pivot
Assign Superelevation
When placing or editing subassemblies
Use Superelevation
Assigns to match superelevation table columns
Right/left, Outside/Inside Lanes
Right/Left, Outside/Inside Shoulders

Wizard interface for parameter assignment
Select the corridor, context ribbon, Superelevation button
Calculate/Edit Superelevation
Select the type of roadway, divided/undivided, crowned/planar
Assign lane parameters, symmetric and extra lanes

Extra Lanes allow for inside lanes to be added to table

Shoulder control, divided highway opens inside shoulder
Attainment, table assignment, method
Transition formula
Resolving overlap between superelevation regions
Superelevation table editor

View Tabular Editor
Edit individual station data
Add or delete critical stations
Possible to create an entire table
Superelevation View
Create Superelevation View button
Control by station range
Display option for each lane/shoulder line
Color options for each line
Select allows for graphic edits
Diamond grips for station control
Arrow and rectangle grips for slope control
190.060 10 to 12 Corridor editing in ribbon Section updated: 4/18/2012

9:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-060-001.mp4
190.060.001 Not new functionality, but easier access
More direct editing options to the corridor
Rebuild corridors
Corridor Surfaces
Add Baselines
Edit Targets
Split Regions
Add Regions
Edit Frequency
Match Properties
Merge Regions
Copy Regions
190.070 10 to 12 Section view editing changes Section updated: 11/29/2012

9:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-070-001.mp4
190.070.001 Viewport configuration
Station advance and filtering
Graphic editing no longer locks the entire section
Setting the view configuration

Set the View/Edit Options to turn view configuration on
In the Viewport Configuration
Assign the viewport layouts
Assign the zoom views to each viewport
Station advancement and filtering

In the Station Selection panel

Advance to next or previous region

Station list filtering - All region station, region stations, only overriden stations, only non-region stations
Graphic Editing does not lock the section

In the Parameter Editor, stations marked as geometrically edited
Unchecking Overrides: True regains numerical editing in certain subassemblies
190.080 10 to 12 Volume dashboard Section updated: 11/29/2012

9:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-080-001.mp4
190.080.001 The Volume Dashboard Functionality
Combines existing volume calculation methods

Creates TIN volume surface
Volume calculation panorama
Bounded volumes
Provides graphs of cut/fill totals
Creates volume reports
Creates volume tables
Maintains records of previous volume calculations
Volume Dashboard Process
Two surfaces for volume comparison, must overlap

Open the Volume Dashboard Extension from the Toolspace Toolbox
Create a New Volume Surface
Assign the Base and Comparison surfaces and cut/fill factors
Compare as many surfaces as necessary
Volume Dashboard Bounded Volumes Process
You must have a volume surface before creating a bounded volume

You must create a closed polyline boundary before creating the bounded volume calculation
In the Volume Dashboard Extension, select the Add Bounded Volumes
Select the closed polyline
Bounded volumes list under the original TIN volume surface entry
Volume Dashboard Tools and Icons
Toggle Net Graph Panel

Add Volume Surface
Create New Volume Surface
Add Bounded Volume
Delete Selected Entry
Re-compute Volumes
Generate Cut/Fill Summary
Insert Cut/Fill Summary
190.090 10 to 12 Merging pipe networks Section updated: 11/29/2012

7:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-090-001.mp4
190.090.001 Merging Pipe Networks Functionality
There is no official pipe network use for the DOT
Networks are designed for pipe/structure interactivity
Pipes and structures that belong to a different network will not interact
Merging pipe networks will move the pipes and structures into a new network and delete the old one.

Particularly useful if you create pipe networks from polylines or feature lines
Merging Pipe Networks Process

Pipes and structures in two or more different networks
Select one of the pipes
In the green context ribbon, Modify panel, choose Merge Networks
Dialog prompt to select the network to merge into another network
Dialog prompt to select the destination network.
Repeat as necessary
Check results in toolspace, prospector, pipe networks, networks
190.100 12 to 14 Quick view drawing tabs Section updated: 3/10/2014

Exercise files
7:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-100-001.mp4
190.100.001 Using Quick View Drawing Tabs
Quick View Drawing Tabs are meant as a quick way to switch between open files. The functionality is a
streamlined version of the Quick View Drawing button in previous releases.
Opening a File
The tabs are located in the upper left, above the drawing area, below the ribbon.
Right-click on a tab and choose Open. Browse to the exercise files and choose the Maps.dwg
Starting a New File From the Tabs

Left-click on plus-sign tab. This starts a new file using the pre-assigned QNEW template file.
Draw a rough shape so there is something to see in this file.
Save File Options

Right-click on this new files tab, choose SAVE. Name the file Geometry.dwg.
File Previews and Switching Between Files

Hover over the Maps.dwg tab. Move your cursor over the thumbnails of the model and layout tabs to see the
previews.
Left-click on one of the layout tabs to open that portion of the file.
Closing Files Options

Right-click on a tab and choose Close All Except This Tab. Say no to the SAVE options on any files that you are
prompted.
Right-click on a files tab and choose Open File Location. This opens Windows Explorer to where this file is saved.
Copy the Full Path of the File

Right-click on the files tab, choose Copy Full File Path.
190.110 12 to 14 Subassembly left/right setting Section updated: 3/10/2014

Exercise files
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-110-001.mp4
190.110.001 Subassembly Left/Right Overview
Subassemblies are tracked in the assembly by the side they were added to. The subassemblies now are able to
understand the side of the subassembly they are being attached to and can automatically set the Side assignment
in reaction to the connection process
Looking at the Assembly That Has a Subassembly

Select on the assembly that has a subassembly attached to it.
Select Assembly Properties from the ribbon.
Go to the Construction tab.
Review the Side that the subassembly is on.
Click OK to close the dialog.
Left-click on the Subassembly.

Right-click and choose Subassembly Properties.

Click on the Parameters tab.
Review the subassemblys Side assignment.
Place a subassembly
Open the Tool Pallette. Home tab Palettes panel, lower middle icon for Tool Palettes.
Select on the Lanes tab.
Left click the LaneSuperelevationAOR
Slide through the Parameters in the properties window.
Set the Potential Pivot to No.
Select the Assembly line to place the first subassembly.
Click on the ETW point of the original subassembly.
Click on the ETW point of the lane subassembly on the left side of the assembly.
Placing the first Subassembly

From the Tool Palette, Lanes tab, select the LaneSuperelevationAOR
Change the Side to Left.
Select the Assembly line.
Select the Assembly line again.
Reviewing the Subassembly Sides

Select on the Assembly line.
Select Assembly Properties.
Select the Construction tab.
Review the Group sides.
190.120 12 to 14 Survey database queries Section updated: 3/10/2014

17:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-120-001.mp4
190.120.001 Survey Database Queries
Provides the ability to search and select data in the survey database. This functionality is in the survey database,
but can be used to import data into different files. Also, surfaces can be built using these queries.
Open the File and database

Open command, project folders-BaseData-Surface-Existing From Survey.dwg
In the Toolspace, open the Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases. Choose Set Working Folder.
WisDOT folder Design - C3D - 12345678 BaseData Survey
Right-click on the Survey Database and choose Open for Edit.
Create a New Survey Query

Survey tab of the ribbon, Survey Query button.
Click New Query.
Name the Query CL
Under Points select the Select a Parameter button.
Choose Description.
Accept Contains for the operator
Type in CL as the description.
Under Figures sleect the parameters option.
Select Name.
Accept Contains.
Type in CL as the Name.
Preview the Query

At the bottom of the Query Editor select Display in Editor.
Review the data.
Click the green checkmark to close the Panorama.
Click Preview in Drawing.

Graphically review the data.

Click on the Preview Removal button in the drawing area.
In the Query Editor choose Save the Query.
Create a Second Query

Click the New Query button.
Type the name Surface.
Under Points choose Description, contains, and type XYZ as the description.
Change the And/Or to OR.
Under Points choose Description, contains, and type EA as the description.
Change the And/Or to OR.
Under Points choose Description, contains, and type CL as the description.
Click the Preview button.
Build a Surface without Importing Points (Reference)

You can build a surface from the survey database query. You can do this without importing the points, t prevent the
file from becoming too cluttered with point data.
Building a Referenced Surface

Check the Prospector tab, Points area that there are no points in the file
Select the Survey ribbon tab, Survey Query.
Select the Surface query.
Select the Add to Surface.
Click the New Surface button.
Name the surface Surface-Exist.
Change the surface style to 2 and .5 Contours
Select the Reference option.
Click OK.
Import the Centerline Points and Figures

In the Survey Query tab select the CL query.
Click the Preview in drawing button.
Identify that there are more figures than intended.
In the Survey Query ribbon choose Query Builder.
Under Points change the operator to Starts With.
Under Figures change the operator to Starts With.
Navigate using the Survey Query

In the Survey Query tab, with the CL query selected
Click the Import into Drawing.
Click the Select in Drawing.
Click the Zoom to option.
Click the Close button at the right of the Survey Query tab.
190.130 12 to 14 Array command updates Section updated: 3/10/2014

8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-130-001.mp4
190.130.001 Array command now creates a sample array so that you can see the effect of your parameters. Editing is done by
grip points or in the properties panel.
Starting the Rectangular Array Command

Type Array at the command line.
Select objects.

Right-click (or ENTER).

Then choose the type of ARRAY.
OR
The Modify panel lower right corner.
Click the drop down and choose Rectangular.
Select the object to array.
Click <ESC>.
Click on one of the arrayed objects.
Click the top arrow to add rows.
Click the furthest right arrow to add columns.
Click the arrow closest to the origin to change spacing of columns and rows.
Editing the Array

Select an arrayed object to edit.
Type in the number of rows, or the number of columns or the spacing.
Creating a Polar Array

Modify panel, Array drop-down choose Path.
Select a center point for the polar array.
Click the arrow to change the spacing. Click the square grip to change the end of the array going around the polar
array.
Creating a Path Array

Modify panel, Array button drop-down.
Choose the Path Array.
Select the object.
Right-click to end selection.
Select the polyline path.
Select the arrow to adjust the spacing.
190.140 12 to 14 Import/export layer filters Section updated: 3/10/2014

Exercise files
4:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-140-001.mp4
190.140.001 Import/Export Layer Filters
Provides the ability to Import and Export layer filters for easy layer managment.
Open the File with all WisDOT Filters

Open command, project folders, AllFilters.dwg or WisDOT14.dwt
On the home tab, Layers Panel, select the Layer Properties command
Select the Save Filter Groups command
Save filter group to desired project folder as WisDOT14FiltersAll.lft or network folder for future use.
Open the File with no WisDOT Filter Groups

Open command, c3d folder, NoFilters.dwg or generic AutoCAD Civil 3D template
On the home tab, Layers Panel, select the Layer Properties command
Select the Load Filter Groups command
Note: Loading a filter group or groups will remove any Layer Filter assignments that already
exist.
Navigate to c3d folder, select WisDOT14FiltersAll.lft
190.170 12 to 14 Targeting through xrefs Section updated: 3/10/2014

10:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-170-001.mp4

190.170.001 Provides the ability to target 2D and 3d Polylines, Feature Lines, and Survey Figures in xrefs.
Open the Corridor File

Open command, project folders, BaseData, Corridor-STH25-4thAveXrefTargets.dwg
Attach the Xref

On the insert tab, Attach command, navigate to the projects edgelines folder, select Edgelines.dwg, select open.
On the Attach External Reference dialog box
Reference Type Overlay
Scale unchecked
Insertion point unchecked
Path type Relative path
Rotation unchecked
Click ok.
Working in Corridor Properties

Open the toolspace, prospector, corridors, Rt. click on STH25, select corridor properties
On the parameters tab select the ellipsis in the RG - STH25-Urban-2Lane B4 Intersection region row and
targets column
Under Surfaces
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_RT- Exist
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_LT - Exist
Under Width or Offset Targets
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_RT Varies Select from drawing
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_RT Select from drawing
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_LT Varies Select from drawing
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_LT Select from drawing
On the parameters tab select the ellipsis in the RG - STH25-Urban-2Lane After Intersection region row
and targets column
Under Surfaces
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_RT- Exist
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_LT - Exist
Under Width or Offset Targets
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_RT Varies Select by Layer
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_RT Select by Layer
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_LT Varies Select by Layer
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_LT Select by Layer
190.180 12 to 14 Layout tools contextual ribbon tab Section updated: 3/10/2014

Exercise files
8:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-180-001.mp4
190.180.001 Provides the ability to have a dynamic north arrow and scale bar in your layout which is set to the viewport.
The north arrow once set to the viewport will rotate the viewport to change the model view automatically.
The scale bar once set to the viewport will scale the viewport to change the model view automatically.
Open the File and layout

Open command, project folders, Sheets Other, LayoutToolsTabSheet.dwg
In the tabs (new to 2014) hover over the drawing name, select the layout.
Select Layout 050109
Insert North Arrow

On the Layout Tools Contextual Ribbon Tab, select the North Arrow icon dropdown
select any north arrow in the list
select the viewport to assign the north arrow.
Select the north arrow icon dropdown
select Load Custom north arrow
pan down and select the block DynNa

select the viewport to assign the north arrow.
Insert Scale Bar

On the Layout Tools Contextual Ribbon Tab, select the Scale Bar icon dropdown
select ScaleBar2_Imperial from the list
select the viewport to assign the scale bar
Set Scale bar division to 20 and feet
Leave to ratio to default
Pick point for scale bar to reside.
190.190 12 to 14 Drafting enhancements Section updated: 3/10/2014

11:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-190-001.mp4
190.190.001 Arcs drawn in Reverse
Provides the ability to switch the direction by which an arc is drawn.
Open the File

Open command, project folders, DrawingEnhancements.dwg
On the Home Tab, Draw Panel of the ribbon, select Arc command
Draw a Start Center End Arc,
Select the first point
Hold ctrl to reverse the direction of the Arc.
Offset command shows preview

Provides the ability to graphically see what and where the offset will be and what it will look like.
Continue with previous File

On the Home Tab, Modify Panel of the ribbon, select Offset command
Key in the distance of the offset
Select the object to Offset
View the preview when selecting which side to offset to
Select side to offset to.
Change layer to a layer with different color and or linetype
Repeat offset command
Type L for layer at command line, hit enter
Type c for current, hit enter
Key in the distance of offset
Select the object to offset
View the preview when selecting which side to offset to
Select side to offset to.
Xref switching from Attach to Overlay and Relative path to full path
Provides the ability to switch multiple xrefs from attach to overlay and/or relative to full path.

On the Insert Tab, References Panel of the ribbon, select small arrow on bottom right of panel
In the External References manager
Select an xref drawing or multiple
Rt. click, select Xref Type flyout
Select Overlay or Attach
In the External References manager
Select an xref drawing or multiple
Rt. click, select Path flyout
Select Make Relative, Absolut or No Path
Layers list in natural numerical order

Provides the ability to scroll through layer in natural numerical order.

On the Home Tab, Layers Panel of the ribbon, select Layer Properties

In the Layer Properties notice the layer are in natural numerical order
Wipeout command allows for frame to be on but not plot

Provides the ability to show frames, no frames or show frames but not plot.

On the Annotate Tab, Markup Panel of the ribbon, select Wipeout command
Key in F for Frames
Key in D for display but not plot or OFF for off
Create wipeout.

Wisdot c3d Train Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wisdot c3d Train Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wisdot c3d Train Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WisDOT Civil 3D Complete Training Manual Page 1 of 398

Module 010 Civil 3D interface

Application Menu Browser

Quick Access Toolbar

Manual last updated: 4/8/2016

Function Key Alternatives

010.020 Toolspace Section updated: 9/1/2012

Active Drawing View/MasterView

Drawing Objects Access

Styles for each object

Setting default styles

Overall Drawing Settings

Survey Database Access

Toolbox - Extra Functionality

Autodesk Labs tools

010.030 Ribbon overview Section updated: 9/1/2012

Tabs for grouping of command panels

Panels for grouping of similar command icons

Icons for starting commands

Panel Pull-downs for less frequently used commands

Minimize Arrow icon

Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, Vault

Help Express Tools Online Add-Ins

010.040 Layer Control Section updated: 9/1/2012

Layers manage entities

Unlimited layers and names

Control color, linetype, lineweight, line thickness, plot/no plot, on/off

Civil 3D styles use of layers

Object layer assignment

Object Styles in the Display tab

List of objects components

Manual last updated: 4/8/2016

Each component has a layer option

Component layers set to 0 allow objects layer to control

Layers for Labels

010.050 Inquiry Tools Section updated: 9/1/2012

Analyze tab, Inquiry panel

Fill in a field or two to report data

010.060 Layout Tabs Section updated: 9/1/2012

For plotting to scale

Turning on layout tabs

010.070 Rotate View Section updated: 9/1/2012

Leaves paper, rotates model

More efficient use of paper

Free Orbit in layout viewport, outside orbit ring (maintains XY plane)

DVIEW/Twist to rotate view

Plan Production tools do this automatically

Manual last updated: 4/8/2016

010.080 Common and useful command lines Section updated: 9/1/2012

All commands have a typed alternative

Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs

This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones

All commands have a typed alternative

Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs

This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones

<F3> = OSNAPS toggle

<SHIFT> + <spacebar> = selection cycling

Z <ENTER> E <ENTER> = Zoom Extent (Fit View)

DI for Distance command (slightly different than ribbon version)